glpi user documentation - glpi polska

246
GLPI User Documentation Version 9.5 GLPI Project, Teclib’ janv. 21, 2021

Upload: others

Post on 05-Nov-2021

75 views

Category:

Documents


3 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska

GLPI User DocumentationVersion 95

GLPI Project Teclibrsquo

janv 21 2021

Table des matiegraveres

1 Preface 3

2 Installation 5

3 Table of contents 731 First Steps with GLPI 7

311 General 7312 Understanding the interface 8313 Manage your password 8314 Manage your Preferences 9315 Navigate GLPI modules 11316 User interfaces 12317 View and manage records 14318 Search for information in GLPI 15319 Saved Searches 18

32 Modules 20321 Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes 20322 Asset module 25323 Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs 127324 Module Gestion 128325 Module Outils 190326 Module Administration 211327 Module Configuration 211

33 Advanced Configuration 234331 Utilisation du cache 234332 OPCache 235

34 Glossary 235

4 Documentation license 239

Index 241

i

ii

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement The documentation is being rewritten It is very likely that some parts are outdated that there aredead links etc

Table des matiegraveres 1

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 Table des matiegraveres

CHAPITRE 1

Preface

This documentation covers the installation and use of GLPI (Gestion Libre de Parc Informatique)

Free and open-source solution for IT asset management and helpdesk and more GLPI is a web application designedto manage all of your IT asset management issues from inventory management of hardware components and softwareto the management of user assistance

This guide is intended to give an overview of GLPI for both administrators and users

Each part can be consulted independently even if for reasons of logic we recommend that you read this documentationentirely

3

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

4 Chapitre 1 Preface

CHAPITRE 2

Installation

The GLPI installation documentation is available separately

5

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Chapitre 2 Installation

CHAPITRE 3

Table of contents

31 First Steps with GLPI

Everything you need to know to get started with GLPI

311 General

Choose a web browser

GLPI requires the use of a web browser

Optimal functioning of the application is obtained by using a modern browser compliant with web standards

The following web browsers are supported mdash Edgemdash Firefox (including 2 latests ESR version)mdash Chrome

GLPI also works on mobile it is generally compatible with the mobile versions of the supported browsers

How to connect

Open your browser and go to the GLPI homepage (httpsglpi_address)

Access to the full functionality of the application requires authentication An unauthenticated user can possibly accesscertain functions if GLPI has been configured to allow it

mdash View the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)mdash Open a ticketmdash

Depending on the profile of the authenticated user they may be shown the standard interface or simplified interface

7

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

End your session

To log out click the Logout button in the top right of the screen Once logged out you will be redirected to the loginpage

312 Understanding the interface

Depending on the userrsquos profile some menus and content may differ but the logic of the interface remains the same

The GLPI interface is made up of different areas grouping together the applicationrsquos functionalities according to theirnature

1 The user menu allows you to manage your preferences access help change the current language and discon-nect

2 The main menu allows you to navigate through the different modules

3 The breadcrumb trail allows you to locate the context of use of the main work area

4 The entity selector (in multi-entity mode)

5 The main working area is the privileged space for interaction with the application

6 The search box allows you to perform a global search at any time

313 Manage your password

The change password form can be found in user preferences

You must enter and confirm your password before validation The administrator can disable this feature so the changepassword area does not appear in this case

In the event that the user has forgotten their password the possibility of resetting it is offered to them from the loginpage The link is only present if notifications are enabled

Only users with an e-mail address defined in GLPI and not authenticating via an external source (LDAP mail serveretc) can use this functionality Once the renewal request has been made by entering their e-mail address the userreceives an e-mail providing them with a link allowing them to reset their password

Passwords must follow the defined security policy A real-time check of the entered password is then carried out

8 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

314 Manage your Preferences

User preferences are accessible from the Preferences tab of the user form by clicking on your name at the top rightof the interface from any page

Each authenticated user has the possibility to modify his preferences if they have the Personalize update right in theirprofile

Main Tab

Here the user can modify the usual personal information mdash Surnamemdash First namemdash Email addressmdash Phone numbersmdash Locationmdash Languagemdash

Note Some fields cannot be modified if they come from an LDAP directory

A user can add email addresses and select the default address which will be used for sending notifications

They can also specify some default behaviors of the application such as the selected profile and entity They can alsoturn off notifications for actions they take

Depending on the profiles the experienced user can also choose to exit the normal application mode In debug modeGLPI displays errors all variable values SQL queries etc It is useful to activate this mode in the event of GLPImalfunction A maximum amount of information can therefore be communicated to the developers This mode alsoallows you to have additional information on different objects in a specific tab (notifications etc)

31 First Steps with GLPI 9

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personalization Tab

This tab allows you to modify the general display preferences applied to a given user These parameters take priorityover those defined in the general configuration

Note The Number of results per page value shown here cannot exceed the maximum value set in the general displayoptions

Note that the Remote access key section allows you to regenerate the security key used to access the private flowsoffered by GLPI Currently the ICAL and WEBCAL flows of the planning are protected by this security key which isintegrated into the url

10 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personal View Tab

Lists custom views defined in objects by the user In particular it allows you to delete the personal views defined toreturn to global views

315 Navigate GLPI modules

The various functions of GLPI have been grouped into several modules built around similar contexts of use The topbar of the interface allows you to navigate between these modules

mdash The Assets module provides access to the various inventoried materialsmdash The Assistance module allows you to create and monitor tickets problems and changes as well as see statisticsmdash The Management module allows you to manage contacts suppliers budgets contracts and documentsmdash The Tools module allows you to manage projects notes the knowledge base reservations RSS feeds and view

reportsmdash The Administration module allows you to administer users groups entities profiles rules and dictionaries It

also allows the maintenance of the application (basic backup and restore check if a new version is available)as well as the management of the email queue

mdash The Setup module provides access to the general configuration options of GLPI notifications collectorsautomatic tasks authentication plugins external links SLA management of titles components as well ascontrol of the uniqueness of fields

The menus presented vary according to the authorizations of the logged in user The navigation context is presented tothe user in the breadcrumb trail

Note You will find at the bottom right a button allowing you to quickly return to the top of the page if necessary

There are keyboard shortcuts that allow you to navigate from one module submodule to another Here is the list ofthese shortcuts

mdash 1 =gt Homemdash Assets

mdash o =gt Computersmdash s =gt Software

mdash Assistancemdash t =gt Ticketsmdash a =gt Statisticsmdash p =gt Planning

mdash Managementmdash d =gt Documents

mdash Toolsmdash b =gt Knowledge basemdash r =gt Reservationsmdash e =gt Reports

mdash Administrationmdash u =gt Usersmdash g =gt Groups

mdash Setupmdash n =gt Dropdowns

Note The combination of keys to associate with these shortcuts varies depending on the operating systems andbrowsers used Here are some examples according to the browsers

mdash Mozilla Firefox ChromeSimultaneously press the keys Alt Shift and the desired shortcut

mdash Opera

31 First Steps with GLPI 11

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Simultaneously press the keys Esc Shift and the desired shortcut

In addition since version 92 GLPI offers navigation with approximate search (fuzzy) accessible from the keyboardshortcut Ctrl + Alt + G This will open a modal window allowing you to filter via a search field all the menus ofGLPI (all the levels are present you have for example access to the 3rd level such as the dropdowns or the components)

In this window additional shortcuts are available mdash and in order to navigate through the resultsmdash Enter to change the active glpi page on the selected resultmdash Esc to close the window

316 User interfaces

Note The choice of the default interface as well as the visiblity of different modules can be configured in the profilesor from the userrsquos preferences

Standard Interface

This is the main interface of the application All the modules are available but there are limits depending on the profilesettings

The home page of the standard interface provides a summary view for quick access to active elements (tickets notesplanning contracts etc)

It is divided into 5 views mdash Dashboard

A customizable dashboard

mdash Personal view

12 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Shows the tickets opened rejected to be processed to be approved (for which the logged-in user isthe requestor) or those on which this user has an interaction as a validator or technician (awaitingvalidation in progress to be closed in waiting) This view also offers him current issues his scheduleand available notes

mdash Group view

Offers the same information about tickets and issues as the personal view but using the groups to whichit belongs as a reference Depending on their profile they may or may not have access to the tickets forwhich their groups are requesting

mdash Global view

Offers statistics on tickets and issues according to their status and on contracts according to their expi-ration date It also offers the view of the latest additions of objects in GLPI Depending on the configu-ration used new tickets can also be presented in this tab

mdash RSS feed

Proposes the content of defined RSS feeds RSS feeds are managed from the laquo Tools gt RSS Feeds raquomenu

Note For Personal and Group views only tables with information are displayed

Note Two security messages may be displayed when you log in for the first time after completing the installationprocedure

The first asks you to change the passwords of the accounts created by default in GLPI the second asks you to deletethe directory glpiinstall

As long as you have not performed these operations the messages will remain

Simplified Interface

It is the most restrictive interface of the application and is built for an end-user more than a technician Therefore thenumber of available modules is reduced to a minimum

31 First Steps with GLPI 13

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is intended for users with very limited permissions in the application such as the built-in self-service and helpdeskprofiles

In the default configuration a user can from this interface only create tickets follow the processing of their ticketsmake reservations view the notes or public RSS feeds (or create private notes or feeds) and consult the FrequentlyAsked Questions

The home page offers the number of its tickets according to their status as well as the most popular and recent FAQtopics

317 View and manage records

The display of all the lists of records and of all the details concerning a record always works in the same way in GLPIWhether itrsquos a list of computers phones or tickets the presentation follows the same principle

A list of elements can be obtained in 2 ways mdash From the search engine

From the search engine after determining the criteria and validating the search a list of records isdisplayed By default no search criteria limit the list of recordings offered and the display is limited tothe first x records in the list which is configurable in the preferences

mdash From another list

Some tabs offer a list of related items For example from a list of computers click on the name of acomputer then navigate to the software tab The list of software installed on this computer is displayed

Details concerning a record are displayed in the form of tabs grouping together similar information For a computerthe financial information and the software list are in two separate tabs

Customize the display

The columns displayed from the complete list of the inventory can be configured Click on the button It ispossible to add delete and order the displayed columns

14 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash The global view applies to all profiles having access to a part of the inventory the modification of this partwill therefore be visible by all users

mdash The personal view applies only to the logged-in user and overrides the global view settings This view is onlyavailable if you have the User view right regarding the Search result display

This tab also allows you to reset the display customization of the different lists The user can for eachtype of object return to the default display by deleting this personalization

318 Search for information in GLPI

GLPI has a search engine allowing you to display a set of elements satisfying a certain number of criteria The proposedlists are paginated A navigation bar at the top and bottom of the list is used to define the number of items to displayper page and to navigate between pages

A global search engine (that is one that can use data from objects of different type) is also available

In addition to the list of elements corresponding to the stated criteria these lists offer some additional features mdash Export in different formats (CSV PDF )mdash Massive (Bulk) actionsmdash A marque-pages system to save searches

Perform a basic search

The basic search makes it possible to carry out multiple searches configured and sorted on one of the types of theinventory Depending on the data on which the search is carried out the following operators can be proposed

mdash containsmdash ismdash is notmdash beforemdash after

Searching on dates allows you to specify a specific date (Specify a date) or to define it in relation to the current date(Now + ou - X hour(s) day(s) month or year(s)) It is also possible to specify a search before or after a given date asdefined intervals (Monday Last Saturday Start of month Start of year Start of year etc)

For labels it is possible to search for a given value (is) If the dropdowns can be visible in the sub-entities the choicesunder and not under appear The criteria are added with the + on a gray background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes - Percentage free contains gt 80

Note Once the criteria have been defined the search is launched by pressing the Search button

Perform a multi-criteria search

The multi-criteria search makes it possible to refine the search by extending it to other types of objects by addingglobal search criteria This type of search is obtained by adding criteria with the + on a white background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space attached toa 17-inch monitor and having LibreOffice software installed

31 First Steps with GLPI 15

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory (Mio) contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes gt Percentage free contains gt 80AND multi Monitor gt Size contains 17AND multi Software gt Name contains LibreOffice

Items in Trash

Some items in GLPI can be trashed To view them in order to restore them or delete them permanently click on theicon representing a recycle bin To return to the display of active elements click again on this icon

Perform an advanced search

Here are some examples of search operators

NULLmdash Find the records with such empty field with a date field ltnumber_of_months orgt number_of_monthsmdash Search for materials with a deadline corresponding to the number of monthsmdash Search for computers that are 5 years old Date of purchase contains lt-60

^123 Find the records containing 123 at the start of the field

Avertissement On some systems you have to type ^ the space bar then the first character

^Windows Find records containing Windows 2000 Windows XP but not with Windows

123$ Find the records containing 123 at the end of the field

^123$ Find records containing only the text 123

Two search criteria linked by the operator AND NOT Find records that do not match a criterion (other than)

Entity is laquo Root entity raquo AND NOT Type contains laquo Laptop raquo Search for all computers in the laquo Root entity raquowhich are not laptops

[Year]-[Month]-[Day] (YYYY-MM-DD) Search by date

For security reasons the operator is not usable

Export the result of a search

The export of the search result in SLK or CSV spreadsheet formats or in PDF format can be done in two differentforms

mdash The current page exports only the data displayed on the screen (for example the first 10 results out of 200)mdash All pages exports all of the search results

The SLK format can be used by many spreadsheets Fields that are too long will be truncated when using software thatdoes not fully comply with the standards In this case it is preferable to use the exports in CSV format

If the data exported in CSV format is imported into Microsoft Excel software accented characters may not be displayedcorrectly This software seems to have difficulty with data encoded in UTF-8

16 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Perform massive actions

A massive action system is integrated into the search engine It allows you to make bulk modifications and performactions to all the selected elements Some examples of the available massive actions (Will differ based on the type ofitem)

mdash Put in trashbinmdash Delete permanentlymdash Restoremdash Connect Disconnectmdash Installmdash Updatemdash Add a contractmdash Enable the financial and administrative informationmdash Add to transfer listmdash Synchronize

To use it simply select the elements for which you want to perform an action then click on the Actions button availableat the top and bottom of the list Then once the type of action has been selected options are optionally presented aswell as a validation button

The results of the actions as well as the information messages are presented at the end of the execution of all theactions

Note mdash You will find in the headers of the table (at the top and at the bottom) a checkbox allowing you to select or

unselect all the elements of the listmdash A similar system of actions is available in certain lists present within the objects themselves The operation is

identical to that explained here

Avertissement The number of elements that can be handled simultaneously is limited by the values ofmax_input_vars or suhosinpostmax_vars in your PHP configuration You may therefore get a mes-sage indicating that massive edits are disabled You just need to increase the values of your PHP configuration orreduce the number of items displayed

Quick search

This tool is located at the top right of the GLPI screen It allows searching within elements including but not limitedto

mdash Ticketsmdash Problemsmdash Changesmdash Projectsmdash Computersmdash Monitorsmdash Softwaremdash Network Equipmentmdash Peripheralsmdash Printers

31 First Steps with GLPI 17

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Phonesmdash Contactsmdash Contactsmdash Suppliersmdash Documentsmdash Budgetsmdash Licensesmdash Usersmdash Groups

Note The search is carried out only on the fields displayed by default for each of the elements mentioned above Inessence it is the same as an items seen search on each type of element

319 Saved Searches

GLPI offers a system for saving searches (bookmarks) Once the search is done it is possible to save it from a star-shaped button accessible in the search form

There are two types of saved searches mdash Private searches Usable by all users and they are only accessible by their authormdash Public searches Can only be created by authorized users and are accessible by all users provided they belong

to the configured entitiesSaved searches can be accessed by clicking on the star shaped button in the user menu

18 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From this interface it is possible to mdash Reorder private searches (drag amp drop) - public searches use automatic sortingmdash Select a default search (only one possible per type of object) by clicking on the star iconmdash Access the search results (by simply clicking on it)mdash Access the saved searches management interface by clicking on the wrench icon at the top right

Avertissement Setting a particularly heavy search as the default display can have catastrophic effects on theoverall performance of the application

Display of counters

The GLPI settings are used to define whether the counters should be displayed or not In the case of research itrsquos a bitmore complicated

This is because some searches can take a long time (and resources) to complete In order to limit the impact onperformance the heaviest requests are not counted by default So that the execution time of a saved query can becalculated it must be executed at least once A scheduled task is also offered to calculate execution times regularly(and thus avoid requests that would have become heavy over time)

Administrators can override the automatic count method and have a search always or never be counted This possibilityshould be used sparingly

Configuring alerts

It is possible to configure the sending of ldquoalertsrdquo on a saved search using the GLPI notification system Sending anotification is based on the number of results returned by the search compared with the chosen operator to the enteredvalue

31 First Steps with GLPI 19

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The notification(s) used are displayed for reference from the alerts configuration tab For private research only theuser who created the search can be notified using a template provided by default in this case a single notificationwill be linked

For public searches a specific event must be created as well as a notification that uses it This is only possible fromthe alerts configuration tab

Once the specific notification is created it has to be configured by associating it with a template and by selecting thedesired recipients Note that it is possible to associate several notifications with the same search via the event thatcorresponds to it

Note As long as the notification specific to a public search is not created it will not be possible to add alerts

32 Modules

321 Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes

Les actions

Les diffeacuterentes actions possibles sur lrsquoobjet deacutependent des droits attribueacutes dans votre profil

De mecircme certaines actions dans lrsquoonglet deacutependent des droits du profil (comme les actions de masse)

Ne sont listeacutees ici que les actions principales pouvant ecirctre reacutealiseacutees sur diffeacuterents objets Si une action est speacutecifique agraveun objet elle sera deacutecrite dans la fiche de cet objet

Creacuteation

Le droit de creacuteer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoajout srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Cliquer sur le laquo + raquo situeacute dans le menu horizontal

4 Si lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire en possegravede une gestion de gabarit choisir un gabarit agrave appliquer

5 Compleacuteter les diffeacuterents champs de la fiche vierge

20 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Valider

Une option preacutesente dans les preacutefeacuterences utilisateur (Apregraves la creacuteation aller agrave lrsquoeacuteleacutement creacuteeacute) permet de deacuteterminersi lrsquoutilisateur souhaite apregraves la creacuteation lrsquoaffichage de la fiche nouvellement creacuteeacutee ou une autre fiche vierge pourcreacuteation en seacuterie

Modification

Le droit de modifier un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la modification srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste desobjets

4 2 choix de modification

mdash Modification unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Modifier les champs souhaiteacutes

3 Cliquer sur le bouton Actualiser

mdash Modification en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

3 Choisir le champ agrave modifier

4 Indiquer la nouvelle valeur du champ

5 Cliquer sur le bouton Envoyer

Affichage

Le droit de visualiser un objet deacutepend du droit Lecture deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur Si vous nrsquoavez pas le droitde visualiser un objet le nom de celui-ci nrsquoapparaitra pas dans les diffeacuterents menus de GLPI

Par exempl si vous supprimer le droit de lecture de lrsquoobjet Ordinateur dans votre profil le sous-menu Ordinateurnrsquoapparaitra pas dans le menu Parc mecircme si vous avez le droit de modifier un ordinateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la visualisation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour visualiser un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur via le moteur de recherche situeacute en haut de la liste des objets

4 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

Association drsquoun document

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoassociation agrave un document srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

32 Modules 21

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Documents

3 Seacutelectionner un document ou cliquer sur le bouton Parcourir pour en ajouter un

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un DocumentAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au document

Association drsquoun contrat

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire si celui-ci peut ecirctre lieacute agrave un contrat lrsquoassociation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircmemaniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un contrat agrave un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Contrats

3 Seacutelectionner un contrat

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un ContratAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au contrat

Transfert entre entiteacutes

Avec la notion drsquoentiteacutes vient la possibiliteacute de deacutefinir des profils de transfert pour les mutations drsquoeacuteleacutements entreentiteacutes

Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet notamment de passer drsquoun GLPI mono entiteacute agrave un GLPI multi-entiteacutes en utilisant lestransferts

Comment faire un transfert

1 Utiliser un profil qui a le droit de faire des transferts (Administration gt Profils gt Administration ndashgt Droit leLecture sur Transfeacuterer)

2 Configurer les actions faites par le transfert ([Administration gt Regravegles ndashgt Transfeacute-rer](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst))

3 Srsquoassurer que le profil qui va effectuer le transfert a une visibiliteacute sur lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante et sur lrsquoentiteacute prenante (leplus simple est drsquoutiliser un profil reacutecursif depuis lrsquoentiteacute racine)

4 Se positionner sur lrsquoEntiteacute racine (Voir Tous)

5 Depuis la liste des objets seacutelectionner lrsquoeacuteleacutement agrave transfeacuterer

22 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Choisir Ajouter agrave la liste de transfert et Valider 7 Dans Mode de transfert choisir un profil de configuration du transfert (creacuteeacute en point 2) 8 Seacutelectionner lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle sera transfeacutereacute lrsquoeacuteleacutement 9 Cliquer sur Transfeacuterer

10 Veacuterifier dans la nouvelle entiteacute que le mateacuteriel srsquoy trouve bien

Note Si un eacuteleacutement lieacute nrsquoexiste pas dans la nouvelle entiteacute il sera automatiquement creacuteeacute si le profil de transfertdemande de le conserver

Exemple transfert drsquoun ordinateur avec un fournisseur deacutefini dans les informations financiegraveres Si ce fournisseurnrsquoexiste que dans lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante il sera creacuteeacute dans lrsquoentiteacute prenante Par contre un fournisseur deacutefini dans lrsquoentiteacuteracine en reacutecursif ne sera pas recreacuteeacute

Avertissement Le lieu et le groupe seront agrave adapter pour la nouvelle entiteacute

Suppression

Le droit de supprimer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la suppression srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere 1 Se connecter agrave GLPI 2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur) 3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des

objets Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes

mdash Suppression unitaire 1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton

mdash Suppression en masse 1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

Dans les deux cas de figure il faudra choisir mdash Mettre agrave la corbeille si lrsquoobjet possegravede une corbeille mdash Supprimer deacutefinitivement si lrsquoobjet ne possegravede pas de corbeille

Dans le cas drsquoun objet ne posseacutedant pas de corbeille GLPI demandera une confirmation avant la suppression deacutefinitivede lrsquoobjet dans la base de donneacutees Dans le cas contraire lrsquoobjet sera mis dans la corbeille drsquoougrave il pourra ecirctre restaureacute(sorti de la corbeille)

La gestion des gabarits dans GLPI

Preacutesentation

Pour certains eacuteleacutements de GLPI il est possible de creacuteer de nouveaux eacuteleacutements (ordinateurs par exemple) depuisdes gabarits preacutealablement deacutefinis Un gabarit deacutefinit un masque de creacuteation certaines valeurs peuvent ecirctre deacutefiniesdirectement ou calculeacutees en fonction drsquoun masque (comme un numeacutero drsquoinventaire par exemple)

La gestion des gabarits se reacutealise via lrsquoicocircne situeacutee dans la barre de menu

32 Modules 23

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Eleacutements de lrsquoinventaire

Pour les eacuteleacutements de lrsquoinventaire le gabarit deacutefinit un eacuteleacutement standard en preacute-remplissant certains champs qui serontreacuteutiliseacutes pour la creacuteation drsquoautres eacuteleacutements Cela permet de simplifier lrsquoajout drsquoun grand nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements quasiidentiques

Par example afin de preacuteparer la reacuteception de 20 imprimantes identiques dont seuls les numeacuteros de seacuterie et drsquoinventairechangent

mdash creacuteer un gabarit correspondant agrave ce modegravele drsquoimprimantemdash dans ce gabarit remplir tous les champs invariables (constructeur modegravele etc)mdash creacuteer ensuite les 20 fiches drsquoimprimantes drsquoapregraves ce gabarit

Lors de la saisie de chaque imprimante le numeacutero de seacuterie et le numeacutero drsquoinventaire seront les seuls eacuteleacutements agravecompleacuteter

Le systegraveme drsquoincreacutementation

Un systegraveme de remplissage et drsquoincreacutementation automatique de certains champs (reconnaissables gracircce au ) estdisponible Ces champs (nom numeacutero drsquoinventaire ) sont alors remplis automatiquement agrave la creacuteation si le champcorrespondant dans le gabarit contient une chaicircne de formatage de la forme ltXXXgt

La chaicircne de formatage doit impeacuterativement deacutebuter par le caractegravere lt et se terminer par le caractegravere gt

Au sein de la chaicircne vous pourrez utiliser les caractegraveres suivants mdash X repreacutesente un caractegravere quelconque mdash g recherche du numeacutero parmi tous les champs identiques baseacutes sur le mecircme format mdash emplacement du numeacutero agrave increacutementer (nombre de chiffres eacutegal au nombre de ) mdash Y anneacutee sur 4 chiffres mdash y anneacutee sur 2 chiffres mdash m mois mdash d jour

Par exemple en poursuivant lrsquoexemple citeacute plus haut il est possible drsquoutiliser la fonctionnaliteacute drsquoincreacutementation pourcreacuteer automatiquement les numeacuteros drsquoinventaire

Ceux-ci sont composeacutes par exemple de la forme ANNEE+MOIS+JOUR+code structure (555) + code opeacuteration(1234) + numeacutero agrave increacutementer il suffira de renseigner dans le gabarit pour le champ numeacutero drsquoinventaire la chaicircneltYmd-555-1234-gt

Chaque imprimante agrave sa creacuteation verra son numeacutero drsquoinventaire geacuteneacutereacute automatiquement et increacutementeacute de 1 agrave 20

Gabarits de ticket

Tout comme les objets drsquoinventaire une notion de gabarit existe pour les tickets Un gabarit permet de personnaliserlrsquointerface de deacuteclaration drsquoun ticket en fonction du type de ticket et de la cateacutegorie

Les comportements pouvant ecirctre modifieacutes sont mdash la liste de champs devant ecirctre obligatoires pour lrsquoouverture drsquoun ticket mdash la liste des champs dont la valeur sera preacutedeacutefinie lors de lrsquoaffichage du formulaire mdash la liste des champs qui doivent ecirctre masqueacutes

Note Pour le controcircle des champs obligatoires seuls les champs disponibles dans lrsquointerface de lrsquoutilisateur sontcontrocircleacutes

24 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Donc si un champ est deacutefini comme obligatoire mais qursquoil nrsquoest pas proposeacute dans lrsquointerface il ne geacuteneacuterera pas drsquoerreurA la saisie des champs obligatoires sont afficheacutees les interfaces dans lesquelles ils sont utiliseacutes

Un gabarit est lieacute agrave lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle il a eacuteteacute deacutefini et peut ecirctre visible dans les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis pour les entiteacutes ou les profils Pour les profils ne sont associables que desgabarits de lrsquoentiteacute racine visibles de toutes les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent eacutegalement ecirctre deacutefinis pour chaque cateacutegorie de ticket (un pour chaque type)

A la creacuteation du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est par ordre de prioriteacute 1 Celui deacutefini dans la cateacutegorie deacutefinie pour le type deacutefini2 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour le profil courant de lrsquoutilisateur3 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour lrsquoentiteacute de creacuteation du ticket

Avertissement Dans les 2 derniers cas si le gabarit preacutedeacutefinit un nouveau couple typecateacutegorie le premier casest alors testeacute de nouveau avec ces nouvelles valeurs

Note mdash A la mise agrave jour du ticket le mecircme ordre de prioriteacute est utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer les champs obligatoiresmdash Si un des paramegravetre (entiteacute profil type ou cateacutegorie) est modifieacute lors de la saisie du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est

alors deacutetermineacute une nouvelle fois en fonction des nouvelles valeursmdash Le gabarit sert agrave la creacuteation de tickets reacutecurrents

Les statuts dans GLPI la vue speacutecifique

Cette information est couramment utiliseacutee pour distinguer le mateacuteriel mis au rebut disponible affecteacute etc Il estdonc possible de creacuteer ses propres statuts en rapport avec le systegraveme drsquoinformation

Crsquoest agrave lrsquoadministrateur de GLPI depuis la configuration des intituleacutes de deacutefinir les statuts qui seront utiliseacutes et pourquels types drsquoeacutelements ils le seront Ces statuts peuvent ecirctre arborescents pour faciliter la gestion

Le statut drsquoun eacuteleacutement est modifiable depuis sa fiche ou depuis le systegraveme drsquoactions massives

Un rapport vous propose une synthegravese des statuts par type de mateacuteriel La recherche globale de lrsquoinventaire vouspermet une recherche par statut sur lrsquoensemble des eacuteleacutements

322 Asset module

The GLPI Asset module is used to manage all the assets that are part of your IT infrastructure

Asset management in GLPI

In order to manage hardwares and softwares of an IT infrastructure GLPI allows natively to list all the assets that areused inside the managed organization

However it is possible to automate information pushing from the assets thanks to third-party tools GLPI supports theuse of two existing plugins

mdash The Fusion Inventory plugin transforms GLPI into an inventory server with the Fusion Inventory agents inter-facing directly with the GLPI server

mdash The ocsinventoryng plugin allow to synchronize the GLPI database with the OCS Inventory NG inventorytool the agents installed on the computers interface directly the the OCS Inventory NG server

32 Modules 25

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Available types

Computers

In a computer form the following information is available mdash Operating system

mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Service packmdash Serial numbermdash Product IDmdash

mdash General characteristics mdash Manufacturermdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Management informations mdash Technical managermdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Users mdash Computer users either known by GLPI or not

Other fields are informative such as Network (connexion type) and Update source (where are computer updatescoming from (Windows update yum apt )

It is possible to use templates with computers

Note mdash when GLPI is used with an inventory tool various informations provided by the tool itself are also availablemdash a computer can be a server a desktop computer or a laptop to differentiate them it is possible to use the type

field

The different tabs

Operating systems

The informations on operating systems for a computer are visible in tabs Operating system for a Computer entry

26 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

An operating system is associated with the following elements mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Architecturemdash Service Packmdash Kernelmdash Editionmdash Product IDmdash Serial number

Note The creation and management of the titles for operating systems is located in the menu Configuration gtDrop-downs gt Operating systems

Note A deletion or addition of an operating system is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the operation system informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 27

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

28 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

32 Modules 29

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Volumes

This tab named Volumes and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the volumes attached to a computer

A volume attached to a computer is characterized by mdash namemdash physical partitionmdash mount pointmdash file systemmdash total sizemdash available sizemdash ciphering algorithm and type

It is possible from a Computer entry to add a volume by clicking on button Add a volume

30 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible from a Computer entry to modify an existing volume by clicking on the link under its name

Note Every deletion or addition of a volume is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the volumes informations can be automatically importedand updated

Softwares

This tab named Softwares and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the softwares installed on a computerThese softwares are sorted by their category and are characterized by name version and version status

To install a software first select its name in the drop-down list then its version

It is possible to associate a license to a software on a computer

To associate a license first select the software in the drop-down list then the wanted license

If the license is associated with a software that is already installed on the computer it will be presented in the list ofsoftwares

32 Modules 31

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Otherwise it will be displayed in a separate table

Note mdash the drop-down list enumerates the softwares that are available in the entitymdash licenses management can be found in Assets gt Softwares See Manage softwares

Note It is possible via mass actions to install on a computer a software selected from its license

Note Every deletion or addition of a software or a license is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the softwares informations can be automatically importedand updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 33

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

34 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

32 Modules 35

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

36 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 37

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

38 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 39

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Virtualization

This tab displays the virtualization systems (virtual machines containers jails ) associated to a host

The available information vary from one system to another for a virtual machine for instance it includes namevirtualization system virtualization model state allocated memory number of logical processors as well as thename of the physical machine (the host)

GLPI establishes the link between a host and a virtual machine based on the unique identifier (UUID) In some caseit is possible that the UUID is different inside the physical machine and the virtual machine it is therefore impossibleto make the link automatically

The only way to link manually a virtual machine to a physical machine is to attribute the same UUID to the virtualmachine declared on the host and to the virtual machine inside GLPI

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the virtualization informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Antivirus

This tab named Antivirus and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the antivirus running on a computer

An antivirus is characterized by mdash namemdash activenon activemdash vendormdash update statusmdash antivirus versionmdash signature database versionmdash expiration date

Note Every deletion or addition of an antivirus is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the antivirus informations can be automatically importedand updated

40 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 41

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

42 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 43

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to computers mdash Install a software with a license on a computer From the tab Softwares add a license by choosing the name

of the software followed by the name of the license From the Mass actions of summary table choose Install

Avertissement A software can only be installed if its license has a version in use or a purchase version

Displays

In a display form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the display

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Display management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Display users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Sizemdash Resolutionmdash Port types (VGA DVI HDMI DisplayPort)

44 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Integrated soundmdash Connectivitymdash

Management type

It is possible to manage displays either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one display per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with displays

The different tabs

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 45

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

46 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 47

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

48 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 49

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

50 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 51

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to displays mdash connect a display to a monitor

Softwares

GLPI allows management of softwares and their versions as well as licenses associated or not to software versions

A software is by default associated with an entity

Financial management is done at the level of licenses the financial management at software level is only a model forthe licenses associated with this software

Softwares can be imported automatically using a third-party inventory tool in this case a dictionary can be usedto filter or clean the import data (see [Configure data dictionaries](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrstlaquo The dictionaries are managed from menu entry Administration gt Dictionaries raquo))

Some fields are specific in the software form mdash Update is an information with no processing associated and which tells whether the software is an update of

another softwaremdash Category allows to group softwares in the list of softwares of an asset

52 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Can be associated with a ticket defines whether the software can be seen in the drop-down list laquo Hardware raquoof a ticket

It is recommended to first create the software without a version number in the name then to create the versions andlast to create the licenses

Note In multi-entity mode the list of software can rapidly become long because of double entries (one softwareper entity) A better approach can consist in grouping identical softwares in the same entity (see tab Grouping below)then to make recursive the elements that can be made recursive

It is possible to use templates with softwares

The different tabs

Versions

A version of a software is the element that can be installed on a asset see also Installations tab

The main view lists the number of installations of the version

Specific fields mdash Name the version numbermdash Status in ITIL recommendations it allows to follow the DSL (library storing authorized versions)mdash Operating system the operating system on which this software version runsmdash Installations the number of installations of the versionmdash Comment some comments

Licenses

Installations

The installation of a software on a computer is visualized through a version and can be consulted on a software form(list of computers having at least one version installed) on a version form (computers having this version installed)and finally on a computer form (list of versions of installed softwares sorted by category)

Note mdash Column license is filled only when the license is affected to the concerned computermdash The initial display of different categories depend upon user preferences (see [manage preferences](01-

premiers-pas03_Utiliser_GLPI04_Geacuterer_ses_preacutefeacuterencesrst raquo)

Two options are available on the list of installations of software on a computer Above the list Install allows toinstall manually a version of a software on the computer by selecting first the software and its version if a license isassociated with this software the use version of the license is automatically selected

To Uninstall a version of a software mass actions must be used first select the versions to be uninstalled then selectSuppress definitively If a license is affected to the computer it remains affected but its use version is erased

Following the list of installed versions the list of affected but non installed licenses is displayed It is possible to adda new license to the computer Mass actions allow via the action Install to install a use version of selected licenses

32 Modules 53

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

54 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

32 Modules 55

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

56 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

32 Modules 57

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

58 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Grouping

This section describes how to group software having same names in sub-entities allowing to group softwares of childentities into mother entity

Note This is only available for multi-entities platforms

How to realize a grouping

1 If the software does not exist in mother entity create in this mother entity a software whose name is strictlyidentical to the name of software in child entities

2 Open the form of the software of the mother entity

3 Activate recursivity (sub-entities to Yes at top right) this will make a new tab Grouping appear after tab History

4 Open this tab a list displays softwares having same names in child entities

5 Select appropriate lines and validate grouping

Avertissement This operation cannot be undone

This grouping have the following effects mdash Licenses are attached to the software in mother entity but stay in origin sub-entitiesmdash Versions are merged no more doubles in mother entitymdash Old softwares are moved to the trash

Note When using a third-party inventory tool some extra steps are mandatory mdash Empty trash after grouping otherwise synchronization will restore the old software in case of new versionmdash Associate the same vendor to the new software as the synchronization checks vendor name a new software

would then be created

32 Modules 59

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to softwares mdash Add a version to a softwaremdash [Manage licenses](03_Module_Parc04_LogicielsOnglet_Licencesrst) From menu Assets gt Softwares

click on license name in tab Licenses

Licenses

A software license is a right to use the software Its specific fields include mdash Name commercial naming of the licensemdash Purchase version the version that was boughtmdash Use version the real installed version of the software

Purchase version and use version can be different however the use version must be compliant with the purchaseversion

Version type describes the specifics of the right to use the software OEM type is the only type that is configured bydefault in GLPI Refer to configure types

60 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Number field displays the number of installations that are allowed with this license It can be a user number (floatinglicense) a number of installations (multiple license) an unlimited number of installation (site license) It is possibleto assign the license to one or several corresponding computers for instance if the license is of type OEM

Expire date is the limit date that allows the use of the license After this date a notification can be triggered for alertsto be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Indication This is configurable at entity level in menu Configuration gt Notifications in order to define usedmodels and recipients and in menu Configuration gt Entity to activate or not this functionality define default valueand anticipation of notification sending if needed

Astuce Expired licenses are not counted in the total of available licenses

It is possible to link contracts with licenses refer to [Manage contracts](05_Module_Gestion05_Contratsrstlaquo Contracts are managed via menu Management gt Contracts raquo))

Astuce When activating the accounting information for a license data are initialized from software accountinginformation which act as a model

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Summary raquo Displays a table containing the number of computers using this license

mdash Tab laquo Computers raquo Displays a table listing the computers using this license including in particular computername serial number inventory number location status group and user Mass actions are available if autho-rized for the computers to delete license use on selected computer or to assign another license of the samesoftware to selected computer (action Move)

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 61

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

62 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 63

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

64 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 65

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

mdash Display software license details From menu Assets gt Software click on license name in tab Licensesmdash Remove use of a license by a computer See tab Computers above See also [tab Softwares of a compu-

ter](modulesassetssoftwaresrst)mdash [Associate a document and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsassocier_un_document_a_un_objetrst)mdash [Associate a contract and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_contrat_agrave_un_objetrst)

Network equipments

Network equipment represent the hardware that manages transmits and route network between several other equip-ments (computers printers )

A network equipment can be a switch an Ethernet hub a router a firewall or a WiFi access point

It is possible to use templates with network equipments

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

66 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

32 Modules 67

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

68 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

32 Modules 69

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

70 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

mdash Tab laquo Network names raquo Summary of IP address and IP networks for each network name

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 71

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

72 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 73

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

74 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 75

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

76 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Network equipments do not have specific actions report to common actions

Peripherals

In a peripheral form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the peripheral

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Peripheral management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Peripheral users mdash Users known to GLPI or not

32 Modules 77

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Groups of usersmdash

Management type

It is possible to manage peripherals either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one peripheral per computer while global management make the peripheral avirtual global element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with peripherals

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

78 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

32 Modules 79

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

80 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

32 Modules 81

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

82 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

32 Modules 83

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

84 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was ordered

32 Modules 85

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

86 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

32 Modules 87

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

88 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 89

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Peripherals do not have specific actions report to common actions

Printers

In a printer form several informations are available mdash General characteristics of the printer

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Printer users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Page countermdash Port typesmdash

Management Type

It is possible to manage printers either unitary or globally

90 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Unitary management corresponds to one printer per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with printers

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

32 Modules 91

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

92 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Cartridges

This tab displays the cartridges associated with the selected printer model mdash cartridges in use with add date and use datemdash used cartridges with cartridge model add date use date end of life date printing counter and number of

printed pages since last cartridge change

Note For cartridge adding or removing report to cartridges management

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Modules 93

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

94 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

32 Modules 95

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

96 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 97

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

98 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 99

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

100 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 101

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

102 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Printers do not have specific actions report to common actions

Cartridges

This functionality of Asset module allows to create cartridges models and corresponding cartridges

In a cartridge form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the cartridge

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage sitemdash

The alert threshold is the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

32 Modules 103

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

For a cartridge to be installable on a printer it must be declared as compatible with this printer

Management of shared stock is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Cartridges raquo This tab allows adding as many cartridges as needed by the model It is also possible toadd several cartridges at once

A first table lists the new or unused cartridges the second table lists used cartridges

mdash Tab laquo Printer models raquo This tab allows to declare the printer models that are compatible with the cartridge

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

104 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 105

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

106 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 107

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

108 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

mdash [Add a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsCreacuteer_un_nouvel_objetrst)mdash [See a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsVisualiser_un_objetrst)mdash [Modify a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsModifier_un_objetrst)mdash [Delete a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsSupprimer_un_objetrst)mdash Add new cartridges to a model See tab Cartridges abovemdash Add a printer model for the cartridge model See tab Printer model abovemdash [Associate a document with a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_document_agrave_un_objetrst)mdash [Transfer a cartridge to another entity](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsTransfeacuterer_un_objetrst)

Consumables

In a consumable form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the consumable

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Consumable management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage locationmdash

The alert threshold corresponds to the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Changing the state of a consumable from new to used requires to set involved user or group

Management of shared stocks is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

Consumables

This tab allows to add as many consumables as needed It is also possible to add several consumable in one shot

A first table lists unused consumables a second table lists used consumables together with the name of the group orthe person to which it has been allocated

The mass actions of this tab allows to allocate consumables (action Give)

32 Modules 109

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

110 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 111

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

112 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 113

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to consumables mdash Add new consumables to a model mdash List allocated consumables

Right icon allows to have a summary of allocated consumables

Phones

In a phone form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the phone

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Phone management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Phone users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Power supplymdash Firmwaremdash

Management type

It is possible to manage phones either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one phone per computer while global management make the phone a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with phones

114 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

32 Modules 115

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

116 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 117

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

118 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and a

32 Modules 119

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

network plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

120 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

32 Modules 121

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

122 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 123

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

124 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

32 Modules 125

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

126 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

Phones do not have specific actions report to common actions

Global search

Menu Asset gt Global allows to perform a global search on default view columns for allowed elements This search islimited to following assets

mdash Computermdash Contactmdash Contractmdash Documentmdash Monitormdash NetworkEquipmentmdash Peripheralmdash Phonemdash Printermdash Softwaremdash SoftwareLicensemdash Ticketmdash Problemmdash Changerdquomdash Usermdash Groupmdash Projectmdash Supplierrdquomdash Budgetmdash Certificatemdash Linemdash Datacentermdash DCRoommdash Enclosuremdash PDUmdash Rackmdash Clustermdash Domain

This search allows for instance to perform a query by status IP or MAC address

Agrave faire Referenced in original doc but not present mdash [Gestion du protocole Internet (IP)](glpiinventory_iphtml) Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plu-

sieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

323 Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs

Le module drsquoassistance permet aux utilisateurs de saisir suivre et traiter des tickets Des plannings (utilisateur ougroupe) et des statistiques sont eacutegalement disponibles

Suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil il est eacutegalement possible de saisir suivre et traiter des problegravemes et deschangements et creacuteer des tickets reacutecurrents (fonctionnaliteacutes agrave nrsquoautoriser que pour un utilisateur de type Technicien)

32 Modules 127

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Afin de mettre en route un service drsquoassistance plusieurs eacutetapes sont neacutecessaires Pour commencer analyser les besoinsde base des utilisateurs et reacutepondre au minimum vital

Une fois que les besoins de base sont satisfaits il est possible de deacutefinir les besoins secondaires et se lancer dans laconfiguration avanceacutee

Le module drsquoassistance de GLPI est conforme au guide de bonnes pratiques ITIL et integravegre donc des notions et nor-malisation de champs Bien que lrsquooutil soit conforme ITIL il nrsquoy aucune obligation pour suivre ces bonnes pratiques chacun est libre drsquoimpleacutementer le service drsquoassistance qui correspond le mieux agrave ses besoins

mdash Mise en route du service drsquoassistancemdash Deacutefinir les acteurs et leurs rocirclesmdash Deacutefinir la matrice de calcul de la prioriteacutemdash Configuration avanceacuteemdash Les matrices de cycle de vie

mdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Regravegles de gestionmdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Ouvrir un ticketmdash Pour aller plus loin

mdash Creacuteer un ticketmdash Geacuterer les problegravemesmdash Geacuterer les changementsmdash Les planningsmdash Les statistiquesmdash Les tickets reacutecurrents

324 Module Gestion

Le module Gestion permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les eacuteleacutements suivants

Geacuterer les licences

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les licences logiciels

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire des licences en lien avec les logiciels deacutejagrave inventorieacutes dans GLPI mdash un suivi des installations de chaque licence sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les licences dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des licences

Note Une licence ne peut pas exister au sein de GLPI sans un logiciel associeacute agrave sa creacuteation

La gestion de licence reste statique un suivi humain est neacutecessaire afin drsquoassurer lrsquoactualisation des informations

128 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Comme enfant de Permet drsquoindiquer si la licence est deacutependante drsquoune autre mdash Version utiliseacutee Crsquoest la version du logiciel qui sera associeacutee agrave la licence mdash Version drsquoachat La version drsquoachat peut diffeacuterer de la version actuellement utiliseacutee il est possible de lrsquoindi-

quer ici mdash Nombre Ici pourra ecirctre indiqueacute le nombre de lien possibles entre la licence et les mateacuteriels dans GLPI mdash Autoriser la surconsommation (Allow Over-Quota) Permet drsquoautoriser ou non le deacutepassement du nombre

de lien maximum configureacute dans le champ Nombre mdash Expiration La date de fin de validiteacute de la licence Champ utile pour configurer les alertes et anticiper le

renouvellement

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Licences

Cet onglet liste toutes les licences consideacutereacutees comme enfant de la licence actuelle

Note Certaines licences peuvent srsquoobtenir par pack ou par groupe de licence (pour un lieu speacutecifique par exemple)il est donc inteacuteressant de les lier

32 Modules 129

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Reacutesumeacute

Cet onglet liste tous les types et les entiteacutes des eacuteleacutements du parc concerneacutes par cette licence

Note Attention au nombre drsquoinstallationlicence disponible deacutefini dans le champ Nombre de la licence

La creacuteation du lien entre un eacuteleacutement du parc et la licence se fait dans lrsquoonglet Logiciels de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste preacuteciseacutement chaque eacuteleacutement relieacute agrave la licence actuelle

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

130 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 131

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

132 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 133

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

134 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Certificats

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un certificat preacutesent dans GLPI agrave une licence

32 Modules 135

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une licencemdash Visualiser une licencemdash Modifier une licencemdash Supprimer une licencemdash Associer un document agrave une licencemdash Transfeacuterer une licence

Geacuterer les budgets

Un budget dans GLPI crsquoest la deacutefinition drsquoun montant sur une peacuteriode donneacutee Les autre eacuteleacutements de GLPI peuventecirctre attacheacutes agrave un budget et ainsi piocher dans ce dernier en indiquant leur valeur

Mateacuterialiser un budget au sein de GLPI ouvre la fonctionnaliteacute de gestion administrative et financiegravere pour tous lesautres eacuteleacutements preacutesents dans lrsquooutil

Il est possible de suivre lrsquoeacutevolution du budget en traccedilant la valeur de chaque eacuteleacutement rattacheacutes

136 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Lier un eacuteleacutement de GLPI avec un budget se passe dans lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Note Lors de la visualisation drsquoun budget dans une sous-entiteacute le total du budget restant nrsquoest pas accessible

Important Ce total est neacutegatif si le total de la valeur des mateacuteriels est plus eacuteleveacutee que la valeur du budget

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Principal

Cet onglet fournit un tableau reacutecapitulant le montant deacutepenseacute sur le budget par type drsquoeacuteleacutements ainsi que le totalrestant

Eleacutements

Cet onglet permet de visualiser les autres eacuteleacutements de GLPI attacheacutes agrave ce budget ainsi que leur valeur

32 Modules 137

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Le lien entre le budget et un eacuteleacutement se fait depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

138 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un budgetmdash Visualiser un budgetmdash Modifier un budget

32 Modules 139

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Supprimer un budgetmdash Associer un document agrave un budgetmdash Transfeacuterer un budget

Geacuterer les certificats

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les certificats

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire de tous les certificats de lrsquoorganisation mdash un suivi des installations de chaque certificat sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les certificats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des certificats

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Fabricant (CA de lrsquoautoriteacute racine) Cette liste deacuteroulante permet de seacutelectionner et ajouter le fabricant ducertificat

mdash Auto-signeacute Permet drsquoindiquer sioui ou non le certificat actuel est auto-signeacute mdash Nom DNS Ici est agrave saisir le preacutefixe du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom -gt

server

140 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Suffixe DNS Ici est agrave saisir le suffixe DNS du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom-gt mycompanycom

mdash Date drsquoexpiration Permet de deacutefinir la fin de validiteacute du certificat Champ utile pour les alertes GLPImdash Commande utiliseacutee Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le certificatmdash Requecircte pour le certificat (CSR) Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le fichier

CSRmdash Certificat Peut ecirctre saisi ici les donneacutees contenues dans le fichier CRT (PEM)

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 141

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

142 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 143

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

144 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 145

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

146 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un certificatmdash Visualiser un certificatmdash Modifier un certificatmdash Supprimer un certificatmdash Associer un document agrave un certificatmdash Transfeacuterer un certificat

Geacuterer les fournisseurs

GLPI integravegre une gestion des fournisseurs celle-ci sert agrave la fois agrave identifier qui a vendu un mateacuteriel (dans la gestion deparc) mais aussi agrave attribuer des tickets agrave cette personne ou socieacuteteacute

Lors de lrsquoachat drsquoun mateacuteriel de marque XX agrave un fournisseur YY il faut traiter deux informations distinctes agrave savoirle fabricant (XX) et le fournisseur (YY)

Un fournisseur se caracteacuterise par un nom un type de tiers (intituleacute) des informations de localisation (adresse codepostal ville pays) et de contact (site web teacuteleacutephone et fax)

Cette gestion agrave pour objectif notamment mdash de reacutefeacuterencer tous les fournisseurs relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation

32 Modules 147

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash drsquooptimiser le contact en cas drsquoincident mdash de permettre drsquoinclure les fournisseurs dans lrsquoAssistance de GLPI

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated Contacts

The Contacts tab is used to show or add linked contacts

Note La distinction est clairement eacutetablie entre le fournisseur qursquoil est possible de lier de maniegravere univoque agrave deseacuteleacutements drsquoinventaire et les contacts qui composent la liste des personnes permettant drsquoentrer en relation avec cefournisseur Pour eacutetablir cette liste il faut donc associer les contacts au fournisseur concerneacute

Exemple

Monsieur Dupont est conseiller de vente dans lrsquoentreprise Acme aupregraves de qui la structure se fournit reacuteguliegraverementCreacuteer un fournisseur nommeacute Acme Creacuteer un contact au nom de Monsieur Dupont Affecter agrave ce contact le typecommercial Puis associer le contact au fournisseur Acme

148 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Eleacutements associeacutes

Lrsquoonglet Eleacutements pour lrsquoobjet fournisseur est speacutecifique Il ne permet que la consultation Lier un eacuteleacutement avec unfournissur se fera depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement (du Parc) concerneacute

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 149

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problegravemes

Dans cet onglet il sera possible de consulter les Problegravemes associeacutes agrave ce fournisseur Crsquoest agrave dire tous les Problegravemessur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacute agrave

150 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changements

Lrsquoonglet permet la consultation de tous les Changements sur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacuteagrave

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 151

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un fournisseurmdash Visualiser un fournisseurmdash Modifier un fournisseurmdash Supprimer un fournisseurmdash Associer un document agrave un fournisseurmdash Transfeacuterer un fournisseur

152 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les contacts

Les utilisateurs au sens de GLPI sont les personnes disposant drsquoun accegraves agrave lrsquoapplication Les personnes exteacuterieuresgeacuteneacuteralement associeacutees agrave des contrats sont stockeacutees sous la forme de contacts

Chaque contact est caracteacuteriseacute par les informations drsquoidentiteacute usuelles ainsi qursquoun titre et des coordonneacutees teacuteleacutepho-niques de messagerie et postales La deacutefinition drsquoune liste de types de contacts permet de classer les contacts selonleur type Lrsquoexportation au format vCard est possible dans la fiche de chaque contact

Note La liste des titres possibles pour un contact est identique agrave celle des utilisateurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Suppliers

The Suppliers tab is used to show or add linked suppliers

32 Modules 153

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

154 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contactmdash Visualiser un contactmdash Modifier un contactmdash Supprimer un contactmdash Associer un document agrave un contactmdash Associer un fournisseur agrave un contactmdash Transfeacuterer un contact

Geacuterer les contrats

Glpi integravegre la gestion des contrats Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet de couvrir tout type de contrat reacutealiseacute tel que les precirctscontrats de maintenance contrat de support etc Cette gestion a pour objectif

mdash de fournir un inventaire de tous les contrats relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation mdash drsquointeacutegrer les contrats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des contrats

32 Modules 155

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Note Il est possible de recevoir des notifications pour preacutevenir drsquoeacuteveacutenements tels que la fin du contrat Dans lecas ou la reconduction du contrat serait expresse il peut ecirctre inteacuteressant drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la date du preacuteavis Pour lescontrats peacuteriodiques il est eacutegalement possible drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la fin de chaque peacuteriode ou preacuteavis de peacuteriode Ceci estconfigurable par entiteacute dans le menu Configuration gt Notifications pour deacutefinir les modegraveles et destinataires utiliseacuteset dans le menu Configuration gt Entiteacute pour activer ou non cette fonctionnaliteacute deacutefinir les valeurs par deacutefaut et uneanticipation de lrsquoenvoi de la notification si besoin

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Type de contrat par deacutefaut aucun type de contrat nrsquoest renseigneacute Il faut au preacutealable les renseigner dans laconfiguration des intituleacutes

mdash Numeacutero cette information nrsquoest pertinente que si le numeacutero de contrat est identique agrave celui utiliseacute au sein desautres services de la socieacuteteacute

mdash Date de deacutebut agrave ne pas confondre avec la date drsquoenregistrement du contrat dans GLPI Tous les calculs depeacuteriodiciteacute sur le contrat sont donc fonction de cette date

mdash Dureacutee initiale du contrat si ce champ et la date de deacutebut sont renseigneacutes la date de fin de contrat apparaitra(en rouge si la date a expireacutee)

mdash Preacuteavis ce champ peut servir au deacuteclenchement des notifications drsquoalerte mdash Numeacutero comptable pour permettre un rapprochement avec le logiciel comptable de la socieacuteteacute mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute du contrat crsquoest la dureacutee agrave laquelle la reconduction du contrat est possible (Exemple Un contrat

drsquoabonnement teacuteleacutephonique drsquoune dureacutee de 24 mois renouvelable au bout de 12 mois) mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute de facturation Crsquoest la dureacutee entre chaque facturemdash Type de reconduction Tacite (le contrat est reconductible automatiquement drsquoune peacuteriode agrave une autre si

aucune des parties ne manifeste sa volonteacute de le rompre) ou Expresse (neacutecessite lrsquoaccord des deux parties pour

156 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

la reconduction du contrat) mdash Nombre max drsquoeacuteleacutements la valeur choisie dans ce champ bloquera ou non lrsquoajout de nouvel eacuteleacutements attacheacutes

agrave ce contrat mdash Heures drsquointervention Les plages horaires drsquointervention correspondent aux horaires drsquointervention couvert

par le contrat Il est possible drsquoy distinguer les samedis et les jours chocircmeacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Coucircts

Cet onglet permet de deacutefinir un coucirct relatif au contrat sur un budget preacutesent dans GLPI- crsquoest-agrave-dire imputer une valeursur le montant total du budget seacutelectionneacute qui sera attribueacute au type drsquoobjet Contrat

Fournisseurs

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs fournisseurs au contrat actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

32 Modules 157

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

158 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 159

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contratmdash Visualiser un contratmdash Modifier un contratmdash Supprimer un contratmdash Associer un document agrave un contratmdash Transfeacuterer un contrat

Geacuterer les documents

Cette section permet drsquoenregistrer des documents eacutelectroniques ou liens web classables selon diverses rubriques

Un document possegravede un nom ainsi qursquoun commentaire et peut ecirctre associeacute agrave une rubrique

Le fichier physique correspondant au document peut ecirctre ajouteacute dans GLPI de plusieurs maniegraveres mdash En parcourant le disque dur local mdash En renseignant un lien web pointant vers un document (une image une page web un PDF ) mdash En preacutecisant un fichier preacutealablement chargeacute par FTP (dans le dossier mon_glpifiles_uploads )mdash Enfin un type MIME peut aussi ecirctre indiqueacute

Note mdash Les types de documents autoriseacutes dans GLPI (selon leur extension) sont deacutefinis dans Configuration gt Intituleacutes

gt Gestion gt Type de documentmdash Les rubriques de documents peuvent ecirctre hieacuterarchiquesmdash Lrsquooption Interdire agrave lrsquoimportation permet drsquoexclure ce document agrave lrsquoimportation via les collecteurs (images

de signatures logos )

160 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Il est possible drsquoassocier drsquoautres documents agrave un document de GLPI crsquoest pourquoi cet objet beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun ongletdu mecircme type

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 161

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un documentmdash Visualiser un documentmdash Modifier un documentmdash Supprimer un documentmdash Associer un document agrave un documentmdash Transfeacuterer un document

Geacuterer les lignes

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de renseigner les lignes teacuteleacutephoniques

Cette gestion a pour objectif mdash drsquoinventorier toutes les lignes de lrsquoorganisation mdash de permettre le suivi drsquoaffectation de chaque ligne mdash permettre la gestion financiegravere des lignes dans GLPI

162 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

32 Modules 163

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

164 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 165

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une lignemdash Visualiser une lignemdash Modifier une lignemdash Supprimer une lignemdash Associer un document agrave une lignemdash Transfeacuterer une ligne

166 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les centres de donneacutees

GLPI permet la gestion des centres de donneacutees et plus preacuteciseacutement la gestion des salles serveurs et des baies informa-tiques qui les composent

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash Un inventaire des centres salles et baies informatiques de lrsquoorganisation mdash tous les autres modules au service des centres salles et baies (notamment le module Parc qui permet une

reacutepreacutesentation graphique deacutetailleacutees des baies) mdash la possibiliteacute drsquoinclure ces objets dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI

Centre de donneacutees

Le centre de donneacutees en lui mecircme est un objet tregraves simpliste dans GLPI Il se mateacuterialise sous la forme drsquoun nom etdrsquoun lieu et permet uniquement de regrouper des salles serveurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Salles serveurs

Cet onglet liste les salles serveurs attacheacutees au centre de donneacutees actuel et permet eacutegalement drsquoen ajouter

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 167

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Salle Serveur

Une salle serveur dans GLPI se mateacuterialise sour forme drsquoun plan scheacutematique Ce plan reacutepreacutesentera lrsquoespace disponibledans la salle de la serveur Cet espace sera utiliseacute pour y deacutefinir et placer les objets Baies de GLPI

La salle serveur est associable agrave un centre de donneacutees et un lieu

Note Le plan sera une grille deacutefinie par un nombre de colonnes et de lignes 1 Baie consomme 1 case

Lrsquoarriegravere plan peut grandement aider agrave la visualisation de la salle notamment si celui ci a eacuteteacute geacuteneacutereacute avec un outiladapteacute agrave la repreacutesentation drsquoespace

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Baies

Cet onglet permet de consulter et drsquoagir sur le plan de la salle serveur Pourront ecirctre ajouteacutees directement sur le planles diffeacuterentes baies informatiques qui composent la salle

Si beaucoup drsquoeacuteleacutements sont preacutesents il est possible de passer sur une vue en mode liste

168 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Analyse drsquoimpact

Cet onglet permet de consulter et de construire le scheacutema drsquoimpact du point de vue de lrsquoobjet

32 Modules 169

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

170 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 171

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

172 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elements

32 Modules 173

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

174 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualiser un centre de donneacuteesmdash Modifier un centre de donneacuteesmdash Supprimer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Associer un document agrave un centre de donneacuteesmdash Transfeacuterer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualier la liste des salles serveurs

Geacuterer les clusters

Un Cluster GLPI est un regroupement de plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc Peut rejoindre un cluster les ordinateurs et lesmateacuteriels reacuteseau

Note Les clusters renseigneacutes dans GLPI sont pris en compte dans lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact TODO link vers la preacutesen-tation de lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact

32 Modules 175

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash UUID Identifiant unique du clustermdash Version Dans le cas drsquoun cluster logiciel ou autre la version peut ecirctre indiqueacuteemdash Source de mise agrave jour Ce champ repreacutesente la maniegravere dont la fiche de lrsquoobjet dans GLPI a eacuteteacute mise agrave jour

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste et pemret lrsquoajout drsquoun ou plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc au sein du cluster

Ports reacuteseau

Cet onglet permet de creacuteer et de lister des interfaces reacuteseau propres au cluster

Les interfaces possibles mdash Port Ethernetmdash Ports Wifimdash Agreacutegation de portmdash Alias de portmdash Connexion par ligne commuteacutee - Dialupmdash Boucle locale

176 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Port Fibre Channel

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 177

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

178 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 179

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un clustermdash Visualiser un clustermdash Modifier un clustermdash Supprimer un clustermdash Associer un document agrave un clustermdash Transfeacuterer un cluster

Geacuterer les domaines

Deux nouveaux objets de GLPI sont rassembleacutes dans cette fonctionnaliteacute les domaines et les enregistrements dedomaines

Geacuterer les domaines et les enregistrements au sein de GLPI permet notamment mdash de construire un inventaire des noms de domaines mdash drsquoinventorier les enregistrements (records) de chaque domaine mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des noms de domaines mdash drsquointeacutegrer les domaines dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash de lier les eacuteleacutements du parc au domaine

Modifieacute dans la version 950mdash inclure les domaines et les enregitrements dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI

Note Lrsquoaccegraves agrave la liste des objets Enregistrements de domaines est accessible depuis la liste des objets Domaines

Objet Domaine

Lrsquoobjet domaine permet de mateacuterialiser un domaine informatique dans son ensemble (son nom sa date drsquoexpirationetc) Lrsquoobjet est associable dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI (tickets problegravemes changements)

180 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Records

Dans cet onglet il est possible de seacutelectionner ou de creacuteer un enregistrement de domaine agrave associer au domaine actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 181

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

182 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 183

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

184 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 185

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

186 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Objet Enregistrement de domaine (Record)

Lrsquoobjet Enregistrement de domaine permet de mateacuterialiser tous les types drsquoenregistrements que lrsquoon peut trouver dansune zone ou un fichier de configuration DNS ( TXT A PTR SOA CNAME etc )

Cet objet doit ecirctre associeacute agrave un objet Domaine vu preacutecedemment

Note Les types drsquoenregistrements ne sont pas limiteacutes agrave ceux creacuteeacutes par deacutefaut ils sont personnalisables depuis lagestion des intituleacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 187

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

188 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changed

32 Modules 189

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Description of the change that was madeThe description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Visualiser un domainemdash Ajouter un domaineun enregistrementmdash Modifier un domaineun enregistrementmdash Supprimer un domaineun enregistrementmdash Associer un document agrave un domaineun enregistrementmdash Transfeacuterer un domainemdash Visualiser les enregistrements de domaines

325 Module Outils

Le module Outils permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les projets les notes les flux RSS la base de connaissance lesreacuteservations ainsi que de geacuteneacuterer des rapports

Geacuterer les projets

La gestion de projets permet de suivre complegravetement lrsquoavancement drsquoun projet au sein de GLPI via la creacuteation detacircche la constitution drsquoune eacutequipe que celui-ci soit lieacute agrave un changement ou non

Un projet dans GLPI crsquoest la possibiliteacute mdash drsquoassocier des tacircches de projet et geacuterer leur avancement mdash drsquoeacutetablir une eacutequipe projet et des eacutequipes de tacircche mdash la possibiliteacute de deacuteclencher des sous projets au sein drsquoun mecircme projet mdash de construire un diagramme de GANTTmdash la possibiliteacute drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban mdash drsquoassocier des coucircts mdash de relier les objets ITIL de GLPI

Le projets peut ecirctre hieacuterarchiseacute un projet peut donc avoir des sous-projets

Les projets disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom codeeacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquounpourcentage drsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

Plusieurs diagrammes de GANTT sont proposeacutes pour chaque projet (voir onglet GANTT)

Dans cette gestion de projet il y a deux objets principaux le projet et la tacircche de projet

190 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Projet

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter une nouvelle tacircche au projet Il liste eacutegalement les tacircches deacutejagrave deacutefinies pour ce projeten indiquant pour chaque tacircche son nom son type son statut le pourcentage effectueacutee les dates de deacutebut et de finplanifieacutees les dureacutees planifieacutee et effective ainsi que le nom de la tacircche parent

Equipe Projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter un membre agrave lrsquoeacutequipe que ce soit un contact un fournisseur un utilisateur ou un groupeIl liste eacutegalement chaque membre de lrsquoeacutequipe projet ainsi que son type respectif

Projet

Cet onglet liste les sous-projets du projet Pour deacutefinir un sous-projet il suffit de remplir le champ laquo comme enfantde raquo drsquoun projet

32 Modules 191

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

GANTT

Un diagramme de GANTT est proposeacute pour chaque projet Un diagramme de GANTT global est eacutegalement proposeacuteincluant les projets deacutefinis comme visible dans ce diagramme

Kanban

Cet onglet met agrave disposition une interface afin drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban dans GLPI

192 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Coucircts

Des coucircts sont associables aux projets auxquels peuvent ecirctre ajouteacute les coucircts des tickets lieacutees aux tacircches du projet

Objets Itil

Crsquoest dans cet onglet qursquoil est possible drsquoassocier au projet actuel les objets itil de GLPI tickets problegravemes etchangements Il est possible de creacuteer ces objets depuis cet onglet eacutegalement

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object and

32 Modules 193

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

the document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

194 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Tacircche de projet

lrsquoobjet tacircche de projet est assez similaire au projet

une tacircche de projet peut ecirctre eacutegalement une sous tacircche de projet

Les tacircches disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom eacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquoun pourcentagedrsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

32 Modules 195

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note La tacircche de projet nrsquoest pas un objet indeacutependant de GLPI Lrsquoaccegraves agrave une tache de projet se fait dans lrsquoongletTacircches de projet du projet concerneacute

Les tacircches peuvent ecirctre lieacutees agrave des tickets permettant de planifier des interventions permettant de mettre en place leprojet Des dureacutees preacutevisionnelles et effectives sont eacutegalement deacutefinies au niveau des tacircches Ces dureacutees ainsi quecelles des tickets sont alors consolideacutees au niveau du projet lui mecircme

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et drsquoajouter les sous-tacircches

Equipe de tacircche

Ici est deacutefinie lrsquoeacutequipe en charge de la tacircche

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

196 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

32 Modules 197

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un projetmdash Visualiser un projetmdash Modifier un projetmdash Supprimer un projetmdash Associer un document agrave un projetmdash Transfeacuterer un projet

Geacuterer les notes personnelles ou publiques

Une note dans GLPI est un simple champ texte et piegravece jointe permettant de transmettre des informations aux utilisa-teurs de la plateforme

Une note est caracteacuteriseacutee par mdash une dureacutee de vie

198 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash un statut mdash la possibiliteacute de la faire apparaicirctre dans le planning mdash les cibles de la note

Les notes saisies apparaissent ensuite sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI ou dans le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes

32 Modules 199

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il est possible de deacuteterminer une date de deacutebut et de fin de publication pour chaque note Si la date de deacutebutnrsquoest pas mentionneacutee la note sera visible immeacutediatement jusqursquoagrave la date de fin Si la date de fin nrsquoest pas mentionneacuteela note sera visible de faccedilon permanente agrave partir de la date de deacutebut

Lrsquoajout drsquoune note au calendrier permet de la faire apparaicirctre sur le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes par la note celui de lrsquoutilisateur pour une note personnelle les plannings de tous les utilisateurs dans le cas drsquoune note publiqueUne note planifieacutee nrsquoest pas supprimeacutee une fois la date expireacutee

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

200 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Cible

Une note est consideacutereacutee comme personnelle par deacutefaut Elle est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoune note devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (note publique) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ouplusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lanote

Une note publique est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les notes publiques

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une notemdash Visualiser une note

32 Modules 201

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Modifier une notemdash Supprimer une notemdash Associer un document agrave une notemdash Rendre une note publique Ajouter une cible agrave la notemdash Publier une note pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee Ajouter une date de deacutebut et une date de fin au niveau de la

visibiliteacute

Geacuterer les rapports

GLPI permet la geacuteneacuteration drsquoun certain nombre de rapports en lien avec les objets preacutesents sur la plateforme mdash Rapport par deacutefaut Ce rapport comptabilise les mateacuteriels preacutesents dans le parc trieacutes par type Pour les ordi-

nateurs un tri est eacutegalement effectueacute par systegraveme drsquoexploitationmdash Par contrat Mateacuteriel sous contrat de maintenance aupregraves drsquoun tiers Il est possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat deacutetailleacute

par type de mateacuteriel et par date drsquoachat La seacutelection multiple est autoriseacutee Pour ajouter un type il suffitde cliquer dans la zone blanche et de choisir le nouveau type Le principe est le mecircme pour ajouter unedate Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet le nom srsquoil est dans la corbeille ou non son entiteacute son lieu les datedrsquoachat et drsquoexpiration de garantie le type de contrat ainsi que les dates de deacutebut et de fin de contrat

mdash Par anneacutee Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacutedent mais listant eacutegalement les mateacuteriel sanscontrat

mdash Informations financiegraveres et administratives du mateacuteriel Reacutecapitulatif des informations financiegraveres pour lesordinateurs les imprimantes les mateacuteriels reacuteseaux les moniteurs les peacuteripheacuteriques et les teacuteleacutephones Ilest possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat pour une peacuteriode donneacutee Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet son nom sonentiteacute sa valeur sa valeur nette comptable son TCO ses dates drsquoachat de mise en service et drsquoexpirationde garantie Un reacutecapitulatif comprenant le total de la valeur et de la valeur nette comptable est poposeacute partype drsquoobjet et pour la totaliteacute des objets

mdash Autres Informations Financiegraveres et administratives Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacute-dent mais mais pour les cartouches les licences et les consommables

mdash Rapport reacuteseau 3 rapports peuvent ecirctre reacutealiseacutes selon le lieu selon le type de mateacuteriel reacuteseau ou selon laprise reacuteseau

mdash Precirct Reacutecapitulatif des reacuteservations en cours agrave venir ou passeacutees pour un utilisateur donneacutemdash Rapport sur les statuts Synthegravese par type de mateacuteriel des diffeacuterents statuts

Note Le nombre de rapport peut ecirctre eacutetoffer en ajoutant un plugin disponible ici httpspluginsglpi-projectorgpluginreports

Geacuterer les reacuteservations

GLPI met agrave disposition un outils de reacuteservation de mateacuteriel outil qui permet de seacutelectionner un ou plusieurs eacuteleacutementsdu parc afin de les reacuteserver sur une plage horaire Pour des reacuteservations reacutepeacutetitives il est possible de mettre en placede la reacutecurrence sur la reacuteservation

202 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Un mateacuteriel nrsquoest pas reacuteservable par deacutefaut Pour rendre un mateacuteriel reacuteservable il faut se rendre dans lrsquoongletReacuteservation de la fiche du mateacuteriel

Un mateacuteriel reacuteserveacute apparaicirctra dans un planning global des reacuteservations

Il est eacutegalement possible de consulter le planning speacutecifique drsquoun mateacuteriel reacuteservable La reacuteservation peut ecirctre creacuteeacuteedepuis ce planning eacutegalement

32 Modules 203

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Reacuteservations

Onglet principal de lrsquooutil Il permet de consulter et de seacutelectionner les mateacuteriels reacuteservables disponibles

Administration

Cet onglet liste tous les objets reacuteservables et non plus ceux disponibles Comme pour les principaux objet de GLPI ilpropose un moteur de recherche avec la possibiliteacute drsquoeffectuer des actions de masse

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une reacuteservationmdash VisualiserModifier les reacuteservationsmdash Supprimer une reacuteservationmdash Rendre un mateacuteriel indisponible

Geacuterer les flux RSS

GLPI permet drsquoinclure des flux RSS dans la page drsquoaccueil de lrsquooutil

Un flux RSS est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun flux RSS devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (flux RSS public) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner uneou plusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes aux profils groupes ou utilisateurs de la plateforme

Note Un flux RSS public est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les flux RSSpublics

204 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Contenu

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter le nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements afficheacutes Crsquoest ce contenu qui est reporteacute en pagedrsquoaccueil

Cibles

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et modifier la liste des cibles pour le flux RSS concerneacute

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 205

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un flux RSSmdash VisualiserModifier un flux RSSmdash Supprimer un flux RSS

Geacuterer la base de connaissances

La base de connaissances de GLPI reacutepond agrave deux objectifs principaux mdash Centraliser des connaissances internes pour les diffeacuterents techniciens mdash Mettre agrave la disposition des utilisateurs des informations leur permettant de reacutesoudre seuls des problegravemes

simples sous forme de FAQ publique

Note Seuls les eacuteleacutements de la FAQ publique sont visibles par les utilisateurs de lrsquointerface simplifieacutee Les eacuteleacutementsqui ne sont pas deacutefinis comme faisant partie de la FAQ publique sont visibles uniquement au sein de la console centralepar des techniciens par exemple

Il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner pour chaque article de la base de connaissances ou de la FAQ une ou plusieurscibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Tantqursquoaucune cible nrsquoa eacuteteacute seacutelectionneacutee pour un article ce dernier est visible uniquement par son reacutedacteur Lrsquoarticle estconsideacutereacute comme laquo non publieacute raquo et apparaicirct dans le tableau laquo Articles non publieacutes raquo de la page drsquoaccueil de la base deconnaissances

Par deacutefaut les articles ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute est activable (voir laconfiguration geacuteneacuterale)

Il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs documents aux articles de la base de connaissances

Note Un article peut ecirctre rendu visible pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee via la deacutefinition de la date de deacutebut et la date defin de visibiliteacute

Avertissement Les eacuteleacutements qui ne doivent pas ecirctre interpreacuteteacutes agrave lrsquoaffichage peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis avec le style Preacute-formateacute (ltpregt en HTML) Des balises comme ltVirtualHostgt sont donc inseacuterable et affichable Par contredes balises au format HTML (ltBALISEgt) peuvent disparaicirctre au moment de lrsquoeacutedition pour avoir une visibiliteacutecomplegravete du texte vous pouvez passer en mode HTML ougrave tous les eacuteleacutements seront visibles Votre navigateur peuteacutegalement modifier dynamiquement le contenu (changement de casse ajout de balises) lors drsquoune eacutedition

Il est possible de creacuteer des cateacutegories et sous-cateacutegories afin drsquoorganiser la navigation (voir Configurer les intituleacutes)

Lrsquoutilisateur peut alors utiliser plusieurs onglets pour recherche et naviguer au sein de la base de connaissances mdash Rechercher Crsquoest lrsquoonglet par deacutefaut Il preacutesente les articles les plus reacutecents les plus populaires et les derniegraveres

modifications Il permet eacutegalement de rechercher au sein de la base de connaissances

206 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Parcourir Cet onglet permet de naviguer au sein de lrsquoarborescence des cateacutegories

mdash Geacuterer Cet onglet nrsquoest accessible qursquoaux administrateurs de la base de connaissances Suivant les droits delrsquoutilisateur il est possible drsquoacceacuteder rapidement agrave ses ou agrave tous les articles non publieacutes (sans cible deacutefinies)ainsi qursquoagrave tous ses articles

Note Le moteur de recherche de la base de connaissances permet drsquoutiliser un certain nombre drsquoopeacuterateurs poureffectuer des recherches complexes + - ~ lt gt rdquo rdquo ()

mdash + Le mot doit ecirctre preacutesent

32 Modules 207

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash - Le mot ne doit pas ecirctre preacutesent mdash Opeacuterateur de troncature agrave positionner en suffixe mdash Une phrase entre guillemets double (laquo ) est rechercheacutee litteacuteralement telle qursquoelle a eacuteteacute saisie mdash lt gt permet de deacutefinir une preacutefeacuterence sur lrsquoordre des eacuteleacutements rechercheacutes mdash () agreacutegateur utile pour lrsquoutilisation de lt et gt

Exemples

- panne imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent au moins un de ces mots

- +panne +imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent ces deux mots

- +courriel thunderbird-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent le mot courriel

mais classe plus haut les lignes qui contiennent aussi thunderbird

- +courriel -outlook-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent courriel mais pas outlook

- +courriel +(gtthunderbird ltoutlook)-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent les mots courriel et thunderbird

ou courriel et outlook (dans nimporte quel ordre)mais classe courriel thunderbird plus haut que courriel outlook

- open-gt Trouve les lignes qui contiennent des mots tels que openoffice openwriter

openbar ou openphp

- suite openoffice-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent exactement la phrase suite openoffice

Les diffeacuterents onglets drsquoun article

Base de connaissances

Cet onglet affiche un tableau concernant lrsquoarticle avec en titre sa cateacutegorie Son ensuite listeacutes son sujet et son contenuainsi que le nom du reacutedacteur des dates de creacuteation et de derniegravere modification le nombre de fois ougrave lrsquoarticle a eacuteteacute luainsi que srsquoil fait partie ou non de la FAQ Si un article nrsquoest pas publieacute (cible non deacutefinie) cette information apparaicircten rouge au-dessus du nombre de vues

Cible

Un article est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun article devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ou plusieurs ciblesLa ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Cet ongletpermet donc drsquoajouter une nouvelle cible tout en listant les cibles deacutejagrave deacutefinies

208 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Editer

Cet onglet permet suivant vos droits de modifier ou supprimer un article

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 209

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Reacutevisions

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter toutes les reacutevisions de chaque article Crsquoest agrave dire que chaque modificationde lrsquoarticle donnera naissance agrave une reacutevision une version anteacuterieure de lrsquoarticle

les reacutevisions sont affichables et peuvent ecirctre restaureacutees

Commentaires

Un article beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun espace commentaires permettant aux utilisateurs de la plateforme drsquoeacutechanger agrave son sujet

210 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un articlemdash Modifier un articlemdash Supprimer un articlemdash Associer un document agrave un articlemdash Modifier la visibiliteacute drsquoun article

326 Module Administration

Le module Administration permet drsquoadministrer les utilisateurs groupes entiteacutes profils regravegles et dictionnaires etoffre des outils de maintenance de lrsquoapplication (sauvegarde et restauration de base veacuterification de nouvelle versiondisponible)

mdash [Geacuterer les utilisateurs](07_Module_Administration02_Utilisateurs01_Utilisateursrst)mdash [Geacuterer les groupes](07_Module_Administration03_Groupesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les entiteacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les regravegles](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst)mdash [Configurer les dictionnaires de donneacutees](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les profils](07_Module_Administration07_Profils01_Profilsrst)mdash [Geacuterer la file drsquoattente drsquoenvoi des courriels](07_Module_Administration08_File_drsquoattente_des_courrielsrst)mdash [Maintenance](07_Module_Administration09_Maintenancerst)mdash [Visualiser les journaux drsquoactiviteacute](07_Module_Administration10_Journauxrst)

327 Module Configuration

Le module Configuration permet drsquoacceacuteder aux options de configuration geacuteneacuterale de GLPI la configuration globalede GLPI les notifications les collecteurs les tacircches automatiques lrsquoauthentification les plugins les critegraveres drsquouniciteacuteet les liens externes protocoleacutes

Les intituleacutes ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

32 Modules 211

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Si des eacuteleacutements que vous voulez supprimer sont utiliseacutes GLPI proposera automatiquement de transfeacuterer lesentreacutees existantes vers un autre eacuteleacutement de la liste ou bien de les remettre agrave zeacutero

mdash [Configurer les composants](08_Module_Configuration03_Composantsrst)mdash [Configurer les notifications](08_Module_Configuration04_Notifications01_Configurer_les_notificationsrst)

Configurer les suivis par courriels creacuteer des modegraveles de notifications deacutefinir lrsquoenvoi de notificationmdash [Configurer les SLAs](08_Module_Configuration05_Sla01_Slarst) Deacutefinir les SLA ainsi que les diffeacute-

rents niveaux drsquoescalademdash [Configurer les paramegravetres centraux](08_Module_Configuration06_Geacuteneacuterale01_Configurer_les_paramegravetres_centrauxrst)mdash [Configurer les controcircles](08_Module_Configuration07_Controlesrst)mdash [Configurer les actions automatiques](08_Module_Configuration08_Actions_automatiquesrst)mdash [Configurer les collecteurs](glpiconfig_mailcollectorhtml) La configuration des collecteurs srsquoeffectue

depuis le menuConfiguration gt Collecteurs

mdash [Ajouter un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les liens externes protocoleacutes](glpiconfig_linkhtml)

Les liens externes se configurent depuis le menu Configuration gt

Liens externesmdash [Ajouter un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les plugins GLPI](glpiconfig_pluginhtml) Les plugins dans GLPI installation configura-

tion activation

Authentification

Crsquoest ici que GLPI gegravere lrsquoauthentification et les informations personnelles des utilisateurs

Lrsquoaccegraves drsquoun utilisateur agrave GLPI est possible apregraves que ces conditions aient eacuteteacute veacuterifieacutees

1 envoi drsquoinformations drsquoauthentification par lrsquoutilisateur

2 existence de lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur

3 authentification de lrsquoutilisateur

4 attribution drsquohabilitations agrave lrsquoutilisateur

GLPI utilise sa propre base interne drsquoutilisateurs Ceux-ci sont soit creacuteeacutes depuis lrsquointerface de lrsquoapplication soit im-porteacutes depuis une ou plusieurs sources externes Selon le type de source lrsquoimport des utilisateurs peut se faire soit enmasse soit au fil de lrsquoeau lors de la tentative de connexion drsquoun utilisateur non encore connu de GLPI

Pour effectuer lrsquoauthentification GLPI fait appel agrave une base de mots de passes interne qui peut ecirctre compleacuteteacutee parune ou plusieurs sources externes drsquoauthentification Lrsquoutilisation de meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externes permet dedeacuteleacuteguer cette fonctionnaliteacute agrave des systegravemes tiers assurant la gestion drsquoidentiteacute Voir [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec lessources drsquoauthentification externes](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification02_Configurationrst) laquo Les para-megravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configura-tion gt Authentification gt Configuration raquo)

Lrsquoattribution des habilitations est deacutecrite dans la section [Attribuer des habilitations agrave un utilisa-teur](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles03_Habilitations_utilisateurrst) laquo GLPI dispose drsquoun moteur drsquoha-bilitations dynamiques qui se base sur des sources externes drsquoauthentification Il est accessible depuis le menuAdministration gt Regravegles gt Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitation agrave un utilisateur raquo)

Note La cineacutematique drsquoauthentification est la suivante

1 lrsquoutilisateur entre son identifiant et son mot de passe

212 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 GLPI veacuterifie si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave enregistreacute dans la base Srsquoil ne lrsquoest pas

1 GLPI essaye les meacutethodes drsquoauthentification les unes apregraves les autres la base interne puis tous les an-nuaires LDAP et enfin les annuaires de messagerie

2 lorsque lrsquoauthentification est reacuteussie lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans la base interne ainsi que sa meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

3 si aucune source nrsquoa pu authentifier lrsquoutilisateur celui-ci est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que sonidentifiant ou mot de passe est incorrect

3 Si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave preacutesent dans la base interne ou une fois son identifiant creacuteeacute

1 GLPI tente drsquoauthentifier lrsquoutilisateur en utilisant la derniegravere meacutethode drsquoauthentification reacuteussie (et unique-ment celle-ci)

2 si lrsquoauthentification a eacutechoueacute lrsquoutilisateur est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que son identifiant oumot de passe est incorrect

4 Le moteur drsquohabilitation est lanceacute avec les informations de lrsquoutilisateur

1 si le moteur a donneacute agrave celui-ci une ou plusieurs habilitations alors lrsquoutilisateur a accegraves agrave GLPI

2 si lrsquoutilisateur ne se voit attribuer aucune habilitation alors bien qursquoeacutetant inscrit dans la base GLPI il nepeut se connecter agrave lrsquoapplication

mdash [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec les sources drsquoauthentification externes](glpiconfig_common_authhtml)Les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes

drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration Authentifica-tion

mdash [Chiffrage des mots de passe dans la base de donneacutees](glpiconfig_passwords_encryptedhtml)Les mots de passe des accegraves exteacuterieurs sont chiffreacutes

mdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldaphtml)Lrsquointerface de GLPI avec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le

menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Annuaire LDAP mdash [Configurer la liaison LDAP pour les utilisateurs et les groupes](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_usersgroupshtml)mdash [Ajouter un nouvel annuaire LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un annuaire](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Importer et synchroniser depuis un annuaire par script](glpiscripts_ldap_mass_synchtml)

Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisation agrave partir drsquoun

annuairemdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imaphtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme source

drsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie mdash [Ajouter un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](glpiconfig_auth_otherhtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de

lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

Sujet parent [Administrer les controcircles drsquoaccegraves](glpiaccess_control_introhtml laquo Cette partie deacutecrit commentadministrer le systegraveme de controcircle drsquoaccegraves qui permet agrave chaque utilisateur drsquoacceacuteder agrave un contexte drsquoutilisation speacuteci-fique raquo)

32 Modules 213

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sources drsquoauthentification externes

Ce menu permet de configurer les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification

Afin de pouvoir utiliser ces sources externes drsquoauthentification il faut au preacutealable activer les extensions correspon-dantes dans la configuration de PHP Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre de sources externes configureacutees danslrsquoapplication

Pour utiliser la capaciteacute de GLPI de creacuteer agrave la voleacutee des utilisateurs preacutesents dans les sources externes drsquoauthentifica-tion il faut lrsquoactiver dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration

Figure 1 Menu de la configuration de lrsquoauthentification [image](docsimageauthConfigpng)

Les annuaires LDAP permettent en outre de refuser la creacuteation des utilisateurs ne posseacutedant pas drsquohabilitations Lasuppression drsquoun utilisateur de lrsquoannuaire peut aussi entraicircner une action telle que la mise agrave la corbeille de lrsquoutilisateurla suppression de ses habilitations ou sa deacutesactivation Crsquoest eacutegalement agrave ce niveau qursquoest parameacutetreacute le fuseau horairede GLPI

Les sources drsquoauthentification externes prises en charges par GLPI sont les suivantes mdash annuaire LDAP voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires

LDAP](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification03_Annuaires_LDAPrst laquo Lrsquointerface de GLPIavec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt AnnuairesLDAP raquo)

mdash serveur de messagerie voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de message-rie](config_auth_imaphtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme sourcedrsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie raquo)

mdash serveur CAS voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash certificat x509 voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash authentification deacuteleacutegueacutee au serveur web voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification ex-terne](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentificationunique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

Annuaires LDAP

GLPI srsquointerface avec un (ou plusieurs) Annuaire LDAP afin drsquoauthentifier les utilisateurs de controcircler leur accegraves dereacutecupeacuterer leurs informations personnelles et drsquoimporter des groupes

Tous les annuaires compatibles LDAP v3 sont supporteacutes par GLPI Crsquoest donc aussi le cas pour lrdquoAnnuaire ActiveDirectory de Microsoft Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires renseigneacutes bien entendu plus le nombreest eacuteleveacute plus la recherche drsquoun nouvel utilisateur agrave authentifier peut ecirctre longue

Il est possible drsquoimporter et de synchroniser les utilisateurs de 2 maniegraveres mdash au fil de lrsquoeau agrave la premiegravere connexion lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans GLPI A chaque login ses informations

personnelles sont synchroniseacutees avec lrsquoannuaire Dans le cas ougrave les collecteurs sont utiliseacutes une adresse demessagerie inconnue sera rechercheacutee dans lrsquoannuaire pour creacuteer lrsquoutilisateur associeacute

mdash en masse soit via lrsquointerface web de GLPI soit en utilisant le script fourni voir [Importer et synchroniserdepuis un annuaire par script](scripts_ldap_mass_synchtml laquo Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisationagrave partir drsquoun annuaire raquo)

Avertissement Si aucune configuration LDAP nrsquoest visible (voir un message drsquoerreur sur cette partie) crsquoest quele module LDAP pour PHP nrsquoest pas installeacute

214 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sous Linux installer le paquet ldap pour PHP (par exemple php5-ldap sur Debian) puis redeacutemarrer le serveurweb

Sous Windows il faut deacutecommenter dans le fichier phpini (fichier preacutesent dans le reacutepertoire apachebin) la ligneextension=php_ldapdll puis redeacutemarrer le serveur web

Le processus drsquoauthentification des utilisateurs est deacutecoupeacute en 3 parties lrsquoauthentification le controcircle drsquoaccegraves et enfinla reacutecupeacuteration des donneacutees personnelles

Authentification LDAP

Lors de la premiegravere connexion de lrsquoutilisateur GLPI va srsquoadresser agrave tous les annuaires jusqursquoagrave trouver celui qui contientlrsquoutilisateur Si lrsquooption permettant drsquoimporter des utilisateurs depuis une source externe est active alors celui-ci estcreacuteeacute et lrsquoidentifiant de la meacutethode de connexion et le serveur LDAP sont stockeacutes en base de donneacutees

Ensuite agrave chaque login lrsquoutilisateur est authentifieacute sur lrsquoannuaire dont lrsquoidentifiant est stockeacute dans GLPI Les autresannuaires ne sont pas utiliseacutes si un utilisateur est deacutesactiveacute dans lrsquoannuaire qursquoil a utiliseacute jusque lagrave pour se connecteril ne peut se connecter avec une autre source drsquoauthentification

Controcircle drsquoaccegraves

Le controcircle drsquoaccegraves est lrsquoattribution drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur Mecircme si un utilisateur est authentifieacute sur un an-nuaire il nrsquoest pas forceacutement habiliteacute agrave se connecter agrave GLPI

Ce meacutecanisme repose sur lrsquoutilisation de regravegles drsquoaffectations drsquohabilitations

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Annuaire LDAP

32 Modules 215

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il existe un modegravele de preacute-configuration Active Directory qui preacute-remplit un certain nombre de champsCelui-ci a eacuteteacute mis en place afin de faciliter la configuration GLPI-AD

Pour le charger cliquer sur le lien Active Directory lors de lrsquoajout drsquoun annuaire Le lien Valeur(s) par deacutefautreacuteinitialise la saisie

mdash serveur par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieurs serveurs LDAP de parameacutetreacutes vous ne pouvez deacutefinir qursquoun seulserveur par deacutefaut Le fait de choisir ce paramegravetre le supprime du serveur sur lequel il eacutetait preacuteceacutedemmentparameacutetreacute

mdash serveur et port repreacutesentant lrsquoadresse de lrsquoannuaire LDAPmdash basedn emplacement de lrsquoannuaire agrave partir duquel les recherches et lectures seront effectueacutees

Note Le basedn doit ecirctre renseigneacute sous la forme du DN complet de lrsquoutilisateur Par exempleCN=glpiadminDC=mondomaine si le compte dans lrsquoannuaire pour GLPI est glpiadmin

mdash DN du compte identifiant de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) mdash Mot de passe du compte mot de passe correspondant (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) Il est possible

drsquoeffacer le mot de passe en cochant la case effacer puis de valider mdash filtre de connexion permet de restreindre la recherche de personnes dans lrsquoannuaire Par exemple si seul un

ensemble restreint de personnes de lrsquoannuaire ont le droit de se connecter agrave GLPI il faut mettre en place unecondition pour restreindre la recherche agrave ces personnes

On peut citer les exemples de filtres suivants mdash un filtre classique LDAP peut ecirctre (objectclass=inetOrgPerson)mdash pour Active Directory utiliser le filtre suivant qui ne renvoie que les utilisa-

teurs non deacutesactiveacutes (car les machines sont aussi consideacutereacutees comme des utili-sateurs par AD) (amp(objectClass=user)(objectCategory=person)((userAccountControl1284011355614803=2)))

Il faut noter que ce filtre est automatiquement rempli lorsque le modegravele de preacute-configurationActive Directory est seacutelectionneacute

mdash Champ de lrsquoidentifiant nom du champ dans lrsquoannuaire LDAP correspondant agrave lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur(par exemple uid sur un annuaire LDAP samaccountname sur un annuaire AD)

mdash Champ de synchronisation nom du champ utiliseacute pour la synchronisation Ce champ doit identifier de ma-niegravere unique lrsquoutilisateur il permet de prendre en compte le cangement de login (par exemple employeeuidsur un LDAP ou objectguid pour un AD)

Avertissement Ne pas oublier drsquoactiver votre annuaire et de le deacutefinir lrsquoannuaire par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieursannuaires

Base DN et utilisateur authentifieacute

Attention le rootdn et le basedn doivent ecirctre eacutecrits sans espaces apregraves les virgules De plus la casse est importante

Exemple de rootdn mdash cn=Admin ou=users dc=mycompany incorrectmdash cn=Adminou=usersdc=mycompany correct

Pour Active Directory si on utilise le userprincipalname au lieu du samaccountname on peut avoir un rootdn sous laforme prenomnomdomainefr

Les paramegravetres agrave entrer sont tregraves simples par exemple mdash hocircte ldapmycompanyfrmdash basedn dc=mycompanydc=fr

216 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Et cela doit suffire si la recherche anonyme est permise Dans le cas contraire et si tous les utilisateurs ne sont paspositionneacutes au sein du mecircme DN il vous faut speacutecifier le DN drsquoun utilisateur autoriseacute et son mot de passe rootdnPassPour Active Directory il est obligatoire de renseigner un compte qui a le droit de srsquoauthentifier sur le domaine

En tentant de se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire gracircce agrave un browser LDAP il est possible de tester ces paramegravetres Il en existebeaucoup mais on peut citer

mdash LdapBrowser Editor (logiciel libre eacutecrit en Java et donc multi-plateforme)mdash ADSIedit pour Active Directory Cet outil se trouve sur les supports toolsoutils suppleacutementaires du CD drsquoins-

tallation de Windows Server

Note Si certains des utilisateurs ont des restrictions de connexion agrave certaines machines configureacutees dans leur profilAD lrsquoerreur suivante est possible lors drsquoune tentative de login sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI Utilisateur non trouveacuteou plusieurs utilisateurs identiques trouveacutes La solution consiste agrave ajouter le serveur heacutebergeant lrsquoAD agrave la liste desPC sur lesquels lrsquoutilisateur peut se connecter

Tester

Permet de tester la configuration deacutefinie dans lrsquoonglet Annuaire LDAP

Le message Test de connexion reacuteussi indique que GLPI a pu se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP avec les informationsrenseigneacutees (hocircte port compte utilisateur)

Il reste deacutesormais agrave importer les utilisateurs Pour cela il faut bien veacuterifier les autres paramegravetres (filtre de connexionchamps de login etc)

Utilisateurs

Permet de configurer comment va ecirctre effectueacute le lien entre les champs de lrsquoannuaire et ceux de GLPI Pour chaquechamp de GLPI (nom preacutenom image ) est associeacute un champ de lrsquoannuaire

Groupes

Permet de configurer la meacutethode de stockage des groupes au niveau de lrsquoannuaire

32 Modules 217

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Informations avanceacutees

Dans le cas ougrave lrsquoheure de la machine heacutebergeant lrsquoannuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas dans le mecircme fuseau horaire que celui deGLPI il faut modifier la variable Fuseau horaire afin drsquoajuster le deacutelai en effet cela peut provoquer des reacutesultatserroneacutes dans la liste des utilisateurs agrave synchroniser

Connexion LDAP seacutecuriseacutee

GLPI gegravere la connexion seacutecuriseacutee agrave un annuaire LDAP agrave travers une connexion SSL (aussi appeleacute LDAPS) Il suffitde rajouter devant le nom de lrsquohocircte (ou son IP) ldaps Ainsi que de changer le port (par deacutefaut 636) Par exemplelrsquoaccegraves en LDAPS en local donnera Hocircte ldaps 127001 Port 636

Limite du nombre drsquoenregistrement retourneacutes (sizelimit)

Il existe souvent deux limites sur le nombre maximum drsquoenregistrements retourneacutes par une requecircte LDAP mdash la limite du client (deacutefinie par exemple sur DebianUbuntu dans etcldapldapconf)mdash la limite imposeacutee par le serveur si la limite deacutefinie par le client est supeacuterieure agrave la limite serveur crsquoest cette

derniegravere qui prend le dessus

Avertissement Si la limite est atteinte lrsquooption de comportement lors de la suppression drsquoun utilisateur delrsquoannuaire ne peut fonctionner De plus GLPI affichera un message drsquoavertissement lors drsquoun import ou drsquounesynchronisation

Avec PHP 54 ou supeacuterieur il est deacutesormais possible de contourner la limitation du sizelimit en activant dans lrsquoongletInformations avanceacutees la pagination des reacutesultats Dans ce mode PHP va requecircter lrsquoannuaire autant de fois queneacutecessaire et par tranche de X reacutesultats jusqursquoagrave ce que lrsquoensemble des enregistrements soient renvoyeacutes

Lrsquooption Taille des pages permet drsquoajuster cette valeur de mecircme que nombre maximum de reacutesultats deacutefinit la limitedrsquoenregistrement agrave ne pas deacutepasser lors drsquoune requecircte LDAP (afin par exemple drsquoeacuteviter une erreur indiquant que PHPdemande plus de meacutemoire que ce qui lui est alloueacute)

218 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Sur un annuaire OpenLDAP la limite par deacutefaut est agrave 500 enregistrements sur un Active Directory elle est de1000

Sur un Active directory il est possible de modifier la valeur du MaxPageSize gracircce aux commandes suivantes (attentioncette modification est globale agrave tout lrsquoannuaire)

Reacuteplicats

Si un annuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas accessible les utilisateurs ne pourront plus se connecter agrave GLPI

Afin drsquoeacuteviter cette situation des reacuteplicats peuvent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes ils partagent la mecircme configuration que le serveurqursquoils reacutepliquent mais sont disponibles agrave une adresse diffeacuterente

Lrsquoutilisation des reacuteplicats se fait uniquement dans le cas drsquoune perte de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire maicirctre Lrsquoajout dereacuteplicats se fait dans la fiche drsquoun annuaire en renseignant un nom qui sera afficheacute dans GLPI ainsi qursquoun nomdrsquohocircte et un port Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires reacutepliqueacutes

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

Les annuaires LDAP ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

Intituleacutes

Certaines listes de seacutelections deacuteroulantes sont parameacutetrables dans GLPI mdash lieux

32 Modules 219

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash statuts de mateacuterielsmdash cateacutegories de ticketsmdash noms des logicielsmdash noms des constructeursmdash

En somme tout ce qui deacutepend drsquoune nomenclature propre agrave un contexte particulier doit ecirctre parameacutetreacute Si certains deces intituleacutes sont fournis avec une liste par deacutefaut la plupart des intituleacutes doivent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes dans lrsquoapplication

Par deacutefaut les intituleacutes ne peuvent ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute doit ecirctre activeacutee et permetalors de traduire lrsquoensemble des champs des intituleacutes

Les intituleacutes sont soit une liste de valeurs agrave plat (simple liste de valeurs) soit une liste arborescente (chaque eacuteleacutementpeut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements)

La premiegravere eacutetape est de seacutelectionner la liste agrave modifier Ensuite on peut ajouter des eacuteleacutements agrave la liste les modifier etles supprimer

Agrave chaque intituleacute est associeacute un commentaire Celui-ci est visible depuis les formulaires de GLPI Il apparaicirct au survolde lrsquoicocircne Aide associeacutee agrave la liste deacuteroulante

Il est possible de visualiser tous les types drsquointituleacutes existants en utilisant voir tous

Cette liste peut varier suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil Les intituleacutes avec fond plus fonceacute sont des intituleacutesglobaux alors que les autres peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutes par entiteacute

220 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuteneacuteral

Lieux

La liste des lieux est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements (Lieu 1 gt Sous-lieu 1 gtSous-sous-lieu 1) Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun lieu on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant ce lieu (code du bacirctiment de la piegravecelongitude latitude altitude) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant le lieu pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le lieu peut ecirctrevisible des sous entiteacutes

Lieux

Liste les sous-lieux existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Eleacutements

Liste tous les eacuteleacutements affecteacutes agrave ce lieu Vous pouvez choisir de nrsquoafficher qursquoun type drsquoeacuteleacutement (ordinateur utilisa-teur prise reacuteseau logiciel )

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

32 Modules 221

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

Prise reacuteseau

[image](docsimagepriseReseaupng)

Liste les prises reacuteseau affecteacutees agrave ce lieu et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquouneprise sur un port reacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants)apparaissent

Lrsquoajout peut ecirctre unique via la partie haute ou multiple via la partie basse Pour lrsquoajout multiple vous pouvez preacutefixerle numeacutero de la prise comme indiqueacute dans la copie drsquoeacutecran

Autre exemple considerant le preacutefixe bru 9 et 11 les bornes de la numeacuterotation et srv le suffixe les prises reacuteseaucreacuteeacutees seront nommeacutees bru09srv bru10srv et bru11srv

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Statuts

La liste des statuts est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee parentiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun statut on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant la visibiliteacute de ce statut ainsi quelrsquoinformation preacutecisant le statut pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le statut peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Statuts des eacuteleacutements

Liste les sous-statuts existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

222 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Fabricants

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Listes noires

La liste des Listes noires est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle comprend la valeur que vous voulez mettre en liste noire ainsi que sur quel type lrsquoappliquer (IP MAC numeacutero deseacuterie UUID ou courriel) Les listes noires sont utiliseacutees pour les imports automatique via un agent drsquoinventaire ou parle collecteur de courriels

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 223

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Contenu de courriel interdit

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Elle permet au collecteur de courriels de ne pas importer un courriel contenu le texte deacutefini Cela peut permettre entreautre de lutter contre le spam dans le cas de lrsquoautorisation de creacuteation de ticket pour les courriels anonymes

Assistance

Cateacutegories de ticket

La liste des cateacutegories de ticket est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de ticket on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant cette cateacutego-rie (responsable et groupe techniques pour lrsquoaffectation automatique des tickets (voir [configuration de lrsquoen-titeacute](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)) la cateacutegorie par deacutefaut de la base de connaissance lorsque lrsquoon sou-haite ajouter une solution drsquoun ticket dans celle-ci la visibiliteacute de cette cateacutegorie suivant lrsquointerface ou suivant lrsquoobjetainsi que les gabarits affecteacutees agrave cette cateacutegorie) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes En cas de choix drsquoun gabarit celui-ci sera affecteacute au choix de lacateacutegorie donc surchargera celle qui aurait u ecirctre deacutefinie dans lrsquoentiteacute ou via regravegle meacutetier

Un lien avec les cateacutegories de la base de connaissances est possible Si une cateacutegorie est choisie le clic sur lrsquoaide de lacateacutegorie du ticket dans un ticket amegravene directement agrave tous les articles de la base de connaissance de cette cateacutegorie

Cateacutegories de tickets

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

224 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Cateacutegories de tacircches

La liste des cateacutegories de tacircches est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

La fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de tacircche indique son nom ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Cateacutegories de tacircches

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Types de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Sources des demandes

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle preacutecise si cette source source doit ecirctre deacutefini par deacutefaut pour les tickets etou les collecteurs

32 Modules 225

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Gabarits de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Elle permet de preacutedeacutefinir le contenu ainsi que le type drsquoune solution et peut ecirctre visible ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Note Les gabarits de solution ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Statuts de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les statuts appliqueacutes agrave un projet ainsi que lrdquo(eacutetat de celui-ci

Types de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Types de tacircches de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types de tacircches appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Les onglets communs

226 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Calendrier

Les calendriers utiliseacutes au sein de GLPI sont parameacutetrables par entiteacute Ils sont caracteacuteriseacutes par des peacuteriodes drsquoouvertureainsi que des peacuteriodes de fermeture

Ces calendriers sont utiliseacutes dans les SLA (voir Configurer les SLAs) et la [configuration des enti-teacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)

Calendrier

Plages horaires

Correspond aux plages horaires drsquoouverture de lrsquoentiteacute Vous pouvez en ajouter autant que neacutecessaire par jour tant queces plages ne se chevauchent pas

Peacuteriode de fermeture

Liste les peacuteriodes de fermeture affecteacutees agrave ce calendrier et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle voir lca configurationdes peacuteriodes de fermeture

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 227

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Peacuteriodes de fermeture

La liste des peacuteriodes de fermeture est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Une peacuteriode de fermeture comprend un nom une peacuteriode et si cette fermeture est reacutecurrente ou non

Concernant le champ Reacutecurrent si celui-ci est agrave Oui cela signifie que la peacuteriode indiqueacutee est valable tout le tempsDans ce cas GLPI ne se soucierait pas de lrsquoanneacutee indiqueacutee

Tregraves utile pour indiquer les jours feacuterieacutes revenant chaque anneacutee (Noeumll Victoire de 1945 1er mai ) ou les peacuteriode defermeture de la socieacuteteacute (fermeacutee tous les ans du 1er au 31 aoucirct) et surtout cela eacutevite de ressaisir chaque anneacutee les mecircmesdates

Intituleacutes Internet

Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plusieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

Un eacutequipement se connecte au reacuteseau au travers de ports reacuteseaux

Agrave un port reacuteseau on associe un ou plusieurs Noms reacuteseau(voir ci-dessous)

Un Nom reacuteseau peut appartenir agrave un Domaine Internet Il peut contenir une ou plusieurs adresses IP (voir ci-dessous)et il peut avoir plusieurs alias

Une adresse IP appartient agrave un reacuteseau IP (voir ci-dessous)

Au niveau protocole IP les reacuteseaux sont indiffeacuteremment en IPv4 et en IPv6

Note GLPI gegravere indiffeacuteremment IPv4 et IPv6 La seule distinction provient du format des adresses et des masques

2128513766 est une adresse IPv4 alors que 2a00 1450 4007 803 1012 est en IPv6

GLPI considegravere IPv4 comme un sous-ensemble drsquoIPv6 les traitements sont les mecircmes

GLPI utilise deux repreacutesentations pour les adresses IP (IPv6 et IPv4) mdash La repreacutesentation binaire lui permet de faire lrsquoanalyse des relations entre reacuteseaux adresses et masques Elle est

inaccessible agrave lrsquoutilisateurmdash La repreacutesentation textuelle est celle utiliseacutee pour lrsquoaffichage et la saisie des donneacutees

Les adresses et les masques IPv4 sont repreacutesenteacutes par leur forme classique (ie 2128513766 2552552550) La repreacutesentation des adresses IPv6 est celle canonique (ie 2001 db8 0 85a3 ac1f 8001 plutocirct que 2001 0db8 0000 85a3 0000 0000 ac1f 8001) Lesmasques IPv6 sont repreacutesenteacutes sous la forme du preacutefixe de sous reacuteseau (ie nombre de bits agrave 1 dans lemasque)

Reacuteseaux IP

Les Reacuteseaux IP permettent de deacutefinir la topologie des reacuteseaux

Ils regroupent un ensemble drsquoadresses IP regroupeacutees selon la topologie deacutefinie par le plan drsquoadressage des administra-teurs du reacuteseau

Ils peuvent srsquoemboicircter la hieacuterarchie des reacuteseaux IP deacutepend des adresses et des masques de ces reacuteseauxainsi que de leurs identiteacutes drsquoappartenance Par exemple 192168102552552550 est un sous reacuteseau de192168002552552540)

228 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement La hieacuterarchie est geacutereacutee implicitement il est impossible de la modifier soi-mecircme

Un reacuteseau est composeacute au minimum drsquoune adresse et drsquoun masque Agrave cela peut srsquoajouter une passerelle

Un reacuteseau est dit adressable si il est utiliseacute pour le routage interne des ordinateurs En drsquoautres termes son masquede sous-reacuteseau et sa passerelle sont utiliseacutes par tous les eacutequipements du reacuteseau (si un ou plusieurs ordinateurs nrsquoontpas les mecircmes informations cela peut engendrer des problegravemes de routage ) Geacuteneacuteralement un reacuteseau ayant unepasserelle est adressable car la passerelle est connue de tous les eacutequipements et elle ne peut appartenir qursquoagrave un seulsous-reacuteseau Mais un reacuteseau adressable nrsquoa pas neacutecessairement de passerelle Crsquoest par exemple le cas des reacuteseauxpriveacutees (1921684802552552550 ) ou de la boucle locale (1270002552552550 ou 1128)

Les reacuteseaux sont modifiables depuis les intituleacutes ( Configuration gt Intituleacutes ) Internet gt Reacuteseaux IP

VLAN

Liste les VLAN associeacutes agrave ce reacuteseau IP et permet drsquoen associer un nouveau

Adresses IP

Liste les adresses IP de ce reacuteseau

Vous pouvez classer cette liste par numeacutero drsquoIP en cliant sur le lien Adresses IP ou par type de mateacuteriel en cliquant surle lien Trier par type drsquoeacuteleacutement Dans ce cas vous aurez un tableau par type drsquoeacuteleacutement

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 229

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Domaines Internet

Noms reacuteseau

Liste les noms reacuteseau du domaine

Alias reacuteseau

Liste les alias reacuteseau du domaine

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Reacuteseaux Wifi

A FAIRE

Noms reacuteseau

Un nom reacuteseau correspond agrave lrsquoidentification unique drsquoune machine du point de vue drsquoInternet

Geacuteneacuteralement un eacutequipement est identifieacute par un ou plusieurs noms particuliers sur le reacuteseau Le serveur DNS reacutesoudrace nom en adresse IP Dans le cas ougrave IPv4 et IPv6 sont utiliseacutes ce nom renverra deux adresses IP une en IPv4 etlrsquoautre en IPv6 Crsquoest pourquoi un nom reacuteseau peut avoir plusieurs adresses IP

Un nom reacuteseau est composeacute drsquoun nom qui correspond au label du FQDN (Cf [labelsFQDN](glossaryfqdn_labelhtml)) drsquoun [domaine internet](glossaryfqdnhtml) et de une ou plusieurs adressesIP

230 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Le champs reacuteseau IP apparaicirct afin de retrouver les informations sur les diffeacuterents reacuteseaux IP disponibles Cette in-formation nrsquoest pas conserveacutee dans le nom reacuteseau car il peut avoir plusieurs adresse IP et chacune peut appartenir agraveplusieurs reacuteseaux IP

Note Lors de la saisie drsquoun nom reacuteseau la validiteacute du nom ainsi que celle de chacune des adresses IP est veacuterifieacutee Siun de ces eacuteleacutement nrsquoest pas valide alors il est rejeteacute

Pour ajouter une adresse IP agrave un nom reacuteseau il faut cliquer sur le [image](docsimageaddcriteriapng) devant leschamps de saisie des adresses IP Pour supprimer une adresse IP il suffit drsquoeffacer le contenu du champs de lrsquoIP quelrsquoon souhaite retirer

Alias reacuteseau

Cet onglet liste les alias deacutejagrave preacutesents pour ce reacuteseau et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traditionnellement le nom reacuteseau est celui utiliseacute par le DNS pour la reacutesolution inverse drsquoune adresse IP alors que lesalias correspondent au CNAME du nomFQDN

De la mecircme maniegravere le nom de lrsquoalias doit un label FQDN valide

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Autres

Types

Quel que soit le type la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du type de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

32 Modules 231

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Modegraveles

Quel que soit le modegravele la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

Machines virtuelles

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute (modegraveles ou systegraveme de virtualisation eacutetat des machines virtuelles) la liste est une listede valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele ou du systegraveme de virtualisation ou celui de lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles

Seul lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles peut ecirctre traduit

Rubrique des documents

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle est valable pour toutes lesentiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Rubriques des documents liste des sous-rubriques deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Type de documents

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Lrsquoapplication propose un certain nombre de types par deacutefaut mais il est possible drsquoen ajouter en fournissant lesinformations suivantes

mdash le nom du type de document mdash lrsquoextension par exemple txt ou pdf la deacutetection des documents qursquoil est permis drsquoajouter se base sur cette

information mdash le nom du fichier pour lrsquoicocircne du document deacutesireacute Placez les fichiers drsquoicocircnes dans le reacutepertoire picsicones

sous lrsquoarborescence des fichiers drsquoinstallation de GLPI mdash le type MIME si neacutecessaire mdash lrsquoautorisation de teacuteleacutechargement de ce type de fichier (oui ou non)

Note Le type de document peut ecirctre une expression reacuteguliegravere Cela permet par exemple drsquoautoriser de deacutefinir unensemble de documents NOMFICHIERXXXXYYYY ougrave XXXX est un numeacutero et YYYY la date de lrsquoanneacutee fiscalecourante Dans ce cas preacutecis lrsquoexpression reacuteguliegravere pourrait ecirctre [0-9]+ pour indiquer toute extension composeacuteeexclusivement de nombres

Ces 2 variables peuvent ecirctre traduites

Outils (Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements ce qui facilite la navigation et larecherche Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance outre le nom de celle-ci on trouve lrsquoinformation preacutecisant lacateacutegorie megravere (comme enfant de) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance liste des sous-cateacutegories deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nou-velle

232 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Une cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance peut ecirctre traduite

Systegravemes drsquoexploitation

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Seul les sources de mise agrave jour peuvent ecirctre traduites

Reacuteseaux

Toutes les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat

Les interfaces reacuteseaux firmwares et reacuteseaux sont valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Prises reacuteseaux domaines et VLAN peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutees par entiteacute avec visibiliteacute ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Seules la liste Reacuteseaux peut ecirctre traduite

Prises reacuteseaux Une prise reacuteseau peut ecirctre lieacutee agrave un lieu Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquoune prise sur un portreacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants) apparaissentSi vous souhaitez plusieurs prises pour un mecircme lieu il est preacutefeacuterable drsquoeffectuer la creacuteation via le menu lieude la partie [Geacuteneacuteral](08_Module_Configuration02_Intituleacutes03_Intituleacutes_Geacuteneacuteralrst) du menu des intituleacutes

Logiciel (cateacutegories des logiciels)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Les valeurs sont deacutefinies pour toutesles entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de logiciels liste les sous-cateacutegories et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Une cateacutegorie de logiciels peut ecirctre traduite

Utilisateur

Les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elles peuvent ecirctre traduites

Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur (Critegravere LDAP)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Il est eacutegalement possible drsquoajouter un critegravere LDAP particulier

Uniciteacute des champs (valeurs ignoreacutees pour lrsquouniciteacute)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat qui peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute et applicable ou non au sous-entiteacutes

Il est possible de renseigner pour chaque type drsquoobjet des valeurs qui ne doivent pas ecirctre prises en compte lors de laveacuterification de lrsquouniciteacute drsquoun objet en base

Par exemple ne pas utiliser le numeacutero de seacuterie geacuteneacuterique laquo To Be Filled By OEM raquo pour veacuterifier si un ordinateur existedeacutejagrave dans GLPI

32 Modules 233

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Certains plugins peuvent apporter des intituleacutes suppleacutementaires qui sont parameacutetrables dans le mecircme menu

Authentifications externes

La liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

33 Advanced Configuration

331 Utilisation du cache

Les informations sur lrsquoutilisation du cache sont disponible dans Configuration Geacuteneacuterale Systegraveme)

Nouveau dans la version 92

Modifieacute dans la version 921

Si lrsquoun des systegravemes de cache APCu ou WinCache est preacutesent sur le serveur il sera automatiquement utiliseacute par GLPILe systegraveme se base sur ZendCache

Le cache permet drsquoameacuteliorer les performances sur certaines opeacuterations relativement lourdes telles que le chargementdes traductions ou le calcul des arbres des entiteacutes

On distingue deux caches distincts dans GLPI mdash le cache base de donneacuteesmdash le cache traduction

Cette distinction permet drsquoeacuteviter de stocker le cache des traductions sur un reacuteseau cela pourrait produire un trop grandnombre de requecirctes sur le reacuteseau et avoir au final un impact neacutegatif

A lrsquoinverse le cache de la base de donneacutees devrait ecirctre sur le reacuteseau en cas de frontaux multiples

Afin de vous permettre drsquoaffiner les reacuteglages ou drsquoutiliser un autre systegraveme de cache une solution manuelle estproposeacutee Pour en profiter ajouter dans la table glpi_configs une cleacute cache_db etou cache_trans pour lecontexte core et adapter la valeur en fonction de ce que vous souhaitez

Note Si le but est de deacutesactiver lrsquoun ou lrsquoautre de ces caches creacuteer la cleacute dans la table mais laisser la valeur vide

adapterapcu

adapterredisoptionsserverhost127001

Se reacutefeacuterer agrave la meacutethode ConfiggetCache() et agrave la documentation de ZendCache pour davantage drsquoinformations

Avertissement Si vous installez plusieurs instances de GLPI sur un mecircme serveur le namespace du cache doitecirctre unique par instance ce qui nrsquoeacutetait pas le cas dans GLPI avant la version 924

Si vous avez speacutecifieacute votre propre namespace dans la configuration assurez-vous qursquoil est bien unique sur chaqueinstance

Si votre version de GLPI est anteacuterieure agrave la 924 il faudra ajouter le namespace dans la configuration du cache dechacune de vos instances

234 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

332 OPCache

OPCache stocke des fichiers PHP preacute-compileacutes en meacutemoire et permet ainsi drsquoameacuteliorer les performances La seulechose agrave faire crsquoest de lrsquoinstaller sur votre instance de PHP et de le configurer (la configuration par deacutefaut devraitconvenir agrave la grande majoriteacute des cas)

Toutefois sur des instances qui pourraient ecirctre fortement solliciteacutees il peut ecirctre utile de ne pas inclures les fichiers depolices pour les PDF dans ce cache En effet elles y prennent eacutenormeacutement de place et le gain est relativement minime

Afin drsquoexclure les fichiers de police du cache il suffit de renseigner leur chemin complet dans un fichier deliste noire pour opcache Le chemin de ce fichier est deacutetermineacute par la diective de configuration opcacheblacklist_filename (etcphpdopcache-glpiblacklist par exemple sous Fedora) Si votre ins-tance de GLPI se situe dans le dossier varwww le chemin agrave exclure sera varwwwhtmlglpiglpi-921vendortecnickcomtcpdffonts

Bien entendu lrsquoemplacement du fichier de configuration et le chemin vers les polices est agrave adapter en fonction de votresystegraveme et de votre type drsquoinstallation

Les RPMS fournis pour Fedora (ou par le deacutepocirct Remi) offrent deacutejagrave cette fonctionnaliteacute par deacutefaut vous nrsquoaurez doncrien agrave faire )

34 Glossary

Accepted State of a demand which has been validated by an approver

Accreditation Authorization to perform a set of actions on several entities given by rights attribution process

Actions Grouping in a list of available handling of GLPI objects

Active Directory service Directory service compatible with LDAP directory provided by Microsoft Also knownas AD

Adaptive rule Rule in which at least one action is the result of a regular expression defined in a criteria

Administrative closing Modification of a ticket status to closed (manually or automatically)

Alert threshold Minimal value from which an alert is triggered

Asset Generic term for an element that can be inventoried and managed in GLPI

Automatic action Process for regular actions triggering either internal to GLPI or external (Unix cron Windowsplanned tasks )

Automatic closing GLPI internal process that closes unresolved tickets after a given time

Booking Element that is booked for a given period

Bookmark Stored link to a GLPI page that allows to access the page quickly

Budget Accounting operation that groups all provisional expenses and receipts

Cartridge Consumable used by a printer and specifically managed in GLPI

Case Physical element that contains a computerrsquos components (motherboard processor disk )

Closed (ticket) Status of a ticket whose solution has been approved by the ticket issuer or that has been closeautomatically

Collector Functionality of GLPI that allows to create tickets or followup by importing messages from a mailbox

Connection (network) Link between two network ports

Contact Referent person linked to a supplier

Contract Financial document linked to assets and to suppliers

Controller Device that interfaces with other peripheral device

Criteria Element or pattern used by search engines to select an information or used by rules engines and dictio-naries to perform actions

34 Glossary 235

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Default profile Profile attributed by the application in the absence of particular settings (rules manual attribu-tion )

Depreciation type Characteristic of depreciation which balance can be linear or declining

Dictionary Set of rules that allow to modify GLPI data

Direct connection Physical link between a computer and another asset

Document Element that defines a link andor store a file and that can be associated to other objects of GLPI

Domain Group of assets connected to a network

Dropdown Customizable dropdown list used in GLPI and plugins

Entity Organizational object allowing to partition view and action scope of users

Express renewal The contract is renewed only if both parties agree for its renewal (opposite to tacit renewal)

External link Link displayed on an asset form in GLPI and built dynamically using the asset data

Financial information Data for invoicing and warranty

Followup Exchange between a ticket issuer and the persons in charge of it

FQDN A FQDN (Fully qualified domain name) is a fully qualified domain nameFor example wwwglpi-projectorg forgeglpi-projectorg

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Specifically in GLPI selection of elements of the knowledge base that canbe provided independently for example articles that are made accessible to users having only access to thesimplified interface

Global management Management mode in which a unique inventory object can be connected to several compu-ters

Global note Public note that is also visible from sub-entities

Global right Permission on objects that are not linked to an entity

Global view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is common to all users

Group Grouping of users

Grouping Action of merging similar elements of distinct entities into the parent entity

Hive Entry in Windows registry

ICAL (ICalendar) Calendar importexport format

ID Technical identifier of an element

Identifier Connection name of a user (login)

IMAPPOP IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) and POP (Post Office Protocol) are messaging protocolsallowing to retrieve mail messages

Impact Measure of the effect of an incident problem or change in business process

In progress (attributed) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians

In progress (planned) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians andfor which an action is planned

Incident Unplanned interruption or quality decrease of a service

Intervention Action of a technician to solve an incident

Knowledge base Database allowing to gather analyze store and share knowledge and information inside anorganization

Label FQDN A FQDN is composed of labels separated by dots (ldquordquo)For example wwwglpi-projectorg is composed of labels www glpi-project and orgA computer name is composed of a label and the name of the domain it belongs to for example www name indomain glpi-projectorgIn GLPI labels are compliant with section 21 of RFC 1123

236 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

LDAP directory Directory service using the LDAP PROTOCOL (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Allowsin particular to store user accounts

Local right Permission applicable to a given scope (entity)

Location Name in GLPI allowing geographical localization of an asset

Logs List of events occurring during use of GLPI application

Mail domain Part of a mail adress that is after character

Manufacturer Company producing a hardware

Mount point Directory from which the data contained in a partition can be accessed

Network Name defining the connection type (internet local )

Network port Network interface that can be virtual or physical

Networks Hardwares providing interconnection of computer equipments

New (ticket) Default status of a ticket

Path Address allowing to localize an element in a tree structure

Pattern Character string used for comparison in a criteria

PDU Power Distribution Unit

Pending (Ticket) Status of a ticket which processing is temporarily suspended (does not impact processing time)

Personal note Note visible only by its writer

Personal view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is specific to a user

Planning Scheduling of a task in time scale

Plugin GLPI extension that allows to add functionalities andor to modify application behaviors

Power supply Bloc providing electric current to the components of a computer

Preferences Personal parameters of a user

Priority Scale that identifies the relative importance of a ticket and that results from impact and urgency

Private Element that is visible only by its writer (bookmark note )

Profile Set of rights

Provider Legal structure toward which a contractual relation can be established (purchase contract )

Public Element that is visible by all authorized users of an entity

Public note Note that is visible by all users of the notersquos entity

Purge Permanent deletion of elements placed in the trash bin

Recursivity Property of an object belonging to an entity that makes it visible from sub-entities

Refused State of a demand that has been invalidated

Registered user Person having an accreditation allowing to connect to GLPI

Regular expression Character string (often called pattern) that describes a set of accepted strings according to awell-defined syntax

Replicate (MySQL) MySQL database used by GLPI if main database (master) is not available

Report Document that sums up GLPI data

Requester Person at the origin of an incident ticket or a service request

Restoration Recovery of an element of the trash bin

Right Authorization of a user for a given action

Root entity First entity of GLPI entities tree structure that is always present even if no other entity is defined andthat cannot be deleted

Rule List of criteria that trig a list of actions if criteria are satisfied

Saved search Recording of GLPI search engine state that allows to store and perform again the search

34 Glossary 237

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Service General action of GLPI listed in the events

Simplified interface GLPI user interface that gives access to a reduced set of functionalities and that targets endusers (opposite to standard interface)

SLA SLA (for Service-Level Agreement) is a contract between a service provider and a client that defines therequested quality of service and the responsibilities in case of failure

Solved (ticket) Ticket state when a technical solution was provided for an incident

SSO Unique authentication system (SSO (Single Sign On))

Standard interface GLPI user interface that gives access to all functionalities (opposite to simplified interface)

Statistics Summary of GLPI data linked to tickets

Status State of an asset or of a ticket belonging to its life cycle

Sub-entity Child entity of an entity on a form indicates recursivity status

Subject Title or question of an element of the knowledge base

Supervisor Person in charge of a group of users

Tacit renewal The contract is renewed automaticaly if none of the parties declares its will to break it

Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is a VLAN which tag is transmited in networkframe (see 8021Q)

Task Action corresponding to a technical operation that can be planned

Technician User in charge of tickets processing

Template Reusable model of object containing predefined fieds and allowing easier user entry

Ticket GLPI object representing an incident or a service request

Tier type Category of providers

Transfer Action of moving an object from one entity to another

Trash bin Container of elements deleted by users Similar to the trash bin in a desktop environment it is anintermediate state before purge

Tree Hierarchical organization of data using a tree structure

Unitary management Management mode in which an inventory object can be connected to only one computer

Urgency Criteria defined by the requester that specifies for a ticket the desired resolution speed

User User of an asset that is not registered in GLPI user base

Validation Action of authorizing a ticket processing

Validator Person performing the validation of a ticket

VCard Virtual visit card

Virtual network port A virtual network port is a port which does not correspond to a physical network hardware

VLAN VLAN Virtual Local Network

Volume Storage area attached to a computer

Webcal Exchange format for calendar data

238 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

CHAPITRE 4

Documentation license

This documentation is distributed under the terms of the Creative Commons License Attribution-ShareAlike 30 France(CC BY-SA 30 FR)

For the complete terms of the license please refer to httpscreativecommonsorglicensesby-sa30frlegalcode

You are free to mdash Share mdash copy and redistribute the material in any medium or formatmdash Adapt mdash remix transform and build upon the material for any purpose even commercially

The licensor cannot revoke these freedoms as long as you follow the license terms

Under the following terms mdash Attribution mdash You must give appropriate credit provide a link to the license and indicate if changes were

made You may do so in any reasonable manner but not in any way that suggests the licensor endorses you oryour use

mdash ShareAlike mdash If you remix transform or build upon the material you must distribute your contributions underthe same license as the original

No additional restrictions mdash You may not apply legal terms or technological measures that legally restrict others fromdoing anything the license permits

239

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

240 Chapitre 4 Documentation license

Index

AAccepted 235Accreditation 235Actions 235Active Directory service 235Adaptive rule 235Administrative closing 235Alert threshold 235Asset 235Automatic action 235Automatic closing 235

BBooking 235Bookmark 235Budget 235

CCartridge 235Case 235Closed (ticket) 235Collector 235Connection (network) 235Contact 235Contract 235Controller 235Criteria 235

DDefault profile 236Depreciation type 236Dictionary 236Direct connection 236Document 236Domain 236Dropdown 236

EEntity 236

Express renewal 236External link 236

FFinancial information 236Followup 236FQDN 236Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 236

GGlobal management 236Global note 236Global right 236Global view 236Group 236Grouping 236

HHive 236

IICAL (ICalendar) 236ID 236Identifier 236IMAPPOP 236Impact 236In progress (attributed) (Ticket) 236In progress (planned) (Ticket) 236Incident 236Intervention 236

KKnowledge base 236

LLabel FQDN 236LDAP directory 237Local right 237Location 237

241

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Logs 237

MMail domain 237Manufacturer 237Mount point 237

NNetwork 237Network port 237Networks 237New (ticket) 237

PPath 237Pattern 237PDU 237Pending (Ticket) 237Personal note 237Personal view 237Planning 237Plugin 237Power supply 237Preferences 237Priority 237Private 237Profile 237Provider 237Public 237Public note 237Purge 237

RRecursivity 237Refused 237Registered user 237Regular expression 237Replicate (MySQL) 237Report 237Requester 237Restoration 237Right 237Root entity 237Rule 237

SSaved search 237Service 238Simplified interface 238SLA 238Solved (ticket) 238SSO 238Standard interface 238Statistics 238

Status 238Sub-entity 238Subject 238Supervisor 238

TTacit renewal 238Tagged VLAN 238Task 238Technician 238Template 238Ticket 238Tier type 238Transfer 238Trash bin 238Tree 238

UUnitary management 238Urgency 238User 238

VValidation 238Validator 238VCard 238Virtual network port 238VLAN 238Volume 238

WWebcal 238

242 Index

  • Preface
  • Installation
  • Table of contents
    • First Steps with GLPI
      • General
      • Understanding the interface
      • Manage your password
      • Manage your Preferences
      • Navigate GLPI modules
      • User interfaces
      • View and manage records
      • Search for information in GLPI
      • Saved Searches
        • Modules
          • Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes
          • Asset module
          • Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs
          • Module Gestion
          • Module Outils
          • Module Administration
          • Module Configuration
            • Advanced Configuration
              • Utilisation du cache
              • OPCache
                • Glossary
                  • Documentation license
                  • Index
Page 2: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska

Table des matiegraveres

1 Preface 3

2 Installation 5

3 Table of contents 731 First Steps with GLPI 7

311 General 7312 Understanding the interface 8313 Manage your password 8314 Manage your Preferences 9315 Navigate GLPI modules 11316 User interfaces 12317 View and manage records 14318 Search for information in GLPI 15319 Saved Searches 18

32 Modules 20321 Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes 20322 Asset module 25323 Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs 127324 Module Gestion 128325 Module Outils 190326 Module Administration 211327 Module Configuration 211

33 Advanced Configuration 234331 Utilisation du cache 234332 OPCache 235

34 Glossary 235

4 Documentation license 239

Index 241

i

ii

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement The documentation is being rewritten It is very likely that some parts are outdated that there aredead links etc

Table des matiegraveres 1

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 Table des matiegraveres

CHAPITRE 1

Preface

This documentation covers the installation and use of GLPI (Gestion Libre de Parc Informatique)

Free and open-source solution for IT asset management and helpdesk and more GLPI is a web application designedto manage all of your IT asset management issues from inventory management of hardware components and softwareto the management of user assistance

This guide is intended to give an overview of GLPI for both administrators and users

Each part can be consulted independently even if for reasons of logic we recommend that you read this documentationentirely

3

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

4 Chapitre 1 Preface

CHAPITRE 2

Installation

The GLPI installation documentation is available separately

5

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Chapitre 2 Installation

CHAPITRE 3

Table of contents

31 First Steps with GLPI

Everything you need to know to get started with GLPI

311 General

Choose a web browser

GLPI requires the use of a web browser

Optimal functioning of the application is obtained by using a modern browser compliant with web standards

The following web browsers are supported mdash Edgemdash Firefox (including 2 latests ESR version)mdash Chrome

GLPI also works on mobile it is generally compatible with the mobile versions of the supported browsers

How to connect

Open your browser and go to the GLPI homepage (httpsglpi_address)

Access to the full functionality of the application requires authentication An unauthenticated user can possibly accesscertain functions if GLPI has been configured to allow it

mdash View the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)mdash Open a ticketmdash

Depending on the profile of the authenticated user they may be shown the standard interface or simplified interface

7

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

End your session

To log out click the Logout button in the top right of the screen Once logged out you will be redirected to the loginpage

312 Understanding the interface

Depending on the userrsquos profile some menus and content may differ but the logic of the interface remains the same

The GLPI interface is made up of different areas grouping together the applicationrsquos functionalities according to theirnature

1 The user menu allows you to manage your preferences access help change the current language and discon-nect

2 The main menu allows you to navigate through the different modules

3 The breadcrumb trail allows you to locate the context of use of the main work area

4 The entity selector (in multi-entity mode)

5 The main working area is the privileged space for interaction with the application

6 The search box allows you to perform a global search at any time

313 Manage your password

The change password form can be found in user preferences

You must enter and confirm your password before validation The administrator can disable this feature so the changepassword area does not appear in this case

In the event that the user has forgotten their password the possibility of resetting it is offered to them from the loginpage The link is only present if notifications are enabled

Only users with an e-mail address defined in GLPI and not authenticating via an external source (LDAP mail serveretc) can use this functionality Once the renewal request has been made by entering their e-mail address the userreceives an e-mail providing them with a link allowing them to reset their password

Passwords must follow the defined security policy A real-time check of the entered password is then carried out

8 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

314 Manage your Preferences

User preferences are accessible from the Preferences tab of the user form by clicking on your name at the top rightof the interface from any page

Each authenticated user has the possibility to modify his preferences if they have the Personalize update right in theirprofile

Main Tab

Here the user can modify the usual personal information mdash Surnamemdash First namemdash Email addressmdash Phone numbersmdash Locationmdash Languagemdash

Note Some fields cannot be modified if they come from an LDAP directory

A user can add email addresses and select the default address which will be used for sending notifications

They can also specify some default behaviors of the application such as the selected profile and entity They can alsoturn off notifications for actions they take

Depending on the profiles the experienced user can also choose to exit the normal application mode In debug modeGLPI displays errors all variable values SQL queries etc It is useful to activate this mode in the event of GLPImalfunction A maximum amount of information can therefore be communicated to the developers This mode alsoallows you to have additional information on different objects in a specific tab (notifications etc)

31 First Steps with GLPI 9

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personalization Tab

This tab allows you to modify the general display preferences applied to a given user These parameters take priorityover those defined in the general configuration

Note The Number of results per page value shown here cannot exceed the maximum value set in the general displayoptions

Note that the Remote access key section allows you to regenerate the security key used to access the private flowsoffered by GLPI Currently the ICAL and WEBCAL flows of the planning are protected by this security key which isintegrated into the url

10 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personal View Tab

Lists custom views defined in objects by the user In particular it allows you to delete the personal views defined toreturn to global views

315 Navigate GLPI modules

The various functions of GLPI have been grouped into several modules built around similar contexts of use The topbar of the interface allows you to navigate between these modules

mdash The Assets module provides access to the various inventoried materialsmdash The Assistance module allows you to create and monitor tickets problems and changes as well as see statisticsmdash The Management module allows you to manage contacts suppliers budgets contracts and documentsmdash The Tools module allows you to manage projects notes the knowledge base reservations RSS feeds and view

reportsmdash The Administration module allows you to administer users groups entities profiles rules and dictionaries It

also allows the maintenance of the application (basic backup and restore check if a new version is available)as well as the management of the email queue

mdash The Setup module provides access to the general configuration options of GLPI notifications collectorsautomatic tasks authentication plugins external links SLA management of titles components as well ascontrol of the uniqueness of fields

The menus presented vary according to the authorizations of the logged in user The navigation context is presented tothe user in the breadcrumb trail

Note You will find at the bottom right a button allowing you to quickly return to the top of the page if necessary

There are keyboard shortcuts that allow you to navigate from one module submodule to another Here is the list ofthese shortcuts

mdash 1 =gt Homemdash Assets

mdash o =gt Computersmdash s =gt Software

mdash Assistancemdash t =gt Ticketsmdash a =gt Statisticsmdash p =gt Planning

mdash Managementmdash d =gt Documents

mdash Toolsmdash b =gt Knowledge basemdash r =gt Reservationsmdash e =gt Reports

mdash Administrationmdash u =gt Usersmdash g =gt Groups

mdash Setupmdash n =gt Dropdowns

Note The combination of keys to associate with these shortcuts varies depending on the operating systems andbrowsers used Here are some examples according to the browsers

mdash Mozilla Firefox ChromeSimultaneously press the keys Alt Shift and the desired shortcut

mdash Opera

31 First Steps with GLPI 11

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Simultaneously press the keys Esc Shift and the desired shortcut

In addition since version 92 GLPI offers navigation with approximate search (fuzzy) accessible from the keyboardshortcut Ctrl + Alt + G This will open a modal window allowing you to filter via a search field all the menus ofGLPI (all the levels are present you have for example access to the 3rd level such as the dropdowns or the components)

In this window additional shortcuts are available mdash and in order to navigate through the resultsmdash Enter to change the active glpi page on the selected resultmdash Esc to close the window

316 User interfaces

Note The choice of the default interface as well as the visiblity of different modules can be configured in the profilesor from the userrsquos preferences

Standard Interface

This is the main interface of the application All the modules are available but there are limits depending on the profilesettings

The home page of the standard interface provides a summary view for quick access to active elements (tickets notesplanning contracts etc)

It is divided into 5 views mdash Dashboard

A customizable dashboard

mdash Personal view

12 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Shows the tickets opened rejected to be processed to be approved (for which the logged-in user isthe requestor) or those on which this user has an interaction as a validator or technician (awaitingvalidation in progress to be closed in waiting) This view also offers him current issues his scheduleand available notes

mdash Group view

Offers the same information about tickets and issues as the personal view but using the groups to whichit belongs as a reference Depending on their profile they may or may not have access to the tickets forwhich their groups are requesting

mdash Global view

Offers statistics on tickets and issues according to their status and on contracts according to their expi-ration date It also offers the view of the latest additions of objects in GLPI Depending on the configu-ration used new tickets can also be presented in this tab

mdash RSS feed

Proposes the content of defined RSS feeds RSS feeds are managed from the laquo Tools gt RSS Feeds raquomenu

Note For Personal and Group views only tables with information are displayed

Note Two security messages may be displayed when you log in for the first time after completing the installationprocedure

The first asks you to change the passwords of the accounts created by default in GLPI the second asks you to deletethe directory glpiinstall

As long as you have not performed these operations the messages will remain

Simplified Interface

It is the most restrictive interface of the application and is built for an end-user more than a technician Therefore thenumber of available modules is reduced to a minimum

31 First Steps with GLPI 13

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is intended for users with very limited permissions in the application such as the built-in self-service and helpdeskprofiles

In the default configuration a user can from this interface only create tickets follow the processing of their ticketsmake reservations view the notes or public RSS feeds (or create private notes or feeds) and consult the FrequentlyAsked Questions

The home page offers the number of its tickets according to their status as well as the most popular and recent FAQtopics

317 View and manage records

The display of all the lists of records and of all the details concerning a record always works in the same way in GLPIWhether itrsquos a list of computers phones or tickets the presentation follows the same principle

A list of elements can be obtained in 2 ways mdash From the search engine

From the search engine after determining the criteria and validating the search a list of records isdisplayed By default no search criteria limit the list of recordings offered and the display is limited tothe first x records in the list which is configurable in the preferences

mdash From another list

Some tabs offer a list of related items For example from a list of computers click on the name of acomputer then navigate to the software tab The list of software installed on this computer is displayed

Details concerning a record are displayed in the form of tabs grouping together similar information For a computerthe financial information and the software list are in two separate tabs

Customize the display

The columns displayed from the complete list of the inventory can be configured Click on the button It ispossible to add delete and order the displayed columns

14 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash The global view applies to all profiles having access to a part of the inventory the modification of this partwill therefore be visible by all users

mdash The personal view applies only to the logged-in user and overrides the global view settings This view is onlyavailable if you have the User view right regarding the Search result display

This tab also allows you to reset the display customization of the different lists The user can for eachtype of object return to the default display by deleting this personalization

318 Search for information in GLPI

GLPI has a search engine allowing you to display a set of elements satisfying a certain number of criteria The proposedlists are paginated A navigation bar at the top and bottom of the list is used to define the number of items to displayper page and to navigate between pages

A global search engine (that is one that can use data from objects of different type) is also available

In addition to the list of elements corresponding to the stated criteria these lists offer some additional features mdash Export in different formats (CSV PDF )mdash Massive (Bulk) actionsmdash A marque-pages system to save searches

Perform a basic search

The basic search makes it possible to carry out multiple searches configured and sorted on one of the types of theinventory Depending on the data on which the search is carried out the following operators can be proposed

mdash containsmdash ismdash is notmdash beforemdash after

Searching on dates allows you to specify a specific date (Specify a date) or to define it in relation to the current date(Now + ou - X hour(s) day(s) month or year(s)) It is also possible to specify a search before or after a given date asdefined intervals (Monday Last Saturday Start of month Start of year Start of year etc)

For labels it is possible to search for a given value (is) If the dropdowns can be visible in the sub-entities the choicesunder and not under appear The criteria are added with the + on a gray background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes - Percentage free contains gt 80

Note Once the criteria have been defined the search is launched by pressing the Search button

Perform a multi-criteria search

The multi-criteria search makes it possible to refine the search by extending it to other types of objects by addingglobal search criteria This type of search is obtained by adding criteria with the + on a white background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space attached toa 17-inch monitor and having LibreOffice software installed

31 First Steps with GLPI 15

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory (Mio) contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes gt Percentage free contains gt 80AND multi Monitor gt Size contains 17AND multi Software gt Name contains LibreOffice

Items in Trash

Some items in GLPI can be trashed To view them in order to restore them or delete them permanently click on theicon representing a recycle bin To return to the display of active elements click again on this icon

Perform an advanced search

Here are some examples of search operators

NULLmdash Find the records with such empty field with a date field ltnumber_of_months orgt number_of_monthsmdash Search for materials with a deadline corresponding to the number of monthsmdash Search for computers that are 5 years old Date of purchase contains lt-60

^123 Find the records containing 123 at the start of the field

Avertissement On some systems you have to type ^ the space bar then the first character

^Windows Find records containing Windows 2000 Windows XP but not with Windows

123$ Find the records containing 123 at the end of the field

^123$ Find records containing only the text 123

Two search criteria linked by the operator AND NOT Find records that do not match a criterion (other than)

Entity is laquo Root entity raquo AND NOT Type contains laquo Laptop raquo Search for all computers in the laquo Root entity raquowhich are not laptops

[Year]-[Month]-[Day] (YYYY-MM-DD) Search by date

For security reasons the operator is not usable

Export the result of a search

The export of the search result in SLK or CSV spreadsheet formats or in PDF format can be done in two differentforms

mdash The current page exports only the data displayed on the screen (for example the first 10 results out of 200)mdash All pages exports all of the search results

The SLK format can be used by many spreadsheets Fields that are too long will be truncated when using software thatdoes not fully comply with the standards In this case it is preferable to use the exports in CSV format

If the data exported in CSV format is imported into Microsoft Excel software accented characters may not be displayedcorrectly This software seems to have difficulty with data encoded in UTF-8

16 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Perform massive actions

A massive action system is integrated into the search engine It allows you to make bulk modifications and performactions to all the selected elements Some examples of the available massive actions (Will differ based on the type ofitem)

mdash Put in trashbinmdash Delete permanentlymdash Restoremdash Connect Disconnectmdash Installmdash Updatemdash Add a contractmdash Enable the financial and administrative informationmdash Add to transfer listmdash Synchronize

To use it simply select the elements for which you want to perform an action then click on the Actions button availableat the top and bottom of the list Then once the type of action has been selected options are optionally presented aswell as a validation button

The results of the actions as well as the information messages are presented at the end of the execution of all theactions

Note mdash You will find in the headers of the table (at the top and at the bottom) a checkbox allowing you to select or

unselect all the elements of the listmdash A similar system of actions is available in certain lists present within the objects themselves The operation is

identical to that explained here

Avertissement The number of elements that can be handled simultaneously is limited by the values ofmax_input_vars or suhosinpostmax_vars in your PHP configuration You may therefore get a mes-sage indicating that massive edits are disabled You just need to increase the values of your PHP configuration orreduce the number of items displayed

Quick search

This tool is located at the top right of the GLPI screen It allows searching within elements including but not limitedto

mdash Ticketsmdash Problemsmdash Changesmdash Projectsmdash Computersmdash Monitorsmdash Softwaremdash Network Equipmentmdash Peripheralsmdash Printers

31 First Steps with GLPI 17

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Phonesmdash Contactsmdash Contactsmdash Suppliersmdash Documentsmdash Budgetsmdash Licensesmdash Usersmdash Groups

Note The search is carried out only on the fields displayed by default for each of the elements mentioned above Inessence it is the same as an items seen search on each type of element

319 Saved Searches

GLPI offers a system for saving searches (bookmarks) Once the search is done it is possible to save it from a star-shaped button accessible in the search form

There are two types of saved searches mdash Private searches Usable by all users and they are only accessible by their authormdash Public searches Can only be created by authorized users and are accessible by all users provided they belong

to the configured entitiesSaved searches can be accessed by clicking on the star shaped button in the user menu

18 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From this interface it is possible to mdash Reorder private searches (drag amp drop) - public searches use automatic sortingmdash Select a default search (only one possible per type of object) by clicking on the star iconmdash Access the search results (by simply clicking on it)mdash Access the saved searches management interface by clicking on the wrench icon at the top right

Avertissement Setting a particularly heavy search as the default display can have catastrophic effects on theoverall performance of the application

Display of counters

The GLPI settings are used to define whether the counters should be displayed or not In the case of research itrsquos a bitmore complicated

This is because some searches can take a long time (and resources) to complete In order to limit the impact onperformance the heaviest requests are not counted by default So that the execution time of a saved query can becalculated it must be executed at least once A scheduled task is also offered to calculate execution times regularly(and thus avoid requests that would have become heavy over time)

Administrators can override the automatic count method and have a search always or never be counted This possibilityshould be used sparingly

Configuring alerts

It is possible to configure the sending of ldquoalertsrdquo on a saved search using the GLPI notification system Sending anotification is based on the number of results returned by the search compared with the chosen operator to the enteredvalue

31 First Steps with GLPI 19

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The notification(s) used are displayed for reference from the alerts configuration tab For private research only theuser who created the search can be notified using a template provided by default in this case a single notificationwill be linked

For public searches a specific event must be created as well as a notification that uses it This is only possible fromthe alerts configuration tab

Once the specific notification is created it has to be configured by associating it with a template and by selecting thedesired recipients Note that it is possible to associate several notifications with the same search via the event thatcorresponds to it

Note As long as the notification specific to a public search is not created it will not be possible to add alerts

32 Modules

321 Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes

Les actions

Les diffeacuterentes actions possibles sur lrsquoobjet deacutependent des droits attribueacutes dans votre profil

De mecircme certaines actions dans lrsquoonglet deacutependent des droits du profil (comme les actions de masse)

Ne sont listeacutees ici que les actions principales pouvant ecirctre reacutealiseacutees sur diffeacuterents objets Si une action est speacutecifique agraveun objet elle sera deacutecrite dans la fiche de cet objet

Creacuteation

Le droit de creacuteer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoajout srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Cliquer sur le laquo + raquo situeacute dans le menu horizontal

4 Si lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire en possegravede une gestion de gabarit choisir un gabarit agrave appliquer

5 Compleacuteter les diffeacuterents champs de la fiche vierge

20 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Valider

Une option preacutesente dans les preacutefeacuterences utilisateur (Apregraves la creacuteation aller agrave lrsquoeacuteleacutement creacuteeacute) permet de deacuteterminersi lrsquoutilisateur souhaite apregraves la creacuteation lrsquoaffichage de la fiche nouvellement creacuteeacutee ou une autre fiche vierge pourcreacuteation en seacuterie

Modification

Le droit de modifier un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la modification srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste desobjets

4 2 choix de modification

mdash Modification unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Modifier les champs souhaiteacutes

3 Cliquer sur le bouton Actualiser

mdash Modification en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

3 Choisir le champ agrave modifier

4 Indiquer la nouvelle valeur du champ

5 Cliquer sur le bouton Envoyer

Affichage

Le droit de visualiser un objet deacutepend du droit Lecture deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur Si vous nrsquoavez pas le droitde visualiser un objet le nom de celui-ci nrsquoapparaitra pas dans les diffeacuterents menus de GLPI

Par exempl si vous supprimer le droit de lecture de lrsquoobjet Ordinateur dans votre profil le sous-menu Ordinateurnrsquoapparaitra pas dans le menu Parc mecircme si vous avez le droit de modifier un ordinateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la visualisation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour visualiser un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur via le moteur de recherche situeacute en haut de la liste des objets

4 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

Association drsquoun document

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoassociation agrave un document srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

32 Modules 21

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Documents

3 Seacutelectionner un document ou cliquer sur le bouton Parcourir pour en ajouter un

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un DocumentAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au document

Association drsquoun contrat

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire si celui-ci peut ecirctre lieacute agrave un contrat lrsquoassociation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircmemaniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un contrat agrave un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Contrats

3 Seacutelectionner un contrat

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un ContratAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au contrat

Transfert entre entiteacutes

Avec la notion drsquoentiteacutes vient la possibiliteacute de deacutefinir des profils de transfert pour les mutations drsquoeacuteleacutements entreentiteacutes

Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet notamment de passer drsquoun GLPI mono entiteacute agrave un GLPI multi-entiteacutes en utilisant lestransferts

Comment faire un transfert

1 Utiliser un profil qui a le droit de faire des transferts (Administration gt Profils gt Administration ndashgt Droit leLecture sur Transfeacuterer)

2 Configurer les actions faites par le transfert ([Administration gt Regravegles ndashgt Transfeacute-rer](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst))

3 Srsquoassurer que le profil qui va effectuer le transfert a une visibiliteacute sur lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante et sur lrsquoentiteacute prenante (leplus simple est drsquoutiliser un profil reacutecursif depuis lrsquoentiteacute racine)

4 Se positionner sur lrsquoEntiteacute racine (Voir Tous)

5 Depuis la liste des objets seacutelectionner lrsquoeacuteleacutement agrave transfeacuterer

22 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Choisir Ajouter agrave la liste de transfert et Valider 7 Dans Mode de transfert choisir un profil de configuration du transfert (creacuteeacute en point 2) 8 Seacutelectionner lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle sera transfeacutereacute lrsquoeacuteleacutement 9 Cliquer sur Transfeacuterer

10 Veacuterifier dans la nouvelle entiteacute que le mateacuteriel srsquoy trouve bien

Note Si un eacuteleacutement lieacute nrsquoexiste pas dans la nouvelle entiteacute il sera automatiquement creacuteeacute si le profil de transfertdemande de le conserver

Exemple transfert drsquoun ordinateur avec un fournisseur deacutefini dans les informations financiegraveres Si ce fournisseurnrsquoexiste que dans lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante il sera creacuteeacute dans lrsquoentiteacute prenante Par contre un fournisseur deacutefini dans lrsquoentiteacuteracine en reacutecursif ne sera pas recreacuteeacute

Avertissement Le lieu et le groupe seront agrave adapter pour la nouvelle entiteacute

Suppression

Le droit de supprimer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la suppression srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere 1 Se connecter agrave GLPI 2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur) 3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des

objets Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes

mdash Suppression unitaire 1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton

mdash Suppression en masse 1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

Dans les deux cas de figure il faudra choisir mdash Mettre agrave la corbeille si lrsquoobjet possegravede une corbeille mdash Supprimer deacutefinitivement si lrsquoobjet ne possegravede pas de corbeille

Dans le cas drsquoun objet ne posseacutedant pas de corbeille GLPI demandera une confirmation avant la suppression deacutefinitivede lrsquoobjet dans la base de donneacutees Dans le cas contraire lrsquoobjet sera mis dans la corbeille drsquoougrave il pourra ecirctre restaureacute(sorti de la corbeille)

La gestion des gabarits dans GLPI

Preacutesentation

Pour certains eacuteleacutements de GLPI il est possible de creacuteer de nouveaux eacuteleacutements (ordinateurs par exemple) depuisdes gabarits preacutealablement deacutefinis Un gabarit deacutefinit un masque de creacuteation certaines valeurs peuvent ecirctre deacutefiniesdirectement ou calculeacutees en fonction drsquoun masque (comme un numeacutero drsquoinventaire par exemple)

La gestion des gabarits se reacutealise via lrsquoicocircne situeacutee dans la barre de menu

32 Modules 23

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Eleacutements de lrsquoinventaire

Pour les eacuteleacutements de lrsquoinventaire le gabarit deacutefinit un eacuteleacutement standard en preacute-remplissant certains champs qui serontreacuteutiliseacutes pour la creacuteation drsquoautres eacuteleacutements Cela permet de simplifier lrsquoajout drsquoun grand nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements quasiidentiques

Par example afin de preacuteparer la reacuteception de 20 imprimantes identiques dont seuls les numeacuteros de seacuterie et drsquoinventairechangent

mdash creacuteer un gabarit correspondant agrave ce modegravele drsquoimprimantemdash dans ce gabarit remplir tous les champs invariables (constructeur modegravele etc)mdash creacuteer ensuite les 20 fiches drsquoimprimantes drsquoapregraves ce gabarit

Lors de la saisie de chaque imprimante le numeacutero de seacuterie et le numeacutero drsquoinventaire seront les seuls eacuteleacutements agravecompleacuteter

Le systegraveme drsquoincreacutementation

Un systegraveme de remplissage et drsquoincreacutementation automatique de certains champs (reconnaissables gracircce au ) estdisponible Ces champs (nom numeacutero drsquoinventaire ) sont alors remplis automatiquement agrave la creacuteation si le champcorrespondant dans le gabarit contient une chaicircne de formatage de la forme ltXXXgt

La chaicircne de formatage doit impeacuterativement deacutebuter par le caractegravere lt et se terminer par le caractegravere gt

Au sein de la chaicircne vous pourrez utiliser les caractegraveres suivants mdash X repreacutesente un caractegravere quelconque mdash g recherche du numeacutero parmi tous les champs identiques baseacutes sur le mecircme format mdash emplacement du numeacutero agrave increacutementer (nombre de chiffres eacutegal au nombre de ) mdash Y anneacutee sur 4 chiffres mdash y anneacutee sur 2 chiffres mdash m mois mdash d jour

Par exemple en poursuivant lrsquoexemple citeacute plus haut il est possible drsquoutiliser la fonctionnaliteacute drsquoincreacutementation pourcreacuteer automatiquement les numeacuteros drsquoinventaire

Ceux-ci sont composeacutes par exemple de la forme ANNEE+MOIS+JOUR+code structure (555) + code opeacuteration(1234) + numeacutero agrave increacutementer il suffira de renseigner dans le gabarit pour le champ numeacutero drsquoinventaire la chaicircneltYmd-555-1234-gt

Chaque imprimante agrave sa creacuteation verra son numeacutero drsquoinventaire geacuteneacutereacute automatiquement et increacutementeacute de 1 agrave 20

Gabarits de ticket

Tout comme les objets drsquoinventaire une notion de gabarit existe pour les tickets Un gabarit permet de personnaliserlrsquointerface de deacuteclaration drsquoun ticket en fonction du type de ticket et de la cateacutegorie

Les comportements pouvant ecirctre modifieacutes sont mdash la liste de champs devant ecirctre obligatoires pour lrsquoouverture drsquoun ticket mdash la liste des champs dont la valeur sera preacutedeacutefinie lors de lrsquoaffichage du formulaire mdash la liste des champs qui doivent ecirctre masqueacutes

Note Pour le controcircle des champs obligatoires seuls les champs disponibles dans lrsquointerface de lrsquoutilisateur sontcontrocircleacutes

24 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Donc si un champ est deacutefini comme obligatoire mais qursquoil nrsquoest pas proposeacute dans lrsquointerface il ne geacuteneacuterera pas drsquoerreurA la saisie des champs obligatoires sont afficheacutees les interfaces dans lesquelles ils sont utiliseacutes

Un gabarit est lieacute agrave lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle il a eacuteteacute deacutefini et peut ecirctre visible dans les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis pour les entiteacutes ou les profils Pour les profils ne sont associables que desgabarits de lrsquoentiteacute racine visibles de toutes les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent eacutegalement ecirctre deacutefinis pour chaque cateacutegorie de ticket (un pour chaque type)

A la creacuteation du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est par ordre de prioriteacute 1 Celui deacutefini dans la cateacutegorie deacutefinie pour le type deacutefini2 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour le profil courant de lrsquoutilisateur3 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour lrsquoentiteacute de creacuteation du ticket

Avertissement Dans les 2 derniers cas si le gabarit preacutedeacutefinit un nouveau couple typecateacutegorie le premier casest alors testeacute de nouveau avec ces nouvelles valeurs

Note mdash A la mise agrave jour du ticket le mecircme ordre de prioriteacute est utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer les champs obligatoiresmdash Si un des paramegravetre (entiteacute profil type ou cateacutegorie) est modifieacute lors de la saisie du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est

alors deacutetermineacute une nouvelle fois en fonction des nouvelles valeursmdash Le gabarit sert agrave la creacuteation de tickets reacutecurrents

Les statuts dans GLPI la vue speacutecifique

Cette information est couramment utiliseacutee pour distinguer le mateacuteriel mis au rebut disponible affecteacute etc Il estdonc possible de creacuteer ses propres statuts en rapport avec le systegraveme drsquoinformation

Crsquoest agrave lrsquoadministrateur de GLPI depuis la configuration des intituleacutes de deacutefinir les statuts qui seront utiliseacutes et pourquels types drsquoeacutelements ils le seront Ces statuts peuvent ecirctre arborescents pour faciliter la gestion

Le statut drsquoun eacuteleacutement est modifiable depuis sa fiche ou depuis le systegraveme drsquoactions massives

Un rapport vous propose une synthegravese des statuts par type de mateacuteriel La recherche globale de lrsquoinventaire vouspermet une recherche par statut sur lrsquoensemble des eacuteleacutements

322 Asset module

The GLPI Asset module is used to manage all the assets that are part of your IT infrastructure

Asset management in GLPI

In order to manage hardwares and softwares of an IT infrastructure GLPI allows natively to list all the assets that areused inside the managed organization

However it is possible to automate information pushing from the assets thanks to third-party tools GLPI supports theuse of two existing plugins

mdash The Fusion Inventory plugin transforms GLPI into an inventory server with the Fusion Inventory agents inter-facing directly with the GLPI server

mdash The ocsinventoryng plugin allow to synchronize the GLPI database with the OCS Inventory NG inventorytool the agents installed on the computers interface directly the the OCS Inventory NG server

32 Modules 25

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Available types

Computers

In a computer form the following information is available mdash Operating system

mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Service packmdash Serial numbermdash Product IDmdash

mdash General characteristics mdash Manufacturermdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Management informations mdash Technical managermdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Users mdash Computer users either known by GLPI or not

Other fields are informative such as Network (connexion type) and Update source (where are computer updatescoming from (Windows update yum apt )

It is possible to use templates with computers

Note mdash when GLPI is used with an inventory tool various informations provided by the tool itself are also availablemdash a computer can be a server a desktop computer or a laptop to differentiate them it is possible to use the type

field

The different tabs

Operating systems

The informations on operating systems for a computer are visible in tabs Operating system for a Computer entry

26 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

An operating system is associated with the following elements mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Architecturemdash Service Packmdash Kernelmdash Editionmdash Product IDmdash Serial number

Note The creation and management of the titles for operating systems is located in the menu Configuration gtDrop-downs gt Operating systems

Note A deletion or addition of an operating system is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the operation system informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 27

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

28 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

32 Modules 29

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Volumes

This tab named Volumes and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the volumes attached to a computer

A volume attached to a computer is characterized by mdash namemdash physical partitionmdash mount pointmdash file systemmdash total sizemdash available sizemdash ciphering algorithm and type

It is possible from a Computer entry to add a volume by clicking on button Add a volume

30 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible from a Computer entry to modify an existing volume by clicking on the link under its name

Note Every deletion or addition of a volume is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the volumes informations can be automatically importedand updated

Softwares

This tab named Softwares and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the softwares installed on a computerThese softwares are sorted by their category and are characterized by name version and version status

To install a software first select its name in the drop-down list then its version

It is possible to associate a license to a software on a computer

To associate a license first select the software in the drop-down list then the wanted license

If the license is associated with a software that is already installed on the computer it will be presented in the list ofsoftwares

32 Modules 31

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Otherwise it will be displayed in a separate table

Note mdash the drop-down list enumerates the softwares that are available in the entitymdash licenses management can be found in Assets gt Softwares See Manage softwares

Note It is possible via mass actions to install on a computer a software selected from its license

Note Every deletion or addition of a software or a license is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the softwares informations can be automatically importedand updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 33

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

34 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

32 Modules 35

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

36 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 37

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

38 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 39

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Virtualization

This tab displays the virtualization systems (virtual machines containers jails ) associated to a host

The available information vary from one system to another for a virtual machine for instance it includes namevirtualization system virtualization model state allocated memory number of logical processors as well as thename of the physical machine (the host)

GLPI establishes the link between a host and a virtual machine based on the unique identifier (UUID) In some caseit is possible that the UUID is different inside the physical machine and the virtual machine it is therefore impossibleto make the link automatically

The only way to link manually a virtual machine to a physical machine is to attribute the same UUID to the virtualmachine declared on the host and to the virtual machine inside GLPI

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the virtualization informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Antivirus

This tab named Antivirus and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the antivirus running on a computer

An antivirus is characterized by mdash namemdash activenon activemdash vendormdash update statusmdash antivirus versionmdash signature database versionmdash expiration date

Note Every deletion or addition of an antivirus is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the antivirus informations can be automatically importedand updated

40 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 41

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

42 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 43

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to computers mdash Install a software with a license on a computer From the tab Softwares add a license by choosing the name

of the software followed by the name of the license From the Mass actions of summary table choose Install

Avertissement A software can only be installed if its license has a version in use or a purchase version

Displays

In a display form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the display

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Display management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Display users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Sizemdash Resolutionmdash Port types (VGA DVI HDMI DisplayPort)

44 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Integrated soundmdash Connectivitymdash

Management type

It is possible to manage displays either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one display per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with displays

The different tabs

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 45

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

46 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 47

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

48 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 49

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

50 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 51

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to displays mdash connect a display to a monitor

Softwares

GLPI allows management of softwares and their versions as well as licenses associated or not to software versions

A software is by default associated with an entity

Financial management is done at the level of licenses the financial management at software level is only a model forthe licenses associated with this software

Softwares can be imported automatically using a third-party inventory tool in this case a dictionary can be usedto filter or clean the import data (see [Configure data dictionaries](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrstlaquo The dictionaries are managed from menu entry Administration gt Dictionaries raquo))

Some fields are specific in the software form mdash Update is an information with no processing associated and which tells whether the software is an update of

another softwaremdash Category allows to group softwares in the list of softwares of an asset

52 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Can be associated with a ticket defines whether the software can be seen in the drop-down list laquo Hardware raquoof a ticket

It is recommended to first create the software without a version number in the name then to create the versions andlast to create the licenses

Note In multi-entity mode the list of software can rapidly become long because of double entries (one softwareper entity) A better approach can consist in grouping identical softwares in the same entity (see tab Grouping below)then to make recursive the elements that can be made recursive

It is possible to use templates with softwares

The different tabs

Versions

A version of a software is the element that can be installed on a asset see also Installations tab

The main view lists the number of installations of the version

Specific fields mdash Name the version numbermdash Status in ITIL recommendations it allows to follow the DSL (library storing authorized versions)mdash Operating system the operating system on which this software version runsmdash Installations the number of installations of the versionmdash Comment some comments

Licenses

Installations

The installation of a software on a computer is visualized through a version and can be consulted on a software form(list of computers having at least one version installed) on a version form (computers having this version installed)and finally on a computer form (list of versions of installed softwares sorted by category)

Note mdash Column license is filled only when the license is affected to the concerned computermdash The initial display of different categories depend upon user preferences (see [manage preferences](01-

premiers-pas03_Utiliser_GLPI04_Geacuterer_ses_preacutefeacuterencesrst raquo)

Two options are available on the list of installations of software on a computer Above the list Install allows toinstall manually a version of a software on the computer by selecting first the software and its version if a license isassociated with this software the use version of the license is automatically selected

To Uninstall a version of a software mass actions must be used first select the versions to be uninstalled then selectSuppress definitively If a license is affected to the computer it remains affected but its use version is erased

Following the list of installed versions the list of affected but non installed licenses is displayed It is possible to adda new license to the computer Mass actions allow via the action Install to install a use version of selected licenses

32 Modules 53

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

54 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

32 Modules 55

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

56 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

32 Modules 57

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

58 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Grouping

This section describes how to group software having same names in sub-entities allowing to group softwares of childentities into mother entity

Note This is only available for multi-entities platforms

How to realize a grouping

1 If the software does not exist in mother entity create in this mother entity a software whose name is strictlyidentical to the name of software in child entities

2 Open the form of the software of the mother entity

3 Activate recursivity (sub-entities to Yes at top right) this will make a new tab Grouping appear after tab History

4 Open this tab a list displays softwares having same names in child entities

5 Select appropriate lines and validate grouping

Avertissement This operation cannot be undone

This grouping have the following effects mdash Licenses are attached to the software in mother entity but stay in origin sub-entitiesmdash Versions are merged no more doubles in mother entitymdash Old softwares are moved to the trash

Note When using a third-party inventory tool some extra steps are mandatory mdash Empty trash after grouping otherwise synchronization will restore the old software in case of new versionmdash Associate the same vendor to the new software as the synchronization checks vendor name a new software

would then be created

32 Modules 59

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to softwares mdash Add a version to a softwaremdash [Manage licenses](03_Module_Parc04_LogicielsOnglet_Licencesrst) From menu Assets gt Softwares

click on license name in tab Licenses

Licenses

A software license is a right to use the software Its specific fields include mdash Name commercial naming of the licensemdash Purchase version the version that was boughtmdash Use version the real installed version of the software

Purchase version and use version can be different however the use version must be compliant with the purchaseversion

Version type describes the specifics of the right to use the software OEM type is the only type that is configured bydefault in GLPI Refer to configure types

60 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Number field displays the number of installations that are allowed with this license It can be a user number (floatinglicense) a number of installations (multiple license) an unlimited number of installation (site license) It is possibleto assign the license to one or several corresponding computers for instance if the license is of type OEM

Expire date is the limit date that allows the use of the license After this date a notification can be triggered for alertsto be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Indication This is configurable at entity level in menu Configuration gt Notifications in order to define usedmodels and recipients and in menu Configuration gt Entity to activate or not this functionality define default valueand anticipation of notification sending if needed

Astuce Expired licenses are not counted in the total of available licenses

It is possible to link contracts with licenses refer to [Manage contracts](05_Module_Gestion05_Contratsrstlaquo Contracts are managed via menu Management gt Contracts raquo))

Astuce When activating the accounting information for a license data are initialized from software accountinginformation which act as a model

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Summary raquo Displays a table containing the number of computers using this license

mdash Tab laquo Computers raquo Displays a table listing the computers using this license including in particular computername serial number inventory number location status group and user Mass actions are available if autho-rized for the computers to delete license use on selected computer or to assign another license of the samesoftware to selected computer (action Move)

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 61

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

62 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 63

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

64 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 65

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

mdash Display software license details From menu Assets gt Software click on license name in tab Licensesmdash Remove use of a license by a computer See tab Computers above See also [tab Softwares of a compu-

ter](modulesassetssoftwaresrst)mdash [Associate a document and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsassocier_un_document_a_un_objetrst)mdash [Associate a contract and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_contrat_agrave_un_objetrst)

Network equipments

Network equipment represent the hardware that manages transmits and route network between several other equip-ments (computers printers )

A network equipment can be a switch an Ethernet hub a router a firewall or a WiFi access point

It is possible to use templates with network equipments

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

66 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

32 Modules 67

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

68 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

32 Modules 69

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

70 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

mdash Tab laquo Network names raquo Summary of IP address and IP networks for each network name

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 71

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

72 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 73

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

74 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 75

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

76 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Network equipments do not have specific actions report to common actions

Peripherals

In a peripheral form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the peripheral

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Peripheral management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Peripheral users mdash Users known to GLPI or not

32 Modules 77

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Groups of usersmdash

Management type

It is possible to manage peripherals either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one peripheral per computer while global management make the peripheral avirtual global element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with peripherals

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

78 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

32 Modules 79

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

80 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

32 Modules 81

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

82 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

32 Modules 83

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

84 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was ordered

32 Modules 85

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

86 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

32 Modules 87

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

88 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 89

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Peripherals do not have specific actions report to common actions

Printers

In a printer form several informations are available mdash General characteristics of the printer

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Printer users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Page countermdash Port typesmdash

Management Type

It is possible to manage printers either unitary or globally

90 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Unitary management corresponds to one printer per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with printers

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

32 Modules 91

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

92 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Cartridges

This tab displays the cartridges associated with the selected printer model mdash cartridges in use with add date and use datemdash used cartridges with cartridge model add date use date end of life date printing counter and number of

printed pages since last cartridge change

Note For cartridge adding or removing report to cartridges management

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Modules 93

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

94 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

32 Modules 95

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

96 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 97

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

98 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 99

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

100 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 101

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

102 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Printers do not have specific actions report to common actions

Cartridges

This functionality of Asset module allows to create cartridges models and corresponding cartridges

In a cartridge form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the cartridge

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage sitemdash

The alert threshold is the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

32 Modules 103

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

For a cartridge to be installable on a printer it must be declared as compatible with this printer

Management of shared stock is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Cartridges raquo This tab allows adding as many cartridges as needed by the model It is also possible toadd several cartridges at once

A first table lists the new or unused cartridges the second table lists used cartridges

mdash Tab laquo Printer models raquo This tab allows to declare the printer models that are compatible with the cartridge

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

104 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 105

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

106 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 107

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

108 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

mdash [Add a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsCreacuteer_un_nouvel_objetrst)mdash [See a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsVisualiser_un_objetrst)mdash [Modify a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsModifier_un_objetrst)mdash [Delete a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsSupprimer_un_objetrst)mdash Add new cartridges to a model See tab Cartridges abovemdash Add a printer model for the cartridge model See tab Printer model abovemdash [Associate a document with a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_document_agrave_un_objetrst)mdash [Transfer a cartridge to another entity](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsTransfeacuterer_un_objetrst)

Consumables

In a consumable form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the consumable

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Consumable management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage locationmdash

The alert threshold corresponds to the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Changing the state of a consumable from new to used requires to set involved user or group

Management of shared stocks is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

Consumables

This tab allows to add as many consumables as needed It is also possible to add several consumable in one shot

A first table lists unused consumables a second table lists used consumables together with the name of the group orthe person to which it has been allocated

The mass actions of this tab allows to allocate consumables (action Give)

32 Modules 109

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

110 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 111

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

112 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 113

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to consumables mdash Add new consumables to a model mdash List allocated consumables

Right icon allows to have a summary of allocated consumables

Phones

In a phone form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the phone

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Phone management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Phone users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Power supplymdash Firmwaremdash

Management type

It is possible to manage phones either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one phone per computer while global management make the phone a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with phones

114 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

32 Modules 115

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

116 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 117

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

118 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and a

32 Modules 119

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

network plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

120 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

32 Modules 121

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

122 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 123

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

124 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

32 Modules 125

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

126 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

Phones do not have specific actions report to common actions

Global search

Menu Asset gt Global allows to perform a global search on default view columns for allowed elements This search islimited to following assets

mdash Computermdash Contactmdash Contractmdash Documentmdash Monitormdash NetworkEquipmentmdash Peripheralmdash Phonemdash Printermdash Softwaremdash SoftwareLicensemdash Ticketmdash Problemmdash Changerdquomdash Usermdash Groupmdash Projectmdash Supplierrdquomdash Budgetmdash Certificatemdash Linemdash Datacentermdash DCRoommdash Enclosuremdash PDUmdash Rackmdash Clustermdash Domain

This search allows for instance to perform a query by status IP or MAC address

Agrave faire Referenced in original doc but not present mdash [Gestion du protocole Internet (IP)](glpiinventory_iphtml) Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plu-

sieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

323 Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs

Le module drsquoassistance permet aux utilisateurs de saisir suivre et traiter des tickets Des plannings (utilisateur ougroupe) et des statistiques sont eacutegalement disponibles

Suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil il est eacutegalement possible de saisir suivre et traiter des problegravemes et deschangements et creacuteer des tickets reacutecurrents (fonctionnaliteacutes agrave nrsquoautoriser que pour un utilisateur de type Technicien)

32 Modules 127

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Afin de mettre en route un service drsquoassistance plusieurs eacutetapes sont neacutecessaires Pour commencer analyser les besoinsde base des utilisateurs et reacutepondre au minimum vital

Une fois que les besoins de base sont satisfaits il est possible de deacutefinir les besoins secondaires et se lancer dans laconfiguration avanceacutee

Le module drsquoassistance de GLPI est conforme au guide de bonnes pratiques ITIL et integravegre donc des notions et nor-malisation de champs Bien que lrsquooutil soit conforme ITIL il nrsquoy aucune obligation pour suivre ces bonnes pratiques chacun est libre drsquoimpleacutementer le service drsquoassistance qui correspond le mieux agrave ses besoins

mdash Mise en route du service drsquoassistancemdash Deacutefinir les acteurs et leurs rocirclesmdash Deacutefinir la matrice de calcul de la prioriteacutemdash Configuration avanceacuteemdash Les matrices de cycle de vie

mdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Regravegles de gestionmdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Ouvrir un ticketmdash Pour aller plus loin

mdash Creacuteer un ticketmdash Geacuterer les problegravemesmdash Geacuterer les changementsmdash Les planningsmdash Les statistiquesmdash Les tickets reacutecurrents

324 Module Gestion

Le module Gestion permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les eacuteleacutements suivants

Geacuterer les licences

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les licences logiciels

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire des licences en lien avec les logiciels deacutejagrave inventorieacutes dans GLPI mdash un suivi des installations de chaque licence sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les licences dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des licences

Note Une licence ne peut pas exister au sein de GLPI sans un logiciel associeacute agrave sa creacuteation

La gestion de licence reste statique un suivi humain est neacutecessaire afin drsquoassurer lrsquoactualisation des informations

128 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Comme enfant de Permet drsquoindiquer si la licence est deacutependante drsquoune autre mdash Version utiliseacutee Crsquoest la version du logiciel qui sera associeacutee agrave la licence mdash Version drsquoachat La version drsquoachat peut diffeacuterer de la version actuellement utiliseacutee il est possible de lrsquoindi-

quer ici mdash Nombre Ici pourra ecirctre indiqueacute le nombre de lien possibles entre la licence et les mateacuteriels dans GLPI mdash Autoriser la surconsommation (Allow Over-Quota) Permet drsquoautoriser ou non le deacutepassement du nombre

de lien maximum configureacute dans le champ Nombre mdash Expiration La date de fin de validiteacute de la licence Champ utile pour configurer les alertes et anticiper le

renouvellement

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Licences

Cet onglet liste toutes les licences consideacutereacutees comme enfant de la licence actuelle

Note Certaines licences peuvent srsquoobtenir par pack ou par groupe de licence (pour un lieu speacutecifique par exemple)il est donc inteacuteressant de les lier

32 Modules 129

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Reacutesumeacute

Cet onglet liste tous les types et les entiteacutes des eacuteleacutements du parc concerneacutes par cette licence

Note Attention au nombre drsquoinstallationlicence disponible deacutefini dans le champ Nombre de la licence

La creacuteation du lien entre un eacuteleacutement du parc et la licence se fait dans lrsquoonglet Logiciels de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste preacuteciseacutement chaque eacuteleacutement relieacute agrave la licence actuelle

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

130 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 131

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

132 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 133

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

134 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Certificats

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un certificat preacutesent dans GLPI agrave une licence

32 Modules 135

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une licencemdash Visualiser une licencemdash Modifier une licencemdash Supprimer une licencemdash Associer un document agrave une licencemdash Transfeacuterer une licence

Geacuterer les budgets

Un budget dans GLPI crsquoest la deacutefinition drsquoun montant sur une peacuteriode donneacutee Les autre eacuteleacutements de GLPI peuventecirctre attacheacutes agrave un budget et ainsi piocher dans ce dernier en indiquant leur valeur

Mateacuterialiser un budget au sein de GLPI ouvre la fonctionnaliteacute de gestion administrative et financiegravere pour tous lesautres eacuteleacutements preacutesents dans lrsquooutil

Il est possible de suivre lrsquoeacutevolution du budget en traccedilant la valeur de chaque eacuteleacutement rattacheacutes

136 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Lier un eacuteleacutement de GLPI avec un budget se passe dans lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Note Lors de la visualisation drsquoun budget dans une sous-entiteacute le total du budget restant nrsquoest pas accessible

Important Ce total est neacutegatif si le total de la valeur des mateacuteriels est plus eacuteleveacutee que la valeur du budget

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Principal

Cet onglet fournit un tableau reacutecapitulant le montant deacutepenseacute sur le budget par type drsquoeacuteleacutements ainsi que le totalrestant

Eleacutements

Cet onglet permet de visualiser les autres eacuteleacutements de GLPI attacheacutes agrave ce budget ainsi que leur valeur

32 Modules 137

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Le lien entre le budget et un eacuteleacutement se fait depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

138 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un budgetmdash Visualiser un budgetmdash Modifier un budget

32 Modules 139

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Supprimer un budgetmdash Associer un document agrave un budgetmdash Transfeacuterer un budget

Geacuterer les certificats

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les certificats

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire de tous les certificats de lrsquoorganisation mdash un suivi des installations de chaque certificat sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les certificats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des certificats

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Fabricant (CA de lrsquoautoriteacute racine) Cette liste deacuteroulante permet de seacutelectionner et ajouter le fabricant ducertificat

mdash Auto-signeacute Permet drsquoindiquer sioui ou non le certificat actuel est auto-signeacute mdash Nom DNS Ici est agrave saisir le preacutefixe du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom -gt

server

140 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Suffixe DNS Ici est agrave saisir le suffixe DNS du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom-gt mycompanycom

mdash Date drsquoexpiration Permet de deacutefinir la fin de validiteacute du certificat Champ utile pour les alertes GLPImdash Commande utiliseacutee Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le certificatmdash Requecircte pour le certificat (CSR) Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le fichier

CSRmdash Certificat Peut ecirctre saisi ici les donneacutees contenues dans le fichier CRT (PEM)

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 141

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

142 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 143

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

144 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 145

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

146 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un certificatmdash Visualiser un certificatmdash Modifier un certificatmdash Supprimer un certificatmdash Associer un document agrave un certificatmdash Transfeacuterer un certificat

Geacuterer les fournisseurs

GLPI integravegre une gestion des fournisseurs celle-ci sert agrave la fois agrave identifier qui a vendu un mateacuteriel (dans la gestion deparc) mais aussi agrave attribuer des tickets agrave cette personne ou socieacuteteacute

Lors de lrsquoachat drsquoun mateacuteriel de marque XX agrave un fournisseur YY il faut traiter deux informations distinctes agrave savoirle fabricant (XX) et le fournisseur (YY)

Un fournisseur se caracteacuterise par un nom un type de tiers (intituleacute) des informations de localisation (adresse codepostal ville pays) et de contact (site web teacuteleacutephone et fax)

Cette gestion agrave pour objectif notamment mdash de reacutefeacuterencer tous les fournisseurs relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation

32 Modules 147

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash drsquooptimiser le contact en cas drsquoincident mdash de permettre drsquoinclure les fournisseurs dans lrsquoAssistance de GLPI

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated Contacts

The Contacts tab is used to show or add linked contacts

Note La distinction est clairement eacutetablie entre le fournisseur qursquoil est possible de lier de maniegravere univoque agrave deseacuteleacutements drsquoinventaire et les contacts qui composent la liste des personnes permettant drsquoentrer en relation avec cefournisseur Pour eacutetablir cette liste il faut donc associer les contacts au fournisseur concerneacute

Exemple

Monsieur Dupont est conseiller de vente dans lrsquoentreprise Acme aupregraves de qui la structure se fournit reacuteguliegraverementCreacuteer un fournisseur nommeacute Acme Creacuteer un contact au nom de Monsieur Dupont Affecter agrave ce contact le typecommercial Puis associer le contact au fournisseur Acme

148 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Eleacutements associeacutes

Lrsquoonglet Eleacutements pour lrsquoobjet fournisseur est speacutecifique Il ne permet que la consultation Lier un eacuteleacutement avec unfournissur se fera depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement (du Parc) concerneacute

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 149

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problegravemes

Dans cet onglet il sera possible de consulter les Problegravemes associeacutes agrave ce fournisseur Crsquoest agrave dire tous les Problegravemessur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacute agrave

150 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changements

Lrsquoonglet permet la consultation de tous les Changements sur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacuteagrave

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 151

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un fournisseurmdash Visualiser un fournisseurmdash Modifier un fournisseurmdash Supprimer un fournisseurmdash Associer un document agrave un fournisseurmdash Transfeacuterer un fournisseur

152 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les contacts

Les utilisateurs au sens de GLPI sont les personnes disposant drsquoun accegraves agrave lrsquoapplication Les personnes exteacuterieuresgeacuteneacuteralement associeacutees agrave des contrats sont stockeacutees sous la forme de contacts

Chaque contact est caracteacuteriseacute par les informations drsquoidentiteacute usuelles ainsi qursquoun titre et des coordonneacutees teacuteleacutepho-niques de messagerie et postales La deacutefinition drsquoune liste de types de contacts permet de classer les contacts selonleur type Lrsquoexportation au format vCard est possible dans la fiche de chaque contact

Note La liste des titres possibles pour un contact est identique agrave celle des utilisateurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Suppliers

The Suppliers tab is used to show or add linked suppliers

32 Modules 153

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

154 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contactmdash Visualiser un contactmdash Modifier un contactmdash Supprimer un contactmdash Associer un document agrave un contactmdash Associer un fournisseur agrave un contactmdash Transfeacuterer un contact

Geacuterer les contrats

Glpi integravegre la gestion des contrats Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet de couvrir tout type de contrat reacutealiseacute tel que les precirctscontrats de maintenance contrat de support etc Cette gestion a pour objectif

mdash de fournir un inventaire de tous les contrats relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation mdash drsquointeacutegrer les contrats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des contrats

32 Modules 155

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Note Il est possible de recevoir des notifications pour preacutevenir drsquoeacuteveacutenements tels que la fin du contrat Dans lecas ou la reconduction du contrat serait expresse il peut ecirctre inteacuteressant drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la date du preacuteavis Pour lescontrats peacuteriodiques il est eacutegalement possible drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la fin de chaque peacuteriode ou preacuteavis de peacuteriode Ceci estconfigurable par entiteacute dans le menu Configuration gt Notifications pour deacutefinir les modegraveles et destinataires utiliseacuteset dans le menu Configuration gt Entiteacute pour activer ou non cette fonctionnaliteacute deacutefinir les valeurs par deacutefaut et uneanticipation de lrsquoenvoi de la notification si besoin

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Type de contrat par deacutefaut aucun type de contrat nrsquoest renseigneacute Il faut au preacutealable les renseigner dans laconfiguration des intituleacutes

mdash Numeacutero cette information nrsquoest pertinente que si le numeacutero de contrat est identique agrave celui utiliseacute au sein desautres services de la socieacuteteacute

mdash Date de deacutebut agrave ne pas confondre avec la date drsquoenregistrement du contrat dans GLPI Tous les calculs depeacuteriodiciteacute sur le contrat sont donc fonction de cette date

mdash Dureacutee initiale du contrat si ce champ et la date de deacutebut sont renseigneacutes la date de fin de contrat apparaitra(en rouge si la date a expireacutee)

mdash Preacuteavis ce champ peut servir au deacuteclenchement des notifications drsquoalerte mdash Numeacutero comptable pour permettre un rapprochement avec le logiciel comptable de la socieacuteteacute mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute du contrat crsquoest la dureacutee agrave laquelle la reconduction du contrat est possible (Exemple Un contrat

drsquoabonnement teacuteleacutephonique drsquoune dureacutee de 24 mois renouvelable au bout de 12 mois) mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute de facturation Crsquoest la dureacutee entre chaque facturemdash Type de reconduction Tacite (le contrat est reconductible automatiquement drsquoune peacuteriode agrave une autre si

aucune des parties ne manifeste sa volonteacute de le rompre) ou Expresse (neacutecessite lrsquoaccord des deux parties pour

156 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

la reconduction du contrat) mdash Nombre max drsquoeacuteleacutements la valeur choisie dans ce champ bloquera ou non lrsquoajout de nouvel eacuteleacutements attacheacutes

agrave ce contrat mdash Heures drsquointervention Les plages horaires drsquointervention correspondent aux horaires drsquointervention couvert

par le contrat Il est possible drsquoy distinguer les samedis et les jours chocircmeacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Coucircts

Cet onglet permet de deacutefinir un coucirct relatif au contrat sur un budget preacutesent dans GLPI- crsquoest-agrave-dire imputer une valeursur le montant total du budget seacutelectionneacute qui sera attribueacute au type drsquoobjet Contrat

Fournisseurs

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs fournisseurs au contrat actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

32 Modules 157

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

158 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 159

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contratmdash Visualiser un contratmdash Modifier un contratmdash Supprimer un contratmdash Associer un document agrave un contratmdash Transfeacuterer un contrat

Geacuterer les documents

Cette section permet drsquoenregistrer des documents eacutelectroniques ou liens web classables selon diverses rubriques

Un document possegravede un nom ainsi qursquoun commentaire et peut ecirctre associeacute agrave une rubrique

Le fichier physique correspondant au document peut ecirctre ajouteacute dans GLPI de plusieurs maniegraveres mdash En parcourant le disque dur local mdash En renseignant un lien web pointant vers un document (une image une page web un PDF ) mdash En preacutecisant un fichier preacutealablement chargeacute par FTP (dans le dossier mon_glpifiles_uploads )mdash Enfin un type MIME peut aussi ecirctre indiqueacute

Note mdash Les types de documents autoriseacutes dans GLPI (selon leur extension) sont deacutefinis dans Configuration gt Intituleacutes

gt Gestion gt Type de documentmdash Les rubriques de documents peuvent ecirctre hieacuterarchiquesmdash Lrsquooption Interdire agrave lrsquoimportation permet drsquoexclure ce document agrave lrsquoimportation via les collecteurs (images

de signatures logos )

160 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Il est possible drsquoassocier drsquoautres documents agrave un document de GLPI crsquoest pourquoi cet objet beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun ongletdu mecircme type

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 161

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un documentmdash Visualiser un documentmdash Modifier un documentmdash Supprimer un documentmdash Associer un document agrave un documentmdash Transfeacuterer un document

Geacuterer les lignes

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de renseigner les lignes teacuteleacutephoniques

Cette gestion a pour objectif mdash drsquoinventorier toutes les lignes de lrsquoorganisation mdash de permettre le suivi drsquoaffectation de chaque ligne mdash permettre la gestion financiegravere des lignes dans GLPI

162 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

32 Modules 163

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

164 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 165

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une lignemdash Visualiser une lignemdash Modifier une lignemdash Supprimer une lignemdash Associer un document agrave une lignemdash Transfeacuterer une ligne

166 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les centres de donneacutees

GLPI permet la gestion des centres de donneacutees et plus preacuteciseacutement la gestion des salles serveurs et des baies informa-tiques qui les composent

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash Un inventaire des centres salles et baies informatiques de lrsquoorganisation mdash tous les autres modules au service des centres salles et baies (notamment le module Parc qui permet une

reacutepreacutesentation graphique deacutetailleacutees des baies) mdash la possibiliteacute drsquoinclure ces objets dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI

Centre de donneacutees

Le centre de donneacutees en lui mecircme est un objet tregraves simpliste dans GLPI Il se mateacuterialise sous la forme drsquoun nom etdrsquoun lieu et permet uniquement de regrouper des salles serveurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Salles serveurs

Cet onglet liste les salles serveurs attacheacutees au centre de donneacutees actuel et permet eacutegalement drsquoen ajouter

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 167

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Salle Serveur

Une salle serveur dans GLPI se mateacuterialise sour forme drsquoun plan scheacutematique Ce plan reacutepreacutesentera lrsquoespace disponibledans la salle de la serveur Cet espace sera utiliseacute pour y deacutefinir et placer les objets Baies de GLPI

La salle serveur est associable agrave un centre de donneacutees et un lieu

Note Le plan sera une grille deacutefinie par un nombre de colonnes et de lignes 1 Baie consomme 1 case

Lrsquoarriegravere plan peut grandement aider agrave la visualisation de la salle notamment si celui ci a eacuteteacute geacuteneacutereacute avec un outiladapteacute agrave la repreacutesentation drsquoespace

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Baies

Cet onglet permet de consulter et drsquoagir sur le plan de la salle serveur Pourront ecirctre ajouteacutees directement sur le planles diffeacuterentes baies informatiques qui composent la salle

Si beaucoup drsquoeacuteleacutements sont preacutesents il est possible de passer sur une vue en mode liste

168 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Analyse drsquoimpact

Cet onglet permet de consulter et de construire le scheacutema drsquoimpact du point de vue de lrsquoobjet

32 Modules 169

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

170 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 171

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

172 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elements

32 Modules 173

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

174 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualiser un centre de donneacuteesmdash Modifier un centre de donneacuteesmdash Supprimer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Associer un document agrave un centre de donneacuteesmdash Transfeacuterer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualier la liste des salles serveurs

Geacuterer les clusters

Un Cluster GLPI est un regroupement de plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc Peut rejoindre un cluster les ordinateurs et lesmateacuteriels reacuteseau

Note Les clusters renseigneacutes dans GLPI sont pris en compte dans lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact TODO link vers la preacutesen-tation de lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact

32 Modules 175

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash UUID Identifiant unique du clustermdash Version Dans le cas drsquoun cluster logiciel ou autre la version peut ecirctre indiqueacuteemdash Source de mise agrave jour Ce champ repreacutesente la maniegravere dont la fiche de lrsquoobjet dans GLPI a eacuteteacute mise agrave jour

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste et pemret lrsquoajout drsquoun ou plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc au sein du cluster

Ports reacuteseau

Cet onglet permet de creacuteer et de lister des interfaces reacuteseau propres au cluster

Les interfaces possibles mdash Port Ethernetmdash Ports Wifimdash Agreacutegation de portmdash Alias de portmdash Connexion par ligne commuteacutee - Dialupmdash Boucle locale

176 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Port Fibre Channel

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 177

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

178 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 179

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un clustermdash Visualiser un clustermdash Modifier un clustermdash Supprimer un clustermdash Associer un document agrave un clustermdash Transfeacuterer un cluster

Geacuterer les domaines

Deux nouveaux objets de GLPI sont rassembleacutes dans cette fonctionnaliteacute les domaines et les enregistrements dedomaines

Geacuterer les domaines et les enregistrements au sein de GLPI permet notamment mdash de construire un inventaire des noms de domaines mdash drsquoinventorier les enregistrements (records) de chaque domaine mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des noms de domaines mdash drsquointeacutegrer les domaines dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash de lier les eacuteleacutements du parc au domaine

Modifieacute dans la version 950mdash inclure les domaines et les enregitrements dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI

Note Lrsquoaccegraves agrave la liste des objets Enregistrements de domaines est accessible depuis la liste des objets Domaines

Objet Domaine

Lrsquoobjet domaine permet de mateacuterialiser un domaine informatique dans son ensemble (son nom sa date drsquoexpirationetc) Lrsquoobjet est associable dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI (tickets problegravemes changements)

180 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Records

Dans cet onglet il est possible de seacutelectionner ou de creacuteer un enregistrement de domaine agrave associer au domaine actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 181

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

182 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 183

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

184 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 185

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

186 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Objet Enregistrement de domaine (Record)

Lrsquoobjet Enregistrement de domaine permet de mateacuterialiser tous les types drsquoenregistrements que lrsquoon peut trouver dansune zone ou un fichier de configuration DNS ( TXT A PTR SOA CNAME etc )

Cet objet doit ecirctre associeacute agrave un objet Domaine vu preacutecedemment

Note Les types drsquoenregistrements ne sont pas limiteacutes agrave ceux creacuteeacutes par deacutefaut ils sont personnalisables depuis lagestion des intituleacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 187

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

188 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changed

32 Modules 189

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Description of the change that was madeThe description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Visualiser un domainemdash Ajouter un domaineun enregistrementmdash Modifier un domaineun enregistrementmdash Supprimer un domaineun enregistrementmdash Associer un document agrave un domaineun enregistrementmdash Transfeacuterer un domainemdash Visualiser les enregistrements de domaines

325 Module Outils

Le module Outils permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les projets les notes les flux RSS la base de connaissance lesreacuteservations ainsi que de geacuteneacuterer des rapports

Geacuterer les projets

La gestion de projets permet de suivre complegravetement lrsquoavancement drsquoun projet au sein de GLPI via la creacuteation detacircche la constitution drsquoune eacutequipe que celui-ci soit lieacute agrave un changement ou non

Un projet dans GLPI crsquoest la possibiliteacute mdash drsquoassocier des tacircches de projet et geacuterer leur avancement mdash drsquoeacutetablir une eacutequipe projet et des eacutequipes de tacircche mdash la possibiliteacute de deacuteclencher des sous projets au sein drsquoun mecircme projet mdash de construire un diagramme de GANTTmdash la possibiliteacute drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban mdash drsquoassocier des coucircts mdash de relier les objets ITIL de GLPI

Le projets peut ecirctre hieacuterarchiseacute un projet peut donc avoir des sous-projets

Les projets disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom codeeacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquounpourcentage drsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

Plusieurs diagrammes de GANTT sont proposeacutes pour chaque projet (voir onglet GANTT)

Dans cette gestion de projet il y a deux objets principaux le projet et la tacircche de projet

190 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Projet

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter une nouvelle tacircche au projet Il liste eacutegalement les tacircches deacutejagrave deacutefinies pour ce projeten indiquant pour chaque tacircche son nom son type son statut le pourcentage effectueacutee les dates de deacutebut et de finplanifieacutees les dureacutees planifieacutee et effective ainsi que le nom de la tacircche parent

Equipe Projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter un membre agrave lrsquoeacutequipe que ce soit un contact un fournisseur un utilisateur ou un groupeIl liste eacutegalement chaque membre de lrsquoeacutequipe projet ainsi que son type respectif

Projet

Cet onglet liste les sous-projets du projet Pour deacutefinir un sous-projet il suffit de remplir le champ laquo comme enfantde raquo drsquoun projet

32 Modules 191

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

GANTT

Un diagramme de GANTT est proposeacute pour chaque projet Un diagramme de GANTT global est eacutegalement proposeacuteincluant les projets deacutefinis comme visible dans ce diagramme

Kanban

Cet onglet met agrave disposition une interface afin drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban dans GLPI

192 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Coucircts

Des coucircts sont associables aux projets auxquels peuvent ecirctre ajouteacute les coucircts des tickets lieacutees aux tacircches du projet

Objets Itil

Crsquoest dans cet onglet qursquoil est possible drsquoassocier au projet actuel les objets itil de GLPI tickets problegravemes etchangements Il est possible de creacuteer ces objets depuis cet onglet eacutegalement

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object and

32 Modules 193

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

the document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

194 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Tacircche de projet

lrsquoobjet tacircche de projet est assez similaire au projet

une tacircche de projet peut ecirctre eacutegalement une sous tacircche de projet

Les tacircches disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom eacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquoun pourcentagedrsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

32 Modules 195

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note La tacircche de projet nrsquoest pas un objet indeacutependant de GLPI Lrsquoaccegraves agrave une tache de projet se fait dans lrsquoongletTacircches de projet du projet concerneacute

Les tacircches peuvent ecirctre lieacutees agrave des tickets permettant de planifier des interventions permettant de mettre en place leprojet Des dureacutees preacutevisionnelles et effectives sont eacutegalement deacutefinies au niveau des tacircches Ces dureacutees ainsi quecelles des tickets sont alors consolideacutees au niveau du projet lui mecircme

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et drsquoajouter les sous-tacircches

Equipe de tacircche

Ici est deacutefinie lrsquoeacutequipe en charge de la tacircche

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

196 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

32 Modules 197

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un projetmdash Visualiser un projetmdash Modifier un projetmdash Supprimer un projetmdash Associer un document agrave un projetmdash Transfeacuterer un projet

Geacuterer les notes personnelles ou publiques

Une note dans GLPI est un simple champ texte et piegravece jointe permettant de transmettre des informations aux utilisa-teurs de la plateforme

Une note est caracteacuteriseacutee par mdash une dureacutee de vie

198 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash un statut mdash la possibiliteacute de la faire apparaicirctre dans le planning mdash les cibles de la note

Les notes saisies apparaissent ensuite sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI ou dans le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes

32 Modules 199

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il est possible de deacuteterminer une date de deacutebut et de fin de publication pour chaque note Si la date de deacutebutnrsquoest pas mentionneacutee la note sera visible immeacutediatement jusqursquoagrave la date de fin Si la date de fin nrsquoest pas mentionneacuteela note sera visible de faccedilon permanente agrave partir de la date de deacutebut

Lrsquoajout drsquoune note au calendrier permet de la faire apparaicirctre sur le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes par la note celui de lrsquoutilisateur pour une note personnelle les plannings de tous les utilisateurs dans le cas drsquoune note publiqueUne note planifieacutee nrsquoest pas supprimeacutee une fois la date expireacutee

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

200 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Cible

Une note est consideacutereacutee comme personnelle par deacutefaut Elle est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoune note devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (note publique) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ouplusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lanote

Une note publique est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les notes publiques

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une notemdash Visualiser une note

32 Modules 201

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Modifier une notemdash Supprimer une notemdash Associer un document agrave une notemdash Rendre une note publique Ajouter une cible agrave la notemdash Publier une note pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee Ajouter une date de deacutebut et une date de fin au niveau de la

visibiliteacute

Geacuterer les rapports

GLPI permet la geacuteneacuteration drsquoun certain nombre de rapports en lien avec les objets preacutesents sur la plateforme mdash Rapport par deacutefaut Ce rapport comptabilise les mateacuteriels preacutesents dans le parc trieacutes par type Pour les ordi-

nateurs un tri est eacutegalement effectueacute par systegraveme drsquoexploitationmdash Par contrat Mateacuteriel sous contrat de maintenance aupregraves drsquoun tiers Il est possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat deacutetailleacute

par type de mateacuteriel et par date drsquoachat La seacutelection multiple est autoriseacutee Pour ajouter un type il suffitde cliquer dans la zone blanche et de choisir le nouveau type Le principe est le mecircme pour ajouter unedate Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet le nom srsquoil est dans la corbeille ou non son entiteacute son lieu les datedrsquoachat et drsquoexpiration de garantie le type de contrat ainsi que les dates de deacutebut et de fin de contrat

mdash Par anneacutee Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacutedent mais listant eacutegalement les mateacuteriel sanscontrat

mdash Informations financiegraveres et administratives du mateacuteriel Reacutecapitulatif des informations financiegraveres pour lesordinateurs les imprimantes les mateacuteriels reacuteseaux les moniteurs les peacuteripheacuteriques et les teacuteleacutephones Ilest possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat pour une peacuteriode donneacutee Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet son nom sonentiteacute sa valeur sa valeur nette comptable son TCO ses dates drsquoachat de mise en service et drsquoexpirationde garantie Un reacutecapitulatif comprenant le total de la valeur et de la valeur nette comptable est poposeacute partype drsquoobjet et pour la totaliteacute des objets

mdash Autres Informations Financiegraveres et administratives Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacute-dent mais mais pour les cartouches les licences et les consommables

mdash Rapport reacuteseau 3 rapports peuvent ecirctre reacutealiseacutes selon le lieu selon le type de mateacuteriel reacuteseau ou selon laprise reacuteseau

mdash Precirct Reacutecapitulatif des reacuteservations en cours agrave venir ou passeacutees pour un utilisateur donneacutemdash Rapport sur les statuts Synthegravese par type de mateacuteriel des diffeacuterents statuts

Note Le nombre de rapport peut ecirctre eacutetoffer en ajoutant un plugin disponible ici httpspluginsglpi-projectorgpluginreports

Geacuterer les reacuteservations

GLPI met agrave disposition un outils de reacuteservation de mateacuteriel outil qui permet de seacutelectionner un ou plusieurs eacuteleacutementsdu parc afin de les reacuteserver sur une plage horaire Pour des reacuteservations reacutepeacutetitives il est possible de mettre en placede la reacutecurrence sur la reacuteservation

202 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Un mateacuteriel nrsquoest pas reacuteservable par deacutefaut Pour rendre un mateacuteriel reacuteservable il faut se rendre dans lrsquoongletReacuteservation de la fiche du mateacuteriel

Un mateacuteriel reacuteserveacute apparaicirctra dans un planning global des reacuteservations

Il est eacutegalement possible de consulter le planning speacutecifique drsquoun mateacuteriel reacuteservable La reacuteservation peut ecirctre creacuteeacuteedepuis ce planning eacutegalement

32 Modules 203

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Reacuteservations

Onglet principal de lrsquooutil Il permet de consulter et de seacutelectionner les mateacuteriels reacuteservables disponibles

Administration

Cet onglet liste tous les objets reacuteservables et non plus ceux disponibles Comme pour les principaux objet de GLPI ilpropose un moteur de recherche avec la possibiliteacute drsquoeffectuer des actions de masse

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une reacuteservationmdash VisualiserModifier les reacuteservationsmdash Supprimer une reacuteservationmdash Rendre un mateacuteriel indisponible

Geacuterer les flux RSS

GLPI permet drsquoinclure des flux RSS dans la page drsquoaccueil de lrsquooutil

Un flux RSS est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun flux RSS devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (flux RSS public) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner uneou plusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes aux profils groupes ou utilisateurs de la plateforme

Note Un flux RSS public est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les flux RSSpublics

204 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Contenu

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter le nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements afficheacutes Crsquoest ce contenu qui est reporteacute en pagedrsquoaccueil

Cibles

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et modifier la liste des cibles pour le flux RSS concerneacute

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 205

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un flux RSSmdash VisualiserModifier un flux RSSmdash Supprimer un flux RSS

Geacuterer la base de connaissances

La base de connaissances de GLPI reacutepond agrave deux objectifs principaux mdash Centraliser des connaissances internes pour les diffeacuterents techniciens mdash Mettre agrave la disposition des utilisateurs des informations leur permettant de reacutesoudre seuls des problegravemes

simples sous forme de FAQ publique

Note Seuls les eacuteleacutements de la FAQ publique sont visibles par les utilisateurs de lrsquointerface simplifieacutee Les eacuteleacutementsqui ne sont pas deacutefinis comme faisant partie de la FAQ publique sont visibles uniquement au sein de la console centralepar des techniciens par exemple

Il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner pour chaque article de la base de connaissances ou de la FAQ une ou plusieurscibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Tantqursquoaucune cible nrsquoa eacuteteacute seacutelectionneacutee pour un article ce dernier est visible uniquement par son reacutedacteur Lrsquoarticle estconsideacutereacute comme laquo non publieacute raquo et apparaicirct dans le tableau laquo Articles non publieacutes raquo de la page drsquoaccueil de la base deconnaissances

Par deacutefaut les articles ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute est activable (voir laconfiguration geacuteneacuterale)

Il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs documents aux articles de la base de connaissances

Note Un article peut ecirctre rendu visible pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee via la deacutefinition de la date de deacutebut et la date defin de visibiliteacute

Avertissement Les eacuteleacutements qui ne doivent pas ecirctre interpreacuteteacutes agrave lrsquoaffichage peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis avec le style Preacute-formateacute (ltpregt en HTML) Des balises comme ltVirtualHostgt sont donc inseacuterable et affichable Par contredes balises au format HTML (ltBALISEgt) peuvent disparaicirctre au moment de lrsquoeacutedition pour avoir une visibiliteacutecomplegravete du texte vous pouvez passer en mode HTML ougrave tous les eacuteleacutements seront visibles Votre navigateur peuteacutegalement modifier dynamiquement le contenu (changement de casse ajout de balises) lors drsquoune eacutedition

Il est possible de creacuteer des cateacutegories et sous-cateacutegories afin drsquoorganiser la navigation (voir Configurer les intituleacutes)

Lrsquoutilisateur peut alors utiliser plusieurs onglets pour recherche et naviguer au sein de la base de connaissances mdash Rechercher Crsquoest lrsquoonglet par deacutefaut Il preacutesente les articles les plus reacutecents les plus populaires et les derniegraveres

modifications Il permet eacutegalement de rechercher au sein de la base de connaissances

206 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Parcourir Cet onglet permet de naviguer au sein de lrsquoarborescence des cateacutegories

mdash Geacuterer Cet onglet nrsquoest accessible qursquoaux administrateurs de la base de connaissances Suivant les droits delrsquoutilisateur il est possible drsquoacceacuteder rapidement agrave ses ou agrave tous les articles non publieacutes (sans cible deacutefinies)ainsi qursquoagrave tous ses articles

Note Le moteur de recherche de la base de connaissances permet drsquoutiliser un certain nombre drsquoopeacuterateurs poureffectuer des recherches complexes + - ~ lt gt rdquo rdquo ()

mdash + Le mot doit ecirctre preacutesent

32 Modules 207

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash - Le mot ne doit pas ecirctre preacutesent mdash Opeacuterateur de troncature agrave positionner en suffixe mdash Une phrase entre guillemets double (laquo ) est rechercheacutee litteacuteralement telle qursquoelle a eacuteteacute saisie mdash lt gt permet de deacutefinir une preacutefeacuterence sur lrsquoordre des eacuteleacutements rechercheacutes mdash () agreacutegateur utile pour lrsquoutilisation de lt et gt

Exemples

- panne imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent au moins un de ces mots

- +panne +imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent ces deux mots

- +courriel thunderbird-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent le mot courriel

mais classe plus haut les lignes qui contiennent aussi thunderbird

- +courriel -outlook-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent courriel mais pas outlook

- +courriel +(gtthunderbird ltoutlook)-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent les mots courriel et thunderbird

ou courriel et outlook (dans nimporte quel ordre)mais classe courriel thunderbird plus haut que courriel outlook

- open-gt Trouve les lignes qui contiennent des mots tels que openoffice openwriter

openbar ou openphp

- suite openoffice-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent exactement la phrase suite openoffice

Les diffeacuterents onglets drsquoun article

Base de connaissances

Cet onglet affiche un tableau concernant lrsquoarticle avec en titre sa cateacutegorie Son ensuite listeacutes son sujet et son contenuainsi que le nom du reacutedacteur des dates de creacuteation et de derniegravere modification le nombre de fois ougrave lrsquoarticle a eacuteteacute luainsi que srsquoil fait partie ou non de la FAQ Si un article nrsquoest pas publieacute (cible non deacutefinie) cette information apparaicircten rouge au-dessus du nombre de vues

Cible

Un article est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun article devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ou plusieurs ciblesLa ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Cet ongletpermet donc drsquoajouter une nouvelle cible tout en listant les cibles deacutejagrave deacutefinies

208 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Editer

Cet onglet permet suivant vos droits de modifier ou supprimer un article

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 209

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Reacutevisions

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter toutes les reacutevisions de chaque article Crsquoest agrave dire que chaque modificationde lrsquoarticle donnera naissance agrave une reacutevision une version anteacuterieure de lrsquoarticle

les reacutevisions sont affichables et peuvent ecirctre restaureacutees

Commentaires

Un article beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun espace commentaires permettant aux utilisateurs de la plateforme drsquoeacutechanger agrave son sujet

210 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un articlemdash Modifier un articlemdash Supprimer un articlemdash Associer un document agrave un articlemdash Modifier la visibiliteacute drsquoun article

326 Module Administration

Le module Administration permet drsquoadministrer les utilisateurs groupes entiteacutes profils regravegles et dictionnaires etoffre des outils de maintenance de lrsquoapplication (sauvegarde et restauration de base veacuterification de nouvelle versiondisponible)

mdash [Geacuterer les utilisateurs](07_Module_Administration02_Utilisateurs01_Utilisateursrst)mdash [Geacuterer les groupes](07_Module_Administration03_Groupesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les entiteacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les regravegles](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst)mdash [Configurer les dictionnaires de donneacutees](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les profils](07_Module_Administration07_Profils01_Profilsrst)mdash [Geacuterer la file drsquoattente drsquoenvoi des courriels](07_Module_Administration08_File_drsquoattente_des_courrielsrst)mdash [Maintenance](07_Module_Administration09_Maintenancerst)mdash [Visualiser les journaux drsquoactiviteacute](07_Module_Administration10_Journauxrst)

327 Module Configuration

Le module Configuration permet drsquoacceacuteder aux options de configuration geacuteneacuterale de GLPI la configuration globalede GLPI les notifications les collecteurs les tacircches automatiques lrsquoauthentification les plugins les critegraveres drsquouniciteacuteet les liens externes protocoleacutes

Les intituleacutes ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

32 Modules 211

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Si des eacuteleacutements que vous voulez supprimer sont utiliseacutes GLPI proposera automatiquement de transfeacuterer lesentreacutees existantes vers un autre eacuteleacutement de la liste ou bien de les remettre agrave zeacutero

mdash [Configurer les composants](08_Module_Configuration03_Composantsrst)mdash [Configurer les notifications](08_Module_Configuration04_Notifications01_Configurer_les_notificationsrst)

Configurer les suivis par courriels creacuteer des modegraveles de notifications deacutefinir lrsquoenvoi de notificationmdash [Configurer les SLAs](08_Module_Configuration05_Sla01_Slarst) Deacutefinir les SLA ainsi que les diffeacute-

rents niveaux drsquoescalademdash [Configurer les paramegravetres centraux](08_Module_Configuration06_Geacuteneacuterale01_Configurer_les_paramegravetres_centrauxrst)mdash [Configurer les controcircles](08_Module_Configuration07_Controlesrst)mdash [Configurer les actions automatiques](08_Module_Configuration08_Actions_automatiquesrst)mdash [Configurer les collecteurs](glpiconfig_mailcollectorhtml) La configuration des collecteurs srsquoeffectue

depuis le menuConfiguration gt Collecteurs

mdash [Ajouter un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les liens externes protocoleacutes](glpiconfig_linkhtml)

Les liens externes se configurent depuis le menu Configuration gt

Liens externesmdash [Ajouter un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les plugins GLPI](glpiconfig_pluginhtml) Les plugins dans GLPI installation configura-

tion activation

Authentification

Crsquoest ici que GLPI gegravere lrsquoauthentification et les informations personnelles des utilisateurs

Lrsquoaccegraves drsquoun utilisateur agrave GLPI est possible apregraves que ces conditions aient eacuteteacute veacuterifieacutees

1 envoi drsquoinformations drsquoauthentification par lrsquoutilisateur

2 existence de lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur

3 authentification de lrsquoutilisateur

4 attribution drsquohabilitations agrave lrsquoutilisateur

GLPI utilise sa propre base interne drsquoutilisateurs Ceux-ci sont soit creacuteeacutes depuis lrsquointerface de lrsquoapplication soit im-porteacutes depuis une ou plusieurs sources externes Selon le type de source lrsquoimport des utilisateurs peut se faire soit enmasse soit au fil de lrsquoeau lors de la tentative de connexion drsquoun utilisateur non encore connu de GLPI

Pour effectuer lrsquoauthentification GLPI fait appel agrave une base de mots de passes interne qui peut ecirctre compleacuteteacutee parune ou plusieurs sources externes drsquoauthentification Lrsquoutilisation de meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externes permet dedeacuteleacuteguer cette fonctionnaliteacute agrave des systegravemes tiers assurant la gestion drsquoidentiteacute Voir [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec lessources drsquoauthentification externes](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification02_Configurationrst) laquo Les para-megravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configura-tion gt Authentification gt Configuration raquo)

Lrsquoattribution des habilitations est deacutecrite dans la section [Attribuer des habilitations agrave un utilisa-teur](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles03_Habilitations_utilisateurrst) laquo GLPI dispose drsquoun moteur drsquoha-bilitations dynamiques qui se base sur des sources externes drsquoauthentification Il est accessible depuis le menuAdministration gt Regravegles gt Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitation agrave un utilisateur raquo)

Note La cineacutematique drsquoauthentification est la suivante

1 lrsquoutilisateur entre son identifiant et son mot de passe

212 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 GLPI veacuterifie si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave enregistreacute dans la base Srsquoil ne lrsquoest pas

1 GLPI essaye les meacutethodes drsquoauthentification les unes apregraves les autres la base interne puis tous les an-nuaires LDAP et enfin les annuaires de messagerie

2 lorsque lrsquoauthentification est reacuteussie lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans la base interne ainsi que sa meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

3 si aucune source nrsquoa pu authentifier lrsquoutilisateur celui-ci est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que sonidentifiant ou mot de passe est incorrect

3 Si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave preacutesent dans la base interne ou une fois son identifiant creacuteeacute

1 GLPI tente drsquoauthentifier lrsquoutilisateur en utilisant la derniegravere meacutethode drsquoauthentification reacuteussie (et unique-ment celle-ci)

2 si lrsquoauthentification a eacutechoueacute lrsquoutilisateur est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que son identifiant oumot de passe est incorrect

4 Le moteur drsquohabilitation est lanceacute avec les informations de lrsquoutilisateur

1 si le moteur a donneacute agrave celui-ci une ou plusieurs habilitations alors lrsquoutilisateur a accegraves agrave GLPI

2 si lrsquoutilisateur ne se voit attribuer aucune habilitation alors bien qursquoeacutetant inscrit dans la base GLPI il nepeut se connecter agrave lrsquoapplication

mdash [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec les sources drsquoauthentification externes](glpiconfig_common_authhtml)Les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes

drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration Authentifica-tion

mdash [Chiffrage des mots de passe dans la base de donneacutees](glpiconfig_passwords_encryptedhtml)Les mots de passe des accegraves exteacuterieurs sont chiffreacutes

mdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldaphtml)Lrsquointerface de GLPI avec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le

menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Annuaire LDAP mdash [Configurer la liaison LDAP pour les utilisateurs et les groupes](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_usersgroupshtml)mdash [Ajouter un nouvel annuaire LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un annuaire](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Importer et synchroniser depuis un annuaire par script](glpiscripts_ldap_mass_synchtml)

Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisation agrave partir drsquoun

annuairemdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imaphtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme source

drsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie mdash [Ajouter un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](glpiconfig_auth_otherhtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de

lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

Sujet parent [Administrer les controcircles drsquoaccegraves](glpiaccess_control_introhtml laquo Cette partie deacutecrit commentadministrer le systegraveme de controcircle drsquoaccegraves qui permet agrave chaque utilisateur drsquoacceacuteder agrave un contexte drsquoutilisation speacuteci-fique raquo)

32 Modules 213

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sources drsquoauthentification externes

Ce menu permet de configurer les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification

Afin de pouvoir utiliser ces sources externes drsquoauthentification il faut au preacutealable activer les extensions correspon-dantes dans la configuration de PHP Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre de sources externes configureacutees danslrsquoapplication

Pour utiliser la capaciteacute de GLPI de creacuteer agrave la voleacutee des utilisateurs preacutesents dans les sources externes drsquoauthentifica-tion il faut lrsquoactiver dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration

Figure 1 Menu de la configuration de lrsquoauthentification [image](docsimageauthConfigpng)

Les annuaires LDAP permettent en outre de refuser la creacuteation des utilisateurs ne posseacutedant pas drsquohabilitations Lasuppression drsquoun utilisateur de lrsquoannuaire peut aussi entraicircner une action telle que la mise agrave la corbeille de lrsquoutilisateurla suppression de ses habilitations ou sa deacutesactivation Crsquoest eacutegalement agrave ce niveau qursquoest parameacutetreacute le fuseau horairede GLPI

Les sources drsquoauthentification externes prises en charges par GLPI sont les suivantes mdash annuaire LDAP voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires

LDAP](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification03_Annuaires_LDAPrst laquo Lrsquointerface de GLPIavec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt AnnuairesLDAP raquo)

mdash serveur de messagerie voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de message-rie](config_auth_imaphtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme sourcedrsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie raquo)

mdash serveur CAS voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash certificat x509 voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash authentification deacuteleacutegueacutee au serveur web voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification ex-terne](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentificationunique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

Annuaires LDAP

GLPI srsquointerface avec un (ou plusieurs) Annuaire LDAP afin drsquoauthentifier les utilisateurs de controcircler leur accegraves dereacutecupeacuterer leurs informations personnelles et drsquoimporter des groupes

Tous les annuaires compatibles LDAP v3 sont supporteacutes par GLPI Crsquoest donc aussi le cas pour lrdquoAnnuaire ActiveDirectory de Microsoft Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires renseigneacutes bien entendu plus le nombreest eacuteleveacute plus la recherche drsquoun nouvel utilisateur agrave authentifier peut ecirctre longue

Il est possible drsquoimporter et de synchroniser les utilisateurs de 2 maniegraveres mdash au fil de lrsquoeau agrave la premiegravere connexion lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans GLPI A chaque login ses informations

personnelles sont synchroniseacutees avec lrsquoannuaire Dans le cas ougrave les collecteurs sont utiliseacutes une adresse demessagerie inconnue sera rechercheacutee dans lrsquoannuaire pour creacuteer lrsquoutilisateur associeacute

mdash en masse soit via lrsquointerface web de GLPI soit en utilisant le script fourni voir [Importer et synchroniserdepuis un annuaire par script](scripts_ldap_mass_synchtml laquo Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisationagrave partir drsquoun annuaire raquo)

Avertissement Si aucune configuration LDAP nrsquoest visible (voir un message drsquoerreur sur cette partie) crsquoest quele module LDAP pour PHP nrsquoest pas installeacute

214 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sous Linux installer le paquet ldap pour PHP (par exemple php5-ldap sur Debian) puis redeacutemarrer le serveurweb

Sous Windows il faut deacutecommenter dans le fichier phpini (fichier preacutesent dans le reacutepertoire apachebin) la ligneextension=php_ldapdll puis redeacutemarrer le serveur web

Le processus drsquoauthentification des utilisateurs est deacutecoupeacute en 3 parties lrsquoauthentification le controcircle drsquoaccegraves et enfinla reacutecupeacuteration des donneacutees personnelles

Authentification LDAP

Lors de la premiegravere connexion de lrsquoutilisateur GLPI va srsquoadresser agrave tous les annuaires jusqursquoagrave trouver celui qui contientlrsquoutilisateur Si lrsquooption permettant drsquoimporter des utilisateurs depuis une source externe est active alors celui-ci estcreacuteeacute et lrsquoidentifiant de la meacutethode de connexion et le serveur LDAP sont stockeacutes en base de donneacutees

Ensuite agrave chaque login lrsquoutilisateur est authentifieacute sur lrsquoannuaire dont lrsquoidentifiant est stockeacute dans GLPI Les autresannuaires ne sont pas utiliseacutes si un utilisateur est deacutesactiveacute dans lrsquoannuaire qursquoil a utiliseacute jusque lagrave pour se connecteril ne peut se connecter avec une autre source drsquoauthentification

Controcircle drsquoaccegraves

Le controcircle drsquoaccegraves est lrsquoattribution drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur Mecircme si un utilisateur est authentifieacute sur un an-nuaire il nrsquoest pas forceacutement habiliteacute agrave se connecter agrave GLPI

Ce meacutecanisme repose sur lrsquoutilisation de regravegles drsquoaffectations drsquohabilitations

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Annuaire LDAP

32 Modules 215

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il existe un modegravele de preacute-configuration Active Directory qui preacute-remplit un certain nombre de champsCelui-ci a eacuteteacute mis en place afin de faciliter la configuration GLPI-AD

Pour le charger cliquer sur le lien Active Directory lors de lrsquoajout drsquoun annuaire Le lien Valeur(s) par deacutefautreacuteinitialise la saisie

mdash serveur par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieurs serveurs LDAP de parameacutetreacutes vous ne pouvez deacutefinir qursquoun seulserveur par deacutefaut Le fait de choisir ce paramegravetre le supprime du serveur sur lequel il eacutetait preacuteceacutedemmentparameacutetreacute

mdash serveur et port repreacutesentant lrsquoadresse de lrsquoannuaire LDAPmdash basedn emplacement de lrsquoannuaire agrave partir duquel les recherches et lectures seront effectueacutees

Note Le basedn doit ecirctre renseigneacute sous la forme du DN complet de lrsquoutilisateur Par exempleCN=glpiadminDC=mondomaine si le compte dans lrsquoannuaire pour GLPI est glpiadmin

mdash DN du compte identifiant de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) mdash Mot de passe du compte mot de passe correspondant (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) Il est possible

drsquoeffacer le mot de passe en cochant la case effacer puis de valider mdash filtre de connexion permet de restreindre la recherche de personnes dans lrsquoannuaire Par exemple si seul un

ensemble restreint de personnes de lrsquoannuaire ont le droit de se connecter agrave GLPI il faut mettre en place unecondition pour restreindre la recherche agrave ces personnes

On peut citer les exemples de filtres suivants mdash un filtre classique LDAP peut ecirctre (objectclass=inetOrgPerson)mdash pour Active Directory utiliser le filtre suivant qui ne renvoie que les utilisa-

teurs non deacutesactiveacutes (car les machines sont aussi consideacutereacutees comme des utili-sateurs par AD) (amp(objectClass=user)(objectCategory=person)((userAccountControl1284011355614803=2)))

Il faut noter que ce filtre est automatiquement rempli lorsque le modegravele de preacute-configurationActive Directory est seacutelectionneacute

mdash Champ de lrsquoidentifiant nom du champ dans lrsquoannuaire LDAP correspondant agrave lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur(par exemple uid sur un annuaire LDAP samaccountname sur un annuaire AD)

mdash Champ de synchronisation nom du champ utiliseacute pour la synchronisation Ce champ doit identifier de ma-niegravere unique lrsquoutilisateur il permet de prendre en compte le cangement de login (par exemple employeeuidsur un LDAP ou objectguid pour un AD)

Avertissement Ne pas oublier drsquoactiver votre annuaire et de le deacutefinir lrsquoannuaire par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieursannuaires

Base DN et utilisateur authentifieacute

Attention le rootdn et le basedn doivent ecirctre eacutecrits sans espaces apregraves les virgules De plus la casse est importante

Exemple de rootdn mdash cn=Admin ou=users dc=mycompany incorrectmdash cn=Adminou=usersdc=mycompany correct

Pour Active Directory si on utilise le userprincipalname au lieu du samaccountname on peut avoir un rootdn sous laforme prenomnomdomainefr

Les paramegravetres agrave entrer sont tregraves simples par exemple mdash hocircte ldapmycompanyfrmdash basedn dc=mycompanydc=fr

216 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Et cela doit suffire si la recherche anonyme est permise Dans le cas contraire et si tous les utilisateurs ne sont paspositionneacutes au sein du mecircme DN il vous faut speacutecifier le DN drsquoun utilisateur autoriseacute et son mot de passe rootdnPassPour Active Directory il est obligatoire de renseigner un compte qui a le droit de srsquoauthentifier sur le domaine

En tentant de se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire gracircce agrave un browser LDAP il est possible de tester ces paramegravetres Il en existebeaucoup mais on peut citer

mdash LdapBrowser Editor (logiciel libre eacutecrit en Java et donc multi-plateforme)mdash ADSIedit pour Active Directory Cet outil se trouve sur les supports toolsoutils suppleacutementaires du CD drsquoins-

tallation de Windows Server

Note Si certains des utilisateurs ont des restrictions de connexion agrave certaines machines configureacutees dans leur profilAD lrsquoerreur suivante est possible lors drsquoune tentative de login sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI Utilisateur non trouveacuteou plusieurs utilisateurs identiques trouveacutes La solution consiste agrave ajouter le serveur heacutebergeant lrsquoAD agrave la liste desPC sur lesquels lrsquoutilisateur peut se connecter

Tester

Permet de tester la configuration deacutefinie dans lrsquoonglet Annuaire LDAP

Le message Test de connexion reacuteussi indique que GLPI a pu se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP avec les informationsrenseigneacutees (hocircte port compte utilisateur)

Il reste deacutesormais agrave importer les utilisateurs Pour cela il faut bien veacuterifier les autres paramegravetres (filtre de connexionchamps de login etc)

Utilisateurs

Permet de configurer comment va ecirctre effectueacute le lien entre les champs de lrsquoannuaire et ceux de GLPI Pour chaquechamp de GLPI (nom preacutenom image ) est associeacute un champ de lrsquoannuaire

Groupes

Permet de configurer la meacutethode de stockage des groupes au niveau de lrsquoannuaire

32 Modules 217

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Informations avanceacutees

Dans le cas ougrave lrsquoheure de la machine heacutebergeant lrsquoannuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas dans le mecircme fuseau horaire que celui deGLPI il faut modifier la variable Fuseau horaire afin drsquoajuster le deacutelai en effet cela peut provoquer des reacutesultatserroneacutes dans la liste des utilisateurs agrave synchroniser

Connexion LDAP seacutecuriseacutee

GLPI gegravere la connexion seacutecuriseacutee agrave un annuaire LDAP agrave travers une connexion SSL (aussi appeleacute LDAPS) Il suffitde rajouter devant le nom de lrsquohocircte (ou son IP) ldaps Ainsi que de changer le port (par deacutefaut 636) Par exemplelrsquoaccegraves en LDAPS en local donnera Hocircte ldaps 127001 Port 636

Limite du nombre drsquoenregistrement retourneacutes (sizelimit)

Il existe souvent deux limites sur le nombre maximum drsquoenregistrements retourneacutes par une requecircte LDAP mdash la limite du client (deacutefinie par exemple sur DebianUbuntu dans etcldapldapconf)mdash la limite imposeacutee par le serveur si la limite deacutefinie par le client est supeacuterieure agrave la limite serveur crsquoest cette

derniegravere qui prend le dessus

Avertissement Si la limite est atteinte lrsquooption de comportement lors de la suppression drsquoun utilisateur delrsquoannuaire ne peut fonctionner De plus GLPI affichera un message drsquoavertissement lors drsquoun import ou drsquounesynchronisation

Avec PHP 54 ou supeacuterieur il est deacutesormais possible de contourner la limitation du sizelimit en activant dans lrsquoongletInformations avanceacutees la pagination des reacutesultats Dans ce mode PHP va requecircter lrsquoannuaire autant de fois queneacutecessaire et par tranche de X reacutesultats jusqursquoagrave ce que lrsquoensemble des enregistrements soient renvoyeacutes

Lrsquooption Taille des pages permet drsquoajuster cette valeur de mecircme que nombre maximum de reacutesultats deacutefinit la limitedrsquoenregistrement agrave ne pas deacutepasser lors drsquoune requecircte LDAP (afin par exemple drsquoeacuteviter une erreur indiquant que PHPdemande plus de meacutemoire que ce qui lui est alloueacute)

218 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Sur un annuaire OpenLDAP la limite par deacutefaut est agrave 500 enregistrements sur un Active Directory elle est de1000

Sur un Active directory il est possible de modifier la valeur du MaxPageSize gracircce aux commandes suivantes (attentioncette modification est globale agrave tout lrsquoannuaire)

Reacuteplicats

Si un annuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas accessible les utilisateurs ne pourront plus se connecter agrave GLPI

Afin drsquoeacuteviter cette situation des reacuteplicats peuvent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes ils partagent la mecircme configuration que le serveurqursquoils reacutepliquent mais sont disponibles agrave une adresse diffeacuterente

Lrsquoutilisation des reacuteplicats se fait uniquement dans le cas drsquoune perte de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire maicirctre Lrsquoajout dereacuteplicats se fait dans la fiche drsquoun annuaire en renseignant un nom qui sera afficheacute dans GLPI ainsi qursquoun nomdrsquohocircte et un port Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires reacutepliqueacutes

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

Les annuaires LDAP ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

Intituleacutes

Certaines listes de seacutelections deacuteroulantes sont parameacutetrables dans GLPI mdash lieux

32 Modules 219

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash statuts de mateacuterielsmdash cateacutegories de ticketsmdash noms des logicielsmdash noms des constructeursmdash

En somme tout ce qui deacutepend drsquoune nomenclature propre agrave un contexte particulier doit ecirctre parameacutetreacute Si certains deces intituleacutes sont fournis avec une liste par deacutefaut la plupart des intituleacutes doivent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes dans lrsquoapplication

Par deacutefaut les intituleacutes ne peuvent ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute doit ecirctre activeacutee et permetalors de traduire lrsquoensemble des champs des intituleacutes

Les intituleacutes sont soit une liste de valeurs agrave plat (simple liste de valeurs) soit une liste arborescente (chaque eacuteleacutementpeut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements)

La premiegravere eacutetape est de seacutelectionner la liste agrave modifier Ensuite on peut ajouter des eacuteleacutements agrave la liste les modifier etles supprimer

Agrave chaque intituleacute est associeacute un commentaire Celui-ci est visible depuis les formulaires de GLPI Il apparaicirct au survolde lrsquoicocircne Aide associeacutee agrave la liste deacuteroulante

Il est possible de visualiser tous les types drsquointituleacutes existants en utilisant voir tous

Cette liste peut varier suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil Les intituleacutes avec fond plus fonceacute sont des intituleacutesglobaux alors que les autres peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutes par entiteacute

220 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuteneacuteral

Lieux

La liste des lieux est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements (Lieu 1 gt Sous-lieu 1 gtSous-sous-lieu 1) Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun lieu on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant ce lieu (code du bacirctiment de la piegravecelongitude latitude altitude) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant le lieu pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le lieu peut ecirctrevisible des sous entiteacutes

Lieux

Liste les sous-lieux existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Eleacutements

Liste tous les eacuteleacutements affecteacutes agrave ce lieu Vous pouvez choisir de nrsquoafficher qursquoun type drsquoeacuteleacutement (ordinateur utilisa-teur prise reacuteseau logiciel )

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

32 Modules 221

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

Prise reacuteseau

[image](docsimagepriseReseaupng)

Liste les prises reacuteseau affecteacutees agrave ce lieu et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquouneprise sur un port reacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants)apparaissent

Lrsquoajout peut ecirctre unique via la partie haute ou multiple via la partie basse Pour lrsquoajout multiple vous pouvez preacutefixerle numeacutero de la prise comme indiqueacute dans la copie drsquoeacutecran

Autre exemple considerant le preacutefixe bru 9 et 11 les bornes de la numeacuterotation et srv le suffixe les prises reacuteseaucreacuteeacutees seront nommeacutees bru09srv bru10srv et bru11srv

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Statuts

La liste des statuts est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee parentiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun statut on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant la visibiliteacute de ce statut ainsi quelrsquoinformation preacutecisant le statut pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le statut peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Statuts des eacuteleacutements

Liste les sous-statuts existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

222 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Fabricants

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Listes noires

La liste des Listes noires est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle comprend la valeur que vous voulez mettre en liste noire ainsi que sur quel type lrsquoappliquer (IP MAC numeacutero deseacuterie UUID ou courriel) Les listes noires sont utiliseacutees pour les imports automatique via un agent drsquoinventaire ou parle collecteur de courriels

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 223

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Contenu de courriel interdit

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Elle permet au collecteur de courriels de ne pas importer un courriel contenu le texte deacutefini Cela peut permettre entreautre de lutter contre le spam dans le cas de lrsquoautorisation de creacuteation de ticket pour les courriels anonymes

Assistance

Cateacutegories de ticket

La liste des cateacutegories de ticket est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de ticket on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant cette cateacutego-rie (responsable et groupe techniques pour lrsquoaffectation automatique des tickets (voir [configuration de lrsquoen-titeacute](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)) la cateacutegorie par deacutefaut de la base de connaissance lorsque lrsquoon sou-haite ajouter une solution drsquoun ticket dans celle-ci la visibiliteacute de cette cateacutegorie suivant lrsquointerface ou suivant lrsquoobjetainsi que les gabarits affecteacutees agrave cette cateacutegorie) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes En cas de choix drsquoun gabarit celui-ci sera affecteacute au choix de lacateacutegorie donc surchargera celle qui aurait u ecirctre deacutefinie dans lrsquoentiteacute ou via regravegle meacutetier

Un lien avec les cateacutegories de la base de connaissances est possible Si une cateacutegorie est choisie le clic sur lrsquoaide de lacateacutegorie du ticket dans un ticket amegravene directement agrave tous les articles de la base de connaissance de cette cateacutegorie

Cateacutegories de tickets

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

224 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Cateacutegories de tacircches

La liste des cateacutegories de tacircches est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

La fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de tacircche indique son nom ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Cateacutegories de tacircches

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Types de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Sources des demandes

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle preacutecise si cette source source doit ecirctre deacutefini par deacutefaut pour les tickets etou les collecteurs

32 Modules 225

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Gabarits de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Elle permet de preacutedeacutefinir le contenu ainsi que le type drsquoune solution et peut ecirctre visible ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Note Les gabarits de solution ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Statuts de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les statuts appliqueacutes agrave un projet ainsi que lrdquo(eacutetat de celui-ci

Types de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Types de tacircches de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types de tacircches appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Les onglets communs

226 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Calendrier

Les calendriers utiliseacutes au sein de GLPI sont parameacutetrables par entiteacute Ils sont caracteacuteriseacutes par des peacuteriodes drsquoouvertureainsi que des peacuteriodes de fermeture

Ces calendriers sont utiliseacutes dans les SLA (voir Configurer les SLAs) et la [configuration des enti-teacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)

Calendrier

Plages horaires

Correspond aux plages horaires drsquoouverture de lrsquoentiteacute Vous pouvez en ajouter autant que neacutecessaire par jour tant queces plages ne se chevauchent pas

Peacuteriode de fermeture

Liste les peacuteriodes de fermeture affecteacutees agrave ce calendrier et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle voir lca configurationdes peacuteriodes de fermeture

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 227

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Peacuteriodes de fermeture

La liste des peacuteriodes de fermeture est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Une peacuteriode de fermeture comprend un nom une peacuteriode et si cette fermeture est reacutecurrente ou non

Concernant le champ Reacutecurrent si celui-ci est agrave Oui cela signifie que la peacuteriode indiqueacutee est valable tout le tempsDans ce cas GLPI ne se soucierait pas de lrsquoanneacutee indiqueacutee

Tregraves utile pour indiquer les jours feacuterieacutes revenant chaque anneacutee (Noeumll Victoire de 1945 1er mai ) ou les peacuteriode defermeture de la socieacuteteacute (fermeacutee tous les ans du 1er au 31 aoucirct) et surtout cela eacutevite de ressaisir chaque anneacutee les mecircmesdates

Intituleacutes Internet

Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plusieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

Un eacutequipement se connecte au reacuteseau au travers de ports reacuteseaux

Agrave un port reacuteseau on associe un ou plusieurs Noms reacuteseau(voir ci-dessous)

Un Nom reacuteseau peut appartenir agrave un Domaine Internet Il peut contenir une ou plusieurs adresses IP (voir ci-dessous)et il peut avoir plusieurs alias

Une adresse IP appartient agrave un reacuteseau IP (voir ci-dessous)

Au niveau protocole IP les reacuteseaux sont indiffeacuteremment en IPv4 et en IPv6

Note GLPI gegravere indiffeacuteremment IPv4 et IPv6 La seule distinction provient du format des adresses et des masques

2128513766 est une adresse IPv4 alors que 2a00 1450 4007 803 1012 est en IPv6

GLPI considegravere IPv4 comme un sous-ensemble drsquoIPv6 les traitements sont les mecircmes

GLPI utilise deux repreacutesentations pour les adresses IP (IPv6 et IPv4) mdash La repreacutesentation binaire lui permet de faire lrsquoanalyse des relations entre reacuteseaux adresses et masques Elle est

inaccessible agrave lrsquoutilisateurmdash La repreacutesentation textuelle est celle utiliseacutee pour lrsquoaffichage et la saisie des donneacutees

Les adresses et les masques IPv4 sont repreacutesenteacutes par leur forme classique (ie 2128513766 2552552550) La repreacutesentation des adresses IPv6 est celle canonique (ie 2001 db8 0 85a3 ac1f 8001 plutocirct que 2001 0db8 0000 85a3 0000 0000 ac1f 8001) Lesmasques IPv6 sont repreacutesenteacutes sous la forme du preacutefixe de sous reacuteseau (ie nombre de bits agrave 1 dans lemasque)

Reacuteseaux IP

Les Reacuteseaux IP permettent de deacutefinir la topologie des reacuteseaux

Ils regroupent un ensemble drsquoadresses IP regroupeacutees selon la topologie deacutefinie par le plan drsquoadressage des administra-teurs du reacuteseau

Ils peuvent srsquoemboicircter la hieacuterarchie des reacuteseaux IP deacutepend des adresses et des masques de ces reacuteseauxainsi que de leurs identiteacutes drsquoappartenance Par exemple 192168102552552550 est un sous reacuteseau de192168002552552540)

228 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement La hieacuterarchie est geacutereacutee implicitement il est impossible de la modifier soi-mecircme

Un reacuteseau est composeacute au minimum drsquoune adresse et drsquoun masque Agrave cela peut srsquoajouter une passerelle

Un reacuteseau est dit adressable si il est utiliseacute pour le routage interne des ordinateurs En drsquoautres termes son masquede sous-reacuteseau et sa passerelle sont utiliseacutes par tous les eacutequipements du reacuteseau (si un ou plusieurs ordinateurs nrsquoontpas les mecircmes informations cela peut engendrer des problegravemes de routage ) Geacuteneacuteralement un reacuteseau ayant unepasserelle est adressable car la passerelle est connue de tous les eacutequipements et elle ne peut appartenir qursquoagrave un seulsous-reacuteseau Mais un reacuteseau adressable nrsquoa pas neacutecessairement de passerelle Crsquoest par exemple le cas des reacuteseauxpriveacutees (1921684802552552550 ) ou de la boucle locale (1270002552552550 ou 1128)

Les reacuteseaux sont modifiables depuis les intituleacutes ( Configuration gt Intituleacutes ) Internet gt Reacuteseaux IP

VLAN

Liste les VLAN associeacutes agrave ce reacuteseau IP et permet drsquoen associer un nouveau

Adresses IP

Liste les adresses IP de ce reacuteseau

Vous pouvez classer cette liste par numeacutero drsquoIP en cliant sur le lien Adresses IP ou par type de mateacuteriel en cliquant surle lien Trier par type drsquoeacuteleacutement Dans ce cas vous aurez un tableau par type drsquoeacuteleacutement

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 229

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Domaines Internet

Noms reacuteseau

Liste les noms reacuteseau du domaine

Alias reacuteseau

Liste les alias reacuteseau du domaine

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Reacuteseaux Wifi

A FAIRE

Noms reacuteseau

Un nom reacuteseau correspond agrave lrsquoidentification unique drsquoune machine du point de vue drsquoInternet

Geacuteneacuteralement un eacutequipement est identifieacute par un ou plusieurs noms particuliers sur le reacuteseau Le serveur DNS reacutesoudrace nom en adresse IP Dans le cas ougrave IPv4 et IPv6 sont utiliseacutes ce nom renverra deux adresses IP une en IPv4 etlrsquoautre en IPv6 Crsquoest pourquoi un nom reacuteseau peut avoir plusieurs adresses IP

Un nom reacuteseau est composeacute drsquoun nom qui correspond au label du FQDN (Cf [labelsFQDN](glossaryfqdn_labelhtml)) drsquoun [domaine internet](glossaryfqdnhtml) et de une ou plusieurs adressesIP

230 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Le champs reacuteseau IP apparaicirct afin de retrouver les informations sur les diffeacuterents reacuteseaux IP disponibles Cette in-formation nrsquoest pas conserveacutee dans le nom reacuteseau car il peut avoir plusieurs adresse IP et chacune peut appartenir agraveplusieurs reacuteseaux IP

Note Lors de la saisie drsquoun nom reacuteseau la validiteacute du nom ainsi que celle de chacune des adresses IP est veacuterifieacutee Siun de ces eacuteleacutement nrsquoest pas valide alors il est rejeteacute

Pour ajouter une adresse IP agrave un nom reacuteseau il faut cliquer sur le [image](docsimageaddcriteriapng) devant leschamps de saisie des adresses IP Pour supprimer une adresse IP il suffit drsquoeffacer le contenu du champs de lrsquoIP quelrsquoon souhaite retirer

Alias reacuteseau

Cet onglet liste les alias deacutejagrave preacutesents pour ce reacuteseau et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traditionnellement le nom reacuteseau est celui utiliseacute par le DNS pour la reacutesolution inverse drsquoune adresse IP alors que lesalias correspondent au CNAME du nomFQDN

De la mecircme maniegravere le nom de lrsquoalias doit un label FQDN valide

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Autres

Types

Quel que soit le type la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du type de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

32 Modules 231

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Modegraveles

Quel que soit le modegravele la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

Machines virtuelles

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute (modegraveles ou systegraveme de virtualisation eacutetat des machines virtuelles) la liste est une listede valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele ou du systegraveme de virtualisation ou celui de lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles

Seul lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles peut ecirctre traduit

Rubrique des documents

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle est valable pour toutes lesentiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Rubriques des documents liste des sous-rubriques deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Type de documents

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Lrsquoapplication propose un certain nombre de types par deacutefaut mais il est possible drsquoen ajouter en fournissant lesinformations suivantes

mdash le nom du type de document mdash lrsquoextension par exemple txt ou pdf la deacutetection des documents qursquoil est permis drsquoajouter se base sur cette

information mdash le nom du fichier pour lrsquoicocircne du document deacutesireacute Placez les fichiers drsquoicocircnes dans le reacutepertoire picsicones

sous lrsquoarborescence des fichiers drsquoinstallation de GLPI mdash le type MIME si neacutecessaire mdash lrsquoautorisation de teacuteleacutechargement de ce type de fichier (oui ou non)

Note Le type de document peut ecirctre une expression reacuteguliegravere Cela permet par exemple drsquoautoriser de deacutefinir unensemble de documents NOMFICHIERXXXXYYYY ougrave XXXX est un numeacutero et YYYY la date de lrsquoanneacutee fiscalecourante Dans ce cas preacutecis lrsquoexpression reacuteguliegravere pourrait ecirctre [0-9]+ pour indiquer toute extension composeacuteeexclusivement de nombres

Ces 2 variables peuvent ecirctre traduites

Outils (Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements ce qui facilite la navigation et larecherche Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance outre le nom de celle-ci on trouve lrsquoinformation preacutecisant lacateacutegorie megravere (comme enfant de) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance liste des sous-cateacutegories deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nou-velle

232 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Une cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance peut ecirctre traduite

Systegravemes drsquoexploitation

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Seul les sources de mise agrave jour peuvent ecirctre traduites

Reacuteseaux

Toutes les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat

Les interfaces reacuteseaux firmwares et reacuteseaux sont valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Prises reacuteseaux domaines et VLAN peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutees par entiteacute avec visibiliteacute ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Seules la liste Reacuteseaux peut ecirctre traduite

Prises reacuteseaux Une prise reacuteseau peut ecirctre lieacutee agrave un lieu Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquoune prise sur un portreacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants) apparaissentSi vous souhaitez plusieurs prises pour un mecircme lieu il est preacutefeacuterable drsquoeffectuer la creacuteation via le menu lieude la partie [Geacuteneacuteral](08_Module_Configuration02_Intituleacutes03_Intituleacutes_Geacuteneacuteralrst) du menu des intituleacutes

Logiciel (cateacutegories des logiciels)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Les valeurs sont deacutefinies pour toutesles entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de logiciels liste les sous-cateacutegories et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Une cateacutegorie de logiciels peut ecirctre traduite

Utilisateur

Les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elles peuvent ecirctre traduites

Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur (Critegravere LDAP)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Il est eacutegalement possible drsquoajouter un critegravere LDAP particulier

Uniciteacute des champs (valeurs ignoreacutees pour lrsquouniciteacute)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat qui peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute et applicable ou non au sous-entiteacutes

Il est possible de renseigner pour chaque type drsquoobjet des valeurs qui ne doivent pas ecirctre prises en compte lors de laveacuterification de lrsquouniciteacute drsquoun objet en base

Par exemple ne pas utiliser le numeacutero de seacuterie geacuteneacuterique laquo To Be Filled By OEM raquo pour veacuterifier si un ordinateur existedeacutejagrave dans GLPI

32 Modules 233

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Certains plugins peuvent apporter des intituleacutes suppleacutementaires qui sont parameacutetrables dans le mecircme menu

Authentifications externes

La liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

33 Advanced Configuration

331 Utilisation du cache

Les informations sur lrsquoutilisation du cache sont disponible dans Configuration Geacuteneacuterale Systegraveme)

Nouveau dans la version 92

Modifieacute dans la version 921

Si lrsquoun des systegravemes de cache APCu ou WinCache est preacutesent sur le serveur il sera automatiquement utiliseacute par GLPILe systegraveme se base sur ZendCache

Le cache permet drsquoameacuteliorer les performances sur certaines opeacuterations relativement lourdes telles que le chargementdes traductions ou le calcul des arbres des entiteacutes

On distingue deux caches distincts dans GLPI mdash le cache base de donneacuteesmdash le cache traduction

Cette distinction permet drsquoeacuteviter de stocker le cache des traductions sur un reacuteseau cela pourrait produire un trop grandnombre de requecirctes sur le reacuteseau et avoir au final un impact neacutegatif

A lrsquoinverse le cache de la base de donneacutees devrait ecirctre sur le reacuteseau en cas de frontaux multiples

Afin de vous permettre drsquoaffiner les reacuteglages ou drsquoutiliser un autre systegraveme de cache une solution manuelle estproposeacutee Pour en profiter ajouter dans la table glpi_configs une cleacute cache_db etou cache_trans pour lecontexte core et adapter la valeur en fonction de ce que vous souhaitez

Note Si le but est de deacutesactiver lrsquoun ou lrsquoautre de ces caches creacuteer la cleacute dans la table mais laisser la valeur vide

adapterapcu

adapterredisoptionsserverhost127001

Se reacutefeacuterer agrave la meacutethode ConfiggetCache() et agrave la documentation de ZendCache pour davantage drsquoinformations

Avertissement Si vous installez plusieurs instances de GLPI sur un mecircme serveur le namespace du cache doitecirctre unique par instance ce qui nrsquoeacutetait pas le cas dans GLPI avant la version 924

Si vous avez speacutecifieacute votre propre namespace dans la configuration assurez-vous qursquoil est bien unique sur chaqueinstance

Si votre version de GLPI est anteacuterieure agrave la 924 il faudra ajouter le namespace dans la configuration du cache dechacune de vos instances

234 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

332 OPCache

OPCache stocke des fichiers PHP preacute-compileacutes en meacutemoire et permet ainsi drsquoameacuteliorer les performances La seulechose agrave faire crsquoest de lrsquoinstaller sur votre instance de PHP et de le configurer (la configuration par deacutefaut devraitconvenir agrave la grande majoriteacute des cas)

Toutefois sur des instances qui pourraient ecirctre fortement solliciteacutees il peut ecirctre utile de ne pas inclures les fichiers depolices pour les PDF dans ce cache En effet elles y prennent eacutenormeacutement de place et le gain est relativement minime

Afin drsquoexclure les fichiers de police du cache il suffit de renseigner leur chemin complet dans un fichier deliste noire pour opcache Le chemin de ce fichier est deacutetermineacute par la diective de configuration opcacheblacklist_filename (etcphpdopcache-glpiblacklist par exemple sous Fedora) Si votre ins-tance de GLPI se situe dans le dossier varwww le chemin agrave exclure sera varwwwhtmlglpiglpi-921vendortecnickcomtcpdffonts

Bien entendu lrsquoemplacement du fichier de configuration et le chemin vers les polices est agrave adapter en fonction de votresystegraveme et de votre type drsquoinstallation

Les RPMS fournis pour Fedora (ou par le deacutepocirct Remi) offrent deacutejagrave cette fonctionnaliteacute par deacutefaut vous nrsquoaurez doncrien agrave faire )

34 Glossary

Accepted State of a demand which has been validated by an approver

Accreditation Authorization to perform a set of actions on several entities given by rights attribution process

Actions Grouping in a list of available handling of GLPI objects

Active Directory service Directory service compatible with LDAP directory provided by Microsoft Also knownas AD

Adaptive rule Rule in which at least one action is the result of a regular expression defined in a criteria

Administrative closing Modification of a ticket status to closed (manually or automatically)

Alert threshold Minimal value from which an alert is triggered

Asset Generic term for an element that can be inventoried and managed in GLPI

Automatic action Process for regular actions triggering either internal to GLPI or external (Unix cron Windowsplanned tasks )

Automatic closing GLPI internal process that closes unresolved tickets after a given time

Booking Element that is booked for a given period

Bookmark Stored link to a GLPI page that allows to access the page quickly

Budget Accounting operation that groups all provisional expenses and receipts

Cartridge Consumable used by a printer and specifically managed in GLPI

Case Physical element that contains a computerrsquos components (motherboard processor disk )

Closed (ticket) Status of a ticket whose solution has been approved by the ticket issuer or that has been closeautomatically

Collector Functionality of GLPI that allows to create tickets or followup by importing messages from a mailbox

Connection (network) Link between two network ports

Contact Referent person linked to a supplier

Contract Financial document linked to assets and to suppliers

Controller Device that interfaces with other peripheral device

Criteria Element or pattern used by search engines to select an information or used by rules engines and dictio-naries to perform actions

34 Glossary 235

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Default profile Profile attributed by the application in the absence of particular settings (rules manual attribu-tion )

Depreciation type Characteristic of depreciation which balance can be linear or declining

Dictionary Set of rules that allow to modify GLPI data

Direct connection Physical link between a computer and another asset

Document Element that defines a link andor store a file and that can be associated to other objects of GLPI

Domain Group of assets connected to a network

Dropdown Customizable dropdown list used in GLPI and plugins

Entity Organizational object allowing to partition view and action scope of users

Express renewal The contract is renewed only if both parties agree for its renewal (opposite to tacit renewal)

External link Link displayed on an asset form in GLPI and built dynamically using the asset data

Financial information Data for invoicing and warranty

Followup Exchange between a ticket issuer and the persons in charge of it

FQDN A FQDN (Fully qualified domain name) is a fully qualified domain nameFor example wwwglpi-projectorg forgeglpi-projectorg

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Specifically in GLPI selection of elements of the knowledge base that canbe provided independently for example articles that are made accessible to users having only access to thesimplified interface

Global management Management mode in which a unique inventory object can be connected to several compu-ters

Global note Public note that is also visible from sub-entities

Global right Permission on objects that are not linked to an entity

Global view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is common to all users

Group Grouping of users

Grouping Action of merging similar elements of distinct entities into the parent entity

Hive Entry in Windows registry

ICAL (ICalendar) Calendar importexport format

ID Technical identifier of an element

Identifier Connection name of a user (login)

IMAPPOP IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) and POP (Post Office Protocol) are messaging protocolsallowing to retrieve mail messages

Impact Measure of the effect of an incident problem or change in business process

In progress (attributed) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians

In progress (planned) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians andfor which an action is planned

Incident Unplanned interruption or quality decrease of a service

Intervention Action of a technician to solve an incident

Knowledge base Database allowing to gather analyze store and share knowledge and information inside anorganization

Label FQDN A FQDN is composed of labels separated by dots (ldquordquo)For example wwwglpi-projectorg is composed of labels www glpi-project and orgA computer name is composed of a label and the name of the domain it belongs to for example www name indomain glpi-projectorgIn GLPI labels are compliant with section 21 of RFC 1123

236 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

LDAP directory Directory service using the LDAP PROTOCOL (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Allowsin particular to store user accounts

Local right Permission applicable to a given scope (entity)

Location Name in GLPI allowing geographical localization of an asset

Logs List of events occurring during use of GLPI application

Mail domain Part of a mail adress that is after character

Manufacturer Company producing a hardware

Mount point Directory from which the data contained in a partition can be accessed

Network Name defining the connection type (internet local )

Network port Network interface that can be virtual or physical

Networks Hardwares providing interconnection of computer equipments

New (ticket) Default status of a ticket

Path Address allowing to localize an element in a tree structure

Pattern Character string used for comparison in a criteria

PDU Power Distribution Unit

Pending (Ticket) Status of a ticket which processing is temporarily suspended (does not impact processing time)

Personal note Note visible only by its writer

Personal view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is specific to a user

Planning Scheduling of a task in time scale

Plugin GLPI extension that allows to add functionalities andor to modify application behaviors

Power supply Bloc providing electric current to the components of a computer

Preferences Personal parameters of a user

Priority Scale that identifies the relative importance of a ticket and that results from impact and urgency

Private Element that is visible only by its writer (bookmark note )

Profile Set of rights

Provider Legal structure toward which a contractual relation can be established (purchase contract )

Public Element that is visible by all authorized users of an entity

Public note Note that is visible by all users of the notersquos entity

Purge Permanent deletion of elements placed in the trash bin

Recursivity Property of an object belonging to an entity that makes it visible from sub-entities

Refused State of a demand that has been invalidated

Registered user Person having an accreditation allowing to connect to GLPI

Regular expression Character string (often called pattern) that describes a set of accepted strings according to awell-defined syntax

Replicate (MySQL) MySQL database used by GLPI if main database (master) is not available

Report Document that sums up GLPI data

Requester Person at the origin of an incident ticket or a service request

Restoration Recovery of an element of the trash bin

Right Authorization of a user for a given action

Root entity First entity of GLPI entities tree structure that is always present even if no other entity is defined andthat cannot be deleted

Rule List of criteria that trig a list of actions if criteria are satisfied

Saved search Recording of GLPI search engine state that allows to store and perform again the search

34 Glossary 237

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Service General action of GLPI listed in the events

Simplified interface GLPI user interface that gives access to a reduced set of functionalities and that targets endusers (opposite to standard interface)

SLA SLA (for Service-Level Agreement) is a contract between a service provider and a client that defines therequested quality of service and the responsibilities in case of failure

Solved (ticket) Ticket state when a technical solution was provided for an incident

SSO Unique authentication system (SSO (Single Sign On))

Standard interface GLPI user interface that gives access to all functionalities (opposite to simplified interface)

Statistics Summary of GLPI data linked to tickets

Status State of an asset or of a ticket belonging to its life cycle

Sub-entity Child entity of an entity on a form indicates recursivity status

Subject Title or question of an element of the knowledge base

Supervisor Person in charge of a group of users

Tacit renewal The contract is renewed automaticaly if none of the parties declares its will to break it

Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is a VLAN which tag is transmited in networkframe (see 8021Q)

Task Action corresponding to a technical operation that can be planned

Technician User in charge of tickets processing

Template Reusable model of object containing predefined fieds and allowing easier user entry

Ticket GLPI object representing an incident or a service request

Tier type Category of providers

Transfer Action of moving an object from one entity to another

Trash bin Container of elements deleted by users Similar to the trash bin in a desktop environment it is anintermediate state before purge

Tree Hierarchical organization of data using a tree structure

Unitary management Management mode in which an inventory object can be connected to only one computer

Urgency Criteria defined by the requester that specifies for a ticket the desired resolution speed

User User of an asset that is not registered in GLPI user base

Validation Action of authorizing a ticket processing

Validator Person performing the validation of a ticket

VCard Virtual visit card

Virtual network port A virtual network port is a port which does not correspond to a physical network hardware

VLAN VLAN Virtual Local Network

Volume Storage area attached to a computer

Webcal Exchange format for calendar data

238 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

CHAPITRE 4

Documentation license

This documentation is distributed under the terms of the Creative Commons License Attribution-ShareAlike 30 France(CC BY-SA 30 FR)

For the complete terms of the license please refer to httpscreativecommonsorglicensesby-sa30frlegalcode

You are free to mdash Share mdash copy and redistribute the material in any medium or formatmdash Adapt mdash remix transform and build upon the material for any purpose even commercially

The licensor cannot revoke these freedoms as long as you follow the license terms

Under the following terms mdash Attribution mdash You must give appropriate credit provide a link to the license and indicate if changes were

made You may do so in any reasonable manner but not in any way that suggests the licensor endorses you oryour use

mdash ShareAlike mdash If you remix transform or build upon the material you must distribute your contributions underthe same license as the original

No additional restrictions mdash You may not apply legal terms or technological measures that legally restrict others fromdoing anything the license permits

239

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

240 Chapitre 4 Documentation license

Index

AAccepted 235Accreditation 235Actions 235Active Directory service 235Adaptive rule 235Administrative closing 235Alert threshold 235Asset 235Automatic action 235Automatic closing 235

BBooking 235Bookmark 235Budget 235

CCartridge 235Case 235Closed (ticket) 235Collector 235Connection (network) 235Contact 235Contract 235Controller 235Criteria 235

DDefault profile 236Depreciation type 236Dictionary 236Direct connection 236Document 236Domain 236Dropdown 236

EEntity 236

Express renewal 236External link 236

FFinancial information 236Followup 236FQDN 236Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 236

GGlobal management 236Global note 236Global right 236Global view 236Group 236Grouping 236

HHive 236

IICAL (ICalendar) 236ID 236Identifier 236IMAPPOP 236Impact 236In progress (attributed) (Ticket) 236In progress (planned) (Ticket) 236Incident 236Intervention 236

KKnowledge base 236

LLabel FQDN 236LDAP directory 237Local right 237Location 237

241

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Logs 237

MMail domain 237Manufacturer 237Mount point 237

NNetwork 237Network port 237Networks 237New (ticket) 237

PPath 237Pattern 237PDU 237Pending (Ticket) 237Personal note 237Personal view 237Planning 237Plugin 237Power supply 237Preferences 237Priority 237Private 237Profile 237Provider 237Public 237Public note 237Purge 237

RRecursivity 237Refused 237Registered user 237Regular expression 237Replicate (MySQL) 237Report 237Requester 237Restoration 237Right 237Root entity 237Rule 237

SSaved search 237Service 238Simplified interface 238SLA 238Solved (ticket) 238SSO 238Standard interface 238Statistics 238

Status 238Sub-entity 238Subject 238Supervisor 238

TTacit renewal 238Tagged VLAN 238Task 238Technician 238Template 238Ticket 238Tier type 238Transfer 238Trash bin 238Tree 238

UUnitary management 238Urgency 238User 238

VValidation 238Validator 238VCard 238Virtual network port 238VLAN 238Volume 238

WWebcal 238

242 Index

  • Preface
  • Installation
  • Table of contents
    • First Steps with GLPI
      • General
      • Understanding the interface
      • Manage your password
      • Manage your Preferences
      • Navigate GLPI modules
      • User interfaces
      • View and manage records
      • Search for information in GLPI
      • Saved Searches
        • Modules
          • Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes
          • Asset module
          • Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs
          • Module Gestion
          • Module Outils
          • Module Administration
          • Module Configuration
            • Advanced Configuration
              • Utilisation du cache
              • OPCache
                • Glossary
                  • Documentation license
                  • Index
Page 3: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska

ii

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement The documentation is being rewritten It is very likely that some parts are outdated that there aredead links etc

Table des matiegraveres 1

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 Table des matiegraveres

CHAPITRE 1

Preface

This documentation covers the installation and use of GLPI (Gestion Libre de Parc Informatique)

Free and open-source solution for IT asset management and helpdesk and more GLPI is a web application designedto manage all of your IT asset management issues from inventory management of hardware components and softwareto the management of user assistance

This guide is intended to give an overview of GLPI for both administrators and users

Each part can be consulted independently even if for reasons of logic we recommend that you read this documentationentirely

3

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

4 Chapitre 1 Preface

CHAPITRE 2

Installation

The GLPI installation documentation is available separately

5

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Chapitre 2 Installation

CHAPITRE 3

Table of contents

31 First Steps with GLPI

Everything you need to know to get started with GLPI

311 General

Choose a web browser

GLPI requires the use of a web browser

Optimal functioning of the application is obtained by using a modern browser compliant with web standards

The following web browsers are supported mdash Edgemdash Firefox (including 2 latests ESR version)mdash Chrome

GLPI also works on mobile it is generally compatible with the mobile versions of the supported browsers

How to connect

Open your browser and go to the GLPI homepage (httpsglpi_address)

Access to the full functionality of the application requires authentication An unauthenticated user can possibly accesscertain functions if GLPI has been configured to allow it

mdash View the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)mdash Open a ticketmdash

Depending on the profile of the authenticated user they may be shown the standard interface or simplified interface

7

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

End your session

To log out click the Logout button in the top right of the screen Once logged out you will be redirected to the loginpage

312 Understanding the interface

Depending on the userrsquos profile some menus and content may differ but the logic of the interface remains the same

The GLPI interface is made up of different areas grouping together the applicationrsquos functionalities according to theirnature

1 The user menu allows you to manage your preferences access help change the current language and discon-nect

2 The main menu allows you to navigate through the different modules

3 The breadcrumb trail allows you to locate the context of use of the main work area

4 The entity selector (in multi-entity mode)

5 The main working area is the privileged space for interaction with the application

6 The search box allows you to perform a global search at any time

313 Manage your password

The change password form can be found in user preferences

You must enter and confirm your password before validation The administrator can disable this feature so the changepassword area does not appear in this case

In the event that the user has forgotten their password the possibility of resetting it is offered to them from the loginpage The link is only present if notifications are enabled

Only users with an e-mail address defined in GLPI and not authenticating via an external source (LDAP mail serveretc) can use this functionality Once the renewal request has been made by entering their e-mail address the userreceives an e-mail providing them with a link allowing them to reset their password

Passwords must follow the defined security policy A real-time check of the entered password is then carried out

8 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

314 Manage your Preferences

User preferences are accessible from the Preferences tab of the user form by clicking on your name at the top rightof the interface from any page

Each authenticated user has the possibility to modify his preferences if they have the Personalize update right in theirprofile

Main Tab

Here the user can modify the usual personal information mdash Surnamemdash First namemdash Email addressmdash Phone numbersmdash Locationmdash Languagemdash

Note Some fields cannot be modified if they come from an LDAP directory

A user can add email addresses and select the default address which will be used for sending notifications

They can also specify some default behaviors of the application such as the selected profile and entity They can alsoturn off notifications for actions they take

Depending on the profiles the experienced user can also choose to exit the normal application mode In debug modeGLPI displays errors all variable values SQL queries etc It is useful to activate this mode in the event of GLPImalfunction A maximum amount of information can therefore be communicated to the developers This mode alsoallows you to have additional information on different objects in a specific tab (notifications etc)

31 First Steps with GLPI 9

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personalization Tab

This tab allows you to modify the general display preferences applied to a given user These parameters take priorityover those defined in the general configuration

Note The Number of results per page value shown here cannot exceed the maximum value set in the general displayoptions

Note that the Remote access key section allows you to regenerate the security key used to access the private flowsoffered by GLPI Currently the ICAL and WEBCAL flows of the planning are protected by this security key which isintegrated into the url

10 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personal View Tab

Lists custom views defined in objects by the user In particular it allows you to delete the personal views defined toreturn to global views

315 Navigate GLPI modules

The various functions of GLPI have been grouped into several modules built around similar contexts of use The topbar of the interface allows you to navigate between these modules

mdash The Assets module provides access to the various inventoried materialsmdash The Assistance module allows you to create and monitor tickets problems and changes as well as see statisticsmdash The Management module allows you to manage contacts suppliers budgets contracts and documentsmdash The Tools module allows you to manage projects notes the knowledge base reservations RSS feeds and view

reportsmdash The Administration module allows you to administer users groups entities profiles rules and dictionaries It

also allows the maintenance of the application (basic backup and restore check if a new version is available)as well as the management of the email queue

mdash The Setup module provides access to the general configuration options of GLPI notifications collectorsautomatic tasks authentication plugins external links SLA management of titles components as well ascontrol of the uniqueness of fields

The menus presented vary according to the authorizations of the logged in user The navigation context is presented tothe user in the breadcrumb trail

Note You will find at the bottom right a button allowing you to quickly return to the top of the page if necessary

There are keyboard shortcuts that allow you to navigate from one module submodule to another Here is the list ofthese shortcuts

mdash 1 =gt Homemdash Assets

mdash o =gt Computersmdash s =gt Software

mdash Assistancemdash t =gt Ticketsmdash a =gt Statisticsmdash p =gt Planning

mdash Managementmdash d =gt Documents

mdash Toolsmdash b =gt Knowledge basemdash r =gt Reservationsmdash e =gt Reports

mdash Administrationmdash u =gt Usersmdash g =gt Groups

mdash Setupmdash n =gt Dropdowns

Note The combination of keys to associate with these shortcuts varies depending on the operating systems andbrowsers used Here are some examples according to the browsers

mdash Mozilla Firefox ChromeSimultaneously press the keys Alt Shift and the desired shortcut

mdash Opera

31 First Steps with GLPI 11

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Simultaneously press the keys Esc Shift and the desired shortcut

In addition since version 92 GLPI offers navigation with approximate search (fuzzy) accessible from the keyboardshortcut Ctrl + Alt + G This will open a modal window allowing you to filter via a search field all the menus ofGLPI (all the levels are present you have for example access to the 3rd level such as the dropdowns or the components)

In this window additional shortcuts are available mdash and in order to navigate through the resultsmdash Enter to change the active glpi page on the selected resultmdash Esc to close the window

316 User interfaces

Note The choice of the default interface as well as the visiblity of different modules can be configured in the profilesor from the userrsquos preferences

Standard Interface

This is the main interface of the application All the modules are available but there are limits depending on the profilesettings

The home page of the standard interface provides a summary view for quick access to active elements (tickets notesplanning contracts etc)

It is divided into 5 views mdash Dashboard

A customizable dashboard

mdash Personal view

12 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Shows the tickets opened rejected to be processed to be approved (for which the logged-in user isthe requestor) or those on which this user has an interaction as a validator or technician (awaitingvalidation in progress to be closed in waiting) This view also offers him current issues his scheduleand available notes

mdash Group view

Offers the same information about tickets and issues as the personal view but using the groups to whichit belongs as a reference Depending on their profile they may or may not have access to the tickets forwhich their groups are requesting

mdash Global view

Offers statistics on tickets and issues according to their status and on contracts according to their expi-ration date It also offers the view of the latest additions of objects in GLPI Depending on the configu-ration used new tickets can also be presented in this tab

mdash RSS feed

Proposes the content of defined RSS feeds RSS feeds are managed from the laquo Tools gt RSS Feeds raquomenu

Note For Personal and Group views only tables with information are displayed

Note Two security messages may be displayed when you log in for the first time after completing the installationprocedure

The first asks you to change the passwords of the accounts created by default in GLPI the second asks you to deletethe directory glpiinstall

As long as you have not performed these operations the messages will remain

Simplified Interface

It is the most restrictive interface of the application and is built for an end-user more than a technician Therefore thenumber of available modules is reduced to a minimum

31 First Steps with GLPI 13

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is intended for users with very limited permissions in the application such as the built-in self-service and helpdeskprofiles

In the default configuration a user can from this interface only create tickets follow the processing of their ticketsmake reservations view the notes or public RSS feeds (or create private notes or feeds) and consult the FrequentlyAsked Questions

The home page offers the number of its tickets according to their status as well as the most popular and recent FAQtopics

317 View and manage records

The display of all the lists of records and of all the details concerning a record always works in the same way in GLPIWhether itrsquos a list of computers phones or tickets the presentation follows the same principle

A list of elements can be obtained in 2 ways mdash From the search engine

From the search engine after determining the criteria and validating the search a list of records isdisplayed By default no search criteria limit the list of recordings offered and the display is limited tothe first x records in the list which is configurable in the preferences

mdash From another list

Some tabs offer a list of related items For example from a list of computers click on the name of acomputer then navigate to the software tab The list of software installed on this computer is displayed

Details concerning a record are displayed in the form of tabs grouping together similar information For a computerthe financial information and the software list are in two separate tabs

Customize the display

The columns displayed from the complete list of the inventory can be configured Click on the button It ispossible to add delete and order the displayed columns

14 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash The global view applies to all profiles having access to a part of the inventory the modification of this partwill therefore be visible by all users

mdash The personal view applies only to the logged-in user and overrides the global view settings This view is onlyavailable if you have the User view right regarding the Search result display

This tab also allows you to reset the display customization of the different lists The user can for eachtype of object return to the default display by deleting this personalization

318 Search for information in GLPI

GLPI has a search engine allowing you to display a set of elements satisfying a certain number of criteria The proposedlists are paginated A navigation bar at the top and bottom of the list is used to define the number of items to displayper page and to navigate between pages

A global search engine (that is one that can use data from objects of different type) is also available

In addition to the list of elements corresponding to the stated criteria these lists offer some additional features mdash Export in different formats (CSV PDF )mdash Massive (Bulk) actionsmdash A marque-pages system to save searches

Perform a basic search

The basic search makes it possible to carry out multiple searches configured and sorted on one of the types of theinventory Depending on the data on which the search is carried out the following operators can be proposed

mdash containsmdash ismdash is notmdash beforemdash after

Searching on dates allows you to specify a specific date (Specify a date) or to define it in relation to the current date(Now + ou - X hour(s) day(s) month or year(s)) It is also possible to specify a search before or after a given date asdefined intervals (Monday Last Saturday Start of month Start of year Start of year etc)

For labels it is possible to search for a given value (is) If the dropdowns can be visible in the sub-entities the choicesunder and not under appear The criteria are added with the + on a gray background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes - Percentage free contains gt 80

Note Once the criteria have been defined the search is launched by pressing the Search button

Perform a multi-criteria search

The multi-criteria search makes it possible to refine the search by extending it to other types of objects by addingglobal search criteria This type of search is obtained by adding criteria with the + on a white background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space attached toa 17-inch monitor and having LibreOffice software installed

31 First Steps with GLPI 15

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory (Mio) contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes gt Percentage free contains gt 80AND multi Monitor gt Size contains 17AND multi Software gt Name contains LibreOffice

Items in Trash

Some items in GLPI can be trashed To view them in order to restore them or delete them permanently click on theicon representing a recycle bin To return to the display of active elements click again on this icon

Perform an advanced search

Here are some examples of search operators

NULLmdash Find the records with such empty field with a date field ltnumber_of_months orgt number_of_monthsmdash Search for materials with a deadline corresponding to the number of monthsmdash Search for computers that are 5 years old Date of purchase contains lt-60

^123 Find the records containing 123 at the start of the field

Avertissement On some systems you have to type ^ the space bar then the first character

^Windows Find records containing Windows 2000 Windows XP but not with Windows

123$ Find the records containing 123 at the end of the field

^123$ Find records containing only the text 123

Two search criteria linked by the operator AND NOT Find records that do not match a criterion (other than)

Entity is laquo Root entity raquo AND NOT Type contains laquo Laptop raquo Search for all computers in the laquo Root entity raquowhich are not laptops

[Year]-[Month]-[Day] (YYYY-MM-DD) Search by date

For security reasons the operator is not usable

Export the result of a search

The export of the search result in SLK or CSV spreadsheet formats or in PDF format can be done in two differentforms

mdash The current page exports only the data displayed on the screen (for example the first 10 results out of 200)mdash All pages exports all of the search results

The SLK format can be used by many spreadsheets Fields that are too long will be truncated when using software thatdoes not fully comply with the standards In this case it is preferable to use the exports in CSV format

If the data exported in CSV format is imported into Microsoft Excel software accented characters may not be displayedcorrectly This software seems to have difficulty with data encoded in UTF-8

16 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Perform massive actions

A massive action system is integrated into the search engine It allows you to make bulk modifications and performactions to all the selected elements Some examples of the available massive actions (Will differ based on the type ofitem)

mdash Put in trashbinmdash Delete permanentlymdash Restoremdash Connect Disconnectmdash Installmdash Updatemdash Add a contractmdash Enable the financial and administrative informationmdash Add to transfer listmdash Synchronize

To use it simply select the elements for which you want to perform an action then click on the Actions button availableat the top and bottom of the list Then once the type of action has been selected options are optionally presented aswell as a validation button

The results of the actions as well as the information messages are presented at the end of the execution of all theactions

Note mdash You will find in the headers of the table (at the top and at the bottom) a checkbox allowing you to select or

unselect all the elements of the listmdash A similar system of actions is available in certain lists present within the objects themselves The operation is

identical to that explained here

Avertissement The number of elements that can be handled simultaneously is limited by the values ofmax_input_vars or suhosinpostmax_vars in your PHP configuration You may therefore get a mes-sage indicating that massive edits are disabled You just need to increase the values of your PHP configuration orreduce the number of items displayed

Quick search

This tool is located at the top right of the GLPI screen It allows searching within elements including but not limitedto

mdash Ticketsmdash Problemsmdash Changesmdash Projectsmdash Computersmdash Monitorsmdash Softwaremdash Network Equipmentmdash Peripheralsmdash Printers

31 First Steps with GLPI 17

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Phonesmdash Contactsmdash Contactsmdash Suppliersmdash Documentsmdash Budgetsmdash Licensesmdash Usersmdash Groups

Note The search is carried out only on the fields displayed by default for each of the elements mentioned above Inessence it is the same as an items seen search on each type of element

319 Saved Searches

GLPI offers a system for saving searches (bookmarks) Once the search is done it is possible to save it from a star-shaped button accessible in the search form

There are two types of saved searches mdash Private searches Usable by all users and they are only accessible by their authormdash Public searches Can only be created by authorized users and are accessible by all users provided they belong

to the configured entitiesSaved searches can be accessed by clicking on the star shaped button in the user menu

18 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From this interface it is possible to mdash Reorder private searches (drag amp drop) - public searches use automatic sortingmdash Select a default search (only one possible per type of object) by clicking on the star iconmdash Access the search results (by simply clicking on it)mdash Access the saved searches management interface by clicking on the wrench icon at the top right

Avertissement Setting a particularly heavy search as the default display can have catastrophic effects on theoverall performance of the application

Display of counters

The GLPI settings are used to define whether the counters should be displayed or not In the case of research itrsquos a bitmore complicated

This is because some searches can take a long time (and resources) to complete In order to limit the impact onperformance the heaviest requests are not counted by default So that the execution time of a saved query can becalculated it must be executed at least once A scheduled task is also offered to calculate execution times regularly(and thus avoid requests that would have become heavy over time)

Administrators can override the automatic count method and have a search always or never be counted This possibilityshould be used sparingly

Configuring alerts

It is possible to configure the sending of ldquoalertsrdquo on a saved search using the GLPI notification system Sending anotification is based on the number of results returned by the search compared with the chosen operator to the enteredvalue

31 First Steps with GLPI 19

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The notification(s) used are displayed for reference from the alerts configuration tab For private research only theuser who created the search can be notified using a template provided by default in this case a single notificationwill be linked

For public searches a specific event must be created as well as a notification that uses it This is only possible fromthe alerts configuration tab

Once the specific notification is created it has to be configured by associating it with a template and by selecting thedesired recipients Note that it is possible to associate several notifications with the same search via the event thatcorresponds to it

Note As long as the notification specific to a public search is not created it will not be possible to add alerts

32 Modules

321 Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes

Les actions

Les diffeacuterentes actions possibles sur lrsquoobjet deacutependent des droits attribueacutes dans votre profil

De mecircme certaines actions dans lrsquoonglet deacutependent des droits du profil (comme les actions de masse)

Ne sont listeacutees ici que les actions principales pouvant ecirctre reacutealiseacutees sur diffeacuterents objets Si une action est speacutecifique agraveun objet elle sera deacutecrite dans la fiche de cet objet

Creacuteation

Le droit de creacuteer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoajout srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Cliquer sur le laquo + raquo situeacute dans le menu horizontal

4 Si lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire en possegravede une gestion de gabarit choisir un gabarit agrave appliquer

5 Compleacuteter les diffeacuterents champs de la fiche vierge

20 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Valider

Une option preacutesente dans les preacutefeacuterences utilisateur (Apregraves la creacuteation aller agrave lrsquoeacuteleacutement creacuteeacute) permet de deacuteterminersi lrsquoutilisateur souhaite apregraves la creacuteation lrsquoaffichage de la fiche nouvellement creacuteeacutee ou une autre fiche vierge pourcreacuteation en seacuterie

Modification

Le droit de modifier un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la modification srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste desobjets

4 2 choix de modification

mdash Modification unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Modifier les champs souhaiteacutes

3 Cliquer sur le bouton Actualiser

mdash Modification en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

3 Choisir le champ agrave modifier

4 Indiquer la nouvelle valeur du champ

5 Cliquer sur le bouton Envoyer

Affichage

Le droit de visualiser un objet deacutepend du droit Lecture deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur Si vous nrsquoavez pas le droitde visualiser un objet le nom de celui-ci nrsquoapparaitra pas dans les diffeacuterents menus de GLPI

Par exempl si vous supprimer le droit de lecture de lrsquoobjet Ordinateur dans votre profil le sous-menu Ordinateurnrsquoapparaitra pas dans le menu Parc mecircme si vous avez le droit de modifier un ordinateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la visualisation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour visualiser un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur via le moteur de recherche situeacute en haut de la liste des objets

4 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

Association drsquoun document

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoassociation agrave un document srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

32 Modules 21

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Documents

3 Seacutelectionner un document ou cliquer sur le bouton Parcourir pour en ajouter un

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un DocumentAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au document

Association drsquoun contrat

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire si celui-ci peut ecirctre lieacute agrave un contrat lrsquoassociation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircmemaniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un contrat agrave un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Contrats

3 Seacutelectionner un contrat

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un ContratAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au contrat

Transfert entre entiteacutes

Avec la notion drsquoentiteacutes vient la possibiliteacute de deacutefinir des profils de transfert pour les mutations drsquoeacuteleacutements entreentiteacutes

Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet notamment de passer drsquoun GLPI mono entiteacute agrave un GLPI multi-entiteacutes en utilisant lestransferts

Comment faire un transfert

1 Utiliser un profil qui a le droit de faire des transferts (Administration gt Profils gt Administration ndashgt Droit leLecture sur Transfeacuterer)

2 Configurer les actions faites par le transfert ([Administration gt Regravegles ndashgt Transfeacute-rer](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst))

3 Srsquoassurer que le profil qui va effectuer le transfert a une visibiliteacute sur lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante et sur lrsquoentiteacute prenante (leplus simple est drsquoutiliser un profil reacutecursif depuis lrsquoentiteacute racine)

4 Se positionner sur lrsquoEntiteacute racine (Voir Tous)

5 Depuis la liste des objets seacutelectionner lrsquoeacuteleacutement agrave transfeacuterer

22 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Choisir Ajouter agrave la liste de transfert et Valider 7 Dans Mode de transfert choisir un profil de configuration du transfert (creacuteeacute en point 2) 8 Seacutelectionner lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle sera transfeacutereacute lrsquoeacuteleacutement 9 Cliquer sur Transfeacuterer

10 Veacuterifier dans la nouvelle entiteacute que le mateacuteriel srsquoy trouve bien

Note Si un eacuteleacutement lieacute nrsquoexiste pas dans la nouvelle entiteacute il sera automatiquement creacuteeacute si le profil de transfertdemande de le conserver

Exemple transfert drsquoun ordinateur avec un fournisseur deacutefini dans les informations financiegraveres Si ce fournisseurnrsquoexiste que dans lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante il sera creacuteeacute dans lrsquoentiteacute prenante Par contre un fournisseur deacutefini dans lrsquoentiteacuteracine en reacutecursif ne sera pas recreacuteeacute

Avertissement Le lieu et le groupe seront agrave adapter pour la nouvelle entiteacute

Suppression

Le droit de supprimer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la suppression srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere 1 Se connecter agrave GLPI 2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur) 3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des

objets Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes

mdash Suppression unitaire 1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton

mdash Suppression en masse 1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

Dans les deux cas de figure il faudra choisir mdash Mettre agrave la corbeille si lrsquoobjet possegravede une corbeille mdash Supprimer deacutefinitivement si lrsquoobjet ne possegravede pas de corbeille

Dans le cas drsquoun objet ne posseacutedant pas de corbeille GLPI demandera une confirmation avant la suppression deacutefinitivede lrsquoobjet dans la base de donneacutees Dans le cas contraire lrsquoobjet sera mis dans la corbeille drsquoougrave il pourra ecirctre restaureacute(sorti de la corbeille)

La gestion des gabarits dans GLPI

Preacutesentation

Pour certains eacuteleacutements de GLPI il est possible de creacuteer de nouveaux eacuteleacutements (ordinateurs par exemple) depuisdes gabarits preacutealablement deacutefinis Un gabarit deacutefinit un masque de creacuteation certaines valeurs peuvent ecirctre deacutefiniesdirectement ou calculeacutees en fonction drsquoun masque (comme un numeacutero drsquoinventaire par exemple)

La gestion des gabarits se reacutealise via lrsquoicocircne situeacutee dans la barre de menu

32 Modules 23

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Eleacutements de lrsquoinventaire

Pour les eacuteleacutements de lrsquoinventaire le gabarit deacutefinit un eacuteleacutement standard en preacute-remplissant certains champs qui serontreacuteutiliseacutes pour la creacuteation drsquoautres eacuteleacutements Cela permet de simplifier lrsquoajout drsquoun grand nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements quasiidentiques

Par example afin de preacuteparer la reacuteception de 20 imprimantes identiques dont seuls les numeacuteros de seacuterie et drsquoinventairechangent

mdash creacuteer un gabarit correspondant agrave ce modegravele drsquoimprimantemdash dans ce gabarit remplir tous les champs invariables (constructeur modegravele etc)mdash creacuteer ensuite les 20 fiches drsquoimprimantes drsquoapregraves ce gabarit

Lors de la saisie de chaque imprimante le numeacutero de seacuterie et le numeacutero drsquoinventaire seront les seuls eacuteleacutements agravecompleacuteter

Le systegraveme drsquoincreacutementation

Un systegraveme de remplissage et drsquoincreacutementation automatique de certains champs (reconnaissables gracircce au ) estdisponible Ces champs (nom numeacutero drsquoinventaire ) sont alors remplis automatiquement agrave la creacuteation si le champcorrespondant dans le gabarit contient une chaicircne de formatage de la forme ltXXXgt

La chaicircne de formatage doit impeacuterativement deacutebuter par le caractegravere lt et se terminer par le caractegravere gt

Au sein de la chaicircne vous pourrez utiliser les caractegraveres suivants mdash X repreacutesente un caractegravere quelconque mdash g recherche du numeacutero parmi tous les champs identiques baseacutes sur le mecircme format mdash emplacement du numeacutero agrave increacutementer (nombre de chiffres eacutegal au nombre de ) mdash Y anneacutee sur 4 chiffres mdash y anneacutee sur 2 chiffres mdash m mois mdash d jour

Par exemple en poursuivant lrsquoexemple citeacute plus haut il est possible drsquoutiliser la fonctionnaliteacute drsquoincreacutementation pourcreacuteer automatiquement les numeacuteros drsquoinventaire

Ceux-ci sont composeacutes par exemple de la forme ANNEE+MOIS+JOUR+code structure (555) + code opeacuteration(1234) + numeacutero agrave increacutementer il suffira de renseigner dans le gabarit pour le champ numeacutero drsquoinventaire la chaicircneltYmd-555-1234-gt

Chaque imprimante agrave sa creacuteation verra son numeacutero drsquoinventaire geacuteneacutereacute automatiquement et increacutementeacute de 1 agrave 20

Gabarits de ticket

Tout comme les objets drsquoinventaire une notion de gabarit existe pour les tickets Un gabarit permet de personnaliserlrsquointerface de deacuteclaration drsquoun ticket en fonction du type de ticket et de la cateacutegorie

Les comportements pouvant ecirctre modifieacutes sont mdash la liste de champs devant ecirctre obligatoires pour lrsquoouverture drsquoun ticket mdash la liste des champs dont la valeur sera preacutedeacutefinie lors de lrsquoaffichage du formulaire mdash la liste des champs qui doivent ecirctre masqueacutes

Note Pour le controcircle des champs obligatoires seuls les champs disponibles dans lrsquointerface de lrsquoutilisateur sontcontrocircleacutes

24 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Donc si un champ est deacutefini comme obligatoire mais qursquoil nrsquoest pas proposeacute dans lrsquointerface il ne geacuteneacuterera pas drsquoerreurA la saisie des champs obligatoires sont afficheacutees les interfaces dans lesquelles ils sont utiliseacutes

Un gabarit est lieacute agrave lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle il a eacuteteacute deacutefini et peut ecirctre visible dans les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis pour les entiteacutes ou les profils Pour les profils ne sont associables que desgabarits de lrsquoentiteacute racine visibles de toutes les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent eacutegalement ecirctre deacutefinis pour chaque cateacutegorie de ticket (un pour chaque type)

A la creacuteation du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est par ordre de prioriteacute 1 Celui deacutefini dans la cateacutegorie deacutefinie pour le type deacutefini2 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour le profil courant de lrsquoutilisateur3 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour lrsquoentiteacute de creacuteation du ticket

Avertissement Dans les 2 derniers cas si le gabarit preacutedeacutefinit un nouveau couple typecateacutegorie le premier casest alors testeacute de nouveau avec ces nouvelles valeurs

Note mdash A la mise agrave jour du ticket le mecircme ordre de prioriteacute est utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer les champs obligatoiresmdash Si un des paramegravetre (entiteacute profil type ou cateacutegorie) est modifieacute lors de la saisie du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est

alors deacutetermineacute une nouvelle fois en fonction des nouvelles valeursmdash Le gabarit sert agrave la creacuteation de tickets reacutecurrents

Les statuts dans GLPI la vue speacutecifique

Cette information est couramment utiliseacutee pour distinguer le mateacuteriel mis au rebut disponible affecteacute etc Il estdonc possible de creacuteer ses propres statuts en rapport avec le systegraveme drsquoinformation

Crsquoest agrave lrsquoadministrateur de GLPI depuis la configuration des intituleacutes de deacutefinir les statuts qui seront utiliseacutes et pourquels types drsquoeacutelements ils le seront Ces statuts peuvent ecirctre arborescents pour faciliter la gestion

Le statut drsquoun eacuteleacutement est modifiable depuis sa fiche ou depuis le systegraveme drsquoactions massives

Un rapport vous propose une synthegravese des statuts par type de mateacuteriel La recherche globale de lrsquoinventaire vouspermet une recherche par statut sur lrsquoensemble des eacuteleacutements

322 Asset module

The GLPI Asset module is used to manage all the assets that are part of your IT infrastructure

Asset management in GLPI

In order to manage hardwares and softwares of an IT infrastructure GLPI allows natively to list all the assets that areused inside the managed organization

However it is possible to automate information pushing from the assets thanks to third-party tools GLPI supports theuse of two existing plugins

mdash The Fusion Inventory plugin transforms GLPI into an inventory server with the Fusion Inventory agents inter-facing directly with the GLPI server

mdash The ocsinventoryng plugin allow to synchronize the GLPI database with the OCS Inventory NG inventorytool the agents installed on the computers interface directly the the OCS Inventory NG server

32 Modules 25

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Available types

Computers

In a computer form the following information is available mdash Operating system

mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Service packmdash Serial numbermdash Product IDmdash

mdash General characteristics mdash Manufacturermdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Management informations mdash Technical managermdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Users mdash Computer users either known by GLPI or not

Other fields are informative such as Network (connexion type) and Update source (where are computer updatescoming from (Windows update yum apt )

It is possible to use templates with computers

Note mdash when GLPI is used with an inventory tool various informations provided by the tool itself are also availablemdash a computer can be a server a desktop computer or a laptop to differentiate them it is possible to use the type

field

The different tabs

Operating systems

The informations on operating systems for a computer are visible in tabs Operating system for a Computer entry

26 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

An operating system is associated with the following elements mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Architecturemdash Service Packmdash Kernelmdash Editionmdash Product IDmdash Serial number

Note The creation and management of the titles for operating systems is located in the menu Configuration gtDrop-downs gt Operating systems

Note A deletion or addition of an operating system is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the operation system informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 27

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

28 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

32 Modules 29

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Volumes

This tab named Volumes and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the volumes attached to a computer

A volume attached to a computer is characterized by mdash namemdash physical partitionmdash mount pointmdash file systemmdash total sizemdash available sizemdash ciphering algorithm and type

It is possible from a Computer entry to add a volume by clicking on button Add a volume

30 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible from a Computer entry to modify an existing volume by clicking on the link under its name

Note Every deletion or addition of a volume is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the volumes informations can be automatically importedand updated

Softwares

This tab named Softwares and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the softwares installed on a computerThese softwares are sorted by their category and are characterized by name version and version status

To install a software first select its name in the drop-down list then its version

It is possible to associate a license to a software on a computer

To associate a license first select the software in the drop-down list then the wanted license

If the license is associated with a software that is already installed on the computer it will be presented in the list ofsoftwares

32 Modules 31

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Otherwise it will be displayed in a separate table

Note mdash the drop-down list enumerates the softwares that are available in the entitymdash licenses management can be found in Assets gt Softwares See Manage softwares

Note It is possible via mass actions to install on a computer a software selected from its license

Note Every deletion or addition of a software or a license is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the softwares informations can be automatically importedand updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 33

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

34 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

32 Modules 35

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

36 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 37

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

38 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 39

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Virtualization

This tab displays the virtualization systems (virtual machines containers jails ) associated to a host

The available information vary from one system to another for a virtual machine for instance it includes namevirtualization system virtualization model state allocated memory number of logical processors as well as thename of the physical machine (the host)

GLPI establishes the link between a host and a virtual machine based on the unique identifier (UUID) In some caseit is possible that the UUID is different inside the physical machine and the virtual machine it is therefore impossibleto make the link automatically

The only way to link manually a virtual machine to a physical machine is to attribute the same UUID to the virtualmachine declared on the host and to the virtual machine inside GLPI

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the virtualization informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Antivirus

This tab named Antivirus and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the antivirus running on a computer

An antivirus is characterized by mdash namemdash activenon activemdash vendormdash update statusmdash antivirus versionmdash signature database versionmdash expiration date

Note Every deletion or addition of an antivirus is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the antivirus informations can be automatically importedand updated

40 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 41

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

42 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 43

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to computers mdash Install a software with a license on a computer From the tab Softwares add a license by choosing the name

of the software followed by the name of the license From the Mass actions of summary table choose Install

Avertissement A software can only be installed if its license has a version in use or a purchase version

Displays

In a display form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the display

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Display management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Display users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Sizemdash Resolutionmdash Port types (VGA DVI HDMI DisplayPort)

44 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Integrated soundmdash Connectivitymdash

Management type

It is possible to manage displays either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one display per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with displays

The different tabs

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 45

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

46 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 47

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

48 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 49

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

50 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 51

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to displays mdash connect a display to a monitor

Softwares

GLPI allows management of softwares and their versions as well as licenses associated or not to software versions

A software is by default associated with an entity

Financial management is done at the level of licenses the financial management at software level is only a model forthe licenses associated with this software

Softwares can be imported automatically using a third-party inventory tool in this case a dictionary can be usedto filter or clean the import data (see [Configure data dictionaries](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrstlaquo The dictionaries are managed from menu entry Administration gt Dictionaries raquo))

Some fields are specific in the software form mdash Update is an information with no processing associated and which tells whether the software is an update of

another softwaremdash Category allows to group softwares in the list of softwares of an asset

52 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Can be associated with a ticket defines whether the software can be seen in the drop-down list laquo Hardware raquoof a ticket

It is recommended to first create the software without a version number in the name then to create the versions andlast to create the licenses

Note In multi-entity mode the list of software can rapidly become long because of double entries (one softwareper entity) A better approach can consist in grouping identical softwares in the same entity (see tab Grouping below)then to make recursive the elements that can be made recursive

It is possible to use templates with softwares

The different tabs

Versions

A version of a software is the element that can be installed on a asset see also Installations tab

The main view lists the number of installations of the version

Specific fields mdash Name the version numbermdash Status in ITIL recommendations it allows to follow the DSL (library storing authorized versions)mdash Operating system the operating system on which this software version runsmdash Installations the number of installations of the versionmdash Comment some comments

Licenses

Installations

The installation of a software on a computer is visualized through a version and can be consulted on a software form(list of computers having at least one version installed) on a version form (computers having this version installed)and finally on a computer form (list of versions of installed softwares sorted by category)

Note mdash Column license is filled only when the license is affected to the concerned computermdash The initial display of different categories depend upon user preferences (see [manage preferences](01-

premiers-pas03_Utiliser_GLPI04_Geacuterer_ses_preacutefeacuterencesrst raquo)

Two options are available on the list of installations of software on a computer Above the list Install allows toinstall manually a version of a software on the computer by selecting first the software and its version if a license isassociated with this software the use version of the license is automatically selected

To Uninstall a version of a software mass actions must be used first select the versions to be uninstalled then selectSuppress definitively If a license is affected to the computer it remains affected but its use version is erased

Following the list of installed versions the list of affected but non installed licenses is displayed It is possible to adda new license to the computer Mass actions allow via the action Install to install a use version of selected licenses

32 Modules 53

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

54 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

32 Modules 55

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

56 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

32 Modules 57

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

58 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Grouping

This section describes how to group software having same names in sub-entities allowing to group softwares of childentities into mother entity

Note This is only available for multi-entities platforms

How to realize a grouping

1 If the software does not exist in mother entity create in this mother entity a software whose name is strictlyidentical to the name of software in child entities

2 Open the form of the software of the mother entity

3 Activate recursivity (sub-entities to Yes at top right) this will make a new tab Grouping appear after tab History

4 Open this tab a list displays softwares having same names in child entities

5 Select appropriate lines and validate grouping

Avertissement This operation cannot be undone

This grouping have the following effects mdash Licenses are attached to the software in mother entity but stay in origin sub-entitiesmdash Versions are merged no more doubles in mother entitymdash Old softwares are moved to the trash

Note When using a third-party inventory tool some extra steps are mandatory mdash Empty trash after grouping otherwise synchronization will restore the old software in case of new versionmdash Associate the same vendor to the new software as the synchronization checks vendor name a new software

would then be created

32 Modules 59

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to softwares mdash Add a version to a softwaremdash [Manage licenses](03_Module_Parc04_LogicielsOnglet_Licencesrst) From menu Assets gt Softwares

click on license name in tab Licenses

Licenses

A software license is a right to use the software Its specific fields include mdash Name commercial naming of the licensemdash Purchase version the version that was boughtmdash Use version the real installed version of the software

Purchase version and use version can be different however the use version must be compliant with the purchaseversion

Version type describes the specifics of the right to use the software OEM type is the only type that is configured bydefault in GLPI Refer to configure types

60 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Number field displays the number of installations that are allowed with this license It can be a user number (floatinglicense) a number of installations (multiple license) an unlimited number of installation (site license) It is possibleto assign the license to one or several corresponding computers for instance if the license is of type OEM

Expire date is the limit date that allows the use of the license After this date a notification can be triggered for alertsto be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Indication This is configurable at entity level in menu Configuration gt Notifications in order to define usedmodels and recipients and in menu Configuration gt Entity to activate or not this functionality define default valueand anticipation of notification sending if needed

Astuce Expired licenses are not counted in the total of available licenses

It is possible to link contracts with licenses refer to [Manage contracts](05_Module_Gestion05_Contratsrstlaquo Contracts are managed via menu Management gt Contracts raquo))

Astuce When activating the accounting information for a license data are initialized from software accountinginformation which act as a model

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Summary raquo Displays a table containing the number of computers using this license

mdash Tab laquo Computers raquo Displays a table listing the computers using this license including in particular computername serial number inventory number location status group and user Mass actions are available if autho-rized for the computers to delete license use on selected computer or to assign another license of the samesoftware to selected computer (action Move)

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 61

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

62 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 63

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

64 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 65

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

mdash Display software license details From menu Assets gt Software click on license name in tab Licensesmdash Remove use of a license by a computer See tab Computers above See also [tab Softwares of a compu-

ter](modulesassetssoftwaresrst)mdash [Associate a document and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsassocier_un_document_a_un_objetrst)mdash [Associate a contract and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_contrat_agrave_un_objetrst)

Network equipments

Network equipment represent the hardware that manages transmits and route network between several other equip-ments (computers printers )

A network equipment can be a switch an Ethernet hub a router a firewall or a WiFi access point

It is possible to use templates with network equipments

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

66 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

32 Modules 67

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

68 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

32 Modules 69

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

70 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

mdash Tab laquo Network names raquo Summary of IP address and IP networks for each network name

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 71

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

72 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 73

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

74 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 75

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

76 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Network equipments do not have specific actions report to common actions

Peripherals

In a peripheral form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the peripheral

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Peripheral management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Peripheral users mdash Users known to GLPI or not

32 Modules 77

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Groups of usersmdash

Management type

It is possible to manage peripherals either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one peripheral per computer while global management make the peripheral avirtual global element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with peripherals

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

78 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

32 Modules 79

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

80 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

32 Modules 81

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

82 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

32 Modules 83

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

84 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was ordered

32 Modules 85

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

86 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

32 Modules 87

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

88 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 89

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Peripherals do not have specific actions report to common actions

Printers

In a printer form several informations are available mdash General characteristics of the printer

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Printer users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Page countermdash Port typesmdash

Management Type

It is possible to manage printers either unitary or globally

90 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Unitary management corresponds to one printer per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with printers

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

32 Modules 91

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

92 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Cartridges

This tab displays the cartridges associated with the selected printer model mdash cartridges in use with add date and use datemdash used cartridges with cartridge model add date use date end of life date printing counter and number of

printed pages since last cartridge change

Note For cartridge adding or removing report to cartridges management

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Modules 93

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

94 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

32 Modules 95

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

96 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 97

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

98 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 99

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

100 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 101

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

102 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Printers do not have specific actions report to common actions

Cartridges

This functionality of Asset module allows to create cartridges models and corresponding cartridges

In a cartridge form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the cartridge

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage sitemdash

The alert threshold is the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

32 Modules 103

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

For a cartridge to be installable on a printer it must be declared as compatible with this printer

Management of shared stock is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Cartridges raquo This tab allows adding as many cartridges as needed by the model It is also possible toadd several cartridges at once

A first table lists the new or unused cartridges the second table lists used cartridges

mdash Tab laquo Printer models raquo This tab allows to declare the printer models that are compatible with the cartridge

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

104 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 105

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

106 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 107

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

108 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

mdash [Add a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsCreacuteer_un_nouvel_objetrst)mdash [See a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsVisualiser_un_objetrst)mdash [Modify a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsModifier_un_objetrst)mdash [Delete a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsSupprimer_un_objetrst)mdash Add new cartridges to a model See tab Cartridges abovemdash Add a printer model for the cartridge model See tab Printer model abovemdash [Associate a document with a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_document_agrave_un_objetrst)mdash [Transfer a cartridge to another entity](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsTransfeacuterer_un_objetrst)

Consumables

In a consumable form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the consumable

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Consumable management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage locationmdash

The alert threshold corresponds to the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Changing the state of a consumable from new to used requires to set involved user or group

Management of shared stocks is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

Consumables

This tab allows to add as many consumables as needed It is also possible to add several consumable in one shot

A first table lists unused consumables a second table lists used consumables together with the name of the group orthe person to which it has been allocated

The mass actions of this tab allows to allocate consumables (action Give)

32 Modules 109

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

110 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 111

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

112 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 113

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to consumables mdash Add new consumables to a model mdash List allocated consumables

Right icon allows to have a summary of allocated consumables

Phones

In a phone form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the phone

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Phone management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Phone users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Power supplymdash Firmwaremdash

Management type

It is possible to manage phones either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one phone per computer while global management make the phone a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with phones

114 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

32 Modules 115

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

116 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 117

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

118 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and a

32 Modules 119

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

network plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

120 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

32 Modules 121

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

122 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 123

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

124 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

32 Modules 125

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

126 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

Phones do not have specific actions report to common actions

Global search

Menu Asset gt Global allows to perform a global search on default view columns for allowed elements This search islimited to following assets

mdash Computermdash Contactmdash Contractmdash Documentmdash Monitormdash NetworkEquipmentmdash Peripheralmdash Phonemdash Printermdash Softwaremdash SoftwareLicensemdash Ticketmdash Problemmdash Changerdquomdash Usermdash Groupmdash Projectmdash Supplierrdquomdash Budgetmdash Certificatemdash Linemdash Datacentermdash DCRoommdash Enclosuremdash PDUmdash Rackmdash Clustermdash Domain

This search allows for instance to perform a query by status IP or MAC address

Agrave faire Referenced in original doc but not present mdash [Gestion du protocole Internet (IP)](glpiinventory_iphtml) Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plu-

sieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

323 Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs

Le module drsquoassistance permet aux utilisateurs de saisir suivre et traiter des tickets Des plannings (utilisateur ougroupe) et des statistiques sont eacutegalement disponibles

Suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil il est eacutegalement possible de saisir suivre et traiter des problegravemes et deschangements et creacuteer des tickets reacutecurrents (fonctionnaliteacutes agrave nrsquoautoriser que pour un utilisateur de type Technicien)

32 Modules 127

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Afin de mettre en route un service drsquoassistance plusieurs eacutetapes sont neacutecessaires Pour commencer analyser les besoinsde base des utilisateurs et reacutepondre au minimum vital

Une fois que les besoins de base sont satisfaits il est possible de deacutefinir les besoins secondaires et se lancer dans laconfiguration avanceacutee

Le module drsquoassistance de GLPI est conforme au guide de bonnes pratiques ITIL et integravegre donc des notions et nor-malisation de champs Bien que lrsquooutil soit conforme ITIL il nrsquoy aucune obligation pour suivre ces bonnes pratiques chacun est libre drsquoimpleacutementer le service drsquoassistance qui correspond le mieux agrave ses besoins

mdash Mise en route du service drsquoassistancemdash Deacutefinir les acteurs et leurs rocirclesmdash Deacutefinir la matrice de calcul de la prioriteacutemdash Configuration avanceacuteemdash Les matrices de cycle de vie

mdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Regravegles de gestionmdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Ouvrir un ticketmdash Pour aller plus loin

mdash Creacuteer un ticketmdash Geacuterer les problegravemesmdash Geacuterer les changementsmdash Les planningsmdash Les statistiquesmdash Les tickets reacutecurrents

324 Module Gestion

Le module Gestion permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les eacuteleacutements suivants

Geacuterer les licences

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les licences logiciels

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire des licences en lien avec les logiciels deacutejagrave inventorieacutes dans GLPI mdash un suivi des installations de chaque licence sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les licences dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des licences

Note Une licence ne peut pas exister au sein de GLPI sans un logiciel associeacute agrave sa creacuteation

La gestion de licence reste statique un suivi humain est neacutecessaire afin drsquoassurer lrsquoactualisation des informations

128 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Comme enfant de Permet drsquoindiquer si la licence est deacutependante drsquoune autre mdash Version utiliseacutee Crsquoest la version du logiciel qui sera associeacutee agrave la licence mdash Version drsquoachat La version drsquoachat peut diffeacuterer de la version actuellement utiliseacutee il est possible de lrsquoindi-

quer ici mdash Nombre Ici pourra ecirctre indiqueacute le nombre de lien possibles entre la licence et les mateacuteriels dans GLPI mdash Autoriser la surconsommation (Allow Over-Quota) Permet drsquoautoriser ou non le deacutepassement du nombre

de lien maximum configureacute dans le champ Nombre mdash Expiration La date de fin de validiteacute de la licence Champ utile pour configurer les alertes et anticiper le

renouvellement

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Licences

Cet onglet liste toutes les licences consideacutereacutees comme enfant de la licence actuelle

Note Certaines licences peuvent srsquoobtenir par pack ou par groupe de licence (pour un lieu speacutecifique par exemple)il est donc inteacuteressant de les lier

32 Modules 129

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Reacutesumeacute

Cet onglet liste tous les types et les entiteacutes des eacuteleacutements du parc concerneacutes par cette licence

Note Attention au nombre drsquoinstallationlicence disponible deacutefini dans le champ Nombre de la licence

La creacuteation du lien entre un eacuteleacutement du parc et la licence se fait dans lrsquoonglet Logiciels de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste preacuteciseacutement chaque eacuteleacutement relieacute agrave la licence actuelle

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

130 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 131

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

132 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 133

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

134 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Certificats

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un certificat preacutesent dans GLPI agrave une licence

32 Modules 135

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une licencemdash Visualiser une licencemdash Modifier une licencemdash Supprimer une licencemdash Associer un document agrave une licencemdash Transfeacuterer une licence

Geacuterer les budgets

Un budget dans GLPI crsquoest la deacutefinition drsquoun montant sur une peacuteriode donneacutee Les autre eacuteleacutements de GLPI peuventecirctre attacheacutes agrave un budget et ainsi piocher dans ce dernier en indiquant leur valeur

Mateacuterialiser un budget au sein de GLPI ouvre la fonctionnaliteacute de gestion administrative et financiegravere pour tous lesautres eacuteleacutements preacutesents dans lrsquooutil

Il est possible de suivre lrsquoeacutevolution du budget en traccedilant la valeur de chaque eacuteleacutement rattacheacutes

136 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Lier un eacuteleacutement de GLPI avec un budget se passe dans lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Note Lors de la visualisation drsquoun budget dans une sous-entiteacute le total du budget restant nrsquoest pas accessible

Important Ce total est neacutegatif si le total de la valeur des mateacuteriels est plus eacuteleveacutee que la valeur du budget

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Principal

Cet onglet fournit un tableau reacutecapitulant le montant deacutepenseacute sur le budget par type drsquoeacuteleacutements ainsi que le totalrestant

Eleacutements

Cet onglet permet de visualiser les autres eacuteleacutements de GLPI attacheacutes agrave ce budget ainsi que leur valeur

32 Modules 137

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Le lien entre le budget et un eacuteleacutement se fait depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

138 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un budgetmdash Visualiser un budgetmdash Modifier un budget

32 Modules 139

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Supprimer un budgetmdash Associer un document agrave un budgetmdash Transfeacuterer un budget

Geacuterer les certificats

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les certificats

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire de tous les certificats de lrsquoorganisation mdash un suivi des installations de chaque certificat sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les certificats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des certificats

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Fabricant (CA de lrsquoautoriteacute racine) Cette liste deacuteroulante permet de seacutelectionner et ajouter le fabricant ducertificat

mdash Auto-signeacute Permet drsquoindiquer sioui ou non le certificat actuel est auto-signeacute mdash Nom DNS Ici est agrave saisir le preacutefixe du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom -gt

server

140 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Suffixe DNS Ici est agrave saisir le suffixe DNS du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom-gt mycompanycom

mdash Date drsquoexpiration Permet de deacutefinir la fin de validiteacute du certificat Champ utile pour les alertes GLPImdash Commande utiliseacutee Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le certificatmdash Requecircte pour le certificat (CSR) Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le fichier

CSRmdash Certificat Peut ecirctre saisi ici les donneacutees contenues dans le fichier CRT (PEM)

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 141

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

142 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 143

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

144 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 145

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

146 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un certificatmdash Visualiser un certificatmdash Modifier un certificatmdash Supprimer un certificatmdash Associer un document agrave un certificatmdash Transfeacuterer un certificat

Geacuterer les fournisseurs

GLPI integravegre une gestion des fournisseurs celle-ci sert agrave la fois agrave identifier qui a vendu un mateacuteriel (dans la gestion deparc) mais aussi agrave attribuer des tickets agrave cette personne ou socieacuteteacute

Lors de lrsquoachat drsquoun mateacuteriel de marque XX agrave un fournisseur YY il faut traiter deux informations distinctes agrave savoirle fabricant (XX) et le fournisseur (YY)

Un fournisseur se caracteacuterise par un nom un type de tiers (intituleacute) des informations de localisation (adresse codepostal ville pays) et de contact (site web teacuteleacutephone et fax)

Cette gestion agrave pour objectif notamment mdash de reacutefeacuterencer tous les fournisseurs relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation

32 Modules 147

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash drsquooptimiser le contact en cas drsquoincident mdash de permettre drsquoinclure les fournisseurs dans lrsquoAssistance de GLPI

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated Contacts

The Contacts tab is used to show or add linked contacts

Note La distinction est clairement eacutetablie entre le fournisseur qursquoil est possible de lier de maniegravere univoque agrave deseacuteleacutements drsquoinventaire et les contacts qui composent la liste des personnes permettant drsquoentrer en relation avec cefournisseur Pour eacutetablir cette liste il faut donc associer les contacts au fournisseur concerneacute

Exemple

Monsieur Dupont est conseiller de vente dans lrsquoentreprise Acme aupregraves de qui la structure se fournit reacuteguliegraverementCreacuteer un fournisseur nommeacute Acme Creacuteer un contact au nom de Monsieur Dupont Affecter agrave ce contact le typecommercial Puis associer le contact au fournisseur Acme

148 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Eleacutements associeacutes

Lrsquoonglet Eleacutements pour lrsquoobjet fournisseur est speacutecifique Il ne permet que la consultation Lier un eacuteleacutement avec unfournissur se fera depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement (du Parc) concerneacute

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 149

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problegravemes

Dans cet onglet il sera possible de consulter les Problegravemes associeacutes agrave ce fournisseur Crsquoest agrave dire tous les Problegravemessur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacute agrave

150 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changements

Lrsquoonglet permet la consultation de tous les Changements sur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacuteagrave

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 151

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un fournisseurmdash Visualiser un fournisseurmdash Modifier un fournisseurmdash Supprimer un fournisseurmdash Associer un document agrave un fournisseurmdash Transfeacuterer un fournisseur

152 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les contacts

Les utilisateurs au sens de GLPI sont les personnes disposant drsquoun accegraves agrave lrsquoapplication Les personnes exteacuterieuresgeacuteneacuteralement associeacutees agrave des contrats sont stockeacutees sous la forme de contacts

Chaque contact est caracteacuteriseacute par les informations drsquoidentiteacute usuelles ainsi qursquoun titre et des coordonneacutees teacuteleacutepho-niques de messagerie et postales La deacutefinition drsquoune liste de types de contacts permet de classer les contacts selonleur type Lrsquoexportation au format vCard est possible dans la fiche de chaque contact

Note La liste des titres possibles pour un contact est identique agrave celle des utilisateurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Suppliers

The Suppliers tab is used to show or add linked suppliers

32 Modules 153

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

154 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contactmdash Visualiser un contactmdash Modifier un contactmdash Supprimer un contactmdash Associer un document agrave un contactmdash Associer un fournisseur agrave un contactmdash Transfeacuterer un contact

Geacuterer les contrats

Glpi integravegre la gestion des contrats Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet de couvrir tout type de contrat reacutealiseacute tel que les precirctscontrats de maintenance contrat de support etc Cette gestion a pour objectif

mdash de fournir un inventaire de tous les contrats relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation mdash drsquointeacutegrer les contrats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des contrats

32 Modules 155

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Note Il est possible de recevoir des notifications pour preacutevenir drsquoeacuteveacutenements tels que la fin du contrat Dans lecas ou la reconduction du contrat serait expresse il peut ecirctre inteacuteressant drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la date du preacuteavis Pour lescontrats peacuteriodiques il est eacutegalement possible drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la fin de chaque peacuteriode ou preacuteavis de peacuteriode Ceci estconfigurable par entiteacute dans le menu Configuration gt Notifications pour deacutefinir les modegraveles et destinataires utiliseacuteset dans le menu Configuration gt Entiteacute pour activer ou non cette fonctionnaliteacute deacutefinir les valeurs par deacutefaut et uneanticipation de lrsquoenvoi de la notification si besoin

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Type de contrat par deacutefaut aucun type de contrat nrsquoest renseigneacute Il faut au preacutealable les renseigner dans laconfiguration des intituleacutes

mdash Numeacutero cette information nrsquoest pertinente que si le numeacutero de contrat est identique agrave celui utiliseacute au sein desautres services de la socieacuteteacute

mdash Date de deacutebut agrave ne pas confondre avec la date drsquoenregistrement du contrat dans GLPI Tous les calculs depeacuteriodiciteacute sur le contrat sont donc fonction de cette date

mdash Dureacutee initiale du contrat si ce champ et la date de deacutebut sont renseigneacutes la date de fin de contrat apparaitra(en rouge si la date a expireacutee)

mdash Preacuteavis ce champ peut servir au deacuteclenchement des notifications drsquoalerte mdash Numeacutero comptable pour permettre un rapprochement avec le logiciel comptable de la socieacuteteacute mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute du contrat crsquoest la dureacutee agrave laquelle la reconduction du contrat est possible (Exemple Un contrat

drsquoabonnement teacuteleacutephonique drsquoune dureacutee de 24 mois renouvelable au bout de 12 mois) mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute de facturation Crsquoest la dureacutee entre chaque facturemdash Type de reconduction Tacite (le contrat est reconductible automatiquement drsquoune peacuteriode agrave une autre si

aucune des parties ne manifeste sa volonteacute de le rompre) ou Expresse (neacutecessite lrsquoaccord des deux parties pour

156 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

la reconduction du contrat) mdash Nombre max drsquoeacuteleacutements la valeur choisie dans ce champ bloquera ou non lrsquoajout de nouvel eacuteleacutements attacheacutes

agrave ce contrat mdash Heures drsquointervention Les plages horaires drsquointervention correspondent aux horaires drsquointervention couvert

par le contrat Il est possible drsquoy distinguer les samedis et les jours chocircmeacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Coucircts

Cet onglet permet de deacutefinir un coucirct relatif au contrat sur un budget preacutesent dans GLPI- crsquoest-agrave-dire imputer une valeursur le montant total du budget seacutelectionneacute qui sera attribueacute au type drsquoobjet Contrat

Fournisseurs

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs fournisseurs au contrat actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

32 Modules 157

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

158 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 159

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contratmdash Visualiser un contratmdash Modifier un contratmdash Supprimer un contratmdash Associer un document agrave un contratmdash Transfeacuterer un contrat

Geacuterer les documents

Cette section permet drsquoenregistrer des documents eacutelectroniques ou liens web classables selon diverses rubriques

Un document possegravede un nom ainsi qursquoun commentaire et peut ecirctre associeacute agrave une rubrique

Le fichier physique correspondant au document peut ecirctre ajouteacute dans GLPI de plusieurs maniegraveres mdash En parcourant le disque dur local mdash En renseignant un lien web pointant vers un document (une image une page web un PDF ) mdash En preacutecisant un fichier preacutealablement chargeacute par FTP (dans le dossier mon_glpifiles_uploads )mdash Enfin un type MIME peut aussi ecirctre indiqueacute

Note mdash Les types de documents autoriseacutes dans GLPI (selon leur extension) sont deacutefinis dans Configuration gt Intituleacutes

gt Gestion gt Type de documentmdash Les rubriques de documents peuvent ecirctre hieacuterarchiquesmdash Lrsquooption Interdire agrave lrsquoimportation permet drsquoexclure ce document agrave lrsquoimportation via les collecteurs (images

de signatures logos )

160 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Il est possible drsquoassocier drsquoautres documents agrave un document de GLPI crsquoest pourquoi cet objet beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun ongletdu mecircme type

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 161

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un documentmdash Visualiser un documentmdash Modifier un documentmdash Supprimer un documentmdash Associer un document agrave un documentmdash Transfeacuterer un document

Geacuterer les lignes

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de renseigner les lignes teacuteleacutephoniques

Cette gestion a pour objectif mdash drsquoinventorier toutes les lignes de lrsquoorganisation mdash de permettre le suivi drsquoaffectation de chaque ligne mdash permettre la gestion financiegravere des lignes dans GLPI

162 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

32 Modules 163

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

164 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 165

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une lignemdash Visualiser une lignemdash Modifier une lignemdash Supprimer une lignemdash Associer un document agrave une lignemdash Transfeacuterer une ligne

166 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les centres de donneacutees

GLPI permet la gestion des centres de donneacutees et plus preacuteciseacutement la gestion des salles serveurs et des baies informa-tiques qui les composent

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash Un inventaire des centres salles et baies informatiques de lrsquoorganisation mdash tous les autres modules au service des centres salles et baies (notamment le module Parc qui permet une

reacutepreacutesentation graphique deacutetailleacutees des baies) mdash la possibiliteacute drsquoinclure ces objets dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI

Centre de donneacutees

Le centre de donneacutees en lui mecircme est un objet tregraves simpliste dans GLPI Il se mateacuterialise sous la forme drsquoun nom etdrsquoun lieu et permet uniquement de regrouper des salles serveurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Salles serveurs

Cet onglet liste les salles serveurs attacheacutees au centre de donneacutees actuel et permet eacutegalement drsquoen ajouter

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 167

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Salle Serveur

Une salle serveur dans GLPI se mateacuterialise sour forme drsquoun plan scheacutematique Ce plan reacutepreacutesentera lrsquoespace disponibledans la salle de la serveur Cet espace sera utiliseacute pour y deacutefinir et placer les objets Baies de GLPI

La salle serveur est associable agrave un centre de donneacutees et un lieu

Note Le plan sera une grille deacutefinie par un nombre de colonnes et de lignes 1 Baie consomme 1 case

Lrsquoarriegravere plan peut grandement aider agrave la visualisation de la salle notamment si celui ci a eacuteteacute geacuteneacutereacute avec un outiladapteacute agrave la repreacutesentation drsquoespace

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Baies

Cet onglet permet de consulter et drsquoagir sur le plan de la salle serveur Pourront ecirctre ajouteacutees directement sur le planles diffeacuterentes baies informatiques qui composent la salle

Si beaucoup drsquoeacuteleacutements sont preacutesents il est possible de passer sur une vue en mode liste

168 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Analyse drsquoimpact

Cet onglet permet de consulter et de construire le scheacutema drsquoimpact du point de vue de lrsquoobjet

32 Modules 169

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

170 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 171

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

172 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elements

32 Modules 173

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

174 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualiser un centre de donneacuteesmdash Modifier un centre de donneacuteesmdash Supprimer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Associer un document agrave un centre de donneacuteesmdash Transfeacuterer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualier la liste des salles serveurs

Geacuterer les clusters

Un Cluster GLPI est un regroupement de plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc Peut rejoindre un cluster les ordinateurs et lesmateacuteriels reacuteseau

Note Les clusters renseigneacutes dans GLPI sont pris en compte dans lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact TODO link vers la preacutesen-tation de lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact

32 Modules 175

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash UUID Identifiant unique du clustermdash Version Dans le cas drsquoun cluster logiciel ou autre la version peut ecirctre indiqueacuteemdash Source de mise agrave jour Ce champ repreacutesente la maniegravere dont la fiche de lrsquoobjet dans GLPI a eacuteteacute mise agrave jour

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste et pemret lrsquoajout drsquoun ou plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc au sein du cluster

Ports reacuteseau

Cet onglet permet de creacuteer et de lister des interfaces reacuteseau propres au cluster

Les interfaces possibles mdash Port Ethernetmdash Ports Wifimdash Agreacutegation de portmdash Alias de portmdash Connexion par ligne commuteacutee - Dialupmdash Boucle locale

176 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Port Fibre Channel

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 177

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

178 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 179

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un clustermdash Visualiser un clustermdash Modifier un clustermdash Supprimer un clustermdash Associer un document agrave un clustermdash Transfeacuterer un cluster

Geacuterer les domaines

Deux nouveaux objets de GLPI sont rassembleacutes dans cette fonctionnaliteacute les domaines et les enregistrements dedomaines

Geacuterer les domaines et les enregistrements au sein de GLPI permet notamment mdash de construire un inventaire des noms de domaines mdash drsquoinventorier les enregistrements (records) de chaque domaine mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des noms de domaines mdash drsquointeacutegrer les domaines dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash de lier les eacuteleacutements du parc au domaine

Modifieacute dans la version 950mdash inclure les domaines et les enregitrements dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI

Note Lrsquoaccegraves agrave la liste des objets Enregistrements de domaines est accessible depuis la liste des objets Domaines

Objet Domaine

Lrsquoobjet domaine permet de mateacuterialiser un domaine informatique dans son ensemble (son nom sa date drsquoexpirationetc) Lrsquoobjet est associable dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI (tickets problegravemes changements)

180 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Records

Dans cet onglet il est possible de seacutelectionner ou de creacuteer un enregistrement de domaine agrave associer au domaine actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 181

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

182 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 183

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

184 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 185

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

186 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Objet Enregistrement de domaine (Record)

Lrsquoobjet Enregistrement de domaine permet de mateacuterialiser tous les types drsquoenregistrements que lrsquoon peut trouver dansune zone ou un fichier de configuration DNS ( TXT A PTR SOA CNAME etc )

Cet objet doit ecirctre associeacute agrave un objet Domaine vu preacutecedemment

Note Les types drsquoenregistrements ne sont pas limiteacutes agrave ceux creacuteeacutes par deacutefaut ils sont personnalisables depuis lagestion des intituleacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 187

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

188 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changed

32 Modules 189

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Description of the change that was madeThe description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Visualiser un domainemdash Ajouter un domaineun enregistrementmdash Modifier un domaineun enregistrementmdash Supprimer un domaineun enregistrementmdash Associer un document agrave un domaineun enregistrementmdash Transfeacuterer un domainemdash Visualiser les enregistrements de domaines

325 Module Outils

Le module Outils permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les projets les notes les flux RSS la base de connaissance lesreacuteservations ainsi que de geacuteneacuterer des rapports

Geacuterer les projets

La gestion de projets permet de suivre complegravetement lrsquoavancement drsquoun projet au sein de GLPI via la creacuteation detacircche la constitution drsquoune eacutequipe que celui-ci soit lieacute agrave un changement ou non

Un projet dans GLPI crsquoest la possibiliteacute mdash drsquoassocier des tacircches de projet et geacuterer leur avancement mdash drsquoeacutetablir une eacutequipe projet et des eacutequipes de tacircche mdash la possibiliteacute de deacuteclencher des sous projets au sein drsquoun mecircme projet mdash de construire un diagramme de GANTTmdash la possibiliteacute drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban mdash drsquoassocier des coucircts mdash de relier les objets ITIL de GLPI

Le projets peut ecirctre hieacuterarchiseacute un projet peut donc avoir des sous-projets

Les projets disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom codeeacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquounpourcentage drsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

Plusieurs diagrammes de GANTT sont proposeacutes pour chaque projet (voir onglet GANTT)

Dans cette gestion de projet il y a deux objets principaux le projet et la tacircche de projet

190 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Projet

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter une nouvelle tacircche au projet Il liste eacutegalement les tacircches deacutejagrave deacutefinies pour ce projeten indiquant pour chaque tacircche son nom son type son statut le pourcentage effectueacutee les dates de deacutebut et de finplanifieacutees les dureacutees planifieacutee et effective ainsi que le nom de la tacircche parent

Equipe Projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter un membre agrave lrsquoeacutequipe que ce soit un contact un fournisseur un utilisateur ou un groupeIl liste eacutegalement chaque membre de lrsquoeacutequipe projet ainsi que son type respectif

Projet

Cet onglet liste les sous-projets du projet Pour deacutefinir un sous-projet il suffit de remplir le champ laquo comme enfantde raquo drsquoun projet

32 Modules 191

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

GANTT

Un diagramme de GANTT est proposeacute pour chaque projet Un diagramme de GANTT global est eacutegalement proposeacuteincluant les projets deacutefinis comme visible dans ce diagramme

Kanban

Cet onglet met agrave disposition une interface afin drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban dans GLPI

192 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Coucircts

Des coucircts sont associables aux projets auxquels peuvent ecirctre ajouteacute les coucircts des tickets lieacutees aux tacircches du projet

Objets Itil

Crsquoest dans cet onglet qursquoil est possible drsquoassocier au projet actuel les objets itil de GLPI tickets problegravemes etchangements Il est possible de creacuteer ces objets depuis cet onglet eacutegalement

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object and

32 Modules 193

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

the document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

194 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Tacircche de projet

lrsquoobjet tacircche de projet est assez similaire au projet

une tacircche de projet peut ecirctre eacutegalement une sous tacircche de projet

Les tacircches disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom eacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquoun pourcentagedrsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

32 Modules 195

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note La tacircche de projet nrsquoest pas un objet indeacutependant de GLPI Lrsquoaccegraves agrave une tache de projet se fait dans lrsquoongletTacircches de projet du projet concerneacute

Les tacircches peuvent ecirctre lieacutees agrave des tickets permettant de planifier des interventions permettant de mettre en place leprojet Des dureacutees preacutevisionnelles et effectives sont eacutegalement deacutefinies au niveau des tacircches Ces dureacutees ainsi quecelles des tickets sont alors consolideacutees au niveau du projet lui mecircme

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et drsquoajouter les sous-tacircches

Equipe de tacircche

Ici est deacutefinie lrsquoeacutequipe en charge de la tacircche

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

196 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

32 Modules 197

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un projetmdash Visualiser un projetmdash Modifier un projetmdash Supprimer un projetmdash Associer un document agrave un projetmdash Transfeacuterer un projet

Geacuterer les notes personnelles ou publiques

Une note dans GLPI est un simple champ texte et piegravece jointe permettant de transmettre des informations aux utilisa-teurs de la plateforme

Une note est caracteacuteriseacutee par mdash une dureacutee de vie

198 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash un statut mdash la possibiliteacute de la faire apparaicirctre dans le planning mdash les cibles de la note

Les notes saisies apparaissent ensuite sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI ou dans le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes

32 Modules 199

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il est possible de deacuteterminer une date de deacutebut et de fin de publication pour chaque note Si la date de deacutebutnrsquoest pas mentionneacutee la note sera visible immeacutediatement jusqursquoagrave la date de fin Si la date de fin nrsquoest pas mentionneacuteela note sera visible de faccedilon permanente agrave partir de la date de deacutebut

Lrsquoajout drsquoune note au calendrier permet de la faire apparaicirctre sur le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes par la note celui de lrsquoutilisateur pour une note personnelle les plannings de tous les utilisateurs dans le cas drsquoune note publiqueUne note planifieacutee nrsquoest pas supprimeacutee une fois la date expireacutee

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

200 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Cible

Une note est consideacutereacutee comme personnelle par deacutefaut Elle est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoune note devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (note publique) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ouplusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lanote

Une note publique est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les notes publiques

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une notemdash Visualiser une note

32 Modules 201

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Modifier une notemdash Supprimer une notemdash Associer un document agrave une notemdash Rendre une note publique Ajouter une cible agrave la notemdash Publier une note pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee Ajouter une date de deacutebut et une date de fin au niveau de la

visibiliteacute

Geacuterer les rapports

GLPI permet la geacuteneacuteration drsquoun certain nombre de rapports en lien avec les objets preacutesents sur la plateforme mdash Rapport par deacutefaut Ce rapport comptabilise les mateacuteriels preacutesents dans le parc trieacutes par type Pour les ordi-

nateurs un tri est eacutegalement effectueacute par systegraveme drsquoexploitationmdash Par contrat Mateacuteriel sous contrat de maintenance aupregraves drsquoun tiers Il est possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat deacutetailleacute

par type de mateacuteriel et par date drsquoachat La seacutelection multiple est autoriseacutee Pour ajouter un type il suffitde cliquer dans la zone blanche et de choisir le nouveau type Le principe est le mecircme pour ajouter unedate Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet le nom srsquoil est dans la corbeille ou non son entiteacute son lieu les datedrsquoachat et drsquoexpiration de garantie le type de contrat ainsi que les dates de deacutebut et de fin de contrat

mdash Par anneacutee Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacutedent mais listant eacutegalement les mateacuteriel sanscontrat

mdash Informations financiegraveres et administratives du mateacuteriel Reacutecapitulatif des informations financiegraveres pour lesordinateurs les imprimantes les mateacuteriels reacuteseaux les moniteurs les peacuteripheacuteriques et les teacuteleacutephones Ilest possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat pour une peacuteriode donneacutee Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet son nom sonentiteacute sa valeur sa valeur nette comptable son TCO ses dates drsquoachat de mise en service et drsquoexpirationde garantie Un reacutecapitulatif comprenant le total de la valeur et de la valeur nette comptable est poposeacute partype drsquoobjet et pour la totaliteacute des objets

mdash Autres Informations Financiegraveres et administratives Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacute-dent mais mais pour les cartouches les licences et les consommables

mdash Rapport reacuteseau 3 rapports peuvent ecirctre reacutealiseacutes selon le lieu selon le type de mateacuteriel reacuteseau ou selon laprise reacuteseau

mdash Precirct Reacutecapitulatif des reacuteservations en cours agrave venir ou passeacutees pour un utilisateur donneacutemdash Rapport sur les statuts Synthegravese par type de mateacuteriel des diffeacuterents statuts

Note Le nombre de rapport peut ecirctre eacutetoffer en ajoutant un plugin disponible ici httpspluginsglpi-projectorgpluginreports

Geacuterer les reacuteservations

GLPI met agrave disposition un outils de reacuteservation de mateacuteriel outil qui permet de seacutelectionner un ou plusieurs eacuteleacutementsdu parc afin de les reacuteserver sur une plage horaire Pour des reacuteservations reacutepeacutetitives il est possible de mettre en placede la reacutecurrence sur la reacuteservation

202 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Un mateacuteriel nrsquoest pas reacuteservable par deacutefaut Pour rendre un mateacuteriel reacuteservable il faut se rendre dans lrsquoongletReacuteservation de la fiche du mateacuteriel

Un mateacuteriel reacuteserveacute apparaicirctra dans un planning global des reacuteservations

Il est eacutegalement possible de consulter le planning speacutecifique drsquoun mateacuteriel reacuteservable La reacuteservation peut ecirctre creacuteeacuteedepuis ce planning eacutegalement

32 Modules 203

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Reacuteservations

Onglet principal de lrsquooutil Il permet de consulter et de seacutelectionner les mateacuteriels reacuteservables disponibles

Administration

Cet onglet liste tous les objets reacuteservables et non plus ceux disponibles Comme pour les principaux objet de GLPI ilpropose un moteur de recherche avec la possibiliteacute drsquoeffectuer des actions de masse

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une reacuteservationmdash VisualiserModifier les reacuteservationsmdash Supprimer une reacuteservationmdash Rendre un mateacuteriel indisponible

Geacuterer les flux RSS

GLPI permet drsquoinclure des flux RSS dans la page drsquoaccueil de lrsquooutil

Un flux RSS est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun flux RSS devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (flux RSS public) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner uneou plusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes aux profils groupes ou utilisateurs de la plateforme

Note Un flux RSS public est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les flux RSSpublics

204 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Contenu

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter le nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements afficheacutes Crsquoest ce contenu qui est reporteacute en pagedrsquoaccueil

Cibles

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et modifier la liste des cibles pour le flux RSS concerneacute

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 205

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un flux RSSmdash VisualiserModifier un flux RSSmdash Supprimer un flux RSS

Geacuterer la base de connaissances

La base de connaissances de GLPI reacutepond agrave deux objectifs principaux mdash Centraliser des connaissances internes pour les diffeacuterents techniciens mdash Mettre agrave la disposition des utilisateurs des informations leur permettant de reacutesoudre seuls des problegravemes

simples sous forme de FAQ publique

Note Seuls les eacuteleacutements de la FAQ publique sont visibles par les utilisateurs de lrsquointerface simplifieacutee Les eacuteleacutementsqui ne sont pas deacutefinis comme faisant partie de la FAQ publique sont visibles uniquement au sein de la console centralepar des techniciens par exemple

Il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner pour chaque article de la base de connaissances ou de la FAQ une ou plusieurscibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Tantqursquoaucune cible nrsquoa eacuteteacute seacutelectionneacutee pour un article ce dernier est visible uniquement par son reacutedacteur Lrsquoarticle estconsideacutereacute comme laquo non publieacute raquo et apparaicirct dans le tableau laquo Articles non publieacutes raquo de la page drsquoaccueil de la base deconnaissances

Par deacutefaut les articles ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute est activable (voir laconfiguration geacuteneacuterale)

Il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs documents aux articles de la base de connaissances

Note Un article peut ecirctre rendu visible pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee via la deacutefinition de la date de deacutebut et la date defin de visibiliteacute

Avertissement Les eacuteleacutements qui ne doivent pas ecirctre interpreacuteteacutes agrave lrsquoaffichage peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis avec le style Preacute-formateacute (ltpregt en HTML) Des balises comme ltVirtualHostgt sont donc inseacuterable et affichable Par contredes balises au format HTML (ltBALISEgt) peuvent disparaicirctre au moment de lrsquoeacutedition pour avoir une visibiliteacutecomplegravete du texte vous pouvez passer en mode HTML ougrave tous les eacuteleacutements seront visibles Votre navigateur peuteacutegalement modifier dynamiquement le contenu (changement de casse ajout de balises) lors drsquoune eacutedition

Il est possible de creacuteer des cateacutegories et sous-cateacutegories afin drsquoorganiser la navigation (voir Configurer les intituleacutes)

Lrsquoutilisateur peut alors utiliser plusieurs onglets pour recherche et naviguer au sein de la base de connaissances mdash Rechercher Crsquoest lrsquoonglet par deacutefaut Il preacutesente les articles les plus reacutecents les plus populaires et les derniegraveres

modifications Il permet eacutegalement de rechercher au sein de la base de connaissances

206 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Parcourir Cet onglet permet de naviguer au sein de lrsquoarborescence des cateacutegories

mdash Geacuterer Cet onglet nrsquoest accessible qursquoaux administrateurs de la base de connaissances Suivant les droits delrsquoutilisateur il est possible drsquoacceacuteder rapidement agrave ses ou agrave tous les articles non publieacutes (sans cible deacutefinies)ainsi qursquoagrave tous ses articles

Note Le moteur de recherche de la base de connaissances permet drsquoutiliser un certain nombre drsquoopeacuterateurs poureffectuer des recherches complexes + - ~ lt gt rdquo rdquo ()

mdash + Le mot doit ecirctre preacutesent

32 Modules 207

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash - Le mot ne doit pas ecirctre preacutesent mdash Opeacuterateur de troncature agrave positionner en suffixe mdash Une phrase entre guillemets double (laquo ) est rechercheacutee litteacuteralement telle qursquoelle a eacuteteacute saisie mdash lt gt permet de deacutefinir une preacutefeacuterence sur lrsquoordre des eacuteleacutements rechercheacutes mdash () agreacutegateur utile pour lrsquoutilisation de lt et gt

Exemples

- panne imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent au moins un de ces mots

- +panne +imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent ces deux mots

- +courriel thunderbird-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent le mot courriel

mais classe plus haut les lignes qui contiennent aussi thunderbird

- +courriel -outlook-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent courriel mais pas outlook

- +courriel +(gtthunderbird ltoutlook)-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent les mots courriel et thunderbird

ou courriel et outlook (dans nimporte quel ordre)mais classe courriel thunderbird plus haut que courriel outlook

- open-gt Trouve les lignes qui contiennent des mots tels que openoffice openwriter

openbar ou openphp

- suite openoffice-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent exactement la phrase suite openoffice

Les diffeacuterents onglets drsquoun article

Base de connaissances

Cet onglet affiche un tableau concernant lrsquoarticle avec en titre sa cateacutegorie Son ensuite listeacutes son sujet et son contenuainsi que le nom du reacutedacteur des dates de creacuteation et de derniegravere modification le nombre de fois ougrave lrsquoarticle a eacuteteacute luainsi que srsquoil fait partie ou non de la FAQ Si un article nrsquoest pas publieacute (cible non deacutefinie) cette information apparaicircten rouge au-dessus du nombre de vues

Cible

Un article est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun article devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ou plusieurs ciblesLa ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Cet ongletpermet donc drsquoajouter une nouvelle cible tout en listant les cibles deacutejagrave deacutefinies

208 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Editer

Cet onglet permet suivant vos droits de modifier ou supprimer un article

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 209

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Reacutevisions

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter toutes les reacutevisions de chaque article Crsquoest agrave dire que chaque modificationde lrsquoarticle donnera naissance agrave une reacutevision une version anteacuterieure de lrsquoarticle

les reacutevisions sont affichables et peuvent ecirctre restaureacutees

Commentaires

Un article beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun espace commentaires permettant aux utilisateurs de la plateforme drsquoeacutechanger agrave son sujet

210 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un articlemdash Modifier un articlemdash Supprimer un articlemdash Associer un document agrave un articlemdash Modifier la visibiliteacute drsquoun article

326 Module Administration

Le module Administration permet drsquoadministrer les utilisateurs groupes entiteacutes profils regravegles et dictionnaires etoffre des outils de maintenance de lrsquoapplication (sauvegarde et restauration de base veacuterification de nouvelle versiondisponible)

mdash [Geacuterer les utilisateurs](07_Module_Administration02_Utilisateurs01_Utilisateursrst)mdash [Geacuterer les groupes](07_Module_Administration03_Groupesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les entiteacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les regravegles](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst)mdash [Configurer les dictionnaires de donneacutees](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les profils](07_Module_Administration07_Profils01_Profilsrst)mdash [Geacuterer la file drsquoattente drsquoenvoi des courriels](07_Module_Administration08_File_drsquoattente_des_courrielsrst)mdash [Maintenance](07_Module_Administration09_Maintenancerst)mdash [Visualiser les journaux drsquoactiviteacute](07_Module_Administration10_Journauxrst)

327 Module Configuration

Le module Configuration permet drsquoacceacuteder aux options de configuration geacuteneacuterale de GLPI la configuration globalede GLPI les notifications les collecteurs les tacircches automatiques lrsquoauthentification les plugins les critegraveres drsquouniciteacuteet les liens externes protocoleacutes

Les intituleacutes ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

32 Modules 211

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Si des eacuteleacutements que vous voulez supprimer sont utiliseacutes GLPI proposera automatiquement de transfeacuterer lesentreacutees existantes vers un autre eacuteleacutement de la liste ou bien de les remettre agrave zeacutero

mdash [Configurer les composants](08_Module_Configuration03_Composantsrst)mdash [Configurer les notifications](08_Module_Configuration04_Notifications01_Configurer_les_notificationsrst)

Configurer les suivis par courriels creacuteer des modegraveles de notifications deacutefinir lrsquoenvoi de notificationmdash [Configurer les SLAs](08_Module_Configuration05_Sla01_Slarst) Deacutefinir les SLA ainsi que les diffeacute-

rents niveaux drsquoescalademdash [Configurer les paramegravetres centraux](08_Module_Configuration06_Geacuteneacuterale01_Configurer_les_paramegravetres_centrauxrst)mdash [Configurer les controcircles](08_Module_Configuration07_Controlesrst)mdash [Configurer les actions automatiques](08_Module_Configuration08_Actions_automatiquesrst)mdash [Configurer les collecteurs](glpiconfig_mailcollectorhtml) La configuration des collecteurs srsquoeffectue

depuis le menuConfiguration gt Collecteurs

mdash [Ajouter un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les liens externes protocoleacutes](glpiconfig_linkhtml)

Les liens externes se configurent depuis le menu Configuration gt

Liens externesmdash [Ajouter un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les plugins GLPI](glpiconfig_pluginhtml) Les plugins dans GLPI installation configura-

tion activation

Authentification

Crsquoest ici que GLPI gegravere lrsquoauthentification et les informations personnelles des utilisateurs

Lrsquoaccegraves drsquoun utilisateur agrave GLPI est possible apregraves que ces conditions aient eacuteteacute veacuterifieacutees

1 envoi drsquoinformations drsquoauthentification par lrsquoutilisateur

2 existence de lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur

3 authentification de lrsquoutilisateur

4 attribution drsquohabilitations agrave lrsquoutilisateur

GLPI utilise sa propre base interne drsquoutilisateurs Ceux-ci sont soit creacuteeacutes depuis lrsquointerface de lrsquoapplication soit im-porteacutes depuis une ou plusieurs sources externes Selon le type de source lrsquoimport des utilisateurs peut se faire soit enmasse soit au fil de lrsquoeau lors de la tentative de connexion drsquoun utilisateur non encore connu de GLPI

Pour effectuer lrsquoauthentification GLPI fait appel agrave une base de mots de passes interne qui peut ecirctre compleacuteteacutee parune ou plusieurs sources externes drsquoauthentification Lrsquoutilisation de meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externes permet dedeacuteleacuteguer cette fonctionnaliteacute agrave des systegravemes tiers assurant la gestion drsquoidentiteacute Voir [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec lessources drsquoauthentification externes](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification02_Configurationrst) laquo Les para-megravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configura-tion gt Authentification gt Configuration raquo)

Lrsquoattribution des habilitations est deacutecrite dans la section [Attribuer des habilitations agrave un utilisa-teur](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles03_Habilitations_utilisateurrst) laquo GLPI dispose drsquoun moteur drsquoha-bilitations dynamiques qui se base sur des sources externes drsquoauthentification Il est accessible depuis le menuAdministration gt Regravegles gt Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitation agrave un utilisateur raquo)

Note La cineacutematique drsquoauthentification est la suivante

1 lrsquoutilisateur entre son identifiant et son mot de passe

212 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 GLPI veacuterifie si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave enregistreacute dans la base Srsquoil ne lrsquoest pas

1 GLPI essaye les meacutethodes drsquoauthentification les unes apregraves les autres la base interne puis tous les an-nuaires LDAP et enfin les annuaires de messagerie

2 lorsque lrsquoauthentification est reacuteussie lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans la base interne ainsi que sa meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

3 si aucune source nrsquoa pu authentifier lrsquoutilisateur celui-ci est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que sonidentifiant ou mot de passe est incorrect

3 Si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave preacutesent dans la base interne ou une fois son identifiant creacuteeacute

1 GLPI tente drsquoauthentifier lrsquoutilisateur en utilisant la derniegravere meacutethode drsquoauthentification reacuteussie (et unique-ment celle-ci)

2 si lrsquoauthentification a eacutechoueacute lrsquoutilisateur est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que son identifiant oumot de passe est incorrect

4 Le moteur drsquohabilitation est lanceacute avec les informations de lrsquoutilisateur

1 si le moteur a donneacute agrave celui-ci une ou plusieurs habilitations alors lrsquoutilisateur a accegraves agrave GLPI

2 si lrsquoutilisateur ne se voit attribuer aucune habilitation alors bien qursquoeacutetant inscrit dans la base GLPI il nepeut se connecter agrave lrsquoapplication

mdash [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec les sources drsquoauthentification externes](glpiconfig_common_authhtml)Les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes

drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration Authentifica-tion

mdash [Chiffrage des mots de passe dans la base de donneacutees](glpiconfig_passwords_encryptedhtml)Les mots de passe des accegraves exteacuterieurs sont chiffreacutes

mdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldaphtml)Lrsquointerface de GLPI avec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le

menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Annuaire LDAP mdash [Configurer la liaison LDAP pour les utilisateurs et les groupes](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_usersgroupshtml)mdash [Ajouter un nouvel annuaire LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un annuaire](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Importer et synchroniser depuis un annuaire par script](glpiscripts_ldap_mass_synchtml)

Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisation agrave partir drsquoun

annuairemdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imaphtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme source

drsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie mdash [Ajouter un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](glpiconfig_auth_otherhtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de

lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

Sujet parent [Administrer les controcircles drsquoaccegraves](glpiaccess_control_introhtml laquo Cette partie deacutecrit commentadministrer le systegraveme de controcircle drsquoaccegraves qui permet agrave chaque utilisateur drsquoacceacuteder agrave un contexte drsquoutilisation speacuteci-fique raquo)

32 Modules 213

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sources drsquoauthentification externes

Ce menu permet de configurer les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification

Afin de pouvoir utiliser ces sources externes drsquoauthentification il faut au preacutealable activer les extensions correspon-dantes dans la configuration de PHP Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre de sources externes configureacutees danslrsquoapplication

Pour utiliser la capaciteacute de GLPI de creacuteer agrave la voleacutee des utilisateurs preacutesents dans les sources externes drsquoauthentifica-tion il faut lrsquoactiver dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration

Figure 1 Menu de la configuration de lrsquoauthentification [image](docsimageauthConfigpng)

Les annuaires LDAP permettent en outre de refuser la creacuteation des utilisateurs ne posseacutedant pas drsquohabilitations Lasuppression drsquoun utilisateur de lrsquoannuaire peut aussi entraicircner une action telle que la mise agrave la corbeille de lrsquoutilisateurla suppression de ses habilitations ou sa deacutesactivation Crsquoest eacutegalement agrave ce niveau qursquoest parameacutetreacute le fuseau horairede GLPI

Les sources drsquoauthentification externes prises en charges par GLPI sont les suivantes mdash annuaire LDAP voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires

LDAP](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification03_Annuaires_LDAPrst laquo Lrsquointerface de GLPIavec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt AnnuairesLDAP raquo)

mdash serveur de messagerie voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de message-rie](config_auth_imaphtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme sourcedrsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie raquo)

mdash serveur CAS voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash certificat x509 voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash authentification deacuteleacutegueacutee au serveur web voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification ex-terne](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentificationunique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

Annuaires LDAP

GLPI srsquointerface avec un (ou plusieurs) Annuaire LDAP afin drsquoauthentifier les utilisateurs de controcircler leur accegraves dereacutecupeacuterer leurs informations personnelles et drsquoimporter des groupes

Tous les annuaires compatibles LDAP v3 sont supporteacutes par GLPI Crsquoest donc aussi le cas pour lrdquoAnnuaire ActiveDirectory de Microsoft Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires renseigneacutes bien entendu plus le nombreest eacuteleveacute plus la recherche drsquoun nouvel utilisateur agrave authentifier peut ecirctre longue

Il est possible drsquoimporter et de synchroniser les utilisateurs de 2 maniegraveres mdash au fil de lrsquoeau agrave la premiegravere connexion lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans GLPI A chaque login ses informations

personnelles sont synchroniseacutees avec lrsquoannuaire Dans le cas ougrave les collecteurs sont utiliseacutes une adresse demessagerie inconnue sera rechercheacutee dans lrsquoannuaire pour creacuteer lrsquoutilisateur associeacute

mdash en masse soit via lrsquointerface web de GLPI soit en utilisant le script fourni voir [Importer et synchroniserdepuis un annuaire par script](scripts_ldap_mass_synchtml laquo Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisationagrave partir drsquoun annuaire raquo)

Avertissement Si aucune configuration LDAP nrsquoest visible (voir un message drsquoerreur sur cette partie) crsquoest quele module LDAP pour PHP nrsquoest pas installeacute

214 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sous Linux installer le paquet ldap pour PHP (par exemple php5-ldap sur Debian) puis redeacutemarrer le serveurweb

Sous Windows il faut deacutecommenter dans le fichier phpini (fichier preacutesent dans le reacutepertoire apachebin) la ligneextension=php_ldapdll puis redeacutemarrer le serveur web

Le processus drsquoauthentification des utilisateurs est deacutecoupeacute en 3 parties lrsquoauthentification le controcircle drsquoaccegraves et enfinla reacutecupeacuteration des donneacutees personnelles

Authentification LDAP

Lors de la premiegravere connexion de lrsquoutilisateur GLPI va srsquoadresser agrave tous les annuaires jusqursquoagrave trouver celui qui contientlrsquoutilisateur Si lrsquooption permettant drsquoimporter des utilisateurs depuis une source externe est active alors celui-ci estcreacuteeacute et lrsquoidentifiant de la meacutethode de connexion et le serveur LDAP sont stockeacutes en base de donneacutees

Ensuite agrave chaque login lrsquoutilisateur est authentifieacute sur lrsquoannuaire dont lrsquoidentifiant est stockeacute dans GLPI Les autresannuaires ne sont pas utiliseacutes si un utilisateur est deacutesactiveacute dans lrsquoannuaire qursquoil a utiliseacute jusque lagrave pour se connecteril ne peut se connecter avec une autre source drsquoauthentification

Controcircle drsquoaccegraves

Le controcircle drsquoaccegraves est lrsquoattribution drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur Mecircme si un utilisateur est authentifieacute sur un an-nuaire il nrsquoest pas forceacutement habiliteacute agrave se connecter agrave GLPI

Ce meacutecanisme repose sur lrsquoutilisation de regravegles drsquoaffectations drsquohabilitations

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Annuaire LDAP

32 Modules 215

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il existe un modegravele de preacute-configuration Active Directory qui preacute-remplit un certain nombre de champsCelui-ci a eacuteteacute mis en place afin de faciliter la configuration GLPI-AD

Pour le charger cliquer sur le lien Active Directory lors de lrsquoajout drsquoun annuaire Le lien Valeur(s) par deacutefautreacuteinitialise la saisie

mdash serveur par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieurs serveurs LDAP de parameacutetreacutes vous ne pouvez deacutefinir qursquoun seulserveur par deacutefaut Le fait de choisir ce paramegravetre le supprime du serveur sur lequel il eacutetait preacuteceacutedemmentparameacutetreacute

mdash serveur et port repreacutesentant lrsquoadresse de lrsquoannuaire LDAPmdash basedn emplacement de lrsquoannuaire agrave partir duquel les recherches et lectures seront effectueacutees

Note Le basedn doit ecirctre renseigneacute sous la forme du DN complet de lrsquoutilisateur Par exempleCN=glpiadminDC=mondomaine si le compte dans lrsquoannuaire pour GLPI est glpiadmin

mdash DN du compte identifiant de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) mdash Mot de passe du compte mot de passe correspondant (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) Il est possible

drsquoeffacer le mot de passe en cochant la case effacer puis de valider mdash filtre de connexion permet de restreindre la recherche de personnes dans lrsquoannuaire Par exemple si seul un

ensemble restreint de personnes de lrsquoannuaire ont le droit de se connecter agrave GLPI il faut mettre en place unecondition pour restreindre la recherche agrave ces personnes

On peut citer les exemples de filtres suivants mdash un filtre classique LDAP peut ecirctre (objectclass=inetOrgPerson)mdash pour Active Directory utiliser le filtre suivant qui ne renvoie que les utilisa-

teurs non deacutesactiveacutes (car les machines sont aussi consideacutereacutees comme des utili-sateurs par AD) (amp(objectClass=user)(objectCategory=person)((userAccountControl1284011355614803=2)))

Il faut noter que ce filtre est automatiquement rempli lorsque le modegravele de preacute-configurationActive Directory est seacutelectionneacute

mdash Champ de lrsquoidentifiant nom du champ dans lrsquoannuaire LDAP correspondant agrave lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur(par exemple uid sur un annuaire LDAP samaccountname sur un annuaire AD)

mdash Champ de synchronisation nom du champ utiliseacute pour la synchronisation Ce champ doit identifier de ma-niegravere unique lrsquoutilisateur il permet de prendre en compte le cangement de login (par exemple employeeuidsur un LDAP ou objectguid pour un AD)

Avertissement Ne pas oublier drsquoactiver votre annuaire et de le deacutefinir lrsquoannuaire par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieursannuaires

Base DN et utilisateur authentifieacute

Attention le rootdn et le basedn doivent ecirctre eacutecrits sans espaces apregraves les virgules De plus la casse est importante

Exemple de rootdn mdash cn=Admin ou=users dc=mycompany incorrectmdash cn=Adminou=usersdc=mycompany correct

Pour Active Directory si on utilise le userprincipalname au lieu du samaccountname on peut avoir un rootdn sous laforme prenomnomdomainefr

Les paramegravetres agrave entrer sont tregraves simples par exemple mdash hocircte ldapmycompanyfrmdash basedn dc=mycompanydc=fr

216 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Et cela doit suffire si la recherche anonyme est permise Dans le cas contraire et si tous les utilisateurs ne sont paspositionneacutes au sein du mecircme DN il vous faut speacutecifier le DN drsquoun utilisateur autoriseacute et son mot de passe rootdnPassPour Active Directory il est obligatoire de renseigner un compte qui a le droit de srsquoauthentifier sur le domaine

En tentant de se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire gracircce agrave un browser LDAP il est possible de tester ces paramegravetres Il en existebeaucoup mais on peut citer

mdash LdapBrowser Editor (logiciel libre eacutecrit en Java et donc multi-plateforme)mdash ADSIedit pour Active Directory Cet outil se trouve sur les supports toolsoutils suppleacutementaires du CD drsquoins-

tallation de Windows Server

Note Si certains des utilisateurs ont des restrictions de connexion agrave certaines machines configureacutees dans leur profilAD lrsquoerreur suivante est possible lors drsquoune tentative de login sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI Utilisateur non trouveacuteou plusieurs utilisateurs identiques trouveacutes La solution consiste agrave ajouter le serveur heacutebergeant lrsquoAD agrave la liste desPC sur lesquels lrsquoutilisateur peut se connecter

Tester

Permet de tester la configuration deacutefinie dans lrsquoonglet Annuaire LDAP

Le message Test de connexion reacuteussi indique que GLPI a pu se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP avec les informationsrenseigneacutees (hocircte port compte utilisateur)

Il reste deacutesormais agrave importer les utilisateurs Pour cela il faut bien veacuterifier les autres paramegravetres (filtre de connexionchamps de login etc)

Utilisateurs

Permet de configurer comment va ecirctre effectueacute le lien entre les champs de lrsquoannuaire et ceux de GLPI Pour chaquechamp de GLPI (nom preacutenom image ) est associeacute un champ de lrsquoannuaire

Groupes

Permet de configurer la meacutethode de stockage des groupes au niveau de lrsquoannuaire

32 Modules 217

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Informations avanceacutees

Dans le cas ougrave lrsquoheure de la machine heacutebergeant lrsquoannuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas dans le mecircme fuseau horaire que celui deGLPI il faut modifier la variable Fuseau horaire afin drsquoajuster le deacutelai en effet cela peut provoquer des reacutesultatserroneacutes dans la liste des utilisateurs agrave synchroniser

Connexion LDAP seacutecuriseacutee

GLPI gegravere la connexion seacutecuriseacutee agrave un annuaire LDAP agrave travers une connexion SSL (aussi appeleacute LDAPS) Il suffitde rajouter devant le nom de lrsquohocircte (ou son IP) ldaps Ainsi que de changer le port (par deacutefaut 636) Par exemplelrsquoaccegraves en LDAPS en local donnera Hocircte ldaps 127001 Port 636

Limite du nombre drsquoenregistrement retourneacutes (sizelimit)

Il existe souvent deux limites sur le nombre maximum drsquoenregistrements retourneacutes par une requecircte LDAP mdash la limite du client (deacutefinie par exemple sur DebianUbuntu dans etcldapldapconf)mdash la limite imposeacutee par le serveur si la limite deacutefinie par le client est supeacuterieure agrave la limite serveur crsquoest cette

derniegravere qui prend le dessus

Avertissement Si la limite est atteinte lrsquooption de comportement lors de la suppression drsquoun utilisateur delrsquoannuaire ne peut fonctionner De plus GLPI affichera un message drsquoavertissement lors drsquoun import ou drsquounesynchronisation

Avec PHP 54 ou supeacuterieur il est deacutesormais possible de contourner la limitation du sizelimit en activant dans lrsquoongletInformations avanceacutees la pagination des reacutesultats Dans ce mode PHP va requecircter lrsquoannuaire autant de fois queneacutecessaire et par tranche de X reacutesultats jusqursquoagrave ce que lrsquoensemble des enregistrements soient renvoyeacutes

Lrsquooption Taille des pages permet drsquoajuster cette valeur de mecircme que nombre maximum de reacutesultats deacutefinit la limitedrsquoenregistrement agrave ne pas deacutepasser lors drsquoune requecircte LDAP (afin par exemple drsquoeacuteviter une erreur indiquant que PHPdemande plus de meacutemoire que ce qui lui est alloueacute)

218 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Sur un annuaire OpenLDAP la limite par deacutefaut est agrave 500 enregistrements sur un Active Directory elle est de1000

Sur un Active directory il est possible de modifier la valeur du MaxPageSize gracircce aux commandes suivantes (attentioncette modification est globale agrave tout lrsquoannuaire)

Reacuteplicats

Si un annuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas accessible les utilisateurs ne pourront plus se connecter agrave GLPI

Afin drsquoeacuteviter cette situation des reacuteplicats peuvent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes ils partagent la mecircme configuration que le serveurqursquoils reacutepliquent mais sont disponibles agrave une adresse diffeacuterente

Lrsquoutilisation des reacuteplicats se fait uniquement dans le cas drsquoune perte de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire maicirctre Lrsquoajout dereacuteplicats se fait dans la fiche drsquoun annuaire en renseignant un nom qui sera afficheacute dans GLPI ainsi qursquoun nomdrsquohocircte et un port Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires reacutepliqueacutes

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

Les annuaires LDAP ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

Intituleacutes

Certaines listes de seacutelections deacuteroulantes sont parameacutetrables dans GLPI mdash lieux

32 Modules 219

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash statuts de mateacuterielsmdash cateacutegories de ticketsmdash noms des logicielsmdash noms des constructeursmdash

En somme tout ce qui deacutepend drsquoune nomenclature propre agrave un contexte particulier doit ecirctre parameacutetreacute Si certains deces intituleacutes sont fournis avec une liste par deacutefaut la plupart des intituleacutes doivent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes dans lrsquoapplication

Par deacutefaut les intituleacutes ne peuvent ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute doit ecirctre activeacutee et permetalors de traduire lrsquoensemble des champs des intituleacutes

Les intituleacutes sont soit une liste de valeurs agrave plat (simple liste de valeurs) soit une liste arborescente (chaque eacuteleacutementpeut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements)

La premiegravere eacutetape est de seacutelectionner la liste agrave modifier Ensuite on peut ajouter des eacuteleacutements agrave la liste les modifier etles supprimer

Agrave chaque intituleacute est associeacute un commentaire Celui-ci est visible depuis les formulaires de GLPI Il apparaicirct au survolde lrsquoicocircne Aide associeacutee agrave la liste deacuteroulante

Il est possible de visualiser tous les types drsquointituleacutes existants en utilisant voir tous

Cette liste peut varier suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil Les intituleacutes avec fond plus fonceacute sont des intituleacutesglobaux alors que les autres peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutes par entiteacute

220 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuteneacuteral

Lieux

La liste des lieux est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements (Lieu 1 gt Sous-lieu 1 gtSous-sous-lieu 1) Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun lieu on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant ce lieu (code du bacirctiment de la piegravecelongitude latitude altitude) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant le lieu pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le lieu peut ecirctrevisible des sous entiteacutes

Lieux

Liste les sous-lieux existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Eleacutements

Liste tous les eacuteleacutements affecteacutes agrave ce lieu Vous pouvez choisir de nrsquoafficher qursquoun type drsquoeacuteleacutement (ordinateur utilisa-teur prise reacuteseau logiciel )

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

32 Modules 221

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

Prise reacuteseau

[image](docsimagepriseReseaupng)

Liste les prises reacuteseau affecteacutees agrave ce lieu et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquouneprise sur un port reacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants)apparaissent

Lrsquoajout peut ecirctre unique via la partie haute ou multiple via la partie basse Pour lrsquoajout multiple vous pouvez preacutefixerle numeacutero de la prise comme indiqueacute dans la copie drsquoeacutecran

Autre exemple considerant le preacutefixe bru 9 et 11 les bornes de la numeacuterotation et srv le suffixe les prises reacuteseaucreacuteeacutees seront nommeacutees bru09srv bru10srv et bru11srv

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Statuts

La liste des statuts est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee parentiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun statut on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant la visibiliteacute de ce statut ainsi quelrsquoinformation preacutecisant le statut pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le statut peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Statuts des eacuteleacutements

Liste les sous-statuts existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

222 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Fabricants

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Listes noires

La liste des Listes noires est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle comprend la valeur que vous voulez mettre en liste noire ainsi que sur quel type lrsquoappliquer (IP MAC numeacutero deseacuterie UUID ou courriel) Les listes noires sont utiliseacutees pour les imports automatique via un agent drsquoinventaire ou parle collecteur de courriels

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 223

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Contenu de courriel interdit

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Elle permet au collecteur de courriels de ne pas importer un courriel contenu le texte deacutefini Cela peut permettre entreautre de lutter contre le spam dans le cas de lrsquoautorisation de creacuteation de ticket pour les courriels anonymes

Assistance

Cateacutegories de ticket

La liste des cateacutegories de ticket est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de ticket on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant cette cateacutego-rie (responsable et groupe techniques pour lrsquoaffectation automatique des tickets (voir [configuration de lrsquoen-titeacute](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)) la cateacutegorie par deacutefaut de la base de connaissance lorsque lrsquoon sou-haite ajouter une solution drsquoun ticket dans celle-ci la visibiliteacute de cette cateacutegorie suivant lrsquointerface ou suivant lrsquoobjetainsi que les gabarits affecteacutees agrave cette cateacutegorie) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes En cas de choix drsquoun gabarit celui-ci sera affecteacute au choix de lacateacutegorie donc surchargera celle qui aurait u ecirctre deacutefinie dans lrsquoentiteacute ou via regravegle meacutetier

Un lien avec les cateacutegories de la base de connaissances est possible Si une cateacutegorie est choisie le clic sur lrsquoaide de lacateacutegorie du ticket dans un ticket amegravene directement agrave tous les articles de la base de connaissance de cette cateacutegorie

Cateacutegories de tickets

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

224 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Cateacutegories de tacircches

La liste des cateacutegories de tacircches est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

La fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de tacircche indique son nom ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Cateacutegories de tacircches

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Types de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Sources des demandes

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle preacutecise si cette source source doit ecirctre deacutefini par deacutefaut pour les tickets etou les collecteurs

32 Modules 225

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Gabarits de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Elle permet de preacutedeacutefinir le contenu ainsi que le type drsquoune solution et peut ecirctre visible ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Note Les gabarits de solution ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Statuts de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les statuts appliqueacutes agrave un projet ainsi que lrdquo(eacutetat de celui-ci

Types de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Types de tacircches de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types de tacircches appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Les onglets communs

226 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Calendrier

Les calendriers utiliseacutes au sein de GLPI sont parameacutetrables par entiteacute Ils sont caracteacuteriseacutes par des peacuteriodes drsquoouvertureainsi que des peacuteriodes de fermeture

Ces calendriers sont utiliseacutes dans les SLA (voir Configurer les SLAs) et la [configuration des enti-teacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)

Calendrier

Plages horaires

Correspond aux plages horaires drsquoouverture de lrsquoentiteacute Vous pouvez en ajouter autant que neacutecessaire par jour tant queces plages ne se chevauchent pas

Peacuteriode de fermeture

Liste les peacuteriodes de fermeture affecteacutees agrave ce calendrier et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle voir lca configurationdes peacuteriodes de fermeture

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 227

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Peacuteriodes de fermeture

La liste des peacuteriodes de fermeture est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Une peacuteriode de fermeture comprend un nom une peacuteriode et si cette fermeture est reacutecurrente ou non

Concernant le champ Reacutecurrent si celui-ci est agrave Oui cela signifie que la peacuteriode indiqueacutee est valable tout le tempsDans ce cas GLPI ne se soucierait pas de lrsquoanneacutee indiqueacutee

Tregraves utile pour indiquer les jours feacuterieacutes revenant chaque anneacutee (Noeumll Victoire de 1945 1er mai ) ou les peacuteriode defermeture de la socieacuteteacute (fermeacutee tous les ans du 1er au 31 aoucirct) et surtout cela eacutevite de ressaisir chaque anneacutee les mecircmesdates

Intituleacutes Internet

Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plusieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

Un eacutequipement se connecte au reacuteseau au travers de ports reacuteseaux

Agrave un port reacuteseau on associe un ou plusieurs Noms reacuteseau(voir ci-dessous)

Un Nom reacuteseau peut appartenir agrave un Domaine Internet Il peut contenir une ou plusieurs adresses IP (voir ci-dessous)et il peut avoir plusieurs alias

Une adresse IP appartient agrave un reacuteseau IP (voir ci-dessous)

Au niveau protocole IP les reacuteseaux sont indiffeacuteremment en IPv4 et en IPv6

Note GLPI gegravere indiffeacuteremment IPv4 et IPv6 La seule distinction provient du format des adresses et des masques

2128513766 est une adresse IPv4 alors que 2a00 1450 4007 803 1012 est en IPv6

GLPI considegravere IPv4 comme un sous-ensemble drsquoIPv6 les traitements sont les mecircmes

GLPI utilise deux repreacutesentations pour les adresses IP (IPv6 et IPv4) mdash La repreacutesentation binaire lui permet de faire lrsquoanalyse des relations entre reacuteseaux adresses et masques Elle est

inaccessible agrave lrsquoutilisateurmdash La repreacutesentation textuelle est celle utiliseacutee pour lrsquoaffichage et la saisie des donneacutees

Les adresses et les masques IPv4 sont repreacutesenteacutes par leur forme classique (ie 2128513766 2552552550) La repreacutesentation des adresses IPv6 est celle canonique (ie 2001 db8 0 85a3 ac1f 8001 plutocirct que 2001 0db8 0000 85a3 0000 0000 ac1f 8001) Lesmasques IPv6 sont repreacutesenteacutes sous la forme du preacutefixe de sous reacuteseau (ie nombre de bits agrave 1 dans lemasque)

Reacuteseaux IP

Les Reacuteseaux IP permettent de deacutefinir la topologie des reacuteseaux

Ils regroupent un ensemble drsquoadresses IP regroupeacutees selon la topologie deacutefinie par le plan drsquoadressage des administra-teurs du reacuteseau

Ils peuvent srsquoemboicircter la hieacuterarchie des reacuteseaux IP deacutepend des adresses et des masques de ces reacuteseauxainsi que de leurs identiteacutes drsquoappartenance Par exemple 192168102552552550 est un sous reacuteseau de192168002552552540)

228 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement La hieacuterarchie est geacutereacutee implicitement il est impossible de la modifier soi-mecircme

Un reacuteseau est composeacute au minimum drsquoune adresse et drsquoun masque Agrave cela peut srsquoajouter une passerelle

Un reacuteseau est dit adressable si il est utiliseacute pour le routage interne des ordinateurs En drsquoautres termes son masquede sous-reacuteseau et sa passerelle sont utiliseacutes par tous les eacutequipements du reacuteseau (si un ou plusieurs ordinateurs nrsquoontpas les mecircmes informations cela peut engendrer des problegravemes de routage ) Geacuteneacuteralement un reacuteseau ayant unepasserelle est adressable car la passerelle est connue de tous les eacutequipements et elle ne peut appartenir qursquoagrave un seulsous-reacuteseau Mais un reacuteseau adressable nrsquoa pas neacutecessairement de passerelle Crsquoest par exemple le cas des reacuteseauxpriveacutees (1921684802552552550 ) ou de la boucle locale (1270002552552550 ou 1128)

Les reacuteseaux sont modifiables depuis les intituleacutes ( Configuration gt Intituleacutes ) Internet gt Reacuteseaux IP

VLAN

Liste les VLAN associeacutes agrave ce reacuteseau IP et permet drsquoen associer un nouveau

Adresses IP

Liste les adresses IP de ce reacuteseau

Vous pouvez classer cette liste par numeacutero drsquoIP en cliant sur le lien Adresses IP ou par type de mateacuteriel en cliquant surle lien Trier par type drsquoeacuteleacutement Dans ce cas vous aurez un tableau par type drsquoeacuteleacutement

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 229

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Domaines Internet

Noms reacuteseau

Liste les noms reacuteseau du domaine

Alias reacuteseau

Liste les alias reacuteseau du domaine

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Reacuteseaux Wifi

A FAIRE

Noms reacuteseau

Un nom reacuteseau correspond agrave lrsquoidentification unique drsquoune machine du point de vue drsquoInternet

Geacuteneacuteralement un eacutequipement est identifieacute par un ou plusieurs noms particuliers sur le reacuteseau Le serveur DNS reacutesoudrace nom en adresse IP Dans le cas ougrave IPv4 et IPv6 sont utiliseacutes ce nom renverra deux adresses IP une en IPv4 etlrsquoautre en IPv6 Crsquoest pourquoi un nom reacuteseau peut avoir plusieurs adresses IP

Un nom reacuteseau est composeacute drsquoun nom qui correspond au label du FQDN (Cf [labelsFQDN](glossaryfqdn_labelhtml)) drsquoun [domaine internet](glossaryfqdnhtml) et de une ou plusieurs adressesIP

230 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Le champs reacuteseau IP apparaicirct afin de retrouver les informations sur les diffeacuterents reacuteseaux IP disponibles Cette in-formation nrsquoest pas conserveacutee dans le nom reacuteseau car il peut avoir plusieurs adresse IP et chacune peut appartenir agraveplusieurs reacuteseaux IP

Note Lors de la saisie drsquoun nom reacuteseau la validiteacute du nom ainsi que celle de chacune des adresses IP est veacuterifieacutee Siun de ces eacuteleacutement nrsquoest pas valide alors il est rejeteacute

Pour ajouter une adresse IP agrave un nom reacuteseau il faut cliquer sur le [image](docsimageaddcriteriapng) devant leschamps de saisie des adresses IP Pour supprimer une adresse IP il suffit drsquoeffacer le contenu du champs de lrsquoIP quelrsquoon souhaite retirer

Alias reacuteseau

Cet onglet liste les alias deacutejagrave preacutesents pour ce reacuteseau et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traditionnellement le nom reacuteseau est celui utiliseacute par le DNS pour la reacutesolution inverse drsquoune adresse IP alors que lesalias correspondent au CNAME du nomFQDN

De la mecircme maniegravere le nom de lrsquoalias doit un label FQDN valide

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Autres

Types

Quel que soit le type la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du type de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

32 Modules 231

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Modegraveles

Quel que soit le modegravele la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

Machines virtuelles

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute (modegraveles ou systegraveme de virtualisation eacutetat des machines virtuelles) la liste est une listede valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele ou du systegraveme de virtualisation ou celui de lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles

Seul lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles peut ecirctre traduit

Rubrique des documents

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle est valable pour toutes lesentiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Rubriques des documents liste des sous-rubriques deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Type de documents

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Lrsquoapplication propose un certain nombre de types par deacutefaut mais il est possible drsquoen ajouter en fournissant lesinformations suivantes

mdash le nom du type de document mdash lrsquoextension par exemple txt ou pdf la deacutetection des documents qursquoil est permis drsquoajouter se base sur cette

information mdash le nom du fichier pour lrsquoicocircne du document deacutesireacute Placez les fichiers drsquoicocircnes dans le reacutepertoire picsicones

sous lrsquoarborescence des fichiers drsquoinstallation de GLPI mdash le type MIME si neacutecessaire mdash lrsquoautorisation de teacuteleacutechargement de ce type de fichier (oui ou non)

Note Le type de document peut ecirctre une expression reacuteguliegravere Cela permet par exemple drsquoautoriser de deacutefinir unensemble de documents NOMFICHIERXXXXYYYY ougrave XXXX est un numeacutero et YYYY la date de lrsquoanneacutee fiscalecourante Dans ce cas preacutecis lrsquoexpression reacuteguliegravere pourrait ecirctre [0-9]+ pour indiquer toute extension composeacuteeexclusivement de nombres

Ces 2 variables peuvent ecirctre traduites

Outils (Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements ce qui facilite la navigation et larecherche Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance outre le nom de celle-ci on trouve lrsquoinformation preacutecisant lacateacutegorie megravere (comme enfant de) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance liste des sous-cateacutegories deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nou-velle

232 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Une cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance peut ecirctre traduite

Systegravemes drsquoexploitation

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Seul les sources de mise agrave jour peuvent ecirctre traduites

Reacuteseaux

Toutes les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat

Les interfaces reacuteseaux firmwares et reacuteseaux sont valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Prises reacuteseaux domaines et VLAN peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutees par entiteacute avec visibiliteacute ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Seules la liste Reacuteseaux peut ecirctre traduite

Prises reacuteseaux Une prise reacuteseau peut ecirctre lieacutee agrave un lieu Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquoune prise sur un portreacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants) apparaissentSi vous souhaitez plusieurs prises pour un mecircme lieu il est preacutefeacuterable drsquoeffectuer la creacuteation via le menu lieude la partie [Geacuteneacuteral](08_Module_Configuration02_Intituleacutes03_Intituleacutes_Geacuteneacuteralrst) du menu des intituleacutes

Logiciel (cateacutegories des logiciels)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Les valeurs sont deacutefinies pour toutesles entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de logiciels liste les sous-cateacutegories et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Une cateacutegorie de logiciels peut ecirctre traduite

Utilisateur

Les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elles peuvent ecirctre traduites

Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur (Critegravere LDAP)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Il est eacutegalement possible drsquoajouter un critegravere LDAP particulier

Uniciteacute des champs (valeurs ignoreacutees pour lrsquouniciteacute)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat qui peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute et applicable ou non au sous-entiteacutes

Il est possible de renseigner pour chaque type drsquoobjet des valeurs qui ne doivent pas ecirctre prises en compte lors de laveacuterification de lrsquouniciteacute drsquoun objet en base

Par exemple ne pas utiliser le numeacutero de seacuterie geacuteneacuterique laquo To Be Filled By OEM raquo pour veacuterifier si un ordinateur existedeacutejagrave dans GLPI

32 Modules 233

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Certains plugins peuvent apporter des intituleacutes suppleacutementaires qui sont parameacutetrables dans le mecircme menu

Authentifications externes

La liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

33 Advanced Configuration

331 Utilisation du cache

Les informations sur lrsquoutilisation du cache sont disponible dans Configuration Geacuteneacuterale Systegraveme)

Nouveau dans la version 92

Modifieacute dans la version 921

Si lrsquoun des systegravemes de cache APCu ou WinCache est preacutesent sur le serveur il sera automatiquement utiliseacute par GLPILe systegraveme se base sur ZendCache

Le cache permet drsquoameacuteliorer les performances sur certaines opeacuterations relativement lourdes telles que le chargementdes traductions ou le calcul des arbres des entiteacutes

On distingue deux caches distincts dans GLPI mdash le cache base de donneacuteesmdash le cache traduction

Cette distinction permet drsquoeacuteviter de stocker le cache des traductions sur un reacuteseau cela pourrait produire un trop grandnombre de requecirctes sur le reacuteseau et avoir au final un impact neacutegatif

A lrsquoinverse le cache de la base de donneacutees devrait ecirctre sur le reacuteseau en cas de frontaux multiples

Afin de vous permettre drsquoaffiner les reacuteglages ou drsquoutiliser un autre systegraveme de cache une solution manuelle estproposeacutee Pour en profiter ajouter dans la table glpi_configs une cleacute cache_db etou cache_trans pour lecontexte core et adapter la valeur en fonction de ce que vous souhaitez

Note Si le but est de deacutesactiver lrsquoun ou lrsquoautre de ces caches creacuteer la cleacute dans la table mais laisser la valeur vide

adapterapcu

adapterredisoptionsserverhost127001

Se reacutefeacuterer agrave la meacutethode ConfiggetCache() et agrave la documentation de ZendCache pour davantage drsquoinformations

Avertissement Si vous installez plusieurs instances de GLPI sur un mecircme serveur le namespace du cache doitecirctre unique par instance ce qui nrsquoeacutetait pas le cas dans GLPI avant la version 924

Si vous avez speacutecifieacute votre propre namespace dans la configuration assurez-vous qursquoil est bien unique sur chaqueinstance

Si votre version de GLPI est anteacuterieure agrave la 924 il faudra ajouter le namespace dans la configuration du cache dechacune de vos instances

234 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

332 OPCache

OPCache stocke des fichiers PHP preacute-compileacutes en meacutemoire et permet ainsi drsquoameacuteliorer les performances La seulechose agrave faire crsquoest de lrsquoinstaller sur votre instance de PHP et de le configurer (la configuration par deacutefaut devraitconvenir agrave la grande majoriteacute des cas)

Toutefois sur des instances qui pourraient ecirctre fortement solliciteacutees il peut ecirctre utile de ne pas inclures les fichiers depolices pour les PDF dans ce cache En effet elles y prennent eacutenormeacutement de place et le gain est relativement minime

Afin drsquoexclure les fichiers de police du cache il suffit de renseigner leur chemin complet dans un fichier deliste noire pour opcache Le chemin de ce fichier est deacutetermineacute par la diective de configuration opcacheblacklist_filename (etcphpdopcache-glpiblacklist par exemple sous Fedora) Si votre ins-tance de GLPI se situe dans le dossier varwww le chemin agrave exclure sera varwwwhtmlglpiglpi-921vendortecnickcomtcpdffonts

Bien entendu lrsquoemplacement du fichier de configuration et le chemin vers les polices est agrave adapter en fonction de votresystegraveme et de votre type drsquoinstallation

Les RPMS fournis pour Fedora (ou par le deacutepocirct Remi) offrent deacutejagrave cette fonctionnaliteacute par deacutefaut vous nrsquoaurez doncrien agrave faire )

34 Glossary

Accepted State of a demand which has been validated by an approver

Accreditation Authorization to perform a set of actions on several entities given by rights attribution process

Actions Grouping in a list of available handling of GLPI objects

Active Directory service Directory service compatible with LDAP directory provided by Microsoft Also knownas AD

Adaptive rule Rule in which at least one action is the result of a regular expression defined in a criteria

Administrative closing Modification of a ticket status to closed (manually or automatically)

Alert threshold Minimal value from which an alert is triggered

Asset Generic term for an element that can be inventoried and managed in GLPI

Automatic action Process for regular actions triggering either internal to GLPI or external (Unix cron Windowsplanned tasks )

Automatic closing GLPI internal process that closes unresolved tickets after a given time

Booking Element that is booked for a given period

Bookmark Stored link to a GLPI page that allows to access the page quickly

Budget Accounting operation that groups all provisional expenses and receipts

Cartridge Consumable used by a printer and specifically managed in GLPI

Case Physical element that contains a computerrsquos components (motherboard processor disk )

Closed (ticket) Status of a ticket whose solution has been approved by the ticket issuer or that has been closeautomatically

Collector Functionality of GLPI that allows to create tickets or followup by importing messages from a mailbox

Connection (network) Link between two network ports

Contact Referent person linked to a supplier

Contract Financial document linked to assets and to suppliers

Controller Device that interfaces with other peripheral device

Criteria Element or pattern used by search engines to select an information or used by rules engines and dictio-naries to perform actions

34 Glossary 235

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Default profile Profile attributed by the application in the absence of particular settings (rules manual attribu-tion )

Depreciation type Characteristic of depreciation which balance can be linear or declining

Dictionary Set of rules that allow to modify GLPI data

Direct connection Physical link between a computer and another asset

Document Element that defines a link andor store a file and that can be associated to other objects of GLPI

Domain Group of assets connected to a network

Dropdown Customizable dropdown list used in GLPI and plugins

Entity Organizational object allowing to partition view and action scope of users

Express renewal The contract is renewed only if both parties agree for its renewal (opposite to tacit renewal)

External link Link displayed on an asset form in GLPI and built dynamically using the asset data

Financial information Data for invoicing and warranty

Followup Exchange between a ticket issuer and the persons in charge of it

FQDN A FQDN (Fully qualified domain name) is a fully qualified domain nameFor example wwwglpi-projectorg forgeglpi-projectorg

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Specifically in GLPI selection of elements of the knowledge base that canbe provided independently for example articles that are made accessible to users having only access to thesimplified interface

Global management Management mode in which a unique inventory object can be connected to several compu-ters

Global note Public note that is also visible from sub-entities

Global right Permission on objects that are not linked to an entity

Global view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is common to all users

Group Grouping of users

Grouping Action of merging similar elements of distinct entities into the parent entity

Hive Entry in Windows registry

ICAL (ICalendar) Calendar importexport format

ID Technical identifier of an element

Identifier Connection name of a user (login)

IMAPPOP IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) and POP (Post Office Protocol) are messaging protocolsallowing to retrieve mail messages

Impact Measure of the effect of an incident problem or change in business process

In progress (attributed) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians

In progress (planned) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians andfor which an action is planned

Incident Unplanned interruption or quality decrease of a service

Intervention Action of a technician to solve an incident

Knowledge base Database allowing to gather analyze store and share knowledge and information inside anorganization

Label FQDN A FQDN is composed of labels separated by dots (ldquordquo)For example wwwglpi-projectorg is composed of labels www glpi-project and orgA computer name is composed of a label and the name of the domain it belongs to for example www name indomain glpi-projectorgIn GLPI labels are compliant with section 21 of RFC 1123

236 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

LDAP directory Directory service using the LDAP PROTOCOL (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Allowsin particular to store user accounts

Local right Permission applicable to a given scope (entity)

Location Name in GLPI allowing geographical localization of an asset

Logs List of events occurring during use of GLPI application

Mail domain Part of a mail adress that is after character

Manufacturer Company producing a hardware

Mount point Directory from which the data contained in a partition can be accessed

Network Name defining the connection type (internet local )

Network port Network interface that can be virtual or physical

Networks Hardwares providing interconnection of computer equipments

New (ticket) Default status of a ticket

Path Address allowing to localize an element in a tree structure

Pattern Character string used for comparison in a criteria

PDU Power Distribution Unit

Pending (Ticket) Status of a ticket which processing is temporarily suspended (does not impact processing time)

Personal note Note visible only by its writer

Personal view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is specific to a user

Planning Scheduling of a task in time scale

Plugin GLPI extension that allows to add functionalities andor to modify application behaviors

Power supply Bloc providing electric current to the components of a computer

Preferences Personal parameters of a user

Priority Scale that identifies the relative importance of a ticket and that results from impact and urgency

Private Element that is visible only by its writer (bookmark note )

Profile Set of rights

Provider Legal structure toward which a contractual relation can be established (purchase contract )

Public Element that is visible by all authorized users of an entity

Public note Note that is visible by all users of the notersquos entity

Purge Permanent deletion of elements placed in the trash bin

Recursivity Property of an object belonging to an entity that makes it visible from sub-entities

Refused State of a demand that has been invalidated

Registered user Person having an accreditation allowing to connect to GLPI

Regular expression Character string (often called pattern) that describes a set of accepted strings according to awell-defined syntax

Replicate (MySQL) MySQL database used by GLPI if main database (master) is not available

Report Document that sums up GLPI data

Requester Person at the origin of an incident ticket or a service request

Restoration Recovery of an element of the trash bin

Right Authorization of a user for a given action

Root entity First entity of GLPI entities tree structure that is always present even if no other entity is defined andthat cannot be deleted

Rule List of criteria that trig a list of actions if criteria are satisfied

Saved search Recording of GLPI search engine state that allows to store and perform again the search

34 Glossary 237

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Service General action of GLPI listed in the events

Simplified interface GLPI user interface that gives access to a reduced set of functionalities and that targets endusers (opposite to standard interface)

SLA SLA (for Service-Level Agreement) is a contract between a service provider and a client that defines therequested quality of service and the responsibilities in case of failure

Solved (ticket) Ticket state when a technical solution was provided for an incident

SSO Unique authentication system (SSO (Single Sign On))

Standard interface GLPI user interface that gives access to all functionalities (opposite to simplified interface)

Statistics Summary of GLPI data linked to tickets

Status State of an asset or of a ticket belonging to its life cycle

Sub-entity Child entity of an entity on a form indicates recursivity status

Subject Title or question of an element of the knowledge base

Supervisor Person in charge of a group of users

Tacit renewal The contract is renewed automaticaly if none of the parties declares its will to break it

Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is a VLAN which tag is transmited in networkframe (see 8021Q)

Task Action corresponding to a technical operation that can be planned

Technician User in charge of tickets processing

Template Reusable model of object containing predefined fieds and allowing easier user entry

Ticket GLPI object representing an incident or a service request

Tier type Category of providers

Transfer Action of moving an object from one entity to another

Trash bin Container of elements deleted by users Similar to the trash bin in a desktop environment it is anintermediate state before purge

Tree Hierarchical organization of data using a tree structure

Unitary management Management mode in which an inventory object can be connected to only one computer

Urgency Criteria defined by the requester that specifies for a ticket the desired resolution speed

User User of an asset that is not registered in GLPI user base

Validation Action of authorizing a ticket processing

Validator Person performing the validation of a ticket

VCard Virtual visit card

Virtual network port A virtual network port is a port which does not correspond to a physical network hardware

VLAN VLAN Virtual Local Network

Volume Storage area attached to a computer

Webcal Exchange format for calendar data

238 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

CHAPITRE 4

Documentation license

This documentation is distributed under the terms of the Creative Commons License Attribution-ShareAlike 30 France(CC BY-SA 30 FR)

For the complete terms of the license please refer to httpscreativecommonsorglicensesby-sa30frlegalcode

You are free to mdash Share mdash copy and redistribute the material in any medium or formatmdash Adapt mdash remix transform and build upon the material for any purpose even commercially

The licensor cannot revoke these freedoms as long as you follow the license terms

Under the following terms mdash Attribution mdash You must give appropriate credit provide a link to the license and indicate if changes were

made You may do so in any reasonable manner but not in any way that suggests the licensor endorses you oryour use

mdash ShareAlike mdash If you remix transform or build upon the material you must distribute your contributions underthe same license as the original

No additional restrictions mdash You may not apply legal terms or technological measures that legally restrict others fromdoing anything the license permits

239

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

240 Chapitre 4 Documentation license

Index

AAccepted 235Accreditation 235Actions 235Active Directory service 235Adaptive rule 235Administrative closing 235Alert threshold 235Asset 235Automatic action 235Automatic closing 235

BBooking 235Bookmark 235Budget 235

CCartridge 235Case 235Closed (ticket) 235Collector 235Connection (network) 235Contact 235Contract 235Controller 235Criteria 235

DDefault profile 236Depreciation type 236Dictionary 236Direct connection 236Document 236Domain 236Dropdown 236

EEntity 236

Express renewal 236External link 236

FFinancial information 236Followup 236FQDN 236Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 236

GGlobal management 236Global note 236Global right 236Global view 236Group 236Grouping 236

HHive 236

IICAL (ICalendar) 236ID 236Identifier 236IMAPPOP 236Impact 236In progress (attributed) (Ticket) 236In progress (planned) (Ticket) 236Incident 236Intervention 236

KKnowledge base 236

LLabel FQDN 236LDAP directory 237Local right 237Location 237

241

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Logs 237

MMail domain 237Manufacturer 237Mount point 237

NNetwork 237Network port 237Networks 237New (ticket) 237

PPath 237Pattern 237PDU 237Pending (Ticket) 237Personal note 237Personal view 237Planning 237Plugin 237Power supply 237Preferences 237Priority 237Private 237Profile 237Provider 237Public 237Public note 237Purge 237

RRecursivity 237Refused 237Registered user 237Regular expression 237Replicate (MySQL) 237Report 237Requester 237Restoration 237Right 237Root entity 237Rule 237

SSaved search 237Service 238Simplified interface 238SLA 238Solved (ticket) 238SSO 238Standard interface 238Statistics 238

Status 238Sub-entity 238Subject 238Supervisor 238

TTacit renewal 238Tagged VLAN 238Task 238Technician 238Template 238Ticket 238Tier type 238Transfer 238Trash bin 238Tree 238

UUnitary management 238Urgency 238User 238

VValidation 238Validator 238VCard 238Virtual network port 238VLAN 238Volume 238

WWebcal 238

242 Index

  • Preface
  • Installation
  • Table of contents
    • First Steps with GLPI
      • General
      • Understanding the interface
      • Manage your password
      • Manage your Preferences
      • Navigate GLPI modules
      • User interfaces
      • View and manage records
      • Search for information in GLPI
      • Saved Searches
        • Modules
          • Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes
          • Asset module
          • Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs
          • Module Gestion
          • Module Outils
          • Module Administration
          • Module Configuration
            • Advanced Configuration
              • Utilisation du cache
              • OPCache
                • Glossary
                  • Documentation license
                  • Index
Page 4: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement The documentation is being rewritten It is very likely that some parts are outdated that there aredead links etc

Table des matiegraveres 1

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 Table des matiegraveres

CHAPITRE 1

Preface

This documentation covers the installation and use of GLPI (Gestion Libre de Parc Informatique)

Free and open-source solution for IT asset management and helpdesk and more GLPI is a web application designedto manage all of your IT asset management issues from inventory management of hardware components and softwareto the management of user assistance

This guide is intended to give an overview of GLPI for both administrators and users

Each part can be consulted independently even if for reasons of logic we recommend that you read this documentationentirely

3

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

4 Chapitre 1 Preface

CHAPITRE 2

Installation

The GLPI installation documentation is available separately

5

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Chapitre 2 Installation

CHAPITRE 3

Table of contents

31 First Steps with GLPI

Everything you need to know to get started with GLPI

311 General

Choose a web browser

GLPI requires the use of a web browser

Optimal functioning of the application is obtained by using a modern browser compliant with web standards

The following web browsers are supported mdash Edgemdash Firefox (including 2 latests ESR version)mdash Chrome

GLPI also works on mobile it is generally compatible with the mobile versions of the supported browsers

How to connect

Open your browser and go to the GLPI homepage (httpsglpi_address)

Access to the full functionality of the application requires authentication An unauthenticated user can possibly accesscertain functions if GLPI has been configured to allow it

mdash View the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)mdash Open a ticketmdash

Depending on the profile of the authenticated user they may be shown the standard interface or simplified interface

7

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

End your session

To log out click the Logout button in the top right of the screen Once logged out you will be redirected to the loginpage

312 Understanding the interface

Depending on the userrsquos profile some menus and content may differ but the logic of the interface remains the same

The GLPI interface is made up of different areas grouping together the applicationrsquos functionalities according to theirnature

1 The user menu allows you to manage your preferences access help change the current language and discon-nect

2 The main menu allows you to navigate through the different modules

3 The breadcrumb trail allows you to locate the context of use of the main work area

4 The entity selector (in multi-entity mode)

5 The main working area is the privileged space for interaction with the application

6 The search box allows you to perform a global search at any time

313 Manage your password

The change password form can be found in user preferences

You must enter and confirm your password before validation The administrator can disable this feature so the changepassword area does not appear in this case

In the event that the user has forgotten their password the possibility of resetting it is offered to them from the loginpage The link is only present if notifications are enabled

Only users with an e-mail address defined in GLPI and not authenticating via an external source (LDAP mail serveretc) can use this functionality Once the renewal request has been made by entering their e-mail address the userreceives an e-mail providing them with a link allowing them to reset their password

Passwords must follow the defined security policy A real-time check of the entered password is then carried out

8 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

314 Manage your Preferences

User preferences are accessible from the Preferences tab of the user form by clicking on your name at the top rightof the interface from any page

Each authenticated user has the possibility to modify his preferences if they have the Personalize update right in theirprofile

Main Tab

Here the user can modify the usual personal information mdash Surnamemdash First namemdash Email addressmdash Phone numbersmdash Locationmdash Languagemdash

Note Some fields cannot be modified if they come from an LDAP directory

A user can add email addresses and select the default address which will be used for sending notifications

They can also specify some default behaviors of the application such as the selected profile and entity They can alsoturn off notifications for actions they take

Depending on the profiles the experienced user can also choose to exit the normal application mode In debug modeGLPI displays errors all variable values SQL queries etc It is useful to activate this mode in the event of GLPImalfunction A maximum amount of information can therefore be communicated to the developers This mode alsoallows you to have additional information on different objects in a specific tab (notifications etc)

31 First Steps with GLPI 9

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personalization Tab

This tab allows you to modify the general display preferences applied to a given user These parameters take priorityover those defined in the general configuration

Note The Number of results per page value shown here cannot exceed the maximum value set in the general displayoptions

Note that the Remote access key section allows you to regenerate the security key used to access the private flowsoffered by GLPI Currently the ICAL and WEBCAL flows of the planning are protected by this security key which isintegrated into the url

10 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personal View Tab

Lists custom views defined in objects by the user In particular it allows you to delete the personal views defined toreturn to global views

315 Navigate GLPI modules

The various functions of GLPI have been grouped into several modules built around similar contexts of use The topbar of the interface allows you to navigate between these modules

mdash The Assets module provides access to the various inventoried materialsmdash The Assistance module allows you to create and monitor tickets problems and changes as well as see statisticsmdash The Management module allows you to manage contacts suppliers budgets contracts and documentsmdash The Tools module allows you to manage projects notes the knowledge base reservations RSS feeds and view

reportsmdash The Administration module allows you to administer users groups entities profiles rules and dictionaries It

also allows the maintenance of the application (basic backup and restore check if a new version is available)as well as the management of the email queue

mdash The Setup module provides access to the general configuration options of GLPI notifications collectorsautomatic tasks authentication plugins external links SLA management of titles components as well ascontrol of the uniqueness of fields

The menus presented vary according to the authorizations of the logged in user The navigation context is presented tothe user in the breadcrumb trail

Note You will find at the bottom right a button allowing you to quickly return to the top of the page if necessary

There are keyboard shortcuts that allow you to navigate from one module submodule to another Here is the list ofthese shortcuts

mdash 1 =gt Homemdash Assets

mdash o =gt Computersmdash s =gt Software

mdash Assistancemdash t =gt Ticketsmdash a =gt Statisticsmdash p =gt Planning

mdash Managementmdash d =gt Documents

mdash Toolsmdash b =gt Knowledge basemdash r =gt Reservationsmdash e =gt Reports

mdash Administrationmdash u =gt Usersmdash g =gt Groups

mdash Setupmdash n =gt Dropdowns

Note The combination of keys to associate with these shortcuts varies depending on the operating systems andbrowsers used Here are some examples according to the browsers

mdash Mozilla Firefox ChromeSimultaneously press the keys Alt Shift and the desired shortcut

mdash Opera

31 First Steps with GLPI 11

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Simultaneously press the keys Esc Shift and the desired shortcut

In addition since version 92 GLPI offers navigation with approximate search (fuzzy) accessible from the keyboardshortcut Ctrl + Alt + G This will open a modal window allowing you to filter via a search field all the menus ofGLPI (all the levels are present you have for example access to the 3rd level such as the dropdowns or the components)

In this window additional shortcuts are available mdash and in order to navigate through the resultsmdash Enter to change the active glpi page on the selected resultmdash Esc to close the window

316 User interfaces

Note The choice of the default interface as well as the visiblity of different modules can be configured in the profilesor from the userrsquos preferences

Standard Interface

This is the main interface of the application All the modules are available but there are limits depending on the profilesettings

The home page of the standard interface provides a summary view for quick access to active elements (tickets notesplanning contracts etc)

It is divided into 5 views mdash Dashboard

A customizable dashboard

mdash Personal view

12 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Shows the tickets opened rejected to be processed to be approved (for which the logged-in user isthe requestor) or those on which this user has an interaction as a validator or technician (awaitingvalidation in progress to be closed in waiting) This view also offers him current issues his scheduleand available notes

mdash Group view

Offers the same information about tickets and issues as the personal view but using the groups to whichit belongs as a reference Depending on their profile they may or may not have access to the tickets forwhich their groups are requesting

mdash Global view

Offers statistics on tickets and issues according to their status and on contracts according to their expi-ration date It also offers the view of the latest additions of objects in GLPI Depending on the configu-ration used new tickets can also be presented in this tab

mdash RSS feed

Proposes the content of defined RSS feeds RSS feeds are managed from the laquo Tools gt RSS Feeds raquomenu

Note For Personal and Group views only tables with information are displayed

Note Two security messages may be displayed when you log in for the first time after completing the installationprocedure

The first asks you to change the passwords of the accounts created by default in GLPI the second asks you to deletethe directory glpiinstall

As long as you have not performed these operations the messages will remain

Simplified Interface

It is the most restrictive interface of the application and is built for an end-user more than a technician Therefore thenumber of available modules is reduced to a minimum

31 First Steps with GLPI 13

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is intended for users with very limited permissions in the application such as the built-in self-service and helpdeskprofiles

In the default configuration a user can from this interface only create tickets follow the processing of their ticketsmake reservations view the notes or public RSS feeds (or create private notes or feeds) and consult the FrequentlyAsked Questions

The home page offers the number of its tickets according to their status as well as the most popular and recent FAQtopics

317 View and manage records

The display of all the lists of records and of all the details concerning a record always works in the same way in GLPIWhether itrsquos a list of computers phones or tickets the presentation follows the same principle

A list of elements can be obtained in 2 ways mdash From the search engine

From the search engine after determining the criteria and validating the search a list of records isdisplayed By default no search criteria limit the list of recordings offered and the display is limited tothe first x records in the list which is configurable in the preferences

mdash From another list

Some tabs offer a list of related items For example from a list of computers click on the name of acomputer then navigate to the software tab The list of software installed on this computer is displayed

Details concerning a record are displayed in the form of tabs grouping together similar information For a computerthe financial information and the software list are in two separate tabs

Customize the display

The columns displayed from the complete list of the inventory can be configured Click on the button It ispossible to add delete and order the displayed columns

14 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash The global view applies to all profiles having access to a part of the inventory the modification of this partwill therefore be visible by all users

mdash The personal view applies only to the logged-in user and overrides the global view settings This view is onlyavailable if you have the User view right regarding the Search result display

This tab also allows you to reset the display customization of the different lists The user can for eachtype of object return to the default display by deleting this personalization

318 Search for information in GLPI

GLPI has a search engine allowing you to display a set of elements satisfying a certain number of criteria The proposedlists are paginated A navigation bar at the top and bottom of the list is used to define the number of items to displayper page and to navigate between pages

A global search engine (that is one that can use data from objects of different type) is also available

In addition to the list of elements corresponding to the stated criteria these lists offer some additional features mdash Export in different formats (CSV PDF )mdash Massive (Bulk) actionsmdash A marque-pages system to save searches

Perform a basic search

The basic search makes it possible to carry out multiple searches configured and sorted on one of the types of theinventory Depending on the data on which the search is carried out the following operators can be proposed

mdash containsmdash ismdash is notmdash beforemdash after

Searching on dates allows you to specify a specific date (Specify a date) or to define it in relation to the current date(Now + ou - X hour(s) day(s) month or year(s)) It is also possible to specify a search before or after a given date asdefined intervals (Monday Last Saturday Start of month Start of year Start of year etc)

For labels it is possible to search for a given value (is) If the dropdowns can be visible in the sub-entities the choicesunder and not under appear The criteria are added with the + on a gray background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes - Percentage free contains gt 80

Note Once the criteria have been defined the search is launched by pressing the Search button

Perform a multi-criteria search

The multi-criteria search makes it possible to refine the search by extending it to other types of objects by addingglobal search criteria This type of search is obtained by adding criteria with the + on a white background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space attached toa 17-inch monitor and having LibreOffice software installed

31 First Steps with GLPI 15

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory (Mio) contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes gt Percentage free contains gt 80AND multi Monitor gt Size contains 17AND multi Software gt Name contains LibreOffice

Items in Trash

Some items in GLPI can be trashed To view them in order to restore them or delete them permanently click on theicon representing a recycle bin To return to the display of active elements click again on this icon

Perform an advanced search

Here are some examples of search operators

NULLmdash Find the records with such empty field with a date field ltnumber_of_months orgt number_of_monthsmdash Search for materials with a deadline corresponding to the number of monthsmdash Search for computers that are 5 years old Date of purchase contains lt-60

^123 Find the records containing 123 at the start of the field

Avertissement On some systems you have to type ^ the space bar then the first character

^Windows Find records containing Windows 2000 Windows XP but not with Windows

123$ Find the records containing 123 at the end of the field

^123$ Find records containing only the text 123

Two search criteria linked by the operator AND NOT Find records that do not match a criterion (other than)

Entity is laquo Root entity raquo AND NOT Type contains laquo Laptop raquo Search for all computers in the laquo Root entity raquowhich are not laptops

[Year]-[Month]-[Day] (YYYY-MM-DD) Search by date

For security reasons the operator is not usable

Export the result of a search

The export of the search result in SLK or CSV spreadsheet formats or in PDF format can be done in two differentforms

mdash The current page exports only the data displayed on the screen (for example the first 10 results out of 200)mdash All pages exports all of the search results

The SLK format can be used by many spreadsheets Fields that are too long will be truncated when using software thatdoes not fully comply with the standards In this case it is preferable to use the exports in CSV format

If the data exported in CSV format is imported into Microsoft Excel software accented characters may not be displayedcorrectly This software seems to have difficulty with data encoded in UTF-8

16 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Perform massive actions

A massive action system is integrated into the search engine It allows you to make bulk modifications and performactions to all the selected elements Some examples of the available massive actions (Will differ based on the type ofitem)

mdash Put in trashbinmdash Delete permanentlymdash Restoremdash Connect Disconnectmdash Installmdash Updatemdash Add a contractmdash Enable the financial and administrative informationmdash Add to transfer listmdash Synchronize

To use it simply select the elements for which you want to perform an action then click on the Actions button availableat the top and bottom of the list Then once the type of action has been selected options are optionally presented aswell as a validation button

The results of the actions as well as the information messages are presented at the end of the execution of all theactions

Note mdash You will find in the headers of the table (at the top and at the bottom) a checkbox allowing you to select or

unselect all the elements of the listmdash A similar system of actions is available in certain lists present within the objects themselves The operation is

identical to that explained here

Avertissement The number of elements that can be handled simultaneously is limited by the values ofmax_input_vars or suhosinpostmax_vars in your PHP configuration You may therefore get a mes-sage indicating that massive edits are disabled You just need to increase the values of your PHP configuration orreduce the number of items displayed

Quick search

This tool is located at the top right of the GLPI screen It allows searching within elements including but not limitedto

mdash Ticketsmdash Problemsmdash Changesmdash Projectsmdash Computersmdash Monitorsmdash Softwaremdash Network Equipmentmdash Peripheralsmdash Printers

31 First Steps with GLPI 17

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Phonesmdash Contactsmdash Contactsmdash Suppliersmdash Documentsmdash Budgetsmdash Licensesmdash Usersmdash Groups

Note The search is carried out only on the fields displayed by default for each of the elements mentioned above Inessence it is the same as an items seen search on each type of element

319 Saved Searches

GLPI offers a system for saving searches (bookmarks) Once the search is done it is possible to save it from a star-shaped button accessible in the search form

There are two types of saved searches mdash Private searches Usable by all users and they are only accessible by their authormdash Public searches Can only be created by authorized users and are accessible by all users provided they belong

to the configured entitiesSaved searches can be accessed by clicking on the star shaped button in the user menu

18 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From this interface it is possible to mdash Reorder private searches (drag amp drop) - public searches use automatic sortingmdash Select a default search (only one possible per type of object) by clicking on the star iconmdash Access the search results (by simply clicking on it)mdash Access the saved searches management interface by clicking on the wrench icon at the top right

Avertissement Setting a particularly heavy search as the default display can have catastrophic effects on theoverall performance of the application

Display of counters

The GLPI settings are used to define whether the counters should be displayed or not In the case of research itrsquos a bitmore complicated

This is because some searches can take a long time (and resources) to complete In order to limit the impact onperformance the heaviest requests are not counted by default So that the execution time of a saved query can becalculated it must be executed at least once A scheduled task is also offered to calculate execution times regularly(and thus avoid requests that would have become heavy over time)

Administrators can override the automatic count method and have a search always or never be counted This possibilityshould be used sparingly

Configuring alerts

It is possible to configure the sending of ldquoalertsrdquo on a saved search using the GLPI notification system Sending anotification is based on the number of results returned by the search compared with the chosen operator to the enteredvalue

31 First Steps with GLPI 19

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The notification(s) used are displayed for reference from the alerts configuration tab For private research only theuser who created the search can be notified using a template provided by default in this case a single notificationwill be linked

For public searches a specific event must be created as well as a notification that uses it This is only possible fromthe alerts configuration tab

Once the specific notification is created it has to be configured by associating it with a template and by selecting thedesired recipients Note that it is possible to associate several notifications with the same search via the event thatcorresponds to it

Note As long as the notification specific to a public search is not created it will not be possible to add alerts

32 Modules

321 Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes

Les actions

Les diffeacuterentes actions possibles sur lrsquoobjet deacutependent des droits attribueacutes dans votre profil

De mecircme certaines actions dans lrsquoonglet deacutependent des droits du profil (comme les actions de masse)

Ne sont listeacutees ici que les actions principales pouvant ecirctre reacutealiseacutees sur diffeacuterents objets Si une action est speacutecifique agraveun objet elle sera deacutecrite dans la fiche de cet objet

Creacuteation

Le droit de creacuteer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoajout srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Cliquer sur le laquo + raquo situeacute dans le menu horizontal

4 Si lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire en possegravede une gestion de gabarit choisir un gabarit agrave appliquer

5 Compleacuteter les diffeacuterents champs de la fiche vierge

20 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Valider

Une option preacutesente dans les preacutefeacuterences utilisateur (Apregraves la creacuteation aller agrave lrsquoeacuteleacutement creacuteeacute) permet de deacuteterminersi lrsquoutilisateur souhaite apregraves la creacuteation lrsquoaffichage de la fiche nouvellement creacuteeacutee ou une autre fiche vierge pourcreacuteation en seacuterie

Modification

Le droit de modifier un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la modification srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste desobjets

4 2 choix de modification

mdash Modification unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Modifier les champs souhaiteacutes

3 Cliquer sur le bouton Actualiser

mdash Modification en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

3 Choisir le champ agrave modifier

4 Indiquer la nouvelle valeur du champ

5 Cliquer sur le bouton Envoyer

Affichage

Le droit de visualiser un objet deacutepend du droit Lecture deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur Si vous nrsquoavez pas le droitde visualiser un objet le nom de celui-ci nrsquoapparaitra pas dans les diffeacuterents menus de GLPI

Par exempl si vous supprimer le droit de lecture de lrsquoobjet Ordinateur dans votre profil le sous-menu Ordinateurnrsquoapparaitra pas dans le menu Parc mecircme si vous avez le droit de modifier un ordinateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la visualisation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour visualiser un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur via le moteur de recherche situeacute en haut de la liste des objets

4 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

Association drsquoun document

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoassociation agrave un document srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

32 Modules 21

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Documents

3 Seacutelectionner un document ou cliquer sur le bouton Parcourir pour en ajouter un

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un DocumentAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au document

Association drsquoun contrat

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire si celui-ci peut ecirctre lieacute agrave un contrat lrsquoassociation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircmemaniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un contrat agrave un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Contrats

3 Seacutelectionner un contrat

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un ContratAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au contrat

Transfert entre entiteacutes

Avec la notion drsquoentiteacutes vient la possibiliteacute de deacutefinir des profils de transfert pour les mutations drsquoeacuteleacutements entreentiteacutes

Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet notamment de passer drsquoun GLPI mono entiteacute agrave un GLPI multi-entiteacutes en utilisant lestransferts

Comment faire un transfert

1 Utiliser un profil qui a le droit de faire des transferts (Administration gt Profils gt Administration ndashgt Droit leLecture sur Transfeacuterer)

2 Configurer les actions faites par le transfert ([Administration gt Regravegles ndashgt Transfeacute-rer](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst))

3 Srsquoassurer que le profil qui va effectuer le transfert a une visibiliteacute sur lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante et sur lrsquoentiteacute prenante (leplus simple est drsquoutiliser un profil reacutecursif depuis lrsquoentiteacute racine)

4 Se positionner sur lrsquoEntiteacute racine (Voir Tous)

5 Depuis la liste des objets seacutelectionner lrsquoeacuteleacutement agrave transfeacuterer

22 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Choisir Ajouter agrave la liste de transfert et Valider 7 Dans Mode de transfert choisir un profil de configuration du transfert (creacuteeacute en point 2) 8 Seacutelectionner lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle sera transfeacutereacute lrsquoeacuteleacutement 9 Cliquer sur Transfeacuterer

10 Veacuterifier dans la nouvelle entiteacute que le mateacuteriel srsquoy trouve bien

Note Si un eacuteleacutement lieacute nrsquoexiste pas dans la nouvelle entiteacute il sera automatiquement creacuteeacute si le profil de transfertdemande de le conserver

Exemple transfert drsquoun ordinateur avec un fournisseur deacutefini dans les informations financiegraveres Si ce fournisseurnrsquoexiste que dans lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante il sera creacuteeacute dans lrsquoentiteacute prenante Par contre un fournisseur deacutefini dans lrsquoentiteacuteracine en reacutecursif ne sera pas recreacuteeacute

Avertissement Le lieu et le groupe seront agrave adapter pour la nouvelle entiteacute

Suppression

Le droit de supprimer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la suppression srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere 1 Se connecter agrave GLPI 2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur) 3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des

objets Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes

mdash Suppression unitaire 1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton

mdash Suppression en masse 1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

Dans les deux cas de figure il faudra choisir mdash Mettre agrave la corbeille si lrsquoobjet possegravede une corbeille mdash Supprimer deacutefinitivement si lrsquoobjet ne possegravede pas de corbeille

Dans le cas drsquoun objet ne posseacutedant pas de corbeille GLPI demandera une confirmation avant la suppression deacutefinitivede lrsquoobjet dans la base de donneacutees Dans le cas contraire lrsquoobjet sera mis dans la corbeille drsquoougrave il pourra ecirctre restaureacute(sorti de la corbeille)

La gestion des gabarits dans GLPI

Preacutesentation

Pour certains eacuteleacutements de GLPI il est possible de creacuteer de nouveaux eacuteleacutements (ordinateurs par exemple) depuisdes gabarits preacutealablement deacutefinis Un gabarit deacutefinit un masque de creacuteation certaines valeurs peuvent ecirctre deacutefiniesdirectement ou calculeacutees en fonction drsquoun masque (comme un numeacutero drsquoinventaire par exemple)

La gestion des gabarits se reacutealise via lrsquoicocircne situeacutee dans la barre de menu

32 Modules 23

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Eleacutements de lrsquoinventaire

Pour les eacuteleacutements de lrsquoinventaire le gabarit deacutefinit un eacuteleacutement standard en preacute-remplissant certains champs qui serontreacuteutiliseacutes pour la creacuteation drsquoautres eacuteleacutements Cela permet de simplifier lrsquoajout drsquoun grand nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements quasiidentiques

Par example afin de preacuteparer la reacuteception de 20 imprimantes identiques dont seuls les numeacuteros de seacuterie et drsquoinventairechangent

mdash creacuteer un gabarit correspondant agrave ce modegravele drsquoimprimantemdash dans ce gabarit remplir tous les champs invariables (constructeur modegravele etc)mdash creacuteer ensuite les 20 fiches drsquoimprimantes drsquoapregraves ce gabarit

Lors de la saisie de chaque imprimante le numeacutero de seacuterie et le numeacutero drsquoinventaire seront les seuls eacuteleacutements agravecompleacuteter

Le systegraveme drsquoincreacutementation

Un systegraveme de remplissage et drsquoincreacutementation automatique de certains champs (reconnaissables gracircce au ) estdisponible Ces champs (nom numeacutero drsquoinventaire ) sont alors remplis automatiquement agrave la creacuteation si le champcorrespondant dans le gabarit contient une chaicircne de formatage de la forme ltXXXgt

La chaicircne de formatage doit impeacuterativement deacutebuter par le caractegravere lt et se terminer par le caractegravere gt

Au sein de la chaicircne vous pourrez utiliser les caractegraveres suivants mdash X repreacutesente un caractegravere quelconque mdash g recherche du numeacutero parmi tous les champs identiques baseacutes sur le mecircme format mdash emplacement du numeacutero agrave increacutementer (nombre de chiffres eacutegal au nombre de ) mdash Y anneacutee sur 4 chiffres mdash y anneacutee sur 2 chiffres mdash m mois mdash d jour

Par exemple en poursuivant lrsquoexemple citeacute plus haut il est possible drsquoutiliser la fonctionnaliteacute drsquoincreacutementation pourcreacuteer automatiquement les numeacuteros drsquoinventaire

Ceux-ci sont composeacutes par exemple de la forme ANNEE+MOIS+JOUR+code structure (555) + code opeacuteration(1234) + numeacutero agrave increacutementer il suffira de renseigner dans le gabarit pour le champ numeacutero drsquoinventaire la chaicircneltYmd-555-1234-gt

Chaque imprimante agrave sa creacuteation verra son numeacutero drsquoinventaire geacuteneacutereacute automatiquement et increacutementeacute de 1 agrave 20

Gabarits de ticket

Tout comme les objets drsquoinventaire une notion de gabarit existe pour les tickets Un gabarit permet de personnaliserlrsquointerface de deacuteclaration drsquoun ticket en fonction du type de ticket et de la cateacutegorie

Les comportements pouvant ecirctre modifieacutes sont mdash la liste de champs devant ecirctre obligatoires pour lrsquoouverture drsquoun ticket mdash la liste des champs dont la valeur sera preacutedeacutefinie lors de lrsquoaffichage du formulaire mdash la liste des champs qui doivent ecirctre masqueacutes

Note Pour le controcircle des champs obligatoires seuls les champs disponibles dans lrsquointerface de lrsquoutilisateur sontcontrocircleacutes

24 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Donc si un champ est deacutefini comme obligatoire mais qursquoil nrsquoest pas proposeacute dans lrsquointerface il ne geacuteneacuterera pas drsquoerreurA la saisie des champs obligatoires sont afficheacutees les interfaces dans lesquelles ils sont utiliseacutes

Un gabarit est lieacute agrave lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle il a eacuteteacute deacutefini et peut ecirctre visible dans les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis pour les entiteacutes ou les profils Pour les profils ne sont associables que desgabarits de lrsquoentiteacute racine visibles de toutes les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent eacutegalement ecirctre deacutefinis pour chaque cateacutegorie de ticket (un pour chaque type)

A la creacuteation du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est par ordre de prioriteacute 1 Celui deacutefini dans la cateacutegorie deacutefinie pour le type deacutefini2 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour le profil courant de lrsquoutilisateur3 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour lrsquoentiteacute de creacuteation du ticket

Avertissement Dans les 2 derniers cas si le gabarit preacutedeacutefinit un nouveau couple typecateacutegorie le premier casest alors testeacute de nouveau avec ces nouvelles valeurs

Note mdash A la mise agrave jour du ticket le mecircme ordre de prioriteacute est utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer les champs obligatoiresmdash Si un des paramegravetre (entiteacute profil type ou cateacutegorie) est modifieacute lors de la saisie du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est

alors deacutetermineacute une nouvelle fois en fonction des nouvelles valeursmdash Le gabarit sert agrave la creacuteation de tickets reacutecurrents

Les statuts dans GLPI la vue speacutecifique

Cette information est couramment utiliseacutee pour distinguer le mateacuteriel mis au rebut disponible affecteacute etc Il estdonc possible de creacuteer ses propres statuts en rapport avec le systegraveme drsquoinformation

Crsquoest agrave lrsquoadministrateur de GLPI depuis la configuration des intituleacutes de deacutefinir les statuts qui seront utiliseacutes et pourquels types drsquoeacutelements ils le seront Ces statuts peuvent ecirctre arborescents pour faciliter la gestion

Le statut drsquoun eacuteleacutement est modifiable depuis sa fiche ou depuis le systegraveme drsquoactions massives

Un rapport vous propose une synthegravese des statuts par type de mateacuteriel La recherche globale de lrsquoinventaire vouspermet une recherche par statut sur lrsquoensemble des eacuteleacutements

322 Asset module

The GLPI Asset module is used to manage all the assets that are part of your IT infrastructure

Asset management in GLPI

In order to manage hardwares and softwares of an IT infrastructure GLPI allows natively to list all the assets that areused inside the managed organization

However it is possible to automate information pushing from the assets thanks to third-party tools GLPI supports theuse of two existing plugins

mdash The Fusion Inventory plugin transforms GLPI into an inventory server with the Fusion Inventory agents inter-facing directly with the GLPI server

mdash The ocsinventoryng plugin allow to synchronize the GLPI database with the OCS Inventory NG inventorytool the agents installed on the computers interface directly the the OCS Inventory NG server

32 Modules 25

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Available types

Computers

In a computer form the following information is available mdash Operating system

mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Service packmdash Serial numbermdash Product IDmdash

mdash General characteristics mdash Manufacturermdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Management informations mdash Technical managermdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Users mdash Computer users either known by GLPI or not

Other fields are informative such as Network (connexion type) and Update source (where are computer updatescoming from (Windows update yum apt )

It is possible to use templates with computers

Note mdash when GLPI is used with an inventory tool various informations provided by the tool itself are also availablemdash a computer can be a server a desktop computer or a laptop to differentiate them it is possible to use the type

field

The different tabs

Operating systems

The informations on operating systems for a computer are visible in tabs Operating system for a Computer entry

26 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

An operating system is associated with the following elements mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Architecturemdash Service Packmdash Kernelmdash Editionmdash Product IDmdash Serial number

Note The creation and management of the titles for operating systems is located in the menu Configuration gtDrop-downs gt Operating systems

Note A deletion or addition of an operating system is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the operation system informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 27

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

28 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

32 Modules 29

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Volumes

This tab named Volumes and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the volumes attached to a computer

A volume attached to a computer is characterized by mdash namemdash physical partitionmdash mount pointmdash file systemmdash total sizemdash available sizemdash ciphering algorithm and type

It is possible from a Computer entry to add a volume by clicking on button Add a volume

30 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible from a Computer entry to modify an existing volume by clicking on the link under its name

Note Every deletion or addition of a volume is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the volumes informations can be automatically importedand updated

Softwares

This tab named Softwares and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the softwares installed on a computerThese softwares are sorted by their category and are characterized by name version and version status

To install a software first select its name in the drop-down list then its version

It is possible to associate a license to a software on a computer

To associate a license first select the software in the drop-down list then the wanted license

If the license is associated with a software that is already installed on the computer it will be presented in the list ofsoftwares

32 Modules 31

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Otherwise it will be displayed in a separate table

Note mdash the drop-down list enumerates the softwares that are available in the entitymdash licenses management can be found in Assets gt Softwares See Manage softwares

Note It is possible via mass actions to install on a computer a software selected from its license

Note Every deletion or addition of a software or a license is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the softwares informations can be automatically importedand updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 33

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

34 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

32 Modules 35

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

36 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 37

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

38 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 39

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Virtualization

This tab displays the virtualization systems (virtual machines containers jails ) associated to a host

The available information vary from one system to another for a virtual machine for instance it includes namevirtualization system virtualization model state allocated memory number of logical processors as well as thename of the physical machine (the host)

GLPI establishes the link between a host and a virtual machine based on the unique identifier (UUID) In some caseit is possible that the UUID is different inside the physical machine and the virtual machine it is therefore impossibleto make the link automatically

The only way to link manually a virtual machine to a physical machine is to attribute the same UUID to the virtualmachine declared on the host and to the virtual machine inside GLPI

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the virtualization informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Antivirus

This tab named Antivirus and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the antivirus running on a computer

An antivirus is characterized by mdash namemdash activenon activemdash vendormdash update statusmdash antivirus versionmdash signature database versionmdash expiration date

Note Every deletion or addition of an antivirus is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the antivirus informations can be automatically importedand updated

40 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 41

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

42 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 43

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to computers mdash Install a software with a license on a computer From the tab Softwares add a license by choosing the name

of the software followed by the name of the license From the Mass actions of summary table choose Install

Avertissement A software can only be installed if its license has a version in use or a purchase version

Displays

In a display form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the display

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Display management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Display users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Sizemdash Resolutionmdash Port types (VGA DVI HDMI DisplayPort)

44 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Integrated soundmdash Connectivitymdash

Management type

It is possible to manage displays either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one display per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with displays

The different tabs

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 45

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

46 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 47

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

48 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 49

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

50 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 51

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to displays mdash connect a display to a monitor

Softwares

GLPI allows management of softwares and their versions as well as licenses associated or not to software versions

A software is by default associated with an entity

Financial management is done at the level of licenses the financial management at software level is only a model forthe licenses associated with this software

Softwares can be imported automatically using a third-party inventory tool in this case a dictionary can be usedto filter or clean the import data (see [Configure data dictionaries](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrstlaquo The dictionaries are managed from menu entry Administration gt Dictionaries raquo))

Some fields are specific in the software form mdash Update is an information with no processing associated and which tells whether the software is an update of

another softwaremdash Category allows to group softwares in the list of softwares of an asset

52 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Can be associated with a ticket defines whether the software can be seen in the drop-down list laquo Hardware raquoof a ticket

It is recommended to first create the software without a version number in the name then to create the versions andlast to create the licenses

Note In multi-entity mode the list of software can rapidly become long because of double entries (one softwareper entity) A better approach can consist in grouping identical softwares in the same entity (see tab Grouping below)then to make recursive the elements that can be made recursive

It is possible to use templates with softwares

The different tabs

Versions

A version of a software is the element that can be installed on a asset see also Installations tab

The main view lists the number of installations of the version

Specific fields mdash Name the version numbermdash Status in ITIL recommendations it allows to follow the DSL (library storing authorized versions)mdash Operating system the operating system on which this software version runsmdash Installations the number of installations of the versionmdash Comment some comments

Licenses

Installations

The installation of a software on a computer is visualized through a version and can be consulted on a software form(list of computers having at least one version installed) on a version form (computers having this version installed)and finally on a computer form (list of versions of installed softwares sorted by category)

Note mdash Column license is filled only when the license is affected to the concerned computermdash The initial display of different categories depend upon user preferences (see [manage preferences](01-

premiers-pas03_Utiliser_GLPI04_Geacuterer_ses_preacutefeacuterencesrst raquo)

Two options are available on the list of installations of software on a computer Above the list Install allows toinstall manually a version of a software on the computer by selecting first the software and its version if a license isassociated with this software the use version of the license is automatically selected

To Uninstall a version of a software mass actions must be used first select the versions to be uninstalled then selectSuppress definitively If a license is affected to the computer it remains affected but its use version is erased

Following the list of installed versions the list of affected but non installed licenses is displayed It is possible to adda new license to the computer Mass actions allow via the action Install to install a use version of selected licenses

32 Modules 53

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

54 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

32 Modules 55

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

56 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

32 Modules 57

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

58 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Grouping

This section describes how to group software having same names in sub-entities allowing to group softwares of childentities into mother entity

Note This is only available for multi-entities platforms

How to realize a grouping

1 If the software does not exist in mother entity create in this mother entity a software whose name is strictlyidentical to the name of software in child entities

2 Open the form of the software of the mother entity

3 Activate recursivity (sub-entities to Yes at top right) this will make a new tab Grouping appear after tab History

4 Open this tab a list displays softwares having same names in child entities

5 Select appropriate lines and validate grouping

Avertissement This operation cannot be undone

This grouping have the following effects mdash Licenses are attached to the software in mother entity but stay in origin sub-entitiesmdash Versions are merged no more doubles in mother entitymdash Old softwares are moved to the trash

Note When using a third-party inventory tool some extra steps are mandatory mdash Empty trash after grouping otherwise synchronization will restore the old software in case of new versionmdash Associate the same vendor to the new software as the synchronization checks vendor name a new software

would then be created

32 Modules 59

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to softwares mdash Add a version to a softwaremdash [Manage licenses](03_Module_Parc04_LogicielsOnglet_Licencesrst) From menu Assets gt Softwares

click on license name in tab Licenses

Licenses

A software license is a right to use the software Its specific fields include mdash Name commercial naming of the licensemdash Purchase version the version that was boughtmdash Use version the real installed version of the software

Purchase version and use version can be different however the use version must be compliant with the purchaseversion

Version type describes the specifics of the right to use the software OEM type is the only type that is configured bydefault in GLPI Refer to configure types

60 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Number field displays the number of installations that are allowed with this license It can be a user number (floatinglicense) a number of installations (multiple license) an unlimited number of installation (site license) It is possibleto assign the license to one or several corresponding computers for instance if the license is of type OEM

Expire date is the limit date that allows the use of the license After this date a notification can be triggered for alertsto be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Indication This is configurable at entity level in menu Configuration gt Notifications in order to define usedmodels and recipients and in menu Configuration gt Entity to activate or not this functionality define default valueand anticipation of notification sending if needed

Astuce Expired licenses are not counted in the total of available licenses

It is possible to link contracts with licenses refer to [Manage contracts](05_Module_Gestion05_Contratsrstlaquo Contracts are managed via menu Management gt Contracts raquo))

Astuce When activating the accounting information for a license data are initialized from software accountinginformation which act as a model

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Summary raquo Displays a table containing the number of computers using this license

mdash Tab laquo Computers raquo Displays a table listing the computers using this license including in particular computername serial number inventory number location status group and user Mass actions are available if autho-rized for the computers to delete license use on selected computer or to assign another license of the samesoftware to selected computer (action Move)

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 61

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

62 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 63

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

64 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 65

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

mdash Display software license details From menu Assets gt Software click on license name in tab Licensesmdash Remove use of a license by a computer See tab Computers above See also [tab Softwares of a compu-

ter](modulesassetssoftwaresrst)mdash [Associate a document and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsassocier_un_document_a_un_objetrst)mdash [Associate a contract and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_contrat_agrave_un_objetrst)

Network equipments

Network equipment represent the hardware that manages transmits and route network between several other equip-ments (computers printers )

A network equipment can be a switch an Ethernet hub a router a firewall or a WiFi access point

It is possible to use templates with network equipments

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

66 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

32 Modules 67

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

68 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

32 Modules 69

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

70 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

mdash Tab laquo Network names raquo Summary of IP address and IP networks for each network name

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 71

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

72 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 73

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

74 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 75

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

76 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Network equipments do not have specific actions report to common actions

Peripherals

In a peripheral form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the peripheral

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Peripheral management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Peripheral users mdash Users known to GLPI or not

32 Modules 77

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Groups of usersmdash

Management type

It is possible to manage peripherals either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one peripheral per computer while global management make the peripheral avirtual global element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with peripherals

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

78 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

32 Modules 79

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

80 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

32 Modules 81

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

82 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

32 Modules 83

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

84 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was ordered

32 Modules 85

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

86 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

32 Modules 87

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

88 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 89

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Peripherals do not have specific actions report to common actions

Printers

In a printer form several informations are available mdash General characteristics of the printer

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Printer users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Page countermdash Port typesmdash

Management Type

It is possible to manage printers either unitary or globally

90 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Unitary management corresponds to one printer per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with printers

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

32 Modules 91

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

92 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Cartridges

This tab displays the cartridges associated with the selected printer model mdash cartridges in use with add date and use datemdash used cartridges with cartridge model add date use date end of life date printing counter and number of

printed pages since last cartridge change

Note For cartridge adding or removing report to cartridges management

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Modules 93

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

94 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

32 Modules 95

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

96 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 97

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

98 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 99

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

100 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 101

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

102 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Printers do not have specific actions report to common actions

Cartridges

This functionality of Asset module allows to create cartridges models and corresponding cartridges

In a cartridge form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the cartridge

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage sitemdash

The alert threshold is the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

32 Modules 103

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

For a cartridge to be installable on a printer it must be declared as compatible with this printer

Management of shared stock is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Cartridges raquo This tab allows adding as many cartridges as needed by the model It is also possible toadd several cartridges at once

A first table lists the new or unused cartridges the second table lists used cartridges

mdash Tab laquo Printer models raquo This tab allows to declare the printer models that are compatible with the cartridge

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

104 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 105

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

106 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 107

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

108 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

mdash [Add a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsCreacuteer_un_nouvel_objetrst)mdash [See a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsVisualiser_un_objetrst)mdash [Modify a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsModifier_un_objetrst)mdash [Delete a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsSupprimer_un_objetrst)mdash Add new cartridges to a model See tab Cartridges abovemdash Add a printer model for the cartridge model See tab Printer model abovemdash [Associate a document with a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_document_agrave_un_objetrst)mdash [Transfer a cartridge to another entity](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsTransfeacuterer_un_objetrst)

Consumables

In a consumable form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the consumable

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Consumable management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage locationmdash

The alert threshold corresponds to the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Changing the state of a consumable from new to used requires to set involved user or group

Management of shared stocks is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

Consumables

This tab allows to add as many consumables as needed It is also possible to add several consumable in one shot

A first table lists unused consumables a second table lists used consumables together with the name of the group orthe person to which it has been allocated

The mass actions of this tab allows to allocate consumables (action Give)

32 Modules 109

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

110 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 111

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

112 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 113

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to consumables mdash Add new consumables to a model mdash List allocated consumables

Right icon allows to have a summary of allocated consumables

Phones

In a phone form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the phone

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Phone management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Phone users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Power supplymdash Firmwaremdash

Management type

It is possible to manage phones either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one phone per computer while global management make the phone a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with phones

114 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

32 Modules 115

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

116 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 117

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

118 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and a

32 Modules 119

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

network plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

120 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

32 Modules 121

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

122 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 123

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

124 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

32 Modules 125

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

126 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

Phones do not have specific actions report to common actions

Global search

Menu Asset gt Global allows to perform a global search on default view columns for allowed elements This search islimited to following assets

mdash Computermdash Contactmdash Contractmdash Documentmdash Monitormdash NetworkEquipmentmdash Peripheralmdash Phonemdash Printermdash Softwaremdash SoftwareLicensemdash Ticketmdash Problemmdash Changerdquomdash Usermdash Groupmdash Projectmdash Supplierrdquomdash Budgetmdash Certificatemdash Linemdash Datacentermdash DCRoommdash Enclosuremdash PDUmdash Rackmdash Clustermdash Domain

This search allows for instance to perform a query by status IP or MAC address

Agrave faire Referenced in original doc but not present mdash [Gestion du protocole Internet (IP)](glpiinventory_iphtml) Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plu-

sieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

323 Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs

Le module drsquoassistance permet aux utilisateurs de saisir suivre et traiter des tickets Des plannings (utilisateur ougroupe) et des statistiques sont eacutegalement disponibles

Suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil il est eacutegalement possible de saisir suivre et traiter des problegravemes et deschangements et creacuteer des tickets reacutecurrents (fonctionnaliteacutes agrave nrsquoautoriser que pour un utilisateur de type Technicien)

32 Modules 127

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Afin de mettre en route un service drsquoassistance plusieurs eacutetapes sont neacutecessaires Pour commencer analyser les besoinsde base des utilisateurs et reacutepondre au minimum vital

Une fois que les besoins de base sont satisfaits il est possible de deacutefinir les besoins secondaires et se lancer dans laconfiguration avanceacutee

Le module drsquoassistance de GLPI est conforme au guide de bonnes pratiques ITIL et integravegre donc des notions et nor-malisation de champs Bien que lrsquooutil soit conforme ITIL il nrsquoy aucune obligation pour suivre ces bonnes pratiques chacun est libre drsquoimpleacutementer le service drsquoassistance qui correspond le mieux agrave ses besoins

mdash Mise en route du service drsquoassistancemdash Deacutefinir les acteurs et leurs rocirclesmdash Deacutefinir la matrice de calcul de la prioriteacutemdash Configuration avanceacuteemdash Les matrices de cycle de vie

mdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Regravegles de gestionmdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Ouvrir un ticketmdash Pour aller plus loin

mdash Creacuteer un ticketmdash Geacuterer les problegravemesmdash Geacuterer les changementsmdash Les planningsmdash Les statistiquesmdash Les tickets reacutecurrents

324 Module Gestion

Le module Gestion permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les eacuteleacutements suivants

Geacuterer les licences

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les licences logiciels

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire des licences en lien avec les logiciels deacutejagrave inventorieacutes dans GLPI mdash un suivi des installations de chaque licence sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les licences dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des licences

Note Une licence ne peut pas exister au sein de GLPI sans un logiciel associeacute agrave sa creacuteation

La gestion de licence reste statique un suivi humain est neacutecessaire afin drsquoassurer lrsquoactualisation des informations

128 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Comme enfant de Permet drsquoindiquer si la licence est deacutependante drsquoune autre mdash Version utiliseacutee Crsquoest la version du logiciel qui sera associeacutee agrave la licence mdash Version drsquoachat La version drsquoachat peut diffeacuterer de la version actuellement utiliseacutee il est possible de lrsquoindi-

quer ici mdash Nombre Ici pourra ecirctre indiqueacute le nombre de lien possibles entre la licence et les mateacuteriels dans GLPI mdash Autoriser la surconsommation (Allow Over-Quota) Permet drsquoautoriser ou non le deacutepassement du nombre

de lien maximum configureacute dans le champ Nombre mdash Expiration La date de fin de validiteacute de la licence Champ utile pour configurer les alertes et anticiper le

renouvellement

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Licences

Cet onglet liste toutes les licences consideacutereacutees comme enfant de la licence actuelle

Note Certaines licences peuvent srsquoobtenir par pack ou par groupe de licence (pour un lieu speacutecifique par exemple)il est donc inteacuteressant de les lier

32 Modules 129

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Reacutesumeacute

Cet onglet liste tous les types et les entiteacutes des eacuteleacutements du parc concerneacutes par cette licence

Note Attention au nombre drsquoinstallationlicence disponible deacutefini dans le champ Nombre de la licence

La creacuteation du lien entre un eacuteleacutement du parc et la licence se fait dans lrsquoonglet Logiciels de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste preacuteciseacutement chaque eacuteleacutement relieacute agrave la licence actuelle

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

130 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 131

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

132 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 133

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

134 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Certificats

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un certificat preacutesent dans GLPI agrave une licence

32 Modules 135

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une licencemdash Visualiser une licencemdash Modifier une licencemdash Supprimer une licencemdash Associer un document agrave une licencemdash Transfeacuterer une licence

Geacuterer les budgets

Un budget dans GLPI crsquoest la deacutefinition drsquoun montant sur une peacuteriode donneacutee Les autre eacuteleacutements de GLPI peuventecirctre attacheacutes agrave un budget et ainsi piocher dans ce dernier en indiquant leur valeur

Mateacuterialiser un budget au sein de GLPI ouvre la fonctionnaliteacute de gestion administrative et financiegravere pour tous lesautres eacuteleacutements preacutesents dans lrsquooutil

Il est possible de suivre lrsquoeacutevolution du budget en traccedilant la valeur de chaque eacuteleacutement rattacheacutes

136 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Lier un eacuteleacutement de GLPI avec un budget se passe dans lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Note Lors de la visualisation drsquoun budget dans une sous-entiteacute le total du budget restant nrsquoest pas accessible

Important Ce total est neacutegatif si le total de la valeur des mateacuteriels est plus eacuteleveacutee que la valeur du budget

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Principal

Cet onglet fournit un tableau reacutecapitulant le montant deacutepenseacute sur le budget par type drsquoeacuteleacutements ainsi que le totalrestant

Eleacutements

Cet onglet permet de visualiser les autres eacuteleacutements de GLPI attacheacutes agrave ce budget ainsi que leur valeur

32 Modules 137

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Le lien entre le budget et un eacuteleacutement se fait depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

138 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un budgetmdash Visualiser un budgetmdash Modifier un budget

32 Modules 139

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Supprimer un budgetmdash Associer un document agrave un budgetmdash Transfeacuterer un budget

Geacuterer les certificats

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les certificats

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire de tous les certificats de lrsquoorganisation mdash un suivi des installations de chaque certificat sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les certificats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des certificats

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Fabricant (CA de lrsquoautoriteacute racine) Cette liste deacuteroulante permet de seacutelectionner et ajouter le fabricant ducertificat

mdash Auto-signeacute Permet drsquoindiquer sioui ou non le certificat actuel est auto-signeacute mdash Nom DNS Ici est agrave saisir le preacutefixe du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom -gt

server

140 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Suffixe DNS Ici est agrave saisir le suffixe DNS du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom-gt mycompanycom

mdash Date drsquoexpiration Permet de deacutefinir la fin de validiteacute du certificat Champ utile pour les alertes GLPImdash Commande utiliseacutee Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le certificatmdash Requecircte pour le certificat (CSR) Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le fichier

CSRmdash Certificat Peut ecirctre saisi ici les donneacutees contenues dans le fichier CRT (PEM)

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 141

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

142 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 143

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

144 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 145

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

146 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un certificatmdash Visualiser un certificatmdash Modifier un certificatmdash Supprimer un certificatmdash Associer un document agrave un certificatmdash Transfeacuterer un certificat

Geacuterer les fournisseurs

GLPI integravegre une gestion des fournisseurs celle-ci sert agrave la fois agrave identifier qui a vendu un mateacuteriel (dans la gestion deparc) mais aussi agrave attribuer des tickets agrave cette personne ou socieacuteteacute

Lors de lrsquoachat drsquoun mateacuteriel de marque XX agrave un fournisseur YY il faut traiter deux informations distinctes agrave savoirle fabricant (XX) et le fournisseur (YY)

Un fournisseur se caracteacuterise par un nom un type de tiers (intituleacute) des informations de localisation (adresse codepostal ville pays) et de contact (site web teacuteleacutephone et fax)

Cette gestion agrave pour objectif notamment mdash de reacutefeacuterencer tous les fournisseurs relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation

32 Modules 147

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash drsquooptimiser le contact en cas drsquoincident mdash de permettre drsquoinclure les fournisseurs dans lrsquoAssistance de GLPI

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated Contacts

The Contacts tab is used to show or add linked contacts

Note La distinction est clairement eacutetablie entre le fournisseur qursquoil est possible de lier de maniegravere univoque agrave deseacuteleacutements drsquoinventaire et les contacts qui composent la liste des personnes permettant drsquoentrer en relation avec cefournisseur Pour eacutetablir cette liste il faut donc associer les contacts au fournisseur concerneacute

Exemple

Monsieur Dupont est conseiller de vente dans lrsquoentreprise Acme aupregraves de qui la structure se fournit reacuteguliegraverementCreacuteer un fournisseur nommeacute Acme Creacuteer un contact au nom de Monsieur Dupont Affecter agrave ce contact le typecommercial Puis associer le contact au fournisseur Acme

148 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Eleacutements associeacutes

Lrsquoonglet Eleacutements pour lrsquoobjet fournisseur est speacutecifique Il ne permet que la consultation Lier un eacuteleacutement avec unfournissur se fera depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement (du Parc) concerneacute

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 149

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problegravemes

Dans cet onglet il sera possible de consulter les Problegravemes associeacutes agrave ce fournisseur Crsquoest agrave dire tous les Problegravemessur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacute agrave

150 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changements

Lrsquoonglet permet la consultation de tous les Changements sur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacuteagrave

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 151

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un fournisseurmdash Visualiser un fournisseurmdash Modifier un fournisseurmdash Supprimer un fournisseurmdash Associer un document agrave un fournisseurmdash Transfeacuterer un fournisseur

152 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les contacts

Les utilisateurs au sens de GLPI sont les personnes disposant drsquoun accegraves agrave lrsquoapplication Les personnes exteacuterieuresgeacuteneacuteralement associeacutees agrave des contrats sont stockeacutees sous la forme de contacts

Chaque contact est caracteacuteriseacute par les informations drsquoidentiteacute usuelles ainsi qursquoun titre et des coordonneacutees teacuteleacutepho-niques de messagerie et postales La deacutefinition drsquoune liste de types de contacts permet de classer les contacts selonleur type Lrsquoexportation au format vCard est possible dans la fiche de chaque contact

Note La liste des titres possibles pour un contact est identique agrave celle des utilisateurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Suppliers

The Suppliers tab is used to show or add linked suppliers

32 Modules 153

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

154 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contactmdash Visualiser un contactmdash Modifier un contactmdash Supprimer un contactmdash Associer un document agrave un contactmdash Associer un fournisseur agrave un contactmdash Transfeacuterer un contact

Geacuterer les contrats

Glpi integravegre la gestion des contrats Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet de couvrir tout type de contrat reacutealiseacute tel que les precirctscontrats de maintenance contrat de support etc Cette gestion a pour objectif

mdash de fournir un inventaire de tous les contrats relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation mdash drsquointeacutegrer les contrats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des contrats

32 Modules 155

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Note Il est possible de recevoir des notifications pour preacutevenir drsquoeacuteveacutenements tels que la fin du contrat Dans lecas ou la reconduction du contrat serait expresse il peut ecirctre inteacuteressant drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la date du preacuteavis Pour lescontrats peacuteriodiques il est eacutegalement possible drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la fin de chaque peacuteriode ou preacuteavis de peacuteriode Ceci estconfigurable par entiteacute dans le menu Configuration gt Notifications pour deacutefinir les modegraveles et destinataires utiliseacuteset dans le menu Configuration gt Entiteacute pour activer ou non cette fonctionnaliteacute deacutefinir les valeurs par deacutefaut et uneanticipation de lrsquoenvoi de la notification si besoin

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Type de contrat par deacutefaut aucun type de contrat nrsquoest renseigneacute Il faut au preacutealable les renseigner dans laconfiguration des intituleacutes

mdash Numeacutero cette information nrsquoest pertinente que si le numeacutero de contrat est identique agrave celui utiliseacute au sein desautres services de la socieacuteteacute

mdash Date de deacutebut agrave ne pas confondre avec la date drsquoenregistrement du contrat dans GLPI Tous les calculs depeacuteriodiciteacute sur le contrat sont donc fonction de cette date

mdash Dureacutee initiale du contrat si ce champ et la date de deacutebut sont renseigneacutes la date de fin de contrat apparaitra(en rouge si la date a expireacutee)

mdash Preacuteavis ce champ peut servir au deacuteclenchement des notifications drsquoalerte mdash Numeacutero comptable pour permettre un rapprochement avec le logiciel comptable de la socieacuteteacute mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute du contrat crsquoest la dureacutee agrave laquelle la reconduction du contrat est possible (Exemple Un contrat

drsquoabonnement teacuteleacutephonique drsquoune dureacutee de 24 mois renouvelable au bout de 12 mois) mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute de facturation Crsquoest la dureacutee entre chaque facturemdash Type de reconduction Tacite (le contrat est reconductible automatiquement drsquoune peacuteriode agrave une autre si

aucune des parties ne manifeste sa volonteacute de le rompre) ou Expresse (neacutecessite lrsquoaccord des deux parties pour

156 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

la reconduction du contrat) mdash Nombre max drsquoeacuteleacutements la valeur choisie dans ce champ bloquera ou non lrsquoajout de nouvel eacuteleacutements attacheacutes

agrave ce contrat mdash Heures drsquointervention Les plages horaires drsquointervention correspondent aux horaires drsquointervention couvert

par le contrat Il est possible drsquoy distinguer les samedis et les jours chocircmeacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Coucircts

Cet onglet permet de deacutefinir un coucirct relatif au contrat sur un budget preacutesent dans GLPI- crsquoest-agrave-dire imputer une valeursur le montant total du budget seacutelectionneacute qui sera attribueacute au type drsquoobjet Contrat

Fournisseurs

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs fournisseurs au contrat actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

32 Modules 157

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

158 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 159

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contratmdash Visualiser un contratmdash Modifier un contratmdash Supprimer un contratmdash Associer un document agrave un contratmdash Transfeacuterer un contrat

Geacuterer les documents

Cette section permet drsquoenregistrer des documents eacutelectroniques ou liens web classables selon diverses rubriques

Un document possegravede un nom ainsi qursquoun commentaire et peut ecirctre associeacute agrave une rubrique

Le fichier physique correspondant au document peut ecirctre ajouteacute dans GLPI de plusieurs maniegraveres mdash En parcourant le disque dur local mdash En renseignant un lien web pointant vers un document (une image une page web un PDF ) mdash En preacutecisant un fichier preacutealablement chargeacute par FTP (dans le dossier mon_glpifiles_uploads )mdash Enfin un type MIME peut aussi ecirctre indiqueacute

Note mdash Les types de documents autoriseacutes dans GLPI (selon leur extension) sont deacutefinis dans Configuration gt Intituleacutes

gt Gestion gt Type de documentmdash Les rubriques de documents peuvent ecirctre hieacuterarchiquesmdash Lrsquooption Interdire agrave lrsquoimportation permet drsquoexclure ce document agrave lrsquoimportation via les collecteurs (images

de signatures logos )

160 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Il est possible drsquoassocier drsquoautres documents agrave un document de GLPI crsquoest pourquoi cet objet beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun ongletdu mecircme type

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 161

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un documentmdash Visualiser un documentmdash Modifier un documentmdash Supprimer un documentmdash Associer un document agrave un documentmdash Transfeacuterer un document

Geacuterer les lignes

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de renseigner les lignes teacuteleacutephoniques

Cette gestion a pour objectif mdash drsquoinventorier toutes les lignes de lrsquoorganisation mdash de permettre le suivi drsquoaffectation de chaque ligne mdash permettre la gestion financiegravere des lignes dans GLPI

162 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

32 Modules 163

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

164 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 165

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une lignemdash Visualiser une lignemdash Modifier une lignemdash Supprimer une lignemdash Associer un document agrave une lignemdash Transfeacuterer une ligne

166 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les centres de donneacutees

GLPI permet la gestion des centres de donneacutees et plus preacuteciseacutement la gestion des salles serveurs et des baies informa-tiques qui les composent

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash Un inventaire des centres salles et baies informatiques de lrsquoorganisation mdash tous les autres modules au service des centres salles et baies (notamment le module Parc qui permet une

reacutepreacutesentation graphique deacutetailleacutees des baies) mdash la possibiliteacute drsquoinclure ces objets dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI

Centre de donneacutees

Le centre de donneacutees en lui mecircme est un objet tregraves simpliste dans GLPI Il se mateacuterialise sous la forme drsquoun nom etdrsquoun lieu et permet uniquement de regrouper des salles serveurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Salles serveurs

Cet onglet liste les salles serveurs attacheacutees au centre de donneacutees actuel et permet eacutegalement drsquoen ajouter

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 167

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Salle Serveur

Une salle serveur dans GLPI se mateacuterialise sour forme drsquoun plan scheacutematique Ce plan reacutepreacutesentera lrsquoespace disponibledans la salle de la serveur Cet espace sera utiliseacute pour y deacutefinir et placer les objets Baies de GLPI

La salle serveur est associable agrave un centre de donneacutees et un lieu

Note Le plan sera une grille deacutefinie par un nombre de colonnes et de lignes 1 Baie consomme 1 case

Lrsquoarriegravere plan peut grandement aider agrave la visualisation de la salle notamment si celui ci a eacuteteacute geacuteneacutereacute avec un outiladapteacute agrave la repreacutesentation drsquoespace

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Baies

Cet onglet permet de consulter et drsquoagir sur le plan de la salle serveur Pourront ecirctre ajouteacutees directement sur le planles diffeacuterentes baies informatiques qui composent la salle

Si beaucoup drsquoeacuteleacutements sont preacutesents il est possible de passer sur une vue en mode liste

168 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Analyse drsquoimpact

Cet onglet permet de consulter et de construire le scheacutema drsquoimpact du point de vue de lrsquoobjet

32 Modules 169

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

170 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 171

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

172 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elements

32 Modules 173

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

174 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualiser un centre de donneacuteesmdash Modifier un centre de donneacuteesmdash Supprimer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Associer un document agrave un centre de donneacuteesmdash Transfeacuterer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualier la liste des salles serveurs

Geacuterer les clusters

Un Cluster GLPI est un regroupement de plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc Peut rejoindre un cluster les ordinateurs et lesmateacuteriels reacuteseau

Note Les clusters renseigneacutes dans GLPI sont pris en compte dans lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact TODO link vers la preacutesen-tation de lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact

32 Modules 175

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash UUID Identifiant unique du clustermdash Version Dans le cas drsquoun cluster logiciel ou autre la version peut ecirctre indiqueacuteemdash Source de mise agrave jour Ce champ repreacutesente la maniegravere dont la fiche de lrsquoobjet dans GLPI a eacuteteacute mise agrave jour

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste et pemret lrsquoajout drsquoun ou plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc au sein du cluster

Ports reacuteseau

Cet onglet permet de creacuteer et de lister des interfaces reacuteseau propres au cluster

Les interfaces possibles mdash Port Ethernetmdash Ports Wifimdash Agreacutegation de portmdash Alias de portmdash Connexion par ligne commuteacutee - Dialupmdash Boucle locale

176 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Port Fibre Channel

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 177

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

178 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 179

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un clustermdash Visualiser un clustermdash Modifier un clustermdash Supprimer un clustermdash Associer un document agrave un clustermdash Transfeacuterer un cluster

Geacuterer les domaines

Deux nouveaux objets de GLPI sont rassembleacutes dans cette fonctionnaliteacute les domaines et les enregistrements dedomaines

Geacuterer les domaines et les enregistrements au sein de GLPI permet notamment mdash de construire un inventaire des noms de domaines mdash drsquoinventorier les enregistrements (records) de chaque domaine mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des noms de domaines mdash drsquointeacutegrer les domaines dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash de lier les eacuteleacutements du parc au domaine

Modifieacute dans la version 950mdash inclure les domaines et les enregitrements dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI

Note Lrsquoaccegraves agrave la liste des objets Enregistrements de domaines est accessible depuis la liste des objets Domaines

Objet Domaine

Lrsquoobjet domaine permet de mateacuterialiser un domaine informatique dans son ensemble (son nom sa date drsquoexpirationetc) Lrsquoobjet est associable dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI (tickets problegravemes changements)

180 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Records

Dans cet onglet il est possible de seacutelectionner ou de creacuteer un enregistrement de domaine agrave associer au domaine actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 181

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

182 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 183

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

184 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 185

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

186 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Objet Enregistrement de domaine (Record)

Lrsquoobjet Enregistrement de domaine permet de mateacuterialiser tous les types drsquoenregistrements que lrsquoon peut trouver dansune zone ou un fichier de configuration DNS ( TXT A PTR SOA CNAME etc )

Cet objet doit ecirctre associeacute agrave un objet Domaine vu preacutecedemment

Note Les types drsquoenregistrements ne sont pas limiteacutes agrave ceux creacuteeacutes par deacutefaut ils sont personnalisables depuis lagestion des intituleacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 187

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

188 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changed

32 Modules 189

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Description of the change that was madeThe description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Visualiser un domainemdash Ajouter un domaineun enregistrementmdash Modifier un domaineun enregistrementmdash Supprimer un domaineun enregistrementmdash Associer un document agrave un domaineun enregistrementmdash Transfeacuterer un domainemdash Visualiser les enregistrements de domaines

325 Module Outils

Le module Outils permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les projets les notes les flux RSS la base de connaissance lesreacuteservations ainsi que de geacuteneacuterer des rapports

Geacuterer les projets

La gestion de projets permet de suivre complegravetement lrsquoavancement drsquoun projet au sein de GLPI via la creacuteation detacircche la constitution drsquoune eacutequipe que celui-ci soit lieacute agrave un changement ou non

Un projet dans GLPI crsquoest la possibiliteacute mdash drsquoassocier des tacircches de projet et geacuterer leur avancement mdash drsquoeacutetablir une eacutequipe projet et des eacutequipes de tacircche mdash la possibiliteacute de deacuteclencher des sous projets au sein drsquoun mecircme projet mdash de construire un diagramme de GANTTmdash la possibiliteacute drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban mdash drsquoassocier des coucircts mdash de relier les objets ITIL de GLPI

Le projets peut ecirctre hieacuterarchiseacute un projet peut donc avoir des sous-projets

Les projets disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom codeeacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquounpourcentage drsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

Plusieurs diagrammes de GANTT sont proposeacutes pour chaque projet (voir onglet GANTT)

Dans cette gestion de projet il y a deux objets principaux le projet et la tacircche de projet

190 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Projet

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter une nouvelle tacircche au projet Il liste eacutegalement les tacircches deacutejagrave deacutefinies pour ce projeten indiquant pour chaque tacircche son nom son type son statut le pourcentage effectueacutee les dates de deacutebut et de finplanifieacutees les dureacutees planifieacutee et effective ainsi que le nom de la tacircche parent

Equipe Projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter un membre agrave lrsquoeacutequipe que ce soit un contact un fournisseur un utilisateur ou un groupeIl liste eacutegalement chaque membre de lrsquoeacutequipe projet ainsi que son type respectif

Projet

Cet onglet liste les sous-projets du projet Pour deacutefinir un sous-projet il suffit de remplir le champ laquo comme enfantde raquo drsquoun projet

32 Modules 191

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

GANTT

Un diagramme de GANTT est proposeacute pour chaque projet Un diagramme de GANTT global est eacutegalement proposeacuteincluant les projets deacutefinis comme visible dans ce diagramme

Kanban

Cet onglet met agrave disposition une interface afin drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban dans GLPI

192 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Coucircts

Des coucircts sont associables aux projets auxquels peuvent ecirctre ajouteacute les coucircts des tickets lieacutees aux tacircches du projet

Objets Itil

Crsquoest dans cet onglet qursquoil est possible drsquoassocier au projet actuel les objets itil de GLPI tickets problegravemes etchangements Il est possible de creacuteer ces objets depuis cet onglet eacutegalement

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object and

32 Modules 193

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

the document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

194 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Tacircche de projet

lrsquoobjet tacircche de projet est assez similaire au projet

une tacircche de projet peut ecirctre eacutegalement une sous tacircche de projet

Les tacircches disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom eacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquoun pourcentagedrsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

32 Modules 195

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note La tacircche de projet nrsquoest pas un objet indeacutependant de GLPI Lrsquoaccegraves agrave une tache de projet se fait dans lrsquoongletTacircches de projet du projet concerneacute

Les tacircches peuvent ecirctre lieacutees agrave des tickets permettant de planifier des interventions permettant de mettre en place leprojet Des dureacutees preacutevisionnelles et effectives sont eacutegalement deacutefinies au niveau des tacircches Ces dureacutees ainsi quecelles des tickets sont alors consolideacutees au niveau du projet lui mecircme

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et drsquoajouter les sous-tacircches

Equipe de tacircche

Ici est deacutefinie lrsquoeacutequipe en charge de la tacircche

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

196 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

32 Modules 197

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un projetmdash Visualiser un projetmdash Modifier un projetmdash Supprimer un projetmdash Associer un document agrave un projetmdash Transfeacuterer un projet

Geacuterer les notes personnelles ou publiques

Une note dans GLPI est un simple champ texte et piegravece jointe permettant de transmettre des informations aux utilisa-teurs de la plateforme

Une note est caracteacuteriseacutee par mdash une dureacutee de vie

198 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash un statut mdash la possibiliteacute de la faire apparaicirctre dans le planning mdash les cibles de la note

Les notes saisies apparaissent ensuite sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI ou dans le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes

32 Modules 199

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il est possible de deacuteterminer une date de deacutebut et de fin de publication pour chaque note Si la date de deacutebutnrsquoest pas mentionneacutee la note sera visible immeacutediatement jusqursquoagrave la date de fin Si la date de fin nrsquoest pas mentionneacuteela note sera visible de faccedilon permanente agrave partir de la date de deacutebut

Lrsquoajout drsquoune note au calendrier permet de la faire apparaicirctre sur le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes par la note celui de lrsquoutilisateur pour une note personnelle les plannings de tous les utilisateurs dans le cas drsquoune note publiqueUne note planifieacutee nrsquoest pas supprimeacutee une fois la date expireacutee

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

200 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Cible

Une note est consideacutereacutee comme personnelle par deacutefaut Elle est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoune note devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (note publique) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ouplusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lanote

Une note publique est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les notes publiques

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une notemdash Visualiser une note

32 Modules 201

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Modifier une notemdash Supprimer une notemdash Associer un document agrave une notemdash Rendre une note publique Ajouter une cible agrave la notemdash Publier une note pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee Ajouter une date de deacutebut et une date de fin au niveau de la

visibiliteacute

Geacuterer les rapports

GLPI permet la geacuteneacuteration drsquoun certain nombre de rapports en lien avec les objets preacutesents sur la plateforme mdash Rapport par deacutefaut Ce rapport comptabilise les mateacuteriels preacutesents dans le parc trieacutes par type Pour les ordi-

nateurs un tri est eacutegalement effectueacute par systegraveme drsquoexploitationmdash Par contrat Mateacuteriel sous contrat de maintenance aupregraves drsquoun tiers Il est possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat deacutetailleacute

par type de mateacuteriel et par date drsquoachat La seacutelection multiple est autoriseacutee Pour ajouter un type il suffitde cliquer dans la zone blanche et de choisir le nouveau type Le principe est le mecircme pour ajouter unedate Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet le nom srsquoil est dans la corbeille ou non son entiteacute son lieu les datedrsquoachat et drsquoexpiration de garantie le type de contrat ainsi que les dates de deacutebut et de fin de contrat

mdash Par anneacutee Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacutedent mais listant eacutegalement les mateacuteriel sanscontrat

mdash Informations financiegraveres et administratives du mateacuteriel Reacutecapitulatif des informations financiegraveres pour lesordinateurs les imprimantes les mateacuteriels reacuteseaux les moniteurs les peacuteripheacuteriques et les teacuteleacutephones Ilest possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat pour une peacuteriode donneacutee Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet son nom sonentiteacute sa valeur sa valeur nette comptable son TCO ses dates drsquoachat de mise en service et drsquoexpirationde garantie Un reacutecapitulatif comprenant le total de la valeur et de la valeur nette comptable est poposeacute partype drsquoobjet et pour la totaliteacute des objets

mdash Autres Informations Financiegraveres et administratives Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacute-dent mais mais pour les cartouches les licences et les consommables

mdash Rapport reacuteseau 3 rapports peuvent ecirctre reacutealiseacutes selon le lieu selon le type de mateacuteriel reacuteseau ou selon laprise reacuteseau

mdash Precirct Reacutecapitulatif des reacuteservations en cours agrave venir ou passeacutees pour un utilisateur donneacutemdash Rapport sur les statuts Synthegravese par type de mateacuteriel des diffeacuterents statuts

Note Le nombre de rapport peut ecirctre eacutetoffer en ajoutant un plugin disponible ici httpspluginsglpi-projectorgpluginreports

Geacuterer les reacuteservations

GLPI met agrave disposition un outils de reacuteservation de mateacuteriel outil qui permet de seacutelectionner un ou plusieurs eacuteleacutementsdu parc afin de les reacuteserver sur une plage horaire Pour des reacuteservations reacutepeacutetitives il est possible de mettre en placede la reacutecurrence sur la reacuteservation

202 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Un mateacuteriel nrsquoest pas reacuteservable par deacutefaut Pour rendre un mateacuteriel reacuteservable il faut se rendre dans lrsquoongletReacuteservation de la fiche du mateacuteriel

Un mateacuteriel reacuteserveacute apparaicirctra dans un planning global des reacuteservations

Il est eacutegalement possible de consulter le planning speacutecifique drsquoun mateacuteriel reacuteservable La reacuteservation peut ecirctre creacuteeacuteedepuis ce planning eacutegalement

32 Modules 203

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Reacuteservations

Onglet principal de lrsquooutil Il permet de consulter et de seacutelectionner les mateacuteriels reacuteservables disponibles

Administration

Cet onglet liste tous les objets reacuteservables et non plus ceux disponibles Comme pour les principaux objet de GLPI ilpropose un moteur de recherche avec la possibiliteacute drsquoeffectuer des actions de masse

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une reacuteservationmdash VisualiserModifier les reacuteservationsmdash Supprimer une reacuteservationmdash Rendre un mateacuteriel indisponible

Geacuterer les flux RSS

GLPI permet drsquoinclure des flux RSS dans la page drsquoaccueil de lrsquooutil

Un flux RSS est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun flux RSS devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (flux RSS public) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner uneou plusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes aux profils groupes ou utilisateurs de la plateforme

Note Un flux RSS public est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les flux RSSpublics

204 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Contenu

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter le nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements afficheacutes Crsquoest ce contenu qui est reporteacute en pagedrsquoaccueil

Cibles

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et modifier la liste des cibles pour le flux RSS concerneacute

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 205

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un flux RSSmdash VisualiserModifier un flux RSSmdash Supprimer un flux RSS

Geacuterer la base de connaissances

La base de connaissances de GLPI reacutepond agrave deux objectifs principaux mdash Centraliser des connaissances internes pour les diffeacuterents techniciens mdash Mettre agrave la disposition des utilisateurs des informations leur permettant de reacutesoudre seuls des problegravemes

simples sous forme de FAQ publique

Note Seuls les eacuteleacutements de la FAQ publique sont visibles par les utilisateurs de lrsquointerface simplifieacutee Les eacuteleacutementsqui ne sont pas deacutefinis comme faisant partie de la FAQ publique sont visibles uniquement au sein de la console centralepar des techniciens par exemple

Il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner pour chaque article de la base de connaissances ou de la FAQ une ou plusieurscibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Tantqursquoaucune cible nrsquoa eacuteteacute seacutelectionneacutee pour un article ce dernier est visible uniquement par son reacutedacteur Lrsquoarticle estconsideacutereacute comme laquo non publieacute raquo et apparaicirct dans le tableau laquo Articles non publieacutes raquo de la page drsquoaccueil de la base deconnaissances

Par deacutefaut les articles ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute est activable (voir laconfiguration geacuteneacuterale)

Il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs documents aux articles de la base de connaissances

Note Un article peut ecirctre rendu visible pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee via la deacutefinition de la date de deacutebut et la date defin de visibiliteacute

Avertissement Les eacuteleacutements qui ne doivent pas ecirctre interpreacuteteacutes agrave lrsquoaffichage peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis avec le style Preacute-formateacute (ltpregt en HTML) Des balises comme ltVirtualHostgt sont donc inseacuterable et affichable Par contredes balises au format HTML (ltBALISEgt) peuvent disparaicirctre au moment de lrsquoeacutedition pour avoir une visibiliteacutecomplegravete du texte vous pouvez passer en mode HTML ougrave tous les eacuteleacutements seront visibles Votre navigateur peuteacutegalement modifier dynamiquement le contenu (changement de casse ajout de balises) lors drsquoune eacutedition

Il est possible de creacuteer des cateacutegories et sous-cateacutegories afin drsquoorganiser la navigation (voir Configurer les intituleacutes)

Lrsquoutilisateur peut alors utiliser plusieurs onglets pour recherche et naviguer au sein de la base de connaissances mdash Rechercher Crsquoest lrsquoonglet par deacutefaut Il preacutesente les articles les plus reacutecents les plus populaires et les derniegraveres

modifications Il permet eacutegalement de rechercher au sein de la base de connaissances

206 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Parcourir Cet onglet permet de naviguer au sein de lrsquoarborescence des cateacutegories

mdash Geacuterer Cet onglet nrsquoest accessible qursquoaux administrateurs de la base de connaissances Suivant les droits delrsquoutilisateur il est possible drsquoacceacuteder rapidement agrave ses ou agrave tous les articles non publieacutes (sans cible deacutefinies)ainsi qursquoagrave tous ses articles

Note Le moteur de recherche de la base de connaissances permet drsquoutiliser un certain nombre drsquoopeacuterateurs poureffectuer des recherches complexes + - ~ lt gt rdquo rdquo ()

mdash + Le mot doit ecirctre preacutesent

32 Modules 207

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash - Le mot ne doit pas ecirctre preacutesent mdash Opeacuterateur de troncature agrave positionner en suffixe mdash Une phrase entre guillemets double (laquo ) est rechercheacutee litteacuteralement telle qursquoelle a eacuteteacute saisie mdash lt gt permet de deacutefinir une preacutefeacuterence sur lrsquoordre des eacuteleacutements rechercheacutes mdash () agreacutegateur utile pour lrsquoutilisation de lt et gt

Exemples

- panne imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent au moins un de ces mots

- +panne +imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent ces deux mots

- +courriel thunderbird-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent le mot courriel

mais classe plus haut les lignes qui contiennent aussi thunderbird

- +courriel -outlook-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent courriel mais pas outlook

- +courriel +(gtthunderbird ltoutlook)-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent les mots courriel et thunderbird

ou courriel et outlook (dans nimporte quel ordre)mais classe courriel thunderbird plus haut que courriel outlook

- open-gt Trouve les lignes qui contiennent des mots tels que openoffice openwriter

openbar ou openphp

- suite openoffice-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent exactement la phrase suite openoffice

Les diffeacuterents onglets drsquoun article

Base de connaissances

Cet onglet affiche un tableau concernant lrsquoarticle avec en titre sa cateacutegorie Son ensuite listeacutes son sujet et son contenuainsi que le nom du reacutedacteur des dates de creacuteation et de derniegravere modification le nombre de fois ougrave lrsquoarticle a eacuteteacute luainsi que srsquoil fait partie ou non de la FAQ Si un article nrsquoest pas publieacute (cible non deacutefinie) cette information apparaicircten rouge au-dessus du nombre de vues

Cible

Un article est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun article devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ou plusieurs ciblesLa ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Cet ongletpermet donc drsquoajouter une nouvelle cible tout en listant les cibles deacutejagrave deacutefinies

208 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Editer

Cet onglet permet suivant vos droits de modifier ou supprimer un article

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 209

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Reacutevisions

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter toutes les reacutevisions de chaque article Crsquoest agrave dire que chaque modificationde lrsquoarticle donnera naissance agrave une reacutevision une version anteacuterieure de lrsquoarticle

les reacutevisions sont affichables et peuvent ecirctre restaureacutees

Commentaires

Un article beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun espace commentaires permettant aux utilisateurs de la plateforme drsquoeacutechanger agrave son sujet

210 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un articlemdash Modifier un articlemdash Supprimer un articlemdash Associer un document agrave un articlemdash Modifier la visibiliteacute drsquoun article

326 Module Administration

Le module Administration permet drsquoadministrer les utilisateurs groupes entiteacutes profils regravegles et dictionnaires etoffre des outils de maintenance de lrsquoapplication (sauvegarde et restauration de base veacuterification de nouvelle versiondisponible)

mdash [Geacuterer les utilisateurs](07_Module_Administration02_Utilisateurs01_Utilisateursrst)mdash [Geacuterer les groupes](07_Module_Administration03_Groupesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les entiteacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les regravegles](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst)mdash [Configurer les dictionnaires de donneacutees](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les profils](07_Module_Administration07_Profils01_Profilsrst)mdash [Geacuterer la file drsquoattente drsquoenvoi des courriels](07_Module_Administration08_File_drsquoattente_des_courrielsrst)mdash [Maintenance](07_Module_Administration09_Maintenancerst)mdash [Visualiser les journaux drsquoactiviteacute](07_Module_Administration10_Journauxrst)

327 Module Configuration

Le module Configuration permet drsquoacceacuteder aux options de configuration geacuteneacuterale de GLPI la configuration globalede GLPI les notifications les collecteurs les tacircches automatiques lrsquoauthentification les plugins les critegraveres drsquouniciteacuteet les liens externes protocoleacutes

Les intituleacutes ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

32 Modules 211

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Si des eacuteleacutements que vous voulez supprimer sont utiliseacutes GLPI proposera automatiquement de transfeacuterer lesentreacutees existantes vers un autre eacuteleacutement de la liste ou bien de les remettre agrave zeacutero

mdash [Configurer les composants](08_Module_Configuration03_Composantsrst)mdash [Configurer les notifications](08_Module_Configuration04_Notifications01_Configurer_les_notificationsrst)

Configurer les suivis par courriels creacuteer des modegraveles de notifications deacutefinir lrsquoenvoi de notificationmdash [Configurer les SLAs](08_Module_Configuration05_Sla01_Slarst) Deacutefinir les SLA ainsi que les diffeacute-

rents niveaux drsquoescalademdash [Configurer les paramegravetres centraux](08_Module_Configuration06_Geacuteneacuterale01_Configurer_les_paramegravetres_centrauxrst)mdash [Configurer les controcircles](08_Module_Configuration07_Controlesrst)mdash [Configurer les actions automatiques](08_Module_Configuration08_Actions_automatiquesrst)mdash [Configurer les collecteurs](glpiconfig_mailcollectorhtml) La configuration des collecteurs srsquoeffectue

depuis le menuConfiguration gt Collecteurs

mdash [Ajouter un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les liens externes protocoleacutes](glpiconfig_linkhtml)

Les liens externes se configurent depuis le menu Configuration gt

Liens externesmdash [Ajouter un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les plugins GLPI](glpiconfig_pluginhtml) Les plugins dans GLPI installation configura-

tion activation

Authentification

Crsquoest ici que GLPI gegravere lrsquoauthentification et les informations personnelles des utilisateurs

Lrsquoaccegraves drsquoun utilisateur agrave GLPI est possible apregraves que ces conditions aient eacuteteacute veacuterifieacutees

1 envoi drsquoinformations drsquoauthentification par lrsquoutilisateur

2 existence de lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur

3 authentification de lrsquoutilisateur

4 attribution drsquohabilitations agrave lrsquoutilisateur

GLPI utilise sa propre base interne drsquoutilisateurs Ceux-ci sont soit creacuteeacutes depuis lrsquointerface de lrsquoapplication soit im-porteacutes depuis une ou plusieurs sources externes Selon le type de source lrsquoimport des utilisateurs peut se faire soit enmasse soit au fil de lrsquoeau lors de la tentative de connexion drsquoun utilisateur non encore connu de GLPI

Pour effectuer lrsquoauthentification GLPI fait appel agrave une base de mots de passes interne qui peut ecirctre compleacuteteacutee parune ou plusieurs sources externes drsquoauthentification Lrsquoutilisation de meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externes permet dedeacuteleacuteguer cette fonctionnaliteacute agrave des systegravemes tiers assurant la gestion drsquoidentiteacute Voir [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec lessources drsquoauthentification externes](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification02_Configurationrst) laquo Les para-megravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configura-tion gt Authentification gt Configuration raquo)

Lrsquoattribution des habilitations est deacutecrite dans la section [Attribuer des habilitations agrave un utilisa-teur](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles03_Habilitations_utilisateurrst) laquo GLPI dispose drsquoun moteur drsquoha-bilitations dynamiques qui se base sur des sources externes drsquoauthentification Il est accessible depuis le menuAdministration gt Regravegles gt Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitation agrave un utilisateur raquo)

Note La cineacutematique drsquoauthentification est la suivante

1 lrsquoutilisateur entre son identifiant et son mot de passe

212 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 GLPI veacuterifie si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave enregistreacute dans la base Srsquoil ne lrsquoest pas

1 GLPI essaye les meacutethodes drsquoauthentification les unes apregraves les autres la base interne puis tous les an-nuaires LDAP et enfin les annuaires de messagerie

2 lorsque lrsquoauthentification est reacuteussie lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans la base interne ainsi que sa meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

3 si aucune source nrsquoa pu authentifier lrsquoutilisateur celui-ci est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que sonidentifiant ou mot de passe est incorrect

3 Si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave preacutesent dans la base interne ou une fois son identifiant creacuteeacute

1 GLPI tente drsquoauthentifier lrsquoutilisateur en utilisant la derniegravere meacutethode drsquoauthentification reacuteussie (et unique-ment celle-ci)

2 si lrsquoauthentification a eacutechoueacute lrsquoutilisateur est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que son identifiant oumot de passe est incorrect

4 Le moteur drsquohabilitation est lanceacute avec les informations de lrsquoutilisateur

1 si le moteur a donneacute agrave celui-ci une ou plusieurs habilitations alors lrsquoutilisateur a accegraves agrave GLPI

2 si lrsquoutilisateur ne se voit attribuer aucune habilitation alors bien qursquoeacutetant inscrit dans la base GLPI il nepeut se connecter agrave lrsquoapplication

mdash [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec les sources drsquoauthentification externes](glpiconfig_common_authhtml)Les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes

drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration Authentifica-tion

mdash [Chiffrage des mots de passe dans la base de donneacutees](glpiconfig_passwords_encryptedhtml)Les mots de passe des accegraves exteacuterieurs sont chiffreacutes

mdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldaphtml)Lrsquointerface de GLPI avec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le

menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Annuaire LDAP mdash [Configurer la liaison LDAP pour les utilisateurs et les groupes](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_usersgroupshtml)mdash [Ajouter un nouvel annuaire LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un annuaire](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Importer et synchroniser depuis un annuaire par script](glpiscripts_ldap_mass_synchtml)

Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisation agrave partir drsquoun

annuairemdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imaphtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme source

drsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie mdash [Ajouter un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](glpiconfig_auth_otherhtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de

lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

Sujet parent [Administrer les controcircles drsquoaccegraves](glpiaccess_control_introhtml laquo Cette partie deacutecrit commentadministrer le systegraveme de controcircle drsquoaccegraves qui permet agrave chaque utilisateur drsquoacceacuteder agrave un contexte drsquoutilisation speacuteci-fique raquo)

32 Modules 213

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sources drsquoauthentification externes

Ce menu permet de configurer les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification

Afin de pouvoir utiliser ces sources externes drsquoauthentification il faut au preacutealable activer les extensions correspon-dantes dans la configuration de PHP Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre de sources externes configureacutees danslrsquoapplication

Pour utiliser la capaciteacute de GLPI de creacuteer agrave la voleacutee des utilisateurs preacutesents dans les sources externes drsquoauthentifica-tion il faut lrsquoactiver dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration

Figure 1 Menu de la configuration de lrsquoauthentification [image](docsimageauthConfigpng)

Les annuaires LDAP permettent en outre de refuser la creacuteation des utilisateurs ne posseacutedant pas drsquohabilitations Lasuppression drsquoun utilisateur de lrsquoannuaire peut aussi entraicircner une action telle que la mise agrave la corbeille de lrsquoutilisateurla suppression de ses habilitations ou sa deacutesactivation Crsquoest eacutegalement agrave ce niveau qursquoest parameacutetreacute le fuseau horairede GLPI

Les sources drsquoauthentification externes prises en charges par GLPI sont les suivantes mdash annuaire LDAP voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires

LDAP](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification03_Annuaires_LDAPrst laquo Lrsquointerface de GLPIavec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt AnnuairesLDAP raquo)

mdash serveur de messagerie voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de message-rie](config_auth_imaphtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme sourcedrsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie raquo)

mdash serveur CAS voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash certificat x509 voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash authentification deacuteleacutegueacutee au serveur web voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification ex-terne](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentificationunique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

Annuaires LDAP

GLPI srsquointerface avec un (ou plusieurs) Annuaire LDAP afin drsquoauthentifier les utilisateurs de controcircler leur accegraves dereacutecupeacuterer leurs informations personnelles et drsquoimporter des groupes

Tous les annuaires compatibles LDAP v3 sont supporteacutes par GLPI Crsquoest donc aussi le cas pour lrdquoAnnuaire ActiveDirectory de Microsoft Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires renseigneacutes bien entendu plus le nombreest eacuteleveacute plus la recherche drsquoun nouvel utilisateur agrave authentifier peut ecirctre longue

Il est possible drsquoimporter et de synchroniser les utilisateurs de 2 maniegraveres mdash au fil de lrsquoeau agrave la premiegravere connexion lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans GLPI A chaque login ses informations

personnelles sont synchroniseacutees avec lrsquoannuaire Dans le cas ougrave les collecteurs sont utiliseacutes une adresse demessagerie inconnue sera rechercheacutee dans lrsquoannuaire pour creacuteer lrsquoutilisateur associeacute

mdash en masse soit via lrsquointerface web de GLPI soit en utilisant le script fourni voir [Importer et synchroniserdepuis un annuaire par script](scripts_ldap_mass_synchtml laquo Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisationagrave partir drsquoun annuaire raquo)

Avertissement Si aucune configuration LDAP nrsquoest visible (voir un message drsquoerreur sur cette partie) crsquoest quele module LDAP pour PHP nrsquoest pas installeacute

214 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sous Linux installer le paquet ldap pour PHP (par exemple php5-ldap sur Debian) puis redeacutemarrer le serveurweb

Sous Windows il faut deacutecommenter dans le fichier phpini (fichier preacutesent dans le reacutepertoire apachebin) la ligneextension=php_ldapdll puis redeacutemarrer le serveur web

Le processus drsquoauthentification des utilisateurs est deacutecoupeacute en 3 parties lrsquoauthentification le controcircle drsquoaccegraves et enfinla reacutecupeacuteration des donneacutees personnelles

Authentification LDAP

Lors de la premiegravere connexion de lrsquoutilisateur GLPI va srsquoadresser agrave tous les annuaires jusqursquoagrave trouver celui qui contientlrsquoutilisateur Si lrsquooption permettant drsquoimporter des utilisateurs depuis une source externe est active alors celui-ci estcreacuteeacute et lrsquoidentifiant de la meacutethode de connexion et le serveur LDAP sont stockeacutes en base de donneacutees

Ensuite agrave chaque login lrsquoutilisateur est authentifieacute sur lrsquoannuaire dont lrsquoidentifiant est stockeacute dans GLPI Les autresannuaires ne sont pas utiliseacutes si un utilisateur est deacutesactiveacute dans lrsquoannuaire qursquoil a utiliseacute jusque lagrave pour se connecteril ne peut se connecter avec une autre source drsquoauthentification

Controcircle drsquoaccegraves

Le controcircle drsquoaccegraves est lrsquoattribution drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur Mecircme si un utilisateur est authentifieacute sur un an-nuaire il nrsquoest pas forceacutement habiliteacute agrave se connecter agrave GLPI

Ce meacutecanisme repose sur lrsquoutilisation de regravegles drsquoaffectations drsquohabilitations

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Annuaire LDAP

32 Modules 215

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il existe un modegravele de preacute-configuration Active Directory qui preacute-remplit un certain nombre de champsCelui-ci a eacuteteacute mis en place afin de faciliter la configuration GLPI-AD

Pour le charger cliquer sur le lien Active Directory lors de lrsquoajout drsquoun annuaire Le lien Valeur(s) par deacutefautreacuteinitialise la saisie

mdash serveur par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieurs serveurs LDAP de parameacutetreacutes vous ne pouvez deacutefinir qursquoun seulserveur par deacutefaut Le fait de choisir ce paramegravetre le supprime du serveur sur lequel il eacutetait preacuteceacutedemmentparameacutetreacute

mdash serveur et port repreacutesentant lrsquoadresse de lrsquoannuaire LDAPmdash basedn emplacement de lrsquoannuaire agrave partir duquel les recherches et lectures seront effectueacutees

Note Le basedn doit ecirctre renseigneacute sous la forme du DN complet de lrsquoutilisateur Par exempleCN=glpiadminDC=mondomaine si le compte dans lrsquoannuaire pour GLPI est glpiadmin

mdash DN du compte identifiant de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) mdash Mot de passe du compte mot de passe correspondant (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) Il est possible

drsquoeffacer le mot de passe en cochant la case effacer puis de valider mdash filtre de connexion permet de restreindre la recherche de personnes dans lrsquoannuaire Par exemple si seul un

ensemble restreint de personnes de lrsquoannuaire ont le droit de se connecter agrave GLPI il faut mettre en place unecondition pour restreindre la recherche agrave ces personnes

On peut citer les exemples de filtres suivants mdash un filtre classique LDAP peut ecirctre (objectclass=inetOrgPerson)mdash pour Active Directory utiliser le filtre suivant qui ne renvoie que les utilisa-

teurs non deacutesactiveacutes (car les machines sont aussi consideacutereacutees comme des utili-sateurs par AD) (amp(objectClass=user)(objectCategory=person)((userAccountControl1284011355614803=2)))

Il faut noter que ce filtre est automatiquement rempli lorsque le modegravele de preacute-configurationActive Directory est seacutelectionneacute

mdash Champ de lrsquoidentifiant nom du champ dans lrsquoannuaire LDAP correspondant agrave lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur(par exemple uid sur un annuaire LDAP samaccountname sur un annuaire AD)

mdash Champ de synchronisation nom du champ utiliseacute pour la synchronisation Ce champ doit identifier de ma-niegravere unique lrsquoutilisateur il permet de prendre en compte le cangement de login (par exemple employeeuidsur un LDAP ou objectguid pour un AD)

Avertissement Ne pas oublier drsquoactiver votre annuaire et de le deacutefinir lrsquoannuaire par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieursannuaires

Base DN et utilisateur authentifieacute

Attention le rootdn et le basedn doivent ecirctre eacutecrits sans espaces apregraves les virgules De plus la casse est importante

Exemple de rootdn mdash cn=Admin ou=users dc=mycompany incorrectmdash cn=Adminou=usersdc=mycompany correct

Pour Active Directory si on utilise le userprincipalname au lieu du samaccountname on peut avoir un rootdn sous laforme prenomnomdomainefr

Les paramegravetres agrave entrer sont tregraves simples par exemple mdash hocircte ldapmycompanyfrmdash basedn dc=mycompanydc=fr

216 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Et cela doit suffire si la recherche anonyme est permise Dans le cas contraire et si tous les utilisateurs ne sont paspositionneacutes au sein du mecircme DN il vous faut speacutecifier le DN drsquoun utilisateur autoriseacute et son mot de passe rootdnPassPour Active Directory il est obligatoire de renseigner un compte qui a le droit de srsquoauthentifier sur le domaine

En tentant de se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire gracircce agrave un browser LDAP il est possible de tester ces paramegravetres Il en existebeaucoup mais on peut citer

mdash LdapBrowser Editor (logiciel libre eacutecrit en Java et donc multi-plateforme)mdash ADSIedit pour Active Directory Cet outil se trouve sur les supports toolsoutils suppleacutementaires du CD drsquoins-

tallation de Windows Server

Note Si certains des utilisateurs ont des restrictions de connexion agrave certaines machines configureacutees dans leur profilAD lrsquoerreur suivante est possible lors drsquoune tentative de login sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI Utilisateur non trouveacuteou plusieurs utilisateurs identiques trouveacutes La solution consiste agrave ajouter le serveur heacutebergeant lrsquoAD agrave la liste desPC sur lesquels lrsquoutilisateur peut se connecter

Tester

Permet de tester la configuration deacutefinie dans lrsquoonglet Annuaire LDAP

Le message Test de connexion reacuteussi indique que GLPI a pu se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP avec les informationsrenseigneacutees (hocircte port compte utilisateur)

Il reste deacutesormais agrave importer les utilisateurs Pour cela il faut bien veacuterifier les autres paramegravetres (filtre de connexionchamps de login etc)

Utilisateurs

Permet de configurer comment va ecirctre effectueacute le lien entre les champs de lrsquoannuaire et ceux de GLPI Pour chaquechamp de GLPI (nom preacutenom image ) est associeacute un champ de lrsquoannuaire

Groupes

Permet de configurer la meacutethode de stockage des groupes au niveau de lrsquoannuaire

32 Modules 217

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Informations avanceacutees

Dans le cas ougrave lrsquoheure de la machine heacutebergeant lrsquoannuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas dans le mecircme fuseau horaire que celui deGLPI il faut modifier la variable Fuseau horaire afin drsquoajuster le deacutelai en effet cela peut provoquer des reacutesultatserroneacutes dans la liste des utilisateurs agrave synchroniser

Connexion LDAP seacutecuriseacutee

GLPI gegravere la connexion seacutecuriseacutee agrave un annuaire LDAP agrave travers une connexion SSL (aussi appeleacute LDAPS) Il suffitde rajouter devant le nom de lrsquohocircte (ou son IP) ldaps Ainsi que de changer le port (par deacutefaut 636) Par exemplelrsquoaccegraves en LDAPS en local donnera Hocircte ldaps 127001 Port 636

Limite du nombre drsquoenregistrement retourneacutes (sizelimit)

Il existe souvent deux limites sur le nombre maximum drsquoenregistrements retourneacutes par une requecircte LDAP mdash la limite du client (deacutefinie par exemple sur DebianUbuntu dans etcldapldapconf)mdash la limite imposeacutee par le serveur si la limite deacutefinie par le client est supeacuterieure agrave la limite serveur crsquoest cette

derniegravere qui prend le dessus

Avertissement Si la limite est atteinte lrsquooption de comportement lors de la suppression drsquoun utilisateur delrsquoannuaire ne peut fonctionner De plus GLPI affichera un message drsquoavertissement lors drsquoun import ou drsquounesynchronisation

Avec PHP 54 ou supeacuterieur il est deacutesormais possible de contourner la limitation du sizelimit en activant dans lrsquoongletInformations avanceacutees la pagination des reacutesultats Dans ce mode PHP va requecircter lrsquoannuaire autant de fois queneacutecessaire et par tranche de X reacutesultats jusqursquoagrave ce que lrsquoensemble des enregistrements soient renvoyeacutes

Lrsquooption Taille des pages permet drsquoajuster cette valeur de mecircme que nombre maximum de reacutesultats deacutefinit la limitedrsquoenregistrement agrave ne pas deacutepasser lors drsquoune requecircte LDAP (afin par exemple drsquoeacuteviter une erreur indiquant que PHPdemande plus de meacutemoire que ce qui lui est alloueacute)

218 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Sur un annuaire OpenLDAP la limite par deacutefaut est agrave 500 enregistrements sur un Active Directory elle est de1000

Sur un Active directory il est possible de modifier la valeur du MaxPageSize gracircce aux commandes suivantes (attentioncette modification est globale agrave tout lrsquoannuaire)

Reacuteplicats

Si un annuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas accessible les utilisateurs ne pourront plus se connecter agrave GLPI

Afin drsquoeacuteviter cette situation des reacuteplicats peuvent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes ils partagent la mecircme configuration que le serveurqursquoils reacutepliquent mais sont disponibles agrave une adresse diffeacuterente

Lrsquoutilisation des reacuteplicats se fait uniquement dans le cas drsquoune perte de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire maicirctre Lrsquoajout dereacuteplicats se fait dans la fiche drsquoun annuaire en renseignant un nom qui sera afficheacute dans GLPI ainsi qursquoun nomdrsquohocircte et un port Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires reacutepliqueacutes

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

Les annuaires LDAP ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

Intituleacutes

Certaines listes de seacutelections deacuteroulantes sont parameacutetrables dans GLPI mdash lieux

32 Modules 219

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash statuts de mateacuterielsmdash cateacutegories de ticketsmdash noms des logicielsmdash noms des constructeursmdash

En somme tout ce qui deacutepend drsquoune nomenclature propre agrave un contexte particulier doit ecirctre parameacutetreacute Si certains deces intituleacutes sont fournis avec une liste par deacutefaut la plupart des intituleacutes doivent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes dans lrsquoapplication

Par deacutefaut les intituleacutes ne peuvent ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute doit ecirctre activeacutee et permetalors de traduire lrsquoensemble des champs des intituleacutes

Les intituleacutes sont soit une liste de valeurs agrave plat (simple liste de valeurs) soit une liste arborescente (chaque eacuteleacutementpeut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements)

La premiegravere eacutetape est de seacutelectionner la liste agrave modifier Ensuite on peut ajouter des eacuteleacutements agrave la liste les modifier etles supprimer

Agrave chaque intituleacute est associeacute un commentaire Celui-ci est visible depuis les formulaires de GLPI Il apparaicirct au survolde lrsquoicocircne Aide associeacutee agrave la liste deacuteroulante

Il est possible de visualiser tous les types drsquointituleacutes existants en utilisant voir tous

Cette liste peut varier suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil Les intituleacutes avec fond plus fonceacute sont des intituleacutesglobaux alors que les autres peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutes par entiteacute

220 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuteneacuteral

Lieux

La liste des lieux est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements (Lieu 1 gt Sous-lieu 1 gtSous-sous-lieu 1) Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun lieu on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant ce lieu (code du bacirctiment de la piegravecelongitude latitude altitude) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant le lieu pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le lieu peut ecirctrevisible des sous entiteacutes

Lieux

Liste les sous-lieux existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Eleacutements

Liste tous les eacuteleacutements affecteacutes agrave ce lieu Vous pouvez choisir de nrsquoafficher qursquoun type drsquoeacuteleacutement (ordinateur utilisa-teur prise reacuteseau logiciel )

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

32 Modules 221

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

Prise reacuteseau

[image](docsimagepriseReseaupng)

Liste les prises reacuteseau affecteacutees agrave ce lieu et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquouneprise sur un port reacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants)apparaissent

Lrsquoajout peut ecirctre unique via la partie haute ou multiple via la partie basse Pour lrsquoajout multiple vous pouvez preacutefixerle numeacutero de la prise comme indiqueacute dans la copie drsquoeacutecran

Autre exemple considerant le preacutefixe bru 9 et 11 les bornes de la numeacuterotation et srv le suffixe les prises reacuteseaucreacuteeacutees seront nommeacutees bru09srv bru10srv et bru11srv

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Statuts

La liste des statuts est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee parentiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun statut on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant la visibiliteacute de ce statut ainsi quelrsquoinformation preacutecisant le statut pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le statut peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Statuts des eacuteleacutements

Liste les sous-statuts existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

222 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Fabricants

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Listes noires

La liste des Listes noires est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle comprend la valeur que vous voulez mettre en liste noire ainsi que sur quel type lrsquoappliquer (IP MAC numeacutero deseacuterie UUID ou courriel) Les listes noires sont utiliseacutees pour les imports automatique via un agent drsquoinventaire ou parle collecteur de courriels

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 223

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Contenu de courriel interdit

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Elle permet au collecteur de courriels de ne pas importer un courriel contenu le texte deacutefini Cela peut permettre entreautre de lutter contre le spam dans le cas de lrsquoautorisation de creacuteation de ticket pour les courriels anonymes

Assistance

Cateacutegories de ticket

La liste des cateacutegories de ticket est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de ticket on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant cette cateacutego-rie (responsable et groupe techniques pour lrsquoaffectation automatique des tickets (voir [configuration de lrsquoen-titeacute](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)) la cateacutegorie par deacutefaut de la base de connaissance lorsque lrsquoon sou-haite ajouter une solution drsquoun ticket dans celle-ci la visibiliteacute de cette cateacutegorie suivant lrsquointerface ou suivant lrsquoobjetainsi que les gabarits affecteacutees agrave cette cateacutegorie) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes En cas de choix drsquoun gabarit celui-ci sera affecteacute au choix de lacateacutegorie donc surchargera celle qui aurait u ecirctre deacutefinie dans lrsquoentiteacute ou via regravegle meacutetier

Un lien avec les cateacutegories de la base de connaissances est possible Si une cateacutegorie est choisie le clic sur lrsquoaide de lacateacutegorie du ticket dans un ticket amegravene directement agrave tous les articles de la base de connaissance de cette cateacutegorie

Cateacutegories de tickets

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

224 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Cateacutegories de tacircches

La liste des cateacutegories de tacircches est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

La fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de tacircche indique son nom ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Cateacutegories de tacircches

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Types de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Sources des demandes

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle preacutecise si cette source source doit ecirctre deacutefini par deacutefaut pour les tickets etou les collecteurs

32 Modules 225

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Gabarits de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Elle permet de preacutedeacutefinir le contenu ainsi que le type drsquoune solution et peut ecirctre visible ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Note Les gabarits de solution ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Statuts de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les statuts appliqueacutes agrave un projet ainsi que lrdquo(eacutetat de celui-ci

Types de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Types de tacircches de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types de tacircches appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Les onglets communs

226 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Calendrier

Les calendriers utiliseacutes au sein de GLPI sont parameacutetrables par entiteacute Ils sont caracteacuteriseacutes par des peacuteriodes drsquoouvertureainsi que des peacuteriodes de fermeture

Ces calendriers sont utiliseacutes dans les SLA (voir Configurer les SLAs) et la [configuration des enti-teacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)

Calendrier

Plages horaires

Correspond aux plages horaires drsquoouverture de lrsquoentiteacute Vous pouvez en ajouter autant que neacutecessaire par jour tant queces plages ne se chevauchent pas

Peacuteriode de fermeture

Liste les peacuteriodes de fermeture affecteacutees agrave ce calendrier et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle voir lca configurationdes peacuteriodes de fermeture

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 227

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Peacuteriodes de fermeture

La liste des peacuteriodes de fermeture est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Une peacuteriode de fermeture comprend un nom une peacuteriode et si cette fermeture est reacutecurrente ou non

Concernant le champ Reacutecurrent si celui-ci est agrave Oui cela signifie que la peacuteriode indiqueacutee est valable tout le tempsDans ce cas GLPI ne se soucierait pas de lrsquoanneacutee indiqueacutee

Tregraves utile pour indiquer les jours feacuterieacutes revenant chaque anneacutee (Noeumll Victoire de 1945 1er mai ) ou les peacuteriode defermeture de la socieacuteteacute (fermeacutee tous les ans du 1er au 31 aoucirct) et surtout cela eacutevite de ressaisir chaque anneacutee les mecircmesdates

Intituleacutes Internet

Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plusieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

Un eacutequipement se connecte au reacuteseau au travers de ports reacuteseaux

Agrave un port reacuteseau on associe un ou plusieurs Noms reacuteseau(voir ci-dessous)

Un Nom reacuteseau peut appartenir agrave un Domaine Internet Il peut contenir une ou plusieurs adresses IP (voir ci-dessous)et il peut avoir plusieurs alias

Une adresse IP appartient agrave un reacuteseau IP (voir ci-dessous)

Au niveau protocole IP les reacuteseaux sont indiffeacuteremment en IPv4 et en IPv6

Note GLPI gegravere indiffeacuteremment IPv4 et IPv6 La seule distinction provient du format des adresses et des masques

2128513766 est une adresse IPv4 alors que 2a00 1450 4007 803 1012 est en IPv6

GLPI considegravere IPv4 comme un sous-ensemble drsquoIPv6 les traitements sont les mecircmes

GLPI utilise deux repreacutesentations pour les adresses IP (IPv6 et IPv4) mdash La repreacutesentation binaire lui permet de faire lrsquoanalyse des relations entre reacuteseaux adresses et masques Elle est

inaccessible agrave lrsquoutilisateurmdash La repreacutesentation textuelle est celle utiliseacutee pour lrsquoaffichage et la saisie des donneacutees

Les adresses et les masques IPv4 sont repreacutesenteacutes par leur forme classique (ie 2128513766 2552552550) La repreacutesentation des adresses IPv6 est celle canonique (ie 2001 db8 0 85a3 ac1f 8001 plutocirct que 2001 0db8 0000 85a3 0000 0000 ac1f 8001) Lesmasques IPv6 sont repreacutesenteacutes sous la forme du preacutefixe de sous reacuteseau (ie nombre de bits agrave 1 dans lemasque)

Reacuteseaux IP

Les Reacuteseaux IP permettent de deacutefinir la topologie des reacuteseaux

Ils regroupent un ensemble drsquoadresses IP regroupeacutees selon la topologie deacutefinie par le plan drsquoadressage des administra-teurs du reacuteseau

Ils peuvent srsquoemboicircter la hieacuterarchie des reacuteseaux IP deacutepend des adresses et des masques de ces reacuteseauxainsi que de leurs identiteacutes drsquoappartenance Par exemple 192168102552552550 est un sous reacuteseau de192168002552552540)

228 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement La hieacuterarchie est geacutereacutee implicitement il est impossible de la modifier soi-mecircme

Un reacuteseau est composeacute au minimum drsquoune adresse et drsquoun masque Agrave cela peut srsquoajouter une passerelle

Un reacuteseau est dit adressable si il est utiliseacute pour le routage interne des ordinateurs En drsquoautres termes son masquede sous-reacuteseau et sa passerelle sont utiliseacutes par tous les eacutequipements du reacuteseau (si un ou plusieurs ordinateurs nrsquoontpas les mecircmes informations cela peut engendrer des problegravemes de routage ) Geacuteneacuteralement un reacuteseau ayant unepasserelle est adressable car la passerelle est connue de tous les eacutequipements et elle ne peut appartenir qursquoagrave un seulsous-reacuteseau Mais un reacuteseau adressable nrsquoa pas neacutecessairement de passerelle Crsquoest par exemple le cas des reacuteseauxpriveacutees (1921684802552552550 ) ou de la boucle locale (1270002552552550 ou 1128)

Les reacuteseaux sont modifiables depuis les intituleacutes ( Configuration gt Intituleacutes ) Internet gt Reacuteseaux IP

VLAN

Liste les VLAN associeacutes agrave ce reacuteseau IP et permet drsquoen associer un nouveau

Adresses IP

Liste les adresses IP de ce reacuteseau

Vous pouvez classer cette liste par numeacutero drsquoIP en cliant sur le lien Adresses IP ou par type de mateacuteriel en cliquant surle lien Trier par type drsquoeacuteleacutement Dans ce cas vous aurez un tableau par type drsquoeacuteleacutement

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 229

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Domaines Internet

Noms reacuteseau

Liste les noms reacuteseau du domaine

Alias reacuteseau

Liste les alias reacuteseau du domaine

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Reacuteseaux Wifi

A FAIRE

Noms reacuteseau

Un nom reacuteseau correspond agrave lrsquoidentification unique drsquoune machine du point de vue drsquoInternet

Geacuteneacuteralement un eacutequipement est identifieacute par un ou plusieurs noms particuliers sur le reacuteseau Le serveur DNS reacutesoudrace nom en adresse IP Dans le cas ougrave IPv4 et IPv6 sont utiliseacutes ce nom renverra deux adresses IP une en IPv4 etlrsquoautre en IPv6 Crsquoest pourquoi un nom reacuteseau peut avoir plusieurs adresses IP

Un nom reacuteseau est composeacute drsquoun nom qui correspond au label du FQDN (Cf [labelsFQDN](glossaryfqdn_labelhtml)) drsquoun [domaine internet](glossaryfqdnhtml) et de une ou plusieurs adressesIP

230 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Le champs reacuteseau IP apparaicirct afin de retrouver les informations sur les diffeacuterents reacuteseaux IP disponibles Cette in-formation nrsquoest pas conserveacutee dans le nom reacuteseau car il peut avoir plusieurs adresse IP et chacune peut appartenir agraveplusieurs reacuteseaux IP

Note Lors de la saisie drsquoun nom reacuteseau la validiteacute du nom ainsi que celle de chacune des adresses IP est veacuterifieacutee Siun de ces eacuteleacutement nrsquoest pas valide alors il est rejeteacute

Pour ajouter une adresse IP agrave un nom reacuteseau il faut cliquer sur le [image](docsimageaddcriteriapng) devant leschamps de saisie des adresses IP Pour supprimer une adresse IP il suffit drsquoeffacer le contenu du champs de lrsquoIP quelrsquoon souhaite retirer

Alias reacuteseau

Cet onglet liste les alias deacutejagrave preacutesents pour ce reacuteseau et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traditionnellement le nom reacuteseau est celui utiliseacute par le DNS pour la reacutesolution inverse drsquoune adresse IP alors que lesalias correspondent au CNAME du nomFQDN

De la mecircme maniegravere le nom de lrsquoalias doit un label FQDN valide

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Autres

Types

Quel que soit le type la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du type de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

32 Modules 231

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Modegraveles

Quel que soit le modegravele la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

Machines virtuelles

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute (modegraveles ou systegraveme de virtualisation eacutetat des machines virtuelles) la liste est une listede valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele ou du systegraveme de virtualisation ou celui de lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles

Seul lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles peut ecirctre traduit

Rubrique des documents

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle est valable pour toutes lesentiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Rubriques des documents liste des sous-rubriques deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Type de documents

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Lrsquoapplication propose un certain nombre de types par deacutefaut mais il est possible drsquoen ajouter en fournissant lesinformations suivantes

mdash le nom du type de document mdash lrsquoextension par exemple txt ou pdf la deacutetection des documents qursquoil est permis drsquoajouter se base sur cette

information mdash le nom du fichier pour lrsquoicocircne du document deacutesireacute Placez les fichiers drsquoicocircnes dans le reacutepertoire picsicones

sous lrsquoarborescence des fichiers drsquoinstallation de GLPI mdash le type MIME si neacutecessaire mdash lrsquoautorisation de teacuteleacutechargement de ce type de fichier (oui ou non)

Note Le type de document peut ecirctre une expression reacuteguliegravere Cela permet par exemple drsquoautoriser de deacutefinir unensemble de documents NOMFICHIERXXXXYYYY ougrave XXXX est un numeacutero et YYYY la date de lrsquoanneacutee fiscalecourante Dans ce cas preacutecis lrsquoexpression reacuteguliegravere pourrait ecirctre [0-9]+ pour indiquer toute extension composeacuteeexclusivement de nombres

Ces 2 variables peuvent ecirctre traduites

Outils (Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements ce qui facilite la navigation et larecherche Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance outre le nom de celle-ci on trouve lrsquoinformation preacutecisant lacateacutegorie megravere (comme enfant de) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance liste des sous-cateacutegories deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nou-velle

232 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Une cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance peut ecirctre traduite

Systegravemes drsquoexploitation

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Seul les sources de mise agrave jour peuvent ecirctre traduites

Reacuteseaux

Toutes les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat

Les interfaces reacuteseaux firmwares et reacuteseaux sont valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Prises reacuteseaux domaines et VLAN peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutees par entiteacute avec visibiliteacute ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Seules la liste Reacuteseaux peut ecirctre traduite

Prises reacuteseaux Une prise reacuteseau peut ecirctre lieacutee agrave un lieu Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquoune prise sur un portreacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants) apparaissentSi vous souhaitez plusieurs prises pour un mecircme lieu il est preacutefeacuterable drsquoeffectuer la creacuteation via le menu lieude la partie [Geacuteneacuteral](08_Module_Configuration02_Intituleacutes03_Intituleacutes_Geacuteneacuteralrst) du menu des intituleacutes

Logiciel (cateacutegories des logiciels)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Les valeurs sont deacutefinies pour toutesles entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de logiciels liste les sous-cateacutegories et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Une cateacutegorie de logiciels peut ecirctre traduite

Utilisateur

Les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elles peuvent ecirctre traduites

Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur (Critegravere LDAP)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Il est eacutegalement possible drsquoajouter un critegravere LDAP particulier

Uniciteacute des champs (valeurs ignoreacutees pour lrsquouniciteacute)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat qui peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute et applicable ou non au sous-entiteacutes

Il est possible de renseigner pour chaque type drsquoobjet des valeurs qui ne doivent pas ecirctre prises en compte lors de laveacuterification de lrsquouniciteacute drsquoun objet en base

Par exemple ne pas utiliser le numeacutero de seacuterie geacuteneacuterique laquo To Be Filled By OEM raquo pour veacuterifier si un ordinateur existedeacutejagrave dans GLPI

32 Modules 233

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Certains plugins peuvent apporter des intituleacutes suppleacutementaires qui sont parameacutetrables dans le mecircme menu

Authentifications externes

La liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

33 Advanced Configuration

331 Utilisation du cache

Les informations sur lrsquoutilisation du cache sont disponible dans Configuration Geacuteneacuterale Systegraveme)

Nouveau dans la version 92

Modifieacute dans la version 921

Si lrsquoun des systegravemes de cache APCu ou WinCache est preacutesent sur le serveur il sera automatiquement utiliseacute par GLPILe systegraveme se base sur ZendCache

Le cache permet drsquoameacuteliorer les performances sur certaines opeacuterations relativement lourdes telles que le chargementdes traductions ou le calcul des arbres des entiteacutes

On distingue deux caches distincts dans GLPI mdash le cache base de donneacuteesmdash le cache traduction

Cette distinction permet drsquoeacuteviter de stocker le cache des traductions sur un reacuteseau cela pourrait produire un trop grandnombre de requecirctes sur le reacuteseau et avoir au final un impact neacutegatif

A lrsquoinverse le cache de la base de donneacutees devrait ecirctre sur le reacuteseau en cas de frontaux multiples

Afin de vous permettre drsquoaffiner les reacuteglages ou drsquoutiliser un autre systegraveme de cache une solution manuelle estproposeacutee Pour en profiter ajouter dans la table glpi_configs une cleacute cache_db etou cache_trans pour lecontexte core et adapter la valeur en fonction de ce que vous souhaitez

Note Si le but est de deacutesactiver lrsquoun ou lrsquoautre de ces caches creacuteer la cleacute dans la table mais laisser la valeur vide

adapterapcu

adapterredisoptionsserverhost127001

Se reacutefeacuterer agrave la meacutethode ConfiggetCache() et agrave la documentation de ZendCache pour davantage drsquoinformations

Avertissement Si vous installez plusieurs instances de GLPI sur un mecircme serveur le namespace du cache doitecirctre unique par instance ce qui nrsquoeacutetait pas le cas dans GLPI avant la version 924

Si vous avez speacutecifieacute votre propre namespace dans la configuration assurez-vous qursquoil est bien unique sur chaqueinstance

Si votre version de GLPI est anteacuterieure agrave la 924 il faudra ajouter le namespace dans la configuration du cache dechacune de vos instances

234 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

332 OPCache

OPCache stocke des fichiers PHP preacute-compileacutes en meacutemoire et permet ainsi drsquoameacuteliorer les performances La seulechose agrave faire crsquoest de lrsquoinstaller sur votre instance de PHP et de le configurer (la configuration par deacutefaut devraitconvenir agrave la grande majoriteacute des cas)

Toutefois sur des instances qui pourraient ecirctre fortement solliciteacutees il peut ecirctre utile de ne pas inclures les fichiers depolices pour les PDF dans ce cache En effet elles y prennent eacutenormeacutement de place et le gain est relativement minime

Afin drsquoexclure les fichiers de police du cache il suffit de renseigner leur chemin complet dans un fichier deliste noire pour opcache Le chemin de ce fichier est deacutetermineacute par la diective de configuration opcacheblacklist_filename (etcphpdopcache-glpiblacklist par exemple sous Fedora) Si votre ins-tance de GLPI se situe dans le dossier varwww le chemin agrave exclure sera varwwwhtmlglpiglpi-921vendortecnickcomtcpdffonts

Bien entendu lrsquoemplacement du fichier de configuration et le chemin vers les polices est agrave adapter en fonction de votresystegraveme et de votre type drsquoinstallation

Les RPMS fournis pour Fedora (ou par le deacutepocirct Remi) offrent deacutejagrave cette fonctionnaliteacute par deacutefaut vous nrsquoaurez doncrien agrave faire )

34 Glossary

Accepted State of a demand which has been validated by an approver

Accreditation Authorization to perform a set of actions on several entities given by rights attribution process

Actions Grouping in a list of available handling of GLPI objects

Active Directory service Directory service compatible with LDAP directory provided by Microsoft Also knownas AD

Adaptive rule Rule in which at least one action is the result of a regular expression defined in a criteria

Administrative closing Modification of a ticket status to closed (manually or automatically)

Alert threshold Minimal value from which an alert is triggered

Asset Generic term for an element that can be inventoried and managed in GLPI

Automatic action Process for regular actions triggering either internal to GLPI or external (Unix cron Windowsplanned tasks )

Automatic closing GLPI internal process that closes unresolved tickets after a given time

Booking Element that is booked for a given period

Bookmark Stored link to a GLPI page that allows to access the page quickly

Budget Accounting operation that groups all provisional expenses and receipts

Cartridge Consumable used by a printer and specifically managed in GLPI

Case Physical element that contains a computerrsquos components (motherboard processor disk )

Closed (ticket) Status of a ticket whose solution has been approved by the ticket issuer or that has been closeautomatically

Collector Functionality of GLPI that allows to create tickets or followup by importing messages from a mailbox

Connection (network) Link between two network ports

Contact Referent person linked to a supplier

Contract Financial document linked to assets and to suppliers

Controller Device that interfaces with other peripheral device

Criteria Element or pattern used by search engines to select an information or used by rules engines and dictio-naries to perform actions

34 Glossary 235

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Default profile Profile attributed by the application in the absence of particular settings (rules manual attribu-tion )

Depreciation type Characteristic of depreciation which balance can be linear or declining

Dictionary Set of rules that allow to modify GLPI data

Direct connection Physical link between a computer and another asset

Document Element that defines a link andor store a file and that can be associated to other objects of GLPI

Domain Group of assets connected to a network

Dropdown Customizable dropdown list used in GLPI and plugins

Entity Organizational object allowing to partition view and action scope of users

Express renewal The contract is renewed only if both parties agree for its renewal (opposite to tacit renewal)

External link Link displayed on an asset form in GLPI and built dynamically using the asset data

Financial information Data for invoicing and warranty

Followup Exchange between a ticket issuer and the persons in charge of it

FQDN A FQDN (Fully qualified domain name) is a fully qualified domain nameFor example wwwglpi-projectorg forgeglpi-projectorg

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Specifically in GLPI selection of elements of the knowledge base that canbe provided independently for example articles that are made accessible to users having only access to thesimplified interface

Global management Management mode in which a unique inventory object can be connected to several compu-ters

Global note Public note that is also visible from sub-entities

Global right Permission on objects that are not linked to an entity

Global view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is common to all users

Group Grouping of users

Grouping Action of merging similar elements of distinct entities into the parent entity

Hive Entry in Windows registry

ICAL (ICalendar) Calendar importexport format

ID Technical identifier of an element

Identifier Connection name of a user (login)

IMAPPOP IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) and POP (Post Office Protocol) are messaging protocolsallowing to retrieve mail messages

Impact Measure of the effect of an incident problem or change in business process

In progress (attributed) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians

In progress (planned) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians andfor which an action is planned

Incident Unplanned interruption or quality decrease of a service

Intervention Action of a technician to solve an incident

Knowledge base Database allowing to gather analyze store and share knowledge and information inside anorganization

Label FQDN A FQDN is composed of labels separated by dots (ldquordquo)For example wwwglpi-projectorg is composed of labels www glpi-project and orgA computer name is composed of a label and the name of the domain it belongs to for example www name indomain glpi-projectorgIn GLPI labels are compliant with section 21 of RFC 1123

236 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

LDAP directory Directory service using the LDAP PROTOCOL (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Allowsin particular to store user accounts

Local right Permission applicable to a given scope (entity)

Location Name in GLPI allowing geographical localization of an asset

Logs List of events occurring during use of GLPI application

Mail domain Part of a mail adress that is after character

Manufacturer Company producing a hardware

Mount point Directory from which the data contained in a partition can be accessed

Network Name defining the connection type (internet local )

Network port Network interface that can be virtual or physical

Networks Hardwares providing interconnection of computer equipments

New (ticket) Default status of a ticket

Path Address allowing to localize an element in a tree structure

Pattern Character string used for comparison in a criteria

PDU Power Distribution Unit

Pending (Ticket) Status of a ticket which processing is temporarily suspended (does not impact processing time)

Personal note Note visible only by its writer

Personal view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is specific to a user

Planning Scheduling of a task in time scale

Plugin GLPI extension that allows to add functionalities andor to modify application behaviors

Power supply Bloc providing electric current to the components of a computer

Preferences Personal parameters of a user

Priority Scale that identifies the relative importance of a ticket and that results from impact and urgency

Private Element that is visible only by its writer (bookmark note )

Profile Set of rights

Provider Legal structure toward which a contractual relation can be established (purchase contract )

Public Element that is visible by all authorized users of an entity

Public note Note that is visible by all users of the notersquos entity

Purge Permanent deletion of elements placed in the trash bin

Recursivity Property of an object belonging to an entity that makes it visible from sub-entities

Refused State of a demand that has been invalidated

Registered user Person having an accreditation allowing to connect to GLPI

Regular expression Character string (often called pattern) that describes a set of accepted strings according to awell-defined syntax

Replicate (MySQL) MySQL database used by GLPI if main database (master) is not available

Report Document that sums up GLPI data

Requester Person at the origin of an incident ticket or a service request

Restoration Recovery of an element of the trash bin

Right Authorization of a user for a given action

Root entity First entity of GLPI entities tree structure that is always present even if no other entity is defined andthat cannot be deleted

Rule List of criteria that trig a list of actions if criteria are satisfied

Saved search Recording of GLPI search engine state that allows to store and perform again the search

34 Glossary 237

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Service General action of GLPI listed in the events

Simplified interface GLPI user interface that gives access to a reduced set of functionalities and that targets endusers (opposite to standard interface)

SLA SLA (for Service-Level Agreement) is a contract between a service provider and a client that defines therequested quality of service and the responsibilities in case of failure

Solved (ticket) Ticket state when a technical solution was provided for an incident

SSO Unique authentication system (SSO (Single Sign On))

Standard interface GLPI user interface that gives access to all functionalities (opposite to simplified interface)

Statistics Summary of GLPI data linked to tickets

Status State of an asset or of a ticket belonging to its life cycle

Sub-entity Child entity of an entity on a form indicates recursivity status

Subject Title or question of an element of the knowledge base

Supervisor Person in charge of a group of users

Tacit renewal The contract is renewed automaticaly if none of the parties declares its will to break it

Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is a VLAN which tag is transmited in networkframe (see 8021Q)

Task Action corresponding to a technical operation that can be planned

Technician User in charge of tickets processing

Template Reusable model of object containing predefined fieds and allowing easier user entry

Ticket GLPI object representing an incident or a service request

Tier type Category of providers

Transfer Action of moving an object from one entity to another

Trash bin Container of elements deleted by users Similar to the trash bin in a desktop environment it is anintermediate state before purge

Tree Hierarchical organization of data using a tree structure

Unitary management Management mode in which an inventory object can be connected to only one computer

Urgency Criteria defined by the requester that specifies for a ticket the desired resolution speed

User User of an asset that is not registered in GLPI user base

Validation Action of authorizing a ticket processing

Validator Person performing the validation of a ticket

VCard Virtual visit card

Virtual network port A virtual network port is a port which does not correspond to a physical network hardware

VLAN VLAN Virtual Local Network

Volume Storage area attached to a computer

Webcal Exchange format for calendar data

238 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

CHAPITRE 4

Documentation license

This documentation is distributed under the terms of the Creative Commons License Attribution-ShareAlike 30 France(CC BY-SA 30 FR)

For the complete terms of the license please refer to httpscreativecommonsorglicensesby-sa30frlegalcode

You are free to mdash Share mdash copy and redistribute the material in any medium or formatmdash Adapt mdash remix transform and build upon the material for any purpose even commercially

The licensor cannot revoke these freedoms as long as you follow the license terms

Under the following terms mdash Attribution mdash You must give appropriate credit provide a link to the license and indicate if changes were

made You may do so in any reasonable manner but not in any way that suggests the licensor endorses you oryour use

mdash ShareAlike mdash If you remix transform or build upon the material you must distribute your contributions underthe same license as the original

No additional restrictions mdash You may not apply legal terms or technological measures that legally restrict others fromdoing anything the license permits

239

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

240 Chapitre 4 Documentation license

Index

AAccepted 235Accreditation 235Actions 235Active Directory service 235Adaptive rule 235Administrative closing 235Alert threshold 235Asset 235Automatic action 235Automatic closing 235

BBooking 235Bookmark 235Budget 235

CCartridge 235Case 235Closed (ticket) 235Collector 235Connection (network) 235Contact 235Contract 235Controller 235Criteria 235

DDefault profile 236Depreciation type 236Dictionary 236Direct connection 236Document 236Domain 236Dropdown 236

EEntity 236

Express renewal 236External link 236

FFinancial information 236Followup 236FQDN 236Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 236

GGlobal management 236Global note 236Global right 236Global view 236Group 236Grouping 236

HHive 236

IICAL (ICalendar) 236ID 236Identifier 236IMAPPOP 236Impact 236In progress (attributed) (Ticket) 236In progress (planned) (Ticket) 236Incident 236Intervention 236

KKnowledge base 236

LLabel FQDN 236LDAP directory 237Local right 237Location 237

241

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Logs 237

MMail domain 237Manufacturer 237Mount point 237

NNetwork 237Network port 237Networks 237New (ticket) 237

PPath 237Pattern 237PDU 237Pending (Ticket) 237Personal note 237Personal view 237Planning 237Plugin 237Power supply 237Preferences 237Priority 237Private 237Profile 237Provider 237Public 237Public note 237Purge 237

RRecursivity 237Refused 237Registered user 237Regular expression 237Replicate (MySQL) 237Report 237Requester 237Restoration 237Right 237Root entity 237Rule 237

SSaved search 237Service 238Simplified interface 238SLA 238Solved (ticket) 238SSO 238Standard interface 238Statistics 238

Status 238Sub-entity 238Subject 238Supervisor 238

TTacit renewal 238Tagged VLAN 238Task 238Technician 238Template 238Ticket 238Tier type 238Transfer 238Trash bin 238Tree 238

UUnitary management 238Urgency 238User 238

VValidation 238Validator 238VCard 238Virtual network port 238VLAN 238Volume 238

WWebcal 238

242 Index

  • Preface
  • Installation
  • Table of contents
    • First Steps with GLPI
      • General
      • Understanding the interface
      • Manage your password
      • Manage your Preferences
      • Navigate GLPI modules
      • User interfaces
      • View and manage records
      • Search for information in GLPI
      • Saved Searches
        • Modules
          • Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes
          • Asset module
          • Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs
          • Module Gestion
          • Module Outils
          • Module Administration
          • Module Configuration
            • Advanced Configuration
              • Utilisation du cache
              • OPCache
                • Glossary
                  • Documentation license
                  • Index
Page 5: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 Table des matiegraveres

CHAPITRE 1

Preface

This documentation covers the installation and use of GLPI (Gestion Libre de Parc Informatique)

Free and open-source solution for IT asset management and helpdesk and more GLPI is a web application designedto manage all of your IT asset management issues from inventory management of hardware components and softwareto the management of user assistance

This guide is intended to give an overview of GLPI for both administrators and users

Each part can be consulted independently even if for reasons of logic we recommend that you read this documentationentirely

3

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

4 Chapitre 1 Preface

CHAPITRE 2

Installation

The GLPI installation documentation is available separately

5

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Chapitre 2 Installation

CHAPITRE 3

Table of contents

31 First Steps with GLPI

Everything you need to know to get started with GLPI

311 General

Choose a web browser

GLPI requires the use of a web browser

Optimal functioning of the application is obtained by using a modern browser compliant with web standards

The following web browsers are supported mdash Edgemdash Firefox (including 2 latests ESR version)mdash Chrome

GLPI also works on mobile it is generally compatible with the mobile versions of the supported browsers

How to connect

Open your browser and go to the GLPI homepage (httpsglpi_address)

Access to the full functionality of the application requires authentication An unauthenticated user can possibly accesscertain functions if GLPI has been configured to allow it

mdash View the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)mdash Open a ticketmdash

Depending on the profile of the authenticated user they may be shown the standard interface or simplified interface

7

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

End your session

To log out click the Logout button in the top right of the screen Once logged out you will be redirected to the loginpage

312 Understanding the interface

Depending on the userrsquos profile some menus and content may differ but the logic of the interface remains the same

The GLPI interface is made up of different areas grouping together the applicationrsquos functionalities according to theirnature

1 The user menu allows you to manage your preferences access help change the current language and discon-nect

2 The main menu allows you to navigate through the different modules

3 The breadcrumb trail allows you to locate the context of use of the main work area

4 The entity selector (in multi-entity mode)

5 The main working area is the privileged space for interaction with the application

6 The search box allows you to perform a global search at any time

313 Manage your password

The change password form can be found in user preferences

You must enter and confirm your password before validation The administrator can disable this feature so the changepassword area does not appear in this case

In the event that the user has forgotten their password the possibility of resetting it is offered to them from the loginpage The link is only present if notifications are enabled

Only users with an e-mail address defined in GLPI and not authenticating via an external source (LDAP mail serveretc) can use this functionality Once the renewal request has been made by entering their e-mail address the userreceives an e-mail providing them with a link allowing them to reset their password

Passwords must follow the defined security policy A real-time check of the entered password is then carried out

8 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

314 Manage your Preferences

User preferences are accessible from the Preferences tab of the user form by clicking on your name at the top rightof the interface from any page

Each authenticated user has the possibility to modify his preferences if they have the Personalize update right in theirprofile

Main Tab

Here the user can modify the usual personal information mdash Surnamemdash First namemdash Email addressmdash Phone numbersmdash Locationmdash Languagemdash

Note Some fields cannot be modified if they come from an LDAP directory

A user can add email addresses and select the default address which will be used for sending notifications

They can also specify some default behaviors of the application such as the selected profile and entity They can alsoturn off notifications for actions they take

Depending on the profiles the experienced user can also choose to exit the normal application mode In debug modeGLPI displays errors all variable values SQL queries etc It is useful to activate this mode in the event of GLPImalfunction A maximum amount of information can therefore be communicated to the developers This mode alsoallows you to have additional information on different objects in a specific tab (notifications etc)

31 First Steps with GLPI 9

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personalization Tab

This tab allows you to modify the general display preferences applied to a given user These parameters take priorityover those defined in the general configuration

Note The Number of results per page value shown here cannot exceed the maximum value set in the general displayoptions

Note that the Remote access key section allows you to regenerate the security key used to access the private flowsoffered by GLPI Currently the ICAL and WEBCAL flows of the planning are protected by this security key which isintegrated into the url

10 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personal View Tab

Lists custom views defined in objects by the user In particular it allows you to delete the personal views defined toreturn to global views

315 Navigate GLPI modules

The various functions of GLPI have been grouped into several modules built around similar contexts of use The topbar of the interface allows you to navigate between these modules

mdash The Assets module provides access to the various inventoried materialsmdash The Assistance module allows you to create and monitor tickets problems and changes as well as see statisticsmdash The Management module allows you to manage contacts suppliers budgets contracts and documentsmdash The Tools module allows you to manage projects notes the knowledge base reservations RSS feeds and view

reportsmdash The Administration module allows you to administer users groups entities profiles rules and dictionaries It

also allows the maintenance of the application (basic backup and restore check if a new version is available)as well as the management of the email queue

mdash The Setup module provides access to the general configuration options of GLPI notifications collectorsautomatic tasks authentication plugins external links SLA management of titles components as well ascontrol of the uniqueness of fields

The menus presented vary according to the authorizations of the logged in user The navigation context is presented tothe user in the breadcrumb trail

Note You will find at the bottom right a button allowing you to quickly return to the top of the page if necessary

There are keyboard shortcuts that allow you to navigate from one module submodule to another Here is the list ofthese shortcuts

mdash 1 =gt Homemdash Assets

mdash o =gt Computersmdash s =gt Software

mdash Assistancemdash t =gt Ticketsmdash a =gt Statisticsmdash p =gt Planning

mdash Managementmdash d =gt Documents

mdash Toolsmdash b =gt Knowledge basemdash r =gt Reservationsmdash e =gt Reports

mdash Administrationmdash u =gt Usersmdash g =gt Groups

mdash Setupmdash n =gt Dropdowns

Note The combination of keys to associate with these shortcuts varies depending on the operating systems andbrowsers used Here are some examples according to the browsers

mdash Mozilla Firefox ChromeSimultaneously press the keys Alt Shift and the desired shortcut

mdash Opera

31 First Steps with GLPI 11

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Simultaneously press the keys Esc Shift and the desired shortcut

In addition since version 92 GLPI offers navigation with approximate search (fuzzy) accessible from the keyboardshortcut Ctrl + Alt + G This will open a modal window allowing you to filter via a search field all the menus ofGLPI (all the levels are present you have for example access to the 3rd level such as the dropdowns or the components)

In this window additional shortcuts are available mdash and in order to navigate through the resultsmdash Enter to change the active glpi page on the selected resultmdash Esc to close the window

316 User interfaces

Note The choice of the default interface as well as the visiblity of different modules can be configured in the profilesor from the userrsquos preferences

Standard Interface

This is the main interface of the application All the modules are available but there are limits depending on the profilesettings

The home page of the standard interface provides a summary view for quick access to active elements (tickets notesplanning contracts etc)

It is divided into 5 views mdash Dashboard

A customizable dashboard

mdash Personal view

12 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Shows the tickets opened rejected to be processed to be approved (for which the logged-in user isthe requestor) or those on which this user has an interaction as a validator or technician (awaitingvalidation in progress to be closed in waiting) This view also offers him current issues his scheduleand available notes

mdash Group view

Offers the same information about tickets and issues as the personal view but using the groups to whichit belongs as a reference Depending on their profile they may or may not have access to the tickets forwhich their groups are requesting

mdash Global view

Offers statistics on tickets and issues according to their status and on contracts according to their expi-ration date It also offers the view of the latest additions of objects in GLPI Depending on the configu-ration used new tickets can also be presented in this tab

mdash RSS feed

Proposes the content of defined RSS feeds RSS feeds are managed from the laquo Tools gt RSS Feeds raquomenu

Note For Personal and Group views only tables with information are displayed

Note Two security messages may be displayed when you log in for the first time after completing the installationprocedure

The first asks you to change the passwords of the accounts created by default in GLPI the second asks you to deletethe directory glpiinstall

As long as you have not performed these operations the messages will remain

Simplified Interface

It is the most restrictive interface of the application and is built for an end-user more than a technician Therefore thenumber of available modules is reduced to a minimum

31 First Steps with GLPI 13

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is intended for users with very limited permissions in the application such as the built-in self-service and helpdeskprofiles

In the default configuration a user can from this interface only create tickets follow the processing of their ticketsmake reservations view the notes or public RSS feeds (or create private notes or feeds) and consult the FrequentlyAsked Questions

The home page offers the number of its tickets according to their status as well as the most popular and recent FAQtopics

317 View and manage records

The display of all the lists of records and of all the details concerning a record always works in the same way in GLPIWhether itrsquos a list of computers phones or tickets the presentation follows the same principle

A list of elements can be obtained in 2 ways mdash From the search engine

From the search engine after determining the criteria and validating the search a list of records isdisplayed By default no search criteria limit the list of recordings offered and the display is limited tothe first x records in the list which is configurable in the preferences

mdash From another list

Some tabs offer a list of related items For example from a list of computers click on the name of acomputer then navigate to the software tab The list of software installed on this computer is displayed

Details concerning a record are displayed in the form of tabs grouping together similar information For a computerthe financial information and the software list are in two separate tabs

Customize the display

The columns displayed from the complete list of the inventory can be configured Click on the button It ispossible to add delete and order the displayed columns

14 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash The global view applies to all profiles having access to a part of the inventory the modification of this partwill therefore be visible by all users

mdash The personal view applies only to the logged-in user and overrides the global view settings This view is onlyavailable if you have the User view right regarding the Search result display

This tab also allows you to reset the display customization of the different lists The user can for eachtype of object return to the default display by deleting this personalization

318 Search for information in GLPI

GLPI has a search engine allowing you to display a set of elements satisfying a certain number of criteria The proposedlists are paginated A navigation bar at the top and bottom of the list is used to define the number of items to displayper page and to navigate between pages

A global search engine (that is one that can use data from objects of different type) is also available

In addition to the list of elements corresponding to the stated criteria these lists offer some additional features mdash Export in different formats (CSV PDF )mdash Massive (Bulk) actionsmdash A marque-pages system to save searches

Perform a basic search

The basic search makes it possible to carry out multiple searches configured and sorted on one of the types of theinventory Depending on the data on which the search is carried out the following operators can be proposed

mdash containsmdash ismdash is notmdash beforemdash after

Searching on dates allows you to specify a specific date (Specify a date) or to define it in relation to the current date(Now + ou - X hour(s) day(s) month or year(s)) It is also possible to specify a search before or after a given date asdefined intervals (Monday Last Saturday Start of month Start of year Start of year etc)

For labels it is possible to search for a given value (is) If the dropdowns can be visible in the sub-entities the choicesunder and not under appear The criteria are added with the + on a gray background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes - Percentage free contains gt 80

Note Once the criteria have been defined the search is launched by pressing the Search button

Perform a multi-criteria search

The multi-criteria search makes it possible to refine the search by extending it to other types of objects by addingglobal search criteria This type of search is obtained by adding criteria with the + on a white background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space attached toa 17-inch monitor and having LibreOffice software installed

31 First Steps with GLPI 15

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory (Mio) contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes gt Percentage free contains gt 80AND multi Monitor gt Size contains 17AND multi Software gt Name contains LibreOffice

Items in Trash

Some items in GLPI can be trashed To view them in order to restore them or delete them permanently click on theicon representing a recycle bin To return to the display of active elements click again on this icon

Perform an advanced search

Here are some examples of search operators

NULLmdash Find the records with such empty field with a date field ltnumber_of_months orgt number_of_monthsmdash Search for materials with a deadline corresponding to the number of monthsmdash Search for computers that are 5 years old Date of purchase contains lt-60

^123 Find the records containing 123 at the start of the field

Avertissement On some systems you have to type ^ the space bar then the first character

^Windows Find records containing Windows 2000 Windows XP but not with Windows

123$ Find the records containing 123 at the end of the field

^123$ Find records containing only the text 123

Two search criteria linked by the operator AND NOT Find records that do not match a criterion (other than)

Entity is laquo Root entity raquo AND NOT Type contains laquo Laptop raquo Search for all computers in the laquo Root entity raquowhich are not laptops

[Year]-[Month]-[Day] (YYYY-MM-DD) Search by date

For security reasons the operator is not usable

Export the result of a search

The export of the search result in SLK or CSV spreadsheet formats or in PDF format can be done in two differentforms

mdash The current page exports only the data displayed on the screen (for example the first 10 results out of 200)mdash All pages exports all of the search results

The SLK format can be used by many spreadsheets Fields that are too long will be truncated when using software thatdoes not fully comply with the standards In this case it is preferable to use the exports in CSV format

If the data exported in CSV format is imported into Microsoft Excel software accented characters may not be displayedcorrectly This software seems to have difficulty with data encoded in UTF-8

16 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Perform massive actions

A massive action system is integrated into the search engine It allows you to make bulk modifications and performactions to all the selected elements Some examples of the available massive actions (Will differ based on the type ofitem)

mdash Put in trashbinmdash Delete permanentlymdash Restoremdash Connect Disconnectmdash Installmdash Updatemdash Add a contractmdash Enable the financial and administrative informationmdash Add to transfer listmdash Synchronize

To use it simply select the elements for which you want to perform an action then click on the Actions button availableat the top and bottom of the list Then once the type of action has been selected options are optionally presented aswell as a validation button

The results of the actions as well as the information messages are presented at the end of the execution of all theactions

Note mdash You will find in the headers of the table (at the top and at the bottom) a checkbox allowing you to select or

unselect all the elements of the listmdash A similar system of actions is available in certain lists present within the objects themselves The operation is

identical to that explained here

Avertissement The number of elements that can be handled simultaneously is limited by the values ofmax_input_vars or suhosinpostmax_vars in your PHP configuration You may therefore get a mes-sage indicating that massive edits are disabled You just need to increase the values of your PHP configuration orreduce the number of items displayed

Quick search

This tool is located at the top right of the GLPI screen It allows searching within elements including but not limitedto

mdash Ticketsmdash Problemsmdash Changesmdash Projectsmdash Computersmdash Monitorsmdash Softwaremdash Network Equipmentmdash Peripheralsmdash Printers

31 First Steps with GLPI 17

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Phonesmdash Contactsmdash Contactsmdash Suppliersmdash Documentsmdash Budgetsmdash Licensesmdash Usersmdash Groups

Note The search is carried out only on the fields displayed by default for each of the elements mentioned above Inessence it is the same as an items seen search on each type of element

319 Saved Searches

GLPI offers a system for saving searches (bookmarks) Once the search is done it is possible to save it from a star-shaped button accessible in the search form

There are two types of saved searches mdash Private searches Usable by all users and they are only accessible by their authormdash Public searches Can only be created by authorized users and are accessible by all users provided they belong

to the configured entitiesSaved searches can be accessed by clicking on the star shaped button in the user menu

18 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From this interface it is possible to mdash Reorder private searches (drag amp drop) - public searches use automatic sortingmdash Select a default search (only one possible per type of object) by clicking on the star iconmdash Access the search results (by simply clicking on it)mdash Access the saved searches management interface by clicking on the wrench icon at the top right

Avertissement Setting a particularly heavy search as the default display can have catastrophic effects on theoverall performance of the application

Display of counters

The GLPI settings are used to define whether the counters should be displayed or not In the case of research itrsquos a bitmore complicated

This is because some searches can take a long time (and resources) to complete In order to limit the impact onperformance the heaviest requests are not counted by default So that the execution time of a saved query can becalculated it must be executed at least once A scheduled task is also offered to calculate execution times regularly(and thus avoid requests that would have become heavy over time)

Administrators can override the automatic count method and have a search always or never be counted This possibilityshould be used sparingly

Configuring alerts

It is possible to configure the sending of ldquoalertsrdquo on a saved search using the GLPI notification system Sending anotification is based on the number of results returned by the search compared with the chosen operator to the enteredvalue

31 First Steps with GLPI 19

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The notification(s) used are displayed for reference from the alerts configuration tab For private research only theuser who created the search can be notified using a template provided by default in this case a single notificationwill be linked

For public searches a specific event must be created as well as a notification that uses it This is only possible fromthe alerts configuration tab

Once the specific notification is created it has to be configured by associating it with a template and by selecting thedesired recipients Note that it is possible to associate several notifications with the same search via the event thatcorresponds to it

Note As long as the notification specific to a public search is not created it will not be possible to add alerts

32 Modules

321 Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes

Les actions

Les diffeacuterentes actions possibles sur lrsquoobjet deacutependent des droits attribueacutes dans votre profil

De mecircme certaines actions dans lrsquoonglet deacutependent des droits du profil (comme les actions de masse)

Ne sont listeacutees ici que les actions principales pouvant ecirctre reacutealiseacutees sur diffeacuterents objets Si une action est speacutecifique agraveun objet elle sera deacutecrite dans la fiche de cet objet

Creacuteation

Le droit de creacuteer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoajout srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Cliquer sur le laquo + raquo situeacute dans le menu horizontal

4 Si lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire en possegravede une gestion de gabarit choisir un gabarit agrave appliquer

5 Compleacuteter les diffeacuterents champs de la fiche vierge

20 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Valider

Une option preacutesente dans les preacutefeacuterences utilisateur (Apregraves la creacuteation aller agrave lrsquoeacuteleacutement creacuteeacute) permet de deacuteterminersi lrsquoutilisateur souhaite apregraves la creacuteation lrsquoaffichage de la fiche nouvellement creacuteeacutee ou une autre fiche vierge pourcreacuteation en seacuterie

Modification

Le droit de modifier un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la modification srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste desobjets

4 2 choix de modification

mdash Modification unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Modifier les champs souhaiteacutes

3 Cliquer sur le bouton Actualiser

mdash Modification en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

3 Choisir le champ agrave modifier

4 Indiquer la nouvelle valeur du champ

5 Cliquer sur le bouton Envoyer

Affichage

Le droit de visualiser un objet deacutepend du droit Lecture deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur Si vous nrsquoavez pas le droitde visualiser un objet le nom de celui-ci nrsquoapparaitra pas dans les diffeacuterents menus de GLPI

Par exempl si vous supprimer le droit de lecture de lrsquoobjet Ordinateur dans votre profil le sous-menu Ordinateurnrsquoapparaitra pas dans le menu Parc mecircme si vous avez le droit de modifier un ordinateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la visualisation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour visualiser un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur via le moteur de recherche situeacute en haut de la liste des objets

4 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

Association drsquoun document

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoassociation agrave un document srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

32 Modules 21

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Documents

3 Seacutelectionner un document ou cliquer sur le bouton Parcourir pour en ajouter un

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un DocumentAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au document

Association drsquoun contrat

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire si celui-ci peut ecirctre lieacute agrave un contrat lrsquoassociation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircmemaniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un contrat agrave un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Contrats

3 Seacutelectionner un contrat

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un ContratAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au contrat

Transfert entre entiteacutes

Avec la notion drsquoentiteacutes vient la possibiliteacute de deacutefinir des profils de transfert pour les mutations drsquoeacuteleacutements entreentiteacutes

Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet notamment de passer drsquoun GLPI mono entiteacute agrave un GLPI multi-entiteacutes en utilisant lestransferts

Comment faire un transfert

1 Utiliser un profil qui a le droit de faire des transferts (Administration gt Profils gt Administration ndashgt Droit leLecture sur Transfeacuterer)

2 Configurer les actions faites par le transfert ([Administration gt Regravegles ndashgt Transfeacute-rer](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst))

3 Srsquoassurer que le profil qui va effectuer le transfert a une visibiliteacute sur lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante et sur lrsquoentiteacute prenante (leplus simple est drsquoutiliser un profil reacutecursif depuis lrsquoentiteacute racine)

4 Se positionner sur lrsquoEntiteacute racine (Voir Tous)

5 Depuis la liste des objets seacutelectionner lrsquoeacuteleacutement agrave transfeacuterer

22 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Choisir Ajouter agrave la liste de transfert et Valider 7 Dans Mode de transfert choisir un profil de configuration du transfert (creacuteeacute en point 2) 8 Seacutelectionner lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle sera transfeacutereacute lrsquoeacuteleacutement 9 Cliquer sur Transfeacuterer

10 Veacuterifier dans la nouvelle entiteacute que le mateacuteriel srsquoy trouve bien

Note Si un eacuteleacutement lieacute nrsquoexiste pas dans la nouvelle entiteacute il sera automatiquement creacuteeacute si le profil de transfertdemande de le conserver

Exemple transfert drsquoun ordinateur avec un fournisseur deacutefini dans les informations financiegraveres Si ce fournisseurnrsquoexiste que dans lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante il sera creacuteeacute dans lrsquoentiteacute prenante Par contre un fournisseur deacutefini dans lrsquoentiteacuteracine en reacutecursif ne sera pas recreacuteeacute

Avertissement Le lieu et le groupe seront agrave adapter pour la nouvelle entiteacute

Suppression

Le droit de supprimer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la suppression srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere 1 Se connecter agrave GLPI 2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur) 3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des

objets Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes

mdash Suppression unitaire 1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton

mdash Suppression en masse 1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

Dans les deux cas de figure il faudra choisir mdash Mettre agrave la corbeille si lrsquoobjet possegravede une corbeille mdash Supprimer deacutefinitivement si lrsquoobjet ne possegravede pas de corbeille

Dans le cas drsquoun objet ne posseacutedant pas de corbeille GLPI demandera une confirmation avant la suppression deacutefinitivede lrsquoobjet dans la base de donneacutees Dans le cas contraire lrsquoobjet sera mis dans la corbeille drsquoougrave il pourra ecirctre restaureacute(sorti de la corbeille)

La gestion des gabarits dans GLPI

Preacutesentation

Pour certains eacuteleacutements de GLPI il est possible de creacuteer de nouveaux eacuteleacutements (ordinateurs par exemple) depuisdes gabarits preacutealablement deacutefinis Un gabarit deacutefinit un masque de creacuteation certaines valeurs peuvent ecirctre deacutefiniesdirectement ou calculeacutees en fonction drsquoun masque (comme un numeacutero drsquoinventaire par exemple)

La gestion des gabarits se reacutealise via lrsquoicocircne situeacutee dans la barre de menu

32 Modules 23

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Eleacutements de lrsquoinventaire

Pour les eacuteleacutements de lrsquoinventaire le gabarit deacutefinit un eacuteleacutement standard en preacute-remplissant certains champs qui serontreacuteutiliseacutes pour la creacuteation drsquoautres eacuteleacutements Cela permet de simplifier lrsquoajout drsquoun grand nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements quasiidentiques

Par example afin de preacuteparer la reacuteception de 20 imprimantes identiques dont seuls les numeacuteros de seacuterie et drsquoinventairechangent

mdash creacuteer un gabarit correspondant agrave ce modegravele drsquoimprimantemdash dans ce gabarit remplir tous les champs invariables (constructeur modegravele etc)mdash creacuteer ensuite les 20 fiches drsquoimprimantes drsquoapregraves ce gabarit

Lors de la saisie de chaque imprimante le numeacutero de seacuterie et le numeacutero drsquoinventaire seront les seuls eacuteleacutements agravecompleacuteter

Le systegraveme drsquoincreacutementation

Un systegraveme de remplissage et drsquoincreacutementation automatique de certains champs (reconnaissables gracircce au ) estdisponible Ces champs (nom numeacutero drsquoinventaire ) sont alors remplis automatiquement agrave la creacuteation si le champcorrespondant dans le gabarit contient une chaicircne de formatage de la forme ltXXXgt

La chaicircne de formatage doit impeacuterativement deacutebuter par le caractegravere lt et se terminer par le caractegravere gt

Au sein de la chaicircne vous pourrez utiliser les caractegraveres suivants mdash X repreacutesente un caractegravere quelconque mdash g recherche du numeacutero parmi tous les champs identiques baseacutes sur le mecircme format mdash emplacement du numeacutero agrave increacutementer (nombre de chiffres eacutegal au nombre de ) mdash Y anneacutee sur 4 chiffres mdash y anneacutee sur 2 chiffres mdash m mois mdash d jour

Par exemple en poursuivant lrsquoexemple citeacute plus haut il est possible drsquoutiliser la fonctionnaliteacute drsquoincreacutementation pourcreacuteer automatiquement les numeacuteros drsquoinventaire

Ceux-ci sont composeacutes par exemple de la forme ANNEE+MOIS+JOUR+code structure (555) + code opeacuteration(1234) + numeacutero agrave increacutementer il suffira de renseigner dans le gabarit pour le champ numeacutero drsquoinventaire la chaicircneltYmd-555-1234-gt

Chaque imprimante agrave sa creacuteation verra son numeacutero drsquoinventaire geacuteneacutereacute automatiquement et increacutementeacute de 1 agrave 20

Gabarits de ticket

Tout comme les objets drsquoinventaire une notion de gabarit existe pour les tickets Un gabarit permet de personnaliserlrsquointerface de deacuteclaration drsquoun ticket en fonction du type de ticket et de la cateacutegorie

Les comportements pouvant ecirctre modifieacutes sont mdash la liste de champs devant ecirctre obligatoires pour lrsquoouverture drsquoun ticket mdash la liste des champs dont la valeur sera preacutedeacutefinie lors de lrsquoaffichage du formulaire mdash la liste des champs qui doivent ecirctre masqueacutes

Note Pour le controcircle des champs obligatoires seuls les champs disponibles dans lrsquointerface de lrsquoutilisateur sontcontrocircleacutes

24 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Donc si un champ est deacutefini comme obligatoire mais qursquoil nrsquoest pas proposeacute dans lrsquointerface il ne geacuteneacuterera pas drsquoerreurA la saisie des champs obligatoires sont afficheacutees les interfaces dans lesquelles ils sont utiliseacutes

Un gabarit est lieacute agrave lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle il a eacuteteacute deacutefini et peut ecirctre visible dans les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis pour les entiteacutes ou les profils Pour les profils ne sont associables que desgabarits de lrsquoentiteacute racine visibles de toutes les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent eacutegalement ecirctre deacutefinis pour chaque cateacutegorie de ticket (un pour chaque type)

A la creacuteation du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est par ordre de prioriteacute 1 Celui deacutefini dans la cateacutegorie deacutefinie pour le type deacutefini2 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour le profil courant de lrsquoutilisateur3 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour lrsquoentiteacute de creacuteation du ticket

Avertissement Dans les 2 derniers cas si le gabarit preacutedeacutefinit un nouveau couple typecateacutegorie le premier casest alors testeacute de nouveau avec ces nouvelles valeurs

Note mdash A la mise agrave jour du ticket le mecircme ordre de prioriteacute est utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer les champs obligatoiresmdash Si un des paramegravetre (entiteacute profil type ou cateacutegorie) est modifieacute lors de la saisie du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est

alors deacutetermineacute une nouvelle fois en fonction des nouvelles valeursmdash Le gabarit sert agrave la creacuteation de tickets reacutecurrents

Les statuts dans GLPI la vue speacutecifique

Cette information est couramment utiliseacutee pour distinguer le mateacuteriel mis au rebut disponible affecteacute etc Il estdonc possible de creacuteer ses propres statuts en rapport avec le systegraveme drsquoinformation

Crsquoest agrave lrsquoadministrateur de GLPI depuis la configuration des intituleacutes de deacutefinir les statuts qui seront utiliseacutes et pourquels types drsquoeacutelements ils le seront Ces statuts peuvent ecirctre arborescents pour faciliter la gestion

Le statut drsquoun eacuteleacutement est modifiable depuis sa fiche ou depuis le systegraveme drsquoactions massives

Un rapport vous propose une synthegravese des statuts par type de mateacuteriel La recherche globale de lrsquoinventaire vouspermet une recherche par statut sur lrsquoensemble des eacuteleacutements

322 Asset module

The GLPI Asset module is used to manage all the assets that are part of your IT infrastructure

Asset management in GLPI

In order to manage hardwares and softwares of an IT infrastructure GLPI allows natively to list all the assets that areused inside the managed organization

However it is possible to automate information pushing from the assets thanks to third-party tools GLPI supports theuse of two existing plugins

mdash The Fusion Inventory plugin transforms GLPI into an inventory server with the Fusion Inventory agents inter-facing directly with the GLPI server

mdash The ocsinventoryng plugin allow to synchronize the GLPI database with the OCS Inventory NG inventorytool the agents installed on the computers interface directly the the OCS Inventory NG server

32 Modules 25

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Available types

Computers

In a computer form the following information is available mdash Operating system

mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Service packmdash Serial numbermdash Product IDmdash

mdash General characteristics mdash Manufacturermdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Management informations mdash Technical managermdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Users mdash Computer users either known by GLPI or not

Other fields are informative such as Network (connexion type) and Update source (where are computer updatescoming from (Windows update yum apt )

It is possible to use templates with computers

Note mdash when GLPI is used with an inventory tool various informations provided by the tool itself are also availablemdash a computer can be a server a desktop computer or a laptop to differentiate them it is possible to use the type

field

The different tabs

Operating systems

The informations on operating systems for a computer are visible in tabs Operating system for a Computer entry

26 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

An operating system is associated with the following elements mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Architecturemdash Service Packmdash Kernelmdash Editionmdash Product IDmdash Serial number

Note The creation and management of the titles for operating systems is located in the menu Configuration gtDrop-downs gt Operating systems

Note A deletion or addition of an operating system is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the operation system informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 27

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

28 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

32 Modules 29

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Volumes

This tab named Volumes and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the volumes attached to a computer

A volume attached to a computer is characterized by mdash namemdash physical partitionmdash mount pointmdash file systemmdash total sizemdash available sizemdash ciphering algorithm and type

It is possible from a Computer entry to add a volume by clicking on button Add a volume

30 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible from a Computer entry to modify an existing volume by clicking on the link under its name

Note Every deletion or addition of a volume is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the volumes informations can be automatically importedand updated

Softwares

This tab named Softwares and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the softwares installed on a computerThese softwares are sorted by their category and are characterized by name version and version status

To install a software first select its name in the drop-down list then its version

It is possible to associate a license to a software on a computer

To associate a license first select the software in the drop-down list then the wanted license

If the license is associated with a software that is already installed on the computer it will be presented in the list ofsoftwares

32 Modules 31

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Otherwise it will be displayed in a separate table

Note mdash the drop-down list enumerates the softwares that are available in the entitymdash licenses management can be found in Assets gt Softwares See Manage softwares

Note It is possible via mass actions to install on a computer a software selected from its license

Note Every deletion or addition of a software or a license is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the softwares informations can be automatically importedand updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 33

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

34 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

32 Modules 35

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

36 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 37

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

38 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 39

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Virtualization

This tab displays the virtualization systems (virtual machines containers jails ) associated to a host

The available information vary from one system to another for a virtual machine for instance it includes namevirtualization system virtualization model state allocated memory number of logical processors as well as thename of the physical machine (the host)

GLPI establishes the link between a host and a virtual machine based on the unique identifier (UUID) In some caseit is possible that the UUID is different inside the physical machine and the virtual machine it is therefore impossibleto make the link automatically

The only way to link manually a virtual machine to a physical machine is to attribute the same UUID to the virtualmachine declared on the host and to the virtual machine inside GLPI

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the virtualization informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Antivirus

This tab named Antivirus and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the antivirus running on a computer

An antivirus is characterized by mdash namemdash activenon activemdash vendormdash update statusmdash antivirus versionmdash signature database versionmdash expiration date

Note Every deletion or addition of an antivirus is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the antivirus informations can be automatically importedand updated

40 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 41

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

42 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 43

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to computers mdash Install a software with a license on a computer From the tab Softwares add a license by choosing the name

of the software followed by the name of the license From the Mass actions of summary table choose Install

Avertissement A software can only be installed if its license has a version in use or a purchase version

Displays

In a display form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the display

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Display management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Display users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Sizemdash Resolutionmdash Port types (VGA DVI HDMI DisplayPort)

44 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Integrated soundmdash Connectivitymdash

Management type

It is possible to manage displays either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one display per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with displays

The different tabs

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 45

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

46 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 47

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

48 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 49

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

50 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 51

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to displays mdash connect a display to a monitor

Softwares

GLPI allows management of softwares and their versions as well as licenses associated or not to software versions

A software is by default associated with an entity

Financial management is done at the level of licenses the financial management at software level is only a model forthe licenses associated with this software

Softwares can be imported automatically using a third-party inventory tool in this case a dictionary can be usedto filter or clean the import data (see [Configure data dictionaries](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrstlaquo The dictionaries are managed from menu entry Administration gt Dictionaries raquo))

Some fields are specific in the software form mdash Update is an information with no processing associated and which tells whether the software is an update of

another softwaremdash Category allows to group softwares in the list of softwares of an asset

52 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Can be associated with a ticket defines whether the software can be seen in the drop-down list laquo Hardware raquoof a ticket

It is recommended to first create the software without a version number in the name then to create the versions andlast to create the licenses

Note In multi-entity mode the list of software can rapidly become long because of double entries (one softwareper entity) A better approach can consist in grouping identical softwares in the same entity (see tab Grouping below)then to make recursive the elements that can be made recursive

It is possible to use templates with softwares

The different tabs

Versions

A version of a software is the element that can be installed on a asset see also Installations tab

The main view lists the number of installations of the version

Specific fields mdash Name the version numbermdash Status in ITIL recommendations it allows to follow the DSL (library storing authorized versions)mdash Operating system the operating system on which this software version runsmdash Installations the number of installations of the versionmdash Comment some comments

Licenses

Installations

The installation of a software on a computer is visualized through a version and can be consulted on a software form(list of computers having at least one version installed) on a version form (computers having this version installed)and finally on a computer form (list of versions of installed softwares sorted by category)

Note mdash Column license is filled only when the license is affected to the concerned computermdash The initial display of different categories depend upon user preferences (see [manage preferences](01-

premiers-pas03_Utiliser_GLPI04_Geacuterer_ses_preacutefeacuterencesrst raquo)

Two options are available on the list of installations of software on a computer Above the list Install allows toinstall manually a version of a software on the computer by selecting first the software and its version if a license isassociated with this software the use version of the license is automatically selected

To Uninstall a version of a software mass actions must be used first select the versions to be uninstalled then selectSuppress definitively If a license is affected to the computer it remains affected but its use version is erased

Following the list of installed versions the list of affected but non installed licenses is displayed It is possible to adda new license to the computer Mass actions allow via the action Install to install a use version of selected licenses

32 Modules 53

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

54 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

32 Modules 55

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

56 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

32 Modules 57

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

58 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Grouping

This section describes how to group software having same names in sub-entities allowing to group softwares of childentities into mother entity

Note This is only available for multi-entities platforms

How to realize a grouping

1 If the software does not exist in mother entity create in this mother entity a software whose name is strictlyidentical to the name of software in child entities

2 Open the form of the software of the mother entity

3 Activate recursivity (sub-entities to Yes at top right) this will make a new tab Grouping appear after tab History

4 Open this tab a list displays softwares having same names in child entities

5 Select appropriate lines and validate grouping

Avertissement This operation cannot be undone

This grouping have the following effects mdash Licenses are attached to the software in mother entity but stay in origin sub-entitiesmdash Versions are merged no more doubles in mother entitymdash Old softwares are moved to the trash

Note When using a third-party inventory tool some extra steps are mandatory mdash Empty trash after grouping otherwise synchronization will restore the old software in case of new versionmdash Associate the same vendor to the new software as the synchronization checks vendor name a new software

would then be created

32 Modules 59

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to softwares mdash Add a version to a softwaremdash [Manage licenses](03_Module_Parc04_LogicielsOnglet_Licencesrst) From menu Assets gt Softwares

click on license name in tab Licenses

Licenses

A software license is a right to use the software Its specific fields include mdash Name commercial naming of the licensemdash Purchase version the version that was boughtmdash Use version the real installed version of the software

Purchase version and use version can be different however the use version must be compliant with the purchaseversion

Version type describes the specifics of the right to use the software OEM type is the only type that is configured bydefault in GLPI Refer to configure types

60 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Number field displays the number of installations that are allowed with this license It can be a user number (floatinglicense) a number of installations (multiple license) an unlimited number of installation (site license) It is possibleto assign the license to one or several corresponding computers for instance if the license is of type OEM

Expire date is the limit date that allows the use of the license After this date a notification can be triggered for alertsto be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Indication This is configurable at entity level in menu Configuration gt Notifications in order to define usedmodels and recipients and in menu Configuration gt Entity to activate or not this functionality define default valueand anticipation of notification sending if needed

Astuce Expired licenses are not counted in the total of available licenses

It is possible to link contracts with licenses refer to [Manage contracts](05_Module_Gestion05_Contratsrstlaquo Contracts are managed via menu Management gt Contracts raquo))

Astuce When activating the accounting information for a license data are initialized from software accountinginformation which act as a model

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Summary raquo Displays a table containing the number of computers using this license

mdash Tab laquo Computers raquo Displays a table listing the computers using this license including in particular computername serial number inventory number location status group and user Mass actions are available if autho-rized for the computers to delete license use on selected computer or to assign another license of the samesoftware to selected computer (action Move)

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 61

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

62 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 63

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

64 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 65

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

mdash Display software license details From menu Assets gt Software click on license name in tab Licensesmdash Remove use of a license by a computer See tab Computers above See also [tab Softwares of a compu-

ter](modulesassetssoftwaresrst)mdash [Associate a document and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsassocier_un_document_a_un_objetrst)mdash [Associate a contract and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_contrat_agrave_un_objetrst)

Network equipments

Network equipment represent the hardware that manages transmits and route network between several other equip-ments (computers printers )

A network equipment can be a switch an Ethernet hub a router a firewall or a WiFi access point

It is possible to use templates with network equipments

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

66 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

32 Modules 67

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

68 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

32 Modules 69

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

70 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

mdash Tab laquo Network names raquo Summary of IP address and IP networks for each network name

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 71

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

72 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 73

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

74 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 75

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

76 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Network equipments do not have specific actions report to common actions

Peripherals

In a peripheral form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the peripheral

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Peripheral management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Peripheral users mdash Users known to GLPI or not

32 Modules 77

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Groups of usersmdash

Management type

It is possible to manage peripherals either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one peripheral per computer while global management make the peripheral avirtual global element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with peripherals

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

78 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

32 Modules 79

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

80 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

32 Modules 81

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

82 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

32 Modules 83

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

84 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was ordered

32 Modules 85

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

86 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

32 Modules 87

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

88 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 89

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Peripherals do not have specific actions report to common actions

Printers

In a printer form several informations are available mdash General characteristics of the printer

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Printer users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Page countermdash Port typesmdash

Management Type

It is possible to manage printers either unitary or globally

90 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Unitary management corresponds to one printer per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with printers

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

32 Modules 91

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

92 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Cartridges

This tab displays the cartridges associated with the selected printer model mdash cartridges in use with add date and use datemdash used cartridges with cartridge model add date use date end of life date printing counter and number of

printed pages since last cartridge change

Note For cartridge adding or removing report to cartridges management

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Modules 93

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

94 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

32 Modules 95

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

96 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 97

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

98 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 99

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

100 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 101

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

102 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Printers do not have specific actions report to common actions

Cartridges

This functionality of Asset module allows to create cartridges models and corresponding cartridges

In a cartridge form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the cartridge

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage sitemdash

The alert threshold is the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

32 Modules 103

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

For a cartridge to be installable on a printer it must be declared as compatible with this printer

Management of shared stock is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Cartridges raquo This tab allows adding as many cartridges as needed by the model It is also possible toadd several cartridges at once

A first table lists the new or unused cartridges the second table lists used cartridges

mdash Tab laquo Printer models raquo This tab allows to declare the printer models that are compatible with the cartridge

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

104 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 105

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

106 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 107

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

108 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

mdash [Add a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsCreacuteer_un_nouvel_objetrst)mdash [See a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsVisualiser_un_objetrst)mdash [Modify a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsModifier_un_objetrst)mdash [Delete a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsSupprimer_un_objetrst)mdash Add new cartridges to a model See tab Cartridges abovemdash Add a printer model for the cartridge model See tab Printer model abovemdash [Associate a document with a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_document_agrave_un_objetrst)mdash [Transfer a cartridge to another entity](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsTransfeacuterer_un_objetrst)

Consumables

In a consumable form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the consumable

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Consumable management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage locationmdash

The alert threshold corresponds to the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Changing the state of a consumable from new to used requires to set involved user or group

Management of shared stocks is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

Consumables

This tab allows to add as many consumables as needed It is also possible to add several consumable in one shot

A first table lists unused consumables a second table lists used consumables together with the name of the group orthe person to which it has been allocated

The mass actions of this tab allows to allocate consumables (action Give)

32 Modules 109

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

110 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 111

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

112 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 113

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to consumables mdash Add new consumables to a model mdash List allocated consumables

Right icon allows to have a summary of allocated consumables

Phones

In a phone form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the phone

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Phone management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Phone users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Power supplymdash Firmwaremdash

Management type

It is possible to manage phones either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one phone per computer while global management make the phone a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with phones

114 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

32 Modules 115

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

116 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 117

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

118 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and a

32 Modules 119

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

network plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

120 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

32 Modules 121

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

122 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 123

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

124 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

32 Modules 125

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

126 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

Phones do not have specific actions report to common actions

Global search

Menu Asset gt Global allows to perform a global search on default view columns for allowed elements This search islimited to following assets

mdash Computermdash Contactmdash Contractmdash Documentmdash Monitormdash NetworkEquipmentmdash Peripheralmdash Phonemdash Printermdash Softwaremdash SoftwareLicensemdash Ticketmdash Problemmdash Changerdquomdash Usermdash Groupmdash Projectmdash Supplierrdquomdash Budgetmdash Certificatemdash Linemdash Datacentermdash DCRoommdash Enclosuremdash PDUmdash Rackmdash Clustermdash Domain

This search allows for instance to perform a query by status IP or MAC address

Agrave faire Referenced in original doc but not present mdash [Gestion du protocole Internet (IP)](glpiinventory_iphtml) Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plu-

sieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

323 Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs

Le module drsquoassistance permet aux utilisateurs de saisir suivre et traiter des tickets Des plannings (utilisateur ougroupe) et des statistiques sont eacutegalement disponibles

Suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil il est eacutegalement possible de saisir suivre et traiter des problegravemes et deschangements et creacuteer des tickets reacutecurrents (fonctionnaliteacutes agrave nrsquoautoriser que pour un utilisateur de type Technicien)

32 Modules 127

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Afin de mettre en route un service drsquoassistance plusieurs eacutetapes sont neacutecessaires Pour commencer analyser les besoinsde base des utilisateurs et reacutepondre au minimum vital

Une fois que les besoins de base sont satisfaits il est possible de deacutefinir les besoins secondaires et se lancer dans laconfiguration avanceacutee

Le module drsquoassistance de GLPI est conforme au guide de bonnes pratiques ITIL et integravegre donc des notions et nor-malisation de champs Bien que lrsquooutil soit conforme ITIL il nrsquoy aucune obligation pour suivre ces bonnes pratiques chacun est libre drsquoimpleacutementer le service drsquoassistance qui correspond le mieux agrave ses besoins

mdash Mise en route du service drsquoassistancemdash Deacutefinir les acteurs et leurs rocirclesmdash Deacutefinir la matrice de calcul de la prioriteacutemdash Configuration avanceacuteemdash Les matrices de cycle de vie

mdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Regravegles de gestionmdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Ouvrir un ticketmdash Pour aller plus loin

mdash Creacuteer un ticketmdash Geacuterer les problegravemesmdash Geacuterer les changementsmdash Les planningsmdash Les statistiquesmdash Les tickets reacutecurrents

324 Module Gestion

Le module Gestion permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les eacuteleacutements suivants

Geacuterer les licences

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les licences logiciels

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire des licences en lien avec les logiciels deacutejagrave inventorieacutes dans GLPI mdash un suivi des installations de chaque licence sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les licences dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des licences

Note Une licence ne peut pas exister au sein de GLPI sans un logiciel associeacute agrave sa creacuteation

La gestion de licence reste statique un suivi humain est neacutecessaire afin drsquoassurer lrsquoactualisation des informations

128 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Comme enfant de Permet drsquoindiquer si la licence est deacutependante drsquoune autre mdash Version utiliseacutee Crsquoest la version du logiciel qui sera associeacutee agrave la licence mdash Version drsquoachat La version drsquoachat peut diffeacuterer de la version actuellement utiliseacutee il est possible de lrsquoindi-

quer ici mdash Nombre Ici pourra ecirctre indiqueacute le nombre de lien possibles entre la licence et les mateacuteriels dans GLPI mdash Autoriser la surconsommation (Allow Over-Quota) Permet drsquoautoriser ou non le deacutepassement du nombre

de lien maximum configureacute dans le champ Nombre mdash Expiration La date de fin de validiteacute de la licence Champ utile pour configurer les alertes et anticiper le

renouvellement

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Licences

Cet onglet liste toutes les licences consideacutereacutees comme enfant de la licence actuelle

Note Certaines licences peuvent srsquoobtenir par pack ou par groupe de licence (pour un lieu speacutecifique par exemple)il est donc inteacuteressant de les lier

32 Modules 129

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Reacutesumeacute

Cet onglet liste tous les types et les entiteacutes des eacuteleacutements du parc concerneacutes par cette licence

Note Attention au nombre drsquoinstallationlicence disponible deacutefini dans le champ Nombre de la licence

La creacuteation du lien entre un eacuteleacutement du parc et la licence se fait dans lrsquoonglet Logiciels de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste preacuteciseacutement chaque eacuteleacutement relieacute agrave la licence actuelle

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

130 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 131

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

132 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 133

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

134 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Certificats

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un certificat preacutesent dans GLPI agrave une licence

32 Modules 135

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une licencemdash Visualiser une licencemdash Modifier une licencemdash Supprimer une licencemdash Associer un document agrave une licencemdash Transfeacuterer une licence

Geacuterer les budgets

Un budget dans GLPI crsquoest la deacutefinition drsquoun montant sur une peacuteriode donneacutee Les autre eacuteleacutements de GLPI peuventecirctre attacheacutes agrave un budget et ainsi piocher dans ce dernier en indiquant leur valeur

Mateacuterialiser un budget au sein de GLPI ouvre la fonctionnaliteacute de gestion administrative et financiegravere pour tous lesautres eacuteleacutements preacutesents dans lrsquooutil

Il est possible de suivre lrsquoeacutevolution du budget en traccedilant la valeur de chaque eacuteleacutement rattacheacutes

136 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Lier un eacuteleacutement de GLPI avec un budget se passe dans lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Note Lors de la visualisation drsquoun budget dans une sous-entiteacute le total du budget restant nrsquoest pas accessible

Important Ce total est neacutegatif si le total de la valeur des mateacuteriels est plus eacuteleveacutee que la valeur du budget

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Principal

Cet onglet fournit un tableau reacutecapitulant le montant deacutepenseacute sur le budget par type drsquoeacuteleacutements ainsi que le totalrestant

Eleacutements

Cet onglet permet de visualiser les autres eacuteleacutements de GLPI attacheacutes agrave ce budget ainsi que leur valeur

32 Modules 137

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Le lien entre le budget et un eacuteleacutement se fait depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

138 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un budgetmdash Visualiser un budgetmdash Modifier un budget

32 Modules 139

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Supprimer un budgetmdash Associer un document agrave un budgetmdash Transfeacuterer un budget

Geacuterer les certificats

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les certificats

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire de tous les certificats de lrsquoorganisation mdash un suivi des installations de chaque certificat sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les certificats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des certificats

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Fabricant (CA de lrsquoautoriteacute racine) Cette liste deacuteroulante permet de seacutelectionner et ajouter le fabricant ducertificat

mdash Auto-signeacute Permet drsquoindiquer sioui ou non le certificat actuel est auto-signeacute mdash Nom DNS Ici est agrave saisir le preacutefixe du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom -gt

server

140 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Suffixe DNS Ici est agrave saisir le suffixe DNS du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom-gt mycompanycom

mdash Date drsquoexpiration Permet de deacutefinir la fin de validiteacute du certificat Champ utile pour les alertes GLPImdash Commande utiliseacutee Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le certificatmdash Requecircte pour le certificat (CSR) Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le fichier

CSRmdash Certificat Peut ecirctre saisi ici les donneacutees contenues dans le fichier CRT (PEM)

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 141

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

142 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 143

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

144 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 145

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

146 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un certificatmdash Visualiser un certificatmdash Modifier un certificatmdash Supprimer un certificatmdash Associer un document agrave un certificatmdash Transfeacuterer un certificat

Geacuterer les fournisseurs

GLPI integravegre une gestion des fournisseurs celle-ci sert agrave la fois agrave identifier qui a vendu un mateacuteriel (dans la gestion deparc) mais aussi agrave attribuer des tickets agrave cette personne ou socieacuteteacute

Lors de lrsquoachat drsquoun mateacuteriel de marque XX agrave un fournisseur YY il faut traiter deux informations distinctes agrave savoirle fabricant (XX) et le fournisseur (YY)

Un fournisseur se caracteacuterise par un nom un type de tiers (intituleacute) des informations de localisation (adresse codepostal ville pays) et de contact (site web teacuteleacutephone et fax)

Cette gestion agrave pour objectif notamment mdash de reacutefeacuterencer tous les fournisseurs relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation

32 Modules 147

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash drsquooptimiser le contact en cas drsquoincident mdash de permettre drsquoinclure les fournisseurs dans lrsquoAssistance de GLPI

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated Contacts

The Contacts tab is used to show or add linked contacts

Note La distinction est clairement eacutetablie entre le fournisseur qursquoil est possible de lier de maniegravere univoque agrave deseacuteleacutements drsquoinventaire et les contacts qui composent la liste des personnes permettant drsquoentrer en relation avec cefournisseur Pour eacutetablir cette liste il faut donc associer les contacts au fournisseur concerneacute

Exemple

Monsieur Dupont est conseiller de vente dans lrsquoentreprise Acme aupregraves de qui la structure se fournit reacuteguliegraverementCreacuteer un fournisseur nommeacute Acme Creacuteer un contact au nom de Monsieur Dupont Affecter agrave ce contact le typecommercial Puis associer le contact au fournisseur Acme

148 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Eleacutements associeacutes

Lrsquoonglet Eleacutements pour lrsquoobjet fournisseur est speacutecifique Il ne permet que la consultation Lier un eacuteleacutement avec unfournissur se fera depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement (du Parc) concerneacute

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 149

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problegravemes

Dans cet onglet il sera possible de consulter les Problegravemes associeacutes agrave ce fournisseur Crsquoest agrave dire tous les Problegravemessur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacute agrave

150 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changements

Lrsquoonglet permet la consultation de tous les Changements sur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacuteagrave

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 151

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un fournisseurmdash Visualiser un fournisseurmdash Modifier un fournisseurmdash Supprimer un fournisseurmdash Associer un document agrave un fournisseurmdash Transfeacuterer un fournisseur

152 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les contacts

Les utilisateurs au sens de GLPI sont les personnes disposant drsquoun accegraves agrave lrsquoapplication Les personnes exteacuterieuresgeacuteneacuteralement associeacutees agrave des contrats sont stockeacutees sous la forme de contacts

Chaque contact est caracteacuteriseacute par les informations drsquoidentiteacute usuelles ainsi qursquoun titre et des coordonneacutees teacuteleacutepho-niques de messagerie et postales La deacutefinition drsquoune liste de types de contacts permet de classer les contacts selonleur type Lrsquoexportation au format vCard est possible dans la fiche de chaque contact

Note La liste des titres possibles pour un contact est identique agrave celle des utilisateurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Suppliers

The Suppliers tab is used to show or add linked suppliers

32 Modules 153

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

154 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contactmdash Visualiser un contactmdash Modifier un contactmdash Supprimer un contactmdash Associer un document agrave un contactmdash Associer un fournisseur agrave un contactmdash Transfeacuterer un contact

Geacuterer les contrats

Glpi integravegre la gestion des contrats Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet de couvrir tout type de contrat reacutealiseacute tel que les precirctscontrats de maintenance contrat de support etc Cette gestion a pour objectif

mdash de fournir un inventaire de tous les contrats relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation mdash drsquointeacutegrer les contrats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des contrats

32 Modules 155

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Note Il est possible de recevoir des notifications pour preacutevenir drsquoeacuteveacutenements tels que la fin du contrat Dans lecas ou la reconduction du contrat serait expresse il peut ecirctre inteacuteressant drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la date du preacuteavis Pour lescontrats peacuteriodiques il est eacutegalement possible drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la fin de chaque peacuteriode ou preacuteavis de peacuteriode Ceci estconfigurable par entiteacute dans le menu Configuration gt Notifications pour deacutefinir les modegraveles et destinataires utiliseacuteset dans le menu Configuration gt Entiteacute pour activer ou non cette fonctionnaliteacute deacutefinir les valeurs par deacutefaut et uneanticipation de lrsquoenvoi de la notification si besoin

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Type de contrat par deacutefaut aucun type de contrat nrsquoest renseigneacute Il faut au preacutealable les renseigner dans laconfiguration des intituleacutes

mdash Numeacutero cette information nrsquoest pertinente que si le numeacutero de contrat est identique agrave celui utiliseacute au sein desautres services de la socieacuteteacute

mdash Date de deacutebut agrave ne pas confondre avec la date drsquoenregistrement du contrat dans GLPI Tous les calculs depeacuteriodiciteacute sur le contrat sont donc fonction de cette date

mdash Dureacutee initiale du contrat si ce champ et la date de deacutebut sont renseigneacutes la date de fin de contrat apparaitra(en rouge si la date a expireacutee)

mdash Preacuteavis ce champ peut servir au deacuteclenchement des notifications drsquoalerte mdash Numeacutero comptable pour permettre un rapprochement avec le logiciel comptable de la socieacuteteacute mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute du contrat crsquoest la dureacutee agrave laquelle la reconduction du contrat est possible (Exemple Un contrat

drsquoabonnement teacuteleacutephonique drsquoune dureacutee de 24 mois renouvelable au bout de 12 mois) mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute de facturation Crsquoest la dureacutee entre chaque facturemdash Type de reconduction Tacite (le contrat est reconductible automatiquement drsquoune peacuteriode agrave une autre si

aucune des parties ne manifeste sa volonteacute de le rompre) ou Expresse (neacutecessite lrsquoaccord des deux parties pour

156 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

la reconduction du contrat) mdash Nombre max drsquoeacuteleacutements la valeur choisie dans ce champ bloquera ou non lrsquoajout de nouvel eacuteleacutements attacheacutes

agrave ce contrat mdash Heures drsquointervention Les plages horaires drsquointervention correspondent aux horaires drsquointervention couvert

par le contrat Il est possible drsquoy distinguer les samedis et les jours chocircmeacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Coucircts

Cet onglet permet de deacutefinir un coucirct relatif au contrat sur un budget preacutesent dans GLPI- crsquoest-agrave-dire imputer une valeursur le montant total du budget seacutelectionneacute qui sera attribueacute au type drsquoobjet Contrat

Fournisseurs

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs fournisseurs au contrat actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

32 Modules 157

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

158 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 159

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contratmdash Visualiser un contratmdash Modifier un contratmdash Supprimer un contratmdash Associer un document agrave un contratmdash Transfeacuterer un contrat

Geacuterer les documents

Cette section permet drsquoenregistrer des documents eacutelectroniques ou liens web classables selon diverses rubriques

Un document possegravede un nom ainsi qursquoun commentaire et peut ecirctre associeacute agrave une rubrique

Le fichier physique correspondant au document peut ecirctre ajouteacute dans GLPI de plusieurs maniegraveres mdash En parcourant le disque dur local mdash En renseignant un lien web pointant vers un document (une image une page web un PDF ) mdash En preacutecisant un fichier preacutealablement chargeacute par FTP (dans le dossier mon_glpifiles_uploads )mdash Enfin un type MIME peut aussi ecirctre indiqueacute

Note mdash Les types de documents autoriseacutes dans GLPI (selon leur extension) sont deacutefinis dans Configuration gt Intituleacutes

gt Gestion gt Type de documentmdash Les rubriques de documents peuvent ecirctre hieacuterarchiquesmdash Lrsquooption Interdire agrave lrsquoimportation permet drsquoexclure ce document agrave lrsquoimportation via les collecteurs (images

de signatures logos )

160 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Il est possible drsquoassocier drsquoautres documents agrave un document de GLPI crsquoest pourquoi cet objet beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun ongletdu mecircme type

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 161

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un documentmdash Visualiser un documentmdash Modifier un documentmdash Supprimer un documentmdash Associer un document agrave un documentmdash Transfeacuterer un document

Geacuterer les lignes

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de renseigner les lignes teacuteleacutephoniques

Cette gestion a pour objectif mdash drsquoinventorier toutes les lignes de lrsquoorganisation mdash de permettre le suivi drsquoaffectation de chaque ligne mdash permettre la gestion financiegravere des lignes dans GLPI

162 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

32 Modules 163

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

164 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 165

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une lignemdash Visualiser une lignemdash Modifier une lignemdash Supprimer une lignemdash Associer un document agrave une lignemdash Transfeacuterer une ligne

166 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les centres de donneacutees

GLPI permet la gestion des centres de donneacutees et plus preacuteciseacutement la gestion des salles serveurs et des baies informa-tiques qui les composent

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash Un inventaire des centres salles et baies informatiques de lrsquoorganisation mdash tous les autres modules au service des centres salles et baies (notamment le module Parc qui permet une

reacutepreacutesentation graphique deacutetailleacutees des baies) mdash la possibiliteacute drsquoinclure ces objets dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI

Centre de donneacutees

Le centre de donneacutees en lui mecircme est un objet tregraves simpliste dans GLPI Il se mateacuterialise sous la forme drsquoun nom etdrsquoun lieu et permet uniquement de regrouper des salles serveurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Salles serveurs

Cet onglet liste les salles serveurs attacheacutees au centre de donneacutees actuel et permet eacutegalement drsquoen ajouter

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 167

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Salle Serveur

Une salle serveur dans GLPI se mateacuterialise sour forme drsquoun plan scheacutematique Ce plan reacutepreacutesentera lrsquoespace disponibledans la salle de la serveur Cet espace sera utiliseacute pour y deacutefinir et placer les objets Baies de GLPI

La salle serveur est associable agrave un centre de donneacutees et un lieu

Note Le plan sera une grille deacutefinie par un nombre de colonnes et de lignes 1 Baie consomme 1 case

Lrsquoarriegravere plan peut grandement aider agrave la visualisation de la salle notamment si celui ci a eacuteteacute geacuteneacutereacute avec un outiladapteacute agrave la repreacutesentation drsquoespace

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Baies

Cet onglet permet de consulter et drsquoagir sur le plan de la salle serveur Pourront ecirctre ajouteacutees directement sur le planles diffeacuterentes baies informatiques qui composent la salle

Si beaucoup drsquoeacuteleacutements sont preacutesents il est possible de passer sur une vue en mode liste

168 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Analyse drsquoimpact

Cet onglet permet de consulter et de construire le scheacutema drsquoimpact du point de vue de lrsquoobjet

32 Modules 169

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

170 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 171

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

172 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elements

32 Modules 173

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

174 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualiser un centre de donneacuteesmdash Modifier un centre de donneacuteesmdash Supprimer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Associer un document agrave un centre de donneacuteesmdash Transfeacuterer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualier la liste des salles serveurs

Geacuterer les clusters

Un Cluster GLPI est un regroupement de plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc Peut rejoindre un cluster les ordinateurs et lesmateacuteriels reacuteseau

Note Les clusters renseigneacutes dans GLPI sont pris en compte dans lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact TODO link vers la preacutesen-tation de lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact

32 Modules 175

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash UUID Identifiant unique du clustermdash Version Dans le cas drsquoun cluster logiciel ou autre la version peut ecirctre indiqueacuteemdash Source de mise agrave jour Ce champ repreacutesente la maniegravere dont la fiche de lrsquoobjet dans GLPI a eacuteteacute mise agrave jour

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste et pemret lrsquoajout drsquoun ou plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc au sein du cluster

Ports reacuteseau

Cet onglet permet de creacuteer et de lister des interfaces reacuteseau propres au cluster

Les interfaces possibles mdash Port Ethernetmdash Ports Wifimdash Agreacutegation de portmdash Alias de portmdash Connexion par ligne commuteacutee - Dialupmdash Boucle locale

176 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Port Fibre Channel

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 177

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

178 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 179

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un clustermdash Visualiser un clustermdash Modifier un clustermdash Supprimer un clustermdash Associer un document agrave un clustermdash Transfeacuterer un cluster

Geacuterer les domaines

Deux nouveaux objets de GLPI sont rassembleacutes dans cette fonctionnaliteacute les domaines et les enregistrements dedomaines

Geacuterer les domaines et les enregistrements au sein de GLPI permet notamment mdash de construire un inventaire des noms de domaines mdash drsquoinventorier les enregistrements (records) de chaque domaine mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des noms de domaines mdash drsquointeacutegrer les domaines dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash de lier les eacuteleacutements du parc au domaine

Modifieacute dans la version 950mdash inclure les domaines et les enregitrements dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI

Note Lrsquoaccegraves agrave la liste des objets Enregistrements de domaines est accessible depuis la liste des objets Domaines

Objet Domaine

Lrsquoobjet domaine permet de mateacuterialiser un domaine informatique dans son ensemble (son nom sa date drsquoexpirationetc) Lrsquoobjet est associable dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI (tickets problegravemes changements)

180 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Records

Dans cet onglet il est possible de seacutelectionner ou de creacuteer un enregistrement de domaine agrave associer au domaine actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 181

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

182 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 183

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

184 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 185

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

186 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Objet Enregistrement de domaine (Record)

Lrsquoobjet Enregistrement de domaine permet de mateacuterialiser tous les types drsquoenregistrements que lrsquoon peut trouver dansune zone ou un fichier de configuration DNS ( TXT A PTR SOA CNAME etc )

Cet objet doit ecirctre associeacute agrave un objet Domaine vu preacutecedemment

Note Les types drsquoenregistrements ne sont pas limiteacutes agrave ceux creacuteeacutes par deacutefaut ils sont personnalisables depuis lagestion des intituleacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 187

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

188 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changed

32 Modules 189

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Description of the change that was madeThe description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Visualiser un domainemdash Ajouter un domaineun enregistrementmdash Modifier un domaineun enregistrementmdash Supprimer un domaineun enregistrementmdash Associer un document agrave un domaineun enregistrementmdash Transfeacuterer un domainemdash Visualiser les enregistrements de domaines

325 Module Outils

Le module Outils permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les projets les notes les flux RSS la base de connaissance lesreacuteservations ainsi que de geacuteneacuterer des rapports

Geacuterer les projets

La gestion de projets permet de suivre complegravetement lrsquoavancement drsquoun projet au sein de GLPI via la creacuteation detacircche la constitution drsquoune eacutequipe que celui-ci soit lieacute agrave un changement ou non

Un projet dans GLPI crsquoest la possibiliteacute mdash drsquoassocier des tacircches de projet et geacuterer leur avancement mdash drsquoeacutetablir une eacutequipe projet et des eacutequipes de tacircche mdash la possibiliteacute de deacuteclencher des sous projets au sein drsquoun mecircme projet mdash de construire un diagramme de GANTTmdash la possibiliteacute drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban mdash drsquoassocier des coucircts mdash de relier les objets ITIL de GLPI

Le projets peut ecirctre hieacuterarchiseacute un projet peut donc avoir des sous-projets

Les projets disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom codeeacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquounpourcentage drsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

Plusieurs diagrammes de GANTT sont proposeacutes pour chaque projet (voir onglet GANTT)

Dans cette gestion de projet il y a deux objets principaux le projet et la tacircche de projet

190 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Projet

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter une nouvelle tacircche au projet Il liste eacutegalement les tacircches deacutejagrave deacutefinies pour ce projeten indiquant pour chaque tacircche son nom son type son statut le pourcentage effectueacutee les dates de deacutebut et de finplanifieacutees les dureacutees planifieacutee et effective ainsi que le nom de la tacircche parent

Equipe Projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter un membre agrave lrsquoeacutequipe que ce soit un contact un fournisseur un utilisateur ou un groupeIl liste eacutegalement chaque membre de lrsquoeacutequipe projet ainsi que son type respectif

Projet

Cet onglet liste les sous-projets du projet Pour deacutefinir un sous-projet il suffit de remplir le champ laquo comme enfantde raquo drsquoun projet

32 Modules 191

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

GANTT

Un diagramme de GANTT est proposeacute pour chaque projet Un diagramme de GANTT global est eacutegalement proposeacuteincluant les projets deacutefinis comme visible dans ce diagramme

Kanban

Cet onglet met agrave disposition une interface afin drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban dans GLPI

192 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Coucircts

Des coucircts sont associables aux projets auxquels peuvent ecirctre ajouteacute les coucircts des tickets lieacutees aux tacircches du projet

Objets Itil

Crsquoest dans cet onglet qursquoil est possible drsquoassocier au projet actuel les objets itil de GLPI tickets problegravemes etchangements Il est possible de creacuteer ces objets depuis cet onglet eacutegalement

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object and

32 Modules 193

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

the document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

194 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Tacircche de projet

lrsquoobjet tacircche de projet est assez similaire au projet

une tacircche de projet peut ecirctre eacutegalement une sous tacircche de projet

Les tacircches disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom eacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquoun pourcentagedrsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

32 Modules 195

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note La tacircche de projet nrsquoest pas un objet indeacutependant de GLPI Lrsquoaccegraves agrave une tache de projet se fait dans lrsquoongletTacircches de projet du projet concerneacute

Les tacircches peuvent ecirctre lieacutees agrave des tickets permettant de planifier des interventions permettant de mettre en place leprojet Des dureacutees preacutevisionnelles et effectives sont eacutegalement deacutefinies au niveau des tacircches Ces dureacutees ainsi quecelles des tickets sont alors consolideacutees au niveau du projet lui mecircme

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et drsquoajouter les sous-tacircches

Equipe de tacircche

Ici est deacutefinie lrsquoeacutequipe en charge de la tacircche

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

196 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

32 Modules 197

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un projetmdash Visualiser un projetmdash Modifier un projetmdash Supprimer un projetmdash Associer un document agrave un projetmdash Transfeacuterer un projet

Geacuterer les notes personnelles ou publiques

Une note dans GLPI est un simple champ texte et piegravece jointe permettant de transmettre des informations aux utilisa-teurs de la plateforme

Une note est caracteacuteriseacutee par mdash une dureacutee de vie

198 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash un statut mdash la possibiliteacute de la faire apparaicirctre dans le planning mdash les cibles de la note

Les notes saisies apparaissent ensuite sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI ou dans le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes

32 Modules 199

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il est possible de deacuteterminer une date de deacutebut et de fin de publication pour chaque note Si la date de deacutebutnrsquoest pas mentionneacutee la note sera visible immeacutediatement jusqursquoagrave la date de fin Si la date de fin nrsquoest pas mentionneacuteela note sera visible de faccedilon permanente agrave partir de la date de deacutebut

Lrsquoajout drsquoune note au calendrier permet de la faire apparaicirctre sur le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes par la note celui de lrsquoutilisateur pour une note personnelle les plannings de tous les utilisateurs dans le cas drsquoune note publiqueUne note planifieacutee nrsquoest pas supprimeacutee une fois la date expireacutee

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

200 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Cible

Une note est consideacutereacutee comme personnelle par deacutefaut Elle est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoune note devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (note publique) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ouplusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lanote

Une note publique est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les notes publiques

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une notemdash Visualiser une note

32 Modules 201

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Modifier une notemdash Supprimer une notemdash Associer un document agrave une notemdash Rendre une note publique Ajouter une cible agrave la notemdash Publier une note pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee Ajouter une date de deacutebut et une date de fin au niveau de la

visibiliteacute

Geacuterer les rapports

GLPI permet la geacuteneacuteration drsquoun certain nombre de rapports en lien avec les objets preacutesents sur la plateforme mdash Rapport par deacutefaut Ce rapport comptabilise les mateacuteriels preacutesents dans le parc trieacutes par type Pour les ordi-

nateurs un tri est eacutegalement effectueacute par systegraveme drsquoexploitationmdash Par contrat Mateacuteriel sous contrat de maintenance aupregraves drsquoun tiers Il est possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat deacutetailleacute

par type de mateacuteriel et par date drsquoachat La seacutelection multiple est autoriseacutee Pour ajouter un type il suffitde cliquer dans la zone blanche et de choisir le nouveau type Le principe est le mecircme pour ajouter unedate Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet le nom srsquoil est dans la corbeille ou non son entiteacute son lieu les datedrsquoachat et drsquoexpiration de garantie le type de contrat ainsi que les dates de deacutebut et de fin de contrat

mdash Par anneacutee Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacutedent mais listant eacutegalement les mateacuteriel sanscontrat

mdash Informations financiegraveres et administratives du mateacuteriel Reacutecapitulatif des informations financiegraveres pour lesordinateurs les imprimantes les mateacuteriels reacuteseaux les moniteurs les peacuteripheacuteriques et les teacuteleacutephones Ilest possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat pour une peacuteriode donneacutee Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet son nom sonentiteacute sa valeur sa valeur nette comptable son TCO ses dates drsquoachat de mise en service et drsquoexpirationde garantie Un reacutecapitulatif comprenant le total de la valeur et de la valeur nette comptable est poposeacute partype drsquoobjet et pour la totaliteacute des objets

mdash Autres Informations Financiegraveres et administratives Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacute-dent mais mais pour les cartouches les licences et les consommables

mdash Rapport reacuteseau 3 rapports peuvent ecirctre reacutealiseacutes selon le lieu selon le type de mateacuteriel reacuteseau ou selon laprise reacuteseau

mdash Precirct Reacutecapitulatif des reacuteservations en cours agrave venir ou passeacutees pour un utilisateur donneacutemdash Rapport sur les statuts Synthegravese par type de mateacuteriel des diffeacuterents statuts

Note Le nombre de rapport peut ecirctre eacutetoffer en ajoutant un plugin disponible ici httpspluginsglpi-projectorgpluginreports

Geacuterer les reacuteservations

GLPI met agrave disposition un outils de reacuteservation de mateacuteriel outil qui permet de seacutelectionner un ou plusieurs eacuteleacutementsdu parc afin de les reacuteserver sur une plage horaire Pour des reacuteservations reacutepeacutetitives il est possible de mettre en placede la reacutecurrence sur la reacuteservation

202 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Un mateacuteriel nrsquoest pas reacuteservable par deacutefaut Pour rendre un mateacuteriel reacuteservable il faut se rendre dans lrsquoongletReacuteservation de la fiche du mateacuteriel

Un mateacuteriel reacuteserveacute apparaicirctra dans un planning global des reacuteservations

Il est eacutegalement possible de consulter le planning speacutecifique drsquoun mateacuteriel reacuteservable La reacuteservation peut ecirctre creacuteeacuteedepuis ce planning eacutegalement

32 Modules 203

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Reacuteservations

Onglet principal de lrsquooutil Il permet de consulter et de seacutelectionner les mateacuteriels reacuteservables disponibles

Administration

Cet onglet liste tous les objets reacuteservables et non plus ceux disponibles Comme pour les principaux objet de GLPI ilpropose un moteur de recherche avec la possibiliteacute drsquoeffectuer des actions de masse

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une reacuteservationmdash VisualiserModifier les reacuteservationsmdash Supprimer une reacuteservationmdash Rendre un mateacuteriel indisponible

Geacuterer les flux RSS

GLPI permet drsquoinclure des flux RSS dans la page drsquoaccueil de lrsquooutil

Un flux RSS est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun flux RSS devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (flux RSS public) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner uneou plusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes aux profils groupes ou utilisateurs de la plateforme

Note Un flux RSS public est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les flux RSSpublics

204 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Contenu

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter le nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements afficheacutes Crsquoest ce contenu qui est reporteacute en pagedrsquoaccueil

Cibles

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et modifier la liste des cibles pour le flux RSS concerneacute

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 205

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un flux RSSmdash VisualiserModifier un flux RSSmdash Supprimer un flux RSS

Geacuterer la base de connaissances

La base de connaissances de GLPI reacutepond agrave deux objectifs principaux mdash Centraliser des connaissances internes pour les diffeacuterents techniciens mdash Mettre agrave la disposition des utilisateurs des informations leur permettant de reacutesoudre seuls des problegravemes

simples sous forme de FAQ publique

Note Seuls les eacuteleacutements de la FAQ publique sont visibles par les utilisateurs de lrsquointerface simplifieacutee Les eacuteleacutementsqui ne sont pas deacutefinis comme faisant partie de la FAQ publique sont visibles uniquement au sein de la console centralepar des techniciens par exemple

Il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner pour chaque article de la base de connaissances ou de la FAQ une ou plusieurscibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Tantqursquoaucune cible nrsquoa eacuteteacute seacutelectionneacutee pour un article ce dernier est visible uniquement par son reacutedacteur Lrsquoarticle estconsideacutereacute comme laquo non publieacute raquo et apparaicirct dans le tableau laquo Articles non publieacutes raquo de la page drsquoaccueil de la base deconnaissances

Par deacutefaut les articles ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute est activable (voir laconfiguration geacuteneacuterale)

Il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs documents aux articles de la base de connaissances

Note Un article peut ecirctre rendu visible pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee via la deacutefinition de la date de deacutebut et la date defin de visibiliteacute

Avertissement Les eacuteleacutements qui ne doivent pas ecirctre interpreacuteteacutes agrave lrsquoaffichage peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis avec le style Preacute-formateacute (ltpregt en HTML) Des balises comme ltVirtualHostgt sont donc inseacuterable et affichable Par contredes balises au format HTML (ltBALISEgt) peuvent disparaicirctre au moment de lrsquoeacutedition pour avoir une visibiliteacutecomplegravete du texte vous pouvez passer en mode HTML ougrave tous les eacuteleacutements seront visibles Votre navigateur peuteacutegalement modifier dynamiquement le contenu (changement de casse ajout de balises) lors drsquoune eacutedition

Il est possible de creacuteer des cateacutegories et sous-cateacutegories afin drsquoorganiser la navigation (voir Configurer les intituleacutes)

Lrsquoutilisateur peut alors utiliser plusieurs onglets pour recherche et naviguer au sein de la base de connaissances mdash Rechercher Crsquoest lrsquoonglet par deacutefaut Il preacutesente les articles les plus reacutecents les plus populaires et les derniegraveres

modifications Il permet eacutegalement de rechercher au sein de la base de connaissances

206 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Parcourir Cet onglet permet de naviguer au sein de lrsquoarborescence des cateacutegories

mdash Geacuterer Cet onglet nrsquoest accessible qursquoaux administrateurs de la base de connaissances Suivant les droits delrsquoutilisateur il est possible drsquoacceacuteder rapidement agrave ses ou agrave tous les articles non publieacutes (sans cible deacutefinies)ainsi qursquoagrave tous ses articles

Note Le moteur de recherche de la base de connaissances permet drsquoutiliser un certain nombre drsquoopeacuterateurs poureffectuer des recherches complexes + - ~ lt gt rdquo rdquo ()

mdash + Le mot doit ecirctre preacutesent

32 Modules 207

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash - Le mot ne doit pas ecirctre preacutesent mdash Opeacuterateur de troncature agrave positionner en suffixe mdash Une phrase entre guillemets double (laquo ) est rechercheacutee litteacuteralement telle qursquoelle a eacuteteacute saisie mdash lt gt permet de deacutefinir une preacutefeacuterence sur lrsquoordre des eacuteleacutements rechercheacutes mdash () agreacutegateur utile pour lrsquoutilisation de lt et gt

Exemples

- panne imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent au moins un de ces mots

- +panne +imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent ces deux mots

- +courriel thunderbird-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent le mot courriel

mais classe plus haut les lignes qui contiennent aussi thunderbird

- +courriel -outlook-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent courriel mais pas outlook

- +courriel +(gtthunderbird ltoutlook)-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent les mots courriel et thunderbird

ou courriel et outlook (dans nimporte quel ordre)mais classe courriel thunderbird plus haut que courriel outlook

- open-gt Trouve les lignes qui contiennent des mots tels que openoffice openwriter

openbar ou openphp

- suite openoffice-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent exactement la phrase suite openoffice

Les diffeacuterents onglets drsquoun article

Base de connaissances

Cet onglet affiche un tableau concernant lrsquoarticle avec en titre sa cateacutegorie Son ensuite listeacutes son sujet et son contenuainsi que le nom du reacutedacteur des dates de creacuteation et de derniegravere modification le nombre de fois ougrave lrsquoarticle a eacuteteacute luainsi que srsquoil fait partie ou non de la FAQ Si un article nrsquoest pas publieacute (cible non deacutefinie) cette information apparaicircten rouge au-dessus du nombre de vues

Cible

Un article est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun article devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ou plusieurs ciblesLa ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Cet ongletpermet donc drsquoajouter une nouvelle cible tout en listant les cibles deacutejagrave deacutefinies

208 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Editer

Cet onglet permet suivant vos droits de modifier ou supprimer un article

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 209

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Reacutevisions

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter toutes les reacutevisions de chaque article Crsquoest agrave dire que chaque modificationde lrsquoarticle donnera naissance agrave une reacutevision une version anteacuterieure de lrsquoarticle

les reacutevisions sont affichables et peuvent ecirctre restaureacutees

Commentaires

Un article beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun espace commentaires permettant aux utilisateurs de la plateforme drsquoeacutechanger agrave son sujet

210 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un articlemdash Modifier un articlemdash Supprimer un articlemdash Associer un document agrave un articlemdash Modifier la visibiliteacute drsquoun article

326 Module Administration

Le module Administration permet drsquoadministrer les utilisateurs groupes entiteacutes profils regravegles et dictionnaires etoffre des outils de maintenance de lrsquoapplication (sauvegarde et restauration de base veacuterification de nouvelle versiondisponible)

mdash [Geacuterer les utilisateurs](07_Module_Administration02_Utilisateurs01_Utilisateursrst)mdash [Geacuterer les groupes](07_Module_Administration03_Groupesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les entiteacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les regravegles](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst)mdash [Configurer les dictionnaires de donneacutees](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les profils](07_Module_Administration07_Profils01_Profilsrst)mdash [Geacuterer la file drsquoattente drsquoenvoi des courriels](07_Module_Administration08_File_drsquoattente_des_courrielsrst)mdash [Maintenance](07_Module_Administration09_Maintenancerst)mdash [Visualiser les journaux drsquoactiviteacute](07_Module_Administration10_Journauxrst)

327 Module Configuration

Le module Configuration permet drsquoacceacuteder aux options de configuration geacuteneacuterale de GLPI la configuration globalede GLPI les notifications les collecteurs les tacircches automatiques lrsquoauthentification les plugins les critegraveres drsquouniciteacuteet les liens externes protocoleacutes

Les intituleacutes ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

32 Modules 211

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Si des eacuteleacutements que vous voulez supprimer sont utiliseacutes GLPI proposera automatiquement de transfeacuterer lesentreacutees existantes vers un autre eacuteleacutement de la liste ou bien de les remettre agrave zeacutero

mdash [Configurer les composants](08_Module_Configuration03_Composantsrst)mdash [Configurer les notifications](08_Module_Configuration04_Notifications01_Configurer_les_notificationsrst)

Configurer les suivis par courriels creacuteer des modegraveles de notifications deacutefinir lrsquoenvoi de notificationmdash [Configurer les SLAs](08_Module_Configuration05_Sla01_Slarst) Deacutefinir les SLA ainsi que les diffeacute-

rents niveaux drsquoescalademdash [Configurer les paramegravetres centraux](08_Module_Configuration06_Geacuteneacuterale01_Configurer_les_paramegravetres_centrauxrst)mdash [Configurer les controcircles](08_Module_Configuration07_Controlesrst)mdash [Configurer les actions automatiques](08_Module_Configuration08_Actions_automatiquesrst)mdash [Configurer les collecteurs](glpiconfig_mailcollectorhtml) La configuration des collecteurs srsquoeffectue

depuis le menuConfiguration gt Collecteurs

mdash [Ajouter un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les liens externes protocoleacutes](glpiconfig_linkhtml)

Les liens externes se configurent depuis le menu Configuration gt

Liens externesmdash [Ajouter un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les plugins GLPI](glpiconfig_pluginhtml) Les plugins dans GLPI installation configura-

tion activation

Authentification

Crsquoest ici que GLPI gegravere lrsquoauthentification et les informations personnelles des utilisateurs

Lrsquoaccegraves drsquoun utilisateur agrave GLPI est possible apregraves que ces conditions aient eacuteteacute veacuterifieacutees

1 envoi drsquoinformations drsquoauthentification par lrsquoutilisateur

2 existence de lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur

3 authentification de lrsquoutilisateur

4 attribution drsquohabilitations agrave lrsquoutilisateur

GLPI utilise sa propre base interne drsquoutilisateurs Ceux-ci sont soit creacuteeacutes depuis lrsquointerface de lrsquoapplication soit im-porteacutes depuis une ou plusieurs sources externes Selon le type de source lrsquoimport des utilisateurs peut se faire soit enmasse soit au fil de lrsquoeau lors de la tentative de connexion drsquoun utilisateur non encore connu de GLPI

Pour effectuer lrsquoauthentification GLPI fait appel agrave une base de mots de passes interne qui peut ecirctre compleacuteteacutee parune ou plusieurs sources externes drsquoauthentification Lrsquoutilisation de meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externes permet dedeacuteleacuteguer cette fonctionnaliteacute agrave des systegravemes tiers assurant la gestion drsquoidentiteacute Voir [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec lessources drsquoauthentification externes](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification02_Configurationrst) laquo Les para-megravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configura-tion gt Authentification gt Configuration raquo)

Lrsquoattribution des habilitations est deacutecrite dans la section [Attribuer des habilitations agrave un utilisa-teur](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles03_Habilitations_utilisateurrst) laquo GLPI dispose drsquoun moteur drsquoha-bilitations dynamiques qui se base sur des sources externes drsquoauthentification Il est accessible depuis le menuAdministration gt Regravegles gt Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitation agrave un utilisateur raquo)

Note La cineacutematique drsquoauthentification est la suivante

1 lrsquoutilisateur entre son identifiant et son mot de passe

212 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 GLPI veacuterifie si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave enregistreacute dans la base Srsquoil ne lrsquoest pas

1 GLPI essaye les meacutethodes drsquoauthentification les unes apregraves les autres la base interne puis tous les an-nuaires LDAP et enfin les annuaires de messagerie

2 lorsque lrsquoauthentification est reacuteussie lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans la base interne ainsi que sa meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

3 si aucune source nrsquoa pu authentifier lrsquoutilisateur celui-ci est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que sonidentifiant ou mot de passe est incorrect

3 Si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave preacutesent dans la base interne ou une fois son identifiant creacuteeacute

1 GLPI tente drsquoauthentifier lrsquoutilisateur en utilisant la derniegravere meacutethode drsquoauthentification reacuteussie (et unique-ment celle-ci)

2 si lrsquoauthentification a eacutechoueacute lrsquoutilisateur est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que son identifiant oumot de passe est incorrect

4 Le moteur drsquohabilitation est lanceacute avec les informations de lrsquoutilisateur

1 si le moteur a donneacute agrave celui-ci une ou plusieurs habilitations alors lrsquoutilisateur a accegraves agrave GLPI

2 si lrsquoutilisateur ne se voit attribuer aucune habilitation alors bien qursquoeacutetant inscrit dans la base GLPI il nepeut se connecter agrave lrsquoapplication

mdash [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec les sources drsquoauthentification externes](glpiconfig_common_authhtml)Les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes

drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration Authentifica-tion

mdash [Chiffrage des mots de passe dans la base de donneacutees](glpiconfig_passwords_encryptedhtml)Les mots de passe des accegraves exteacuterieurs sont chiffreacutes

mdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldaphtml)Lrsquointerface de GLPI avec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le

menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Annuaire LDAP mdash [Configurer la liaison LDAP pour les utilisateurs et les groupes](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_usersgroupshtml)mdash [Ajouter un nouvel annuaire LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un annuaire](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Importer et synchroniser depuis un annuaire par script](glpiscripts_ldap_mass_synchtml)

Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisation agrave partir drsquoun

annuairemdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imaphtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme source

drsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie mdash [Ajouter un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](glpiconfig_auth_otherhtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de

lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

Sujet parent [Administrer les controcircles drsquoaccegraves](glpiaccess_control_introhtml laquo Cette partie deacutecrit commentadministrer le systegraveme de controcircle drsquoaccegraves qui permet agrave chaque utilisateur drsquoacceacuteder agrave un contexte drsquoutilisation speacuteci-fique raquo)

32 Modules 213

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sources drsquoauthentification externes

Ce menu permet de configurer les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification

Afin de pouvoir utiliser ces sources externes drsquoauthentification il faut au preacutealable activer les extensions correspon-dantes dans la configuration de PHP Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre de sources externes configureacutees danslrsquoapplication

Pour utiliser la capaciteacute de GLPI de creacuteer agrave la voleacutee des utilisateurs preacutesents dans les sources externes drsquoauthentifica-tion il faut lrsquoactiver dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration

Figure 1 Menu de la configuration de lrsquoauthentification [image](docsimageauthConfigpng)

Les annuaires LDAP permettent en outre de refuser la creacuteation des utilisateurs ne posseacutedant pas drsquohabilitations Lasuppression drsquoun utilisateur de lrsquoannuaire peut aussi entraicircner une action telle que la mise agrave la corbeille de lrsquoutilisateurla suppression de ses habilitations ou sa deacutesactivation Crsquoest eacutegalement agrave ce niveau qursquoest parameacutetreacute le fuseau horairede GLPI

Les sources drsquoauthentification externes prises en charges par GLPI sont les suivantes mdash annuaire LDAP voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires

LDAP](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification03_Annuaires_LDAPrst laquo Lrsquointerface de GLPIavec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt AnnuairesLDAP raquo)

mdash serveur de messagerie voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de message-rie](config_auth_imaphtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme sourcedrsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie raquo)

mdash serveur CAS voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash certificat x509 voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash authentification deacuteleacutegueacutee au serveur web voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification ex-terne](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentificationunique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

Annuaires LDAP

GLPI srsquointerface avec un (ou plusieurs) Annuaire LDAP afin drsquoauthentifier les utilisateurs de controcircler leur accegraves dereacutecupeacuterer leurs informations personnelles et drsquoimporter des groupes

Tous les annuaires compatibles LDAP v3 sont supporteacutes par GLPI Crsquoest donc aussi le cas pour lrdquoAnnuaire ActiveDirectory de Microsoft Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires renseigneacutes bien entendu plus le nombreest eacuteleveacute plus la recherche drsquoun nouvel utilisateur agrave authentifier peut ecirctre longue

Il est possible drsquoimporter et de synchroniser les utilisateurs de 2 maniegraveres mdash au fil de lrsquoeau agrave la premiegravere connexion lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans GLPI A chaque login ses informations

personnelles sont synchroniseacutees avec lrsquoannuaire Dans le cas ougrave les collecteurs sont utiliseacutes une adresse demessagerie inconnue sera rechercheacutee dans lrsquoannuaire pour creacuteer lrsquoutilisateur associeacute

mdash en masse soit via lrsquointerface web de GLPI soit en utilisant le script fourni voir [Importer et synchroniserdepuis un annuaire par script](scripts_ldap_mass_synchtml laquo Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisationagrave partir drsquoun annuaire raquo)

Avertissement Si aucune configuration LDAP nrsquoest visible (voir un message drsquoerreur sur cette partie) crsquoest quele module LDAP pour PHP nrsquoest pas installeacute

214 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sous Linux installer le paquet ldap pour PHP (par exemple php5-ldap sur Debian) puis redeacutemarrer le serveurweb

Sous Windows il faut deacutecommenter dans le fichier phpini (fichier preacutesent dans le reacutepertoire apachebin) la ligneextension=php_ldapdll puis redeacutemarrer le serveur web

Le processus drsquoauthentification des utilisateurs est deacutecoupeacute en 3 parties lrsquoauthentification le controcircle drsquoaccegraves et enfinla reacutecupeacuteration des donneacutees personnelles

Authentification LDAP

Lors de la premiegravere connexion de lrsquoutilisateur GLPI va srsquoadresser agrave tous les annuaires jusqursquoagrave trouver celui qui contientlrsquoutilisateur Si lrsquooption permettant drsquoimporter des utilisateurs depuis une source externe est active alors celui-ci estcreacuteeacute et lrsquoidentifiant de la meacutethode de connexion et le serveur LDAP sont stockeacutes en base de donneacutees

Ensuite agrave chaque login lrsquoutilisateur est authentifieacute sur lrsquoannuaire dont lrsquoidentifiant est stockeacute dans GLPI Les autresannuaires ne sont pas utiliseacutes si un utilisateur est deacutesactiveacute dans lrsquoannuaire qursquoil a utiliseacute jusque lagrave pour se connecteril ne peut se connecter avec une autre source drsquoauthentification

Controcircle drsquoaccegraves

Le controcircle drsquoaccegraves est lrsquoattribution drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur Mecircme si un utilisateur est authentifieacute sur un an-nuaire il nrsquoest pas forceacutement habiliteacute agrave se connecter agrave GLPI

Ce meacutecanisme repose sur lrsquoutilisation de regravegles drsquoaffectations drsquohabilitations

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Annuaire LDAP

32 Modules 215

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il existe un modegravele de preacute-configuration Active Directory qui preacute-remplit un certain nombre de champsCelui-ci a eacuteteacute mis en place afin de faciliter la configuration GLPI-AD

Pour le charger cliquer sur le lien Active Directory lors de lrsquoajout drsquoun annuaire Le lien Valeur(s) par deacutefautreacuteinitialise la saisie

mdash serveur par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieurs serveurs LDAP de parameacutetreacutes vous ne pouvez deacutefinir qursquoun seulserveur par deacutefaut Le fait de choisir ce paramegravetre le supprime du serveur sur lequel il eacutetait preacuteceacutedemmentparameacutetreacute

mdash serveur et port repreacutesentant lrsquoadresse de lrsquoannuaire LDAPmdash basedn emplacement de lrsquoannuaire agrave partir duquel les recherches et lectures seront effectueacutees

Note Le basedn doit ecirctre renseigneacute sous la forme du DN complet de lrsquoutilisateur Par exempleCN=glpiadminDC=mondomaine si le compte dans lrsquoannuaire pour GLPI est glpiadmin

mdash DN du compte identifiant de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) mdash Mot de passe du compte mot de passe correspondant (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) Il est possible

drsquoeffacer le mot de passe en cochant la case effacer puis de valider mdash filtre de connexion permet de restreindre la recherche de personnes dans lrsquoannuaire Par exemple si seul un

ensemble restreint de personnes de lrsquoannuaire ont le droit de se connecter agrave GLPI il faut mettre en place unecondition pour restreindre la recherche agrave ces personnes

On peut citer les exemples de filtres suivants mdash un filtre classique LDAP peut ecirctre (objectclass=inetOrgPerson)mdash pour Active Directory utiliser le filtre suivant qui ne renvoie que les utilisa-

teurs non deacutesactiveacutes (car les machines sont aussi consideacutereacutees comme des utili-sateurs par AD) (amp(objectClass=user)(objectCategory=person)((userAccountControl1284011355614803=2)))

Il faut noter que ce filtre est automatiquement rempli lorsque le modegravele de preacute-configurationActive Directory est seacutelectionneacute

mdash Champ de lrsquoidentifiant nom du champ dans lrsquoannuaire LDAP correspondant agrave lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur(par exemple uid sur un annuaire LDAP samaccountname sur un annuaire AD)

mdash Champ de synchronisation nom du champ utiliseacute pour la synchronisation Ce champ doit identifier de ma-niegravere unique lrsquoutilisateur il permet de prendre en compte le cangement de login (par exemple employeeuidsur un LDAP ou objectguid pour un AD)

Avertissement Ne pas oublier drsquoactiver votre annuaire et de le deacutefinir lrsquoannuaire par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieursannuaires

Base DN et utilisateur authentifieacute

Attention le rootdn et le basedn doivent ecirctre eacutecrits sans espaces apregraves les virgules De plus la casse est importante

Exemple de rootdn mdash cn=Admin ou=users dc=mycompany incorrectmdash cn=Adminou=usersdc=mycompany correct

Pour Active Directory si on utilise le userprincipalname au lieu du samaccountname on peut avoir un rootdn sous laforme prenomnomdomainefr

Les paramegravetres agrave entrer sont tregraves simples par exemple mdash hocircte ldapmycompanyfrmdash basedn dc=mycompanydc=fr

216 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Et cela doit suffire si la recherche anonyme est permise Dans le cas contraire et si tous les utilisateurs ne sont paspositionneacutes au sein du mecircme DN il vous faut speacutecifier le DN drsquoun utilisateur autoriseacute et son mot de passe rootdnPassPour Active Directory il est obligatoire de renseigner un compte qui a le droit de srsquoauthentifier sur le domaine

En tentant de se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire gracircce agrave un browser LDAP il est possible de tester ces paramegravetres Il en existebeaucoup mais on peut citer

mdash LdapBrowser Editor (logiciel libre eacutecrit en Java et donc multi-plateforme)mdash ADSIedit pour Active Directory Cet outil se trouve sur les supports toolsoutils suppleacutementaires du CD drsquoins-

tallation de Windows Server

Note Si certains des utilisateurs ont des restrictions de connexion agrave certaines machines configureacutees dans leur profilAD lrsquoerreur suivante est possible lors drsquoune tentative de login sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI Utilisateur non trouveacuteou plusieurs utilisateurs identiques trouveacutes La solution consiste agrave ajouter le serveur heacutebergeant lrsquoAD agrave la liste desPC sur lesquels lrsquoutilisateur peut se connecter

Tester

Permet de tester la configuration deacutefinie dans lrsquoonglet Annuaire LDAP

Le message Test de connexion reacuteussi indique que GLPI a pu se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP avec les informationsrenseigneacutees (hocircte port compte utilisateur)

Il reste deacutesormais agrave importer les utilisateurs Pour cela il faut bien veacuterifier les autres paramegravetres (filtre de connexionchamps de login etc)

Utilisateurs

Permet de configurer comment va ecirctre effectueacute le lien entre les champs de lrsquoannuaire et ceux de GLPI Pour chaquechamp de GLPI (nom preacutenom image ) est associeacute un champ de lrsquoannuaire

Groupes

Permet de configurer la meacutethode de stockage des groupes au niveau de lrsquoannuaire

32 Modules 217

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Informations avanceacutees

Dans le cas ougrave lrsquoheure de la machine heacutebergeant lrsquoannuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas dans le mecircme fuseau horaire que celui deGLPI il faut modifier la variable Fuseau horaire afin drsquoajuster le deacutelai en effet cela peut provoquer des reacutesultatserroneacutes dans la liste des utilisateurs agrave synchroniser

Connexion LDAP seacutecuriseacutee

GLPI gegravere la connexion seacutecuriseacutee agrave un annuaire LDAP agrave travers une connexion SSL (aussi appeleacute LDAPS) Il suffitde rajouter devant le nom de lrsquohocircte (ou son IP) ldaps Ainsi que de changer le port (par deacutefaut 636) Par exemplelrsquoaccegraves en LDAPS en local donnera Hocircte ldaps 127001 Port 636

Limite du nombre drsquoenregistrement retourneacutes (sizelimit)

Il existe souvent deux limites sur le nombre maximum drsquoenregistrements retourneacutes par une requecircte LDAP mdash la limite du client (deacutefinie par exemple sur DebianUbuntu dans etcldapldapconf)mdash la limite imposeacutee par le serveur si la limite deacutefinie par le client est supeacuterieure agrave la limite serveur crsquoest cette

derniegravere qui prend le dessus

Avertissement Si la limite est atteinte lrsquooption de comportement lors de la suppression drsquoun utilisateur delrsquoannuaire ne peut fonctionner De plus GLPI affichera un message drsquoavertissement lors drsquoun import ou drsquounesynchronisation

Avec PHP 54 ou supeacuterieur il est deacutesormais possible de contourner la limitation du sizelimit en activant dans lrsquoongletInformations avanceacutees la pagination des reacutesultats Dans ce mode PHP va requecircter lrsquoannuaire autant de fois queneacutecessaire et par tranche de X reacutesultats jusqursquoagrave ce que lrsquoensemble des enregistrements soient renvoyeacutes

Lrsquooption Taille des pages permet drsquoajuster cette valeur de mecircme que nombre maximum de reacutesultats deacutefinit la limitedrsquoenregistrement agrave ne pas deacutepasser lors drsquoune requecircte LDAP (afin par exemple drsquoeacuteviter une erreur indiquant que PHPdemande plus de meacutemoire que ce qui lui est alloueacute)

218 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Sur un annuaire OpenLDAP la limite par deacutefaut est agrave 500 enregistrements sur un Active Directory elle est de1000

Sur un Active directory il est possible de modifier la valeur du MaxPageSize gracircce aux commandes suivantes (attentioncette modification est globale agrave tout lrsquoannuaire)

Reacuteplicats

Si un annuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas accessible les utilisateurs ne pourront plus se connecter agrave GLPI

Afin drsquoeacuteviter cette situation des reacuteplicats peuvent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes ils partagent la mecircme configuration que le serveurqursquoils reacutepliquent mais sont disponibles agrave une adresse diffeacuterente

Lrsquoutilisation des reacuteplicats se fait uniquement dans le cas drsquoune perte de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire maicirctre Lrsquoajout dereacuteplicats se fait dans la fiche drsquoun annuaire en renseignant un nom qui sera afficheacute dans GLPI ainsi qursquoun nomdrsquohocircte et un port Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires reacutepliqueacutes

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

Les annuaires LDAP ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

Intituleacutes

Certaines listes de seacutelections deacuteroulantes sont parameacutetrables dans GLPI mdash lieux

32 Modules 219

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash statuts de mateacuterielsmdash cateacutegories de ticketsmdash noms des logicielsmdash noms des constructeursmdash

En somme tout ce qui deacutepend drsquoune nomenclature propre agrave un contexte particulier doit ecirctre parameacutetreacute Si certains deces intituleacutes sont fournis avec une liste par deacutefaut la plupart des intituleacutes doivent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes dans lrsquoapplication

Par deacutefaut les intituleacutes ne peuvent ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute doit ecirctre activeacutee et permetalors de traduire lrsquoensemble des champs des intituleacutes

Les intituleacutes sont soit une liste de valeurs agrave plat (simple liste de valeurs) soit une liste arborescente (chaque eacuteleacutementpeut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements)

La premiegravere eacutetape est de seacutelectionner la liste agrave modifier Ensuite on peut ajouter des eacuteleacutements agrave la liste les modifier etles supprimer

Agrave chaque intituleacute est associeacute un commentaire Celui-ci est visible depuis les formulaires de GLPI Il apparaicirct au survolde lrsquoicocircne Aide associeacutee agrave la liste deacuteroulante

Il est possible de visualiser tous les types drsquointituleacutes existants en utilisant voir tous

Cette liste peut varier suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil Les intituleacutes avec fond plus fonceacute sont des intituleacutesglobaux alors que les autres peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutes par entiteacute

220 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuteneacuteral

Lieux

La liste des lieux est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements (Lieu 1 gt Sous-lieu 1 gtSous-sous-lieu 1) Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun lieu on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant ce lieu (code du bacirctiment de la piegravecelongitude latitude altitude) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant le lieu pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le lieu peut ecirctrevisible des sous entiteacutes

Lieux

Liste les sous-lieux existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Eleacutements

Liste tous les eacuteleacutements affecteacutes agrave ce lieu Vous pouvez choisir de nrsquoafficher qursquoun type drsquoeacuteleacutement (ordinateur utilisa-teur prise reacuteseau logiciel )

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

32 Modules 221

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

Prise reacuteseau

[image](docsimagepriseReseaupng)

Liste les prises reacuteseau affecteacutees agrave ce lieu et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquouneprise sur un port reacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants)apparaissent

Lrsquoajout peut ecirctre unique via la partie haute ou multiple via la partie basse Pour lrsquoajout multiple vous pouvez preacutefixerle numeacutero de la prise comme indiqueacute dans la copie drsquoeacutecran

Autre exemple considerant le preacutefixe bru 9 et 11 les bornes de la numeacuterotation et srv le suffixe les prises reacuteseaucreacuteeacutees seront nommeacutees bru09srv bru10srv et bru11srv

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Statuts

La liste des statuts est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee parentiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun statut on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant la visibiliteacute de ce statut ainsi quelrsquoinformation preacutecisant le statut pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le statut peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Statuts des eacuteleacutements

Liste les sous-statuts existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

222 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Fabricants

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Listes noires

La liste des Listes noires est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle comprend la valeur que vous voulez mettre en liste noire ainsi que sur quel type lrsquoappliquer (IP MAC numeacutero deseacuterie UUID ou courriel) Les listes noires sont utiliseacutees pour les imports automatique via un agent drsquoinventaire ou parle collecteur de courriels

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 223

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Contenu de courriel interdit

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Elle permet au collecteur de courriels de ne pas importer un courriel contenu le texte deacutefini Cela peut permettre entreautre de lutter contre le spam dans le cas de lrsquoautorisation de creacuteation de ticket pour les courriels anonymes

Assistance

Cateacutegories de ticket

La liste des cateacutegories de ticket est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de ticket on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant cette cateacutego-rie (responsable et groupe techniques pour lrsquoaffectation automatique des tickets (voir [configuration de lrsquoen-titeacute](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)) la cateacutegorie par deacutefaut de la base de connaissance lorsque lrsquoon sou-haite ajouter une solution drsquoun ticket dans celle-ci la visibiliteacute de cette cateacutegorie suivant lrsquointerface ou suivant lrsquoobjetainsi que les gabarits affecteacutees agrave cette cateacutegorie) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes En cas de choix drsquoun gabarit celui-ci sera affecteacute au choix de lacateacutegorie donc surchargera celle qui aurait u ecirctre deacutefinie dans lrsquoentiteacute ou via regravegle meacutetier

Un lien avec les cateacutegories de la base de connaissances est possible Si une cateacutegorie est choisie le clic sur lrsquoaide de lacateacutegorie du ticket dans un ticket amegravene directement agrave tous les articles de la base de connaissance de cette cateacutegorie

Cateacutegories de tickets

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

224 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Cateacutegories de tacircches

La liste des cateacutegories de tacircches est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

La fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de tacircche indique son nom ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Cateacutegories de tacircches

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Types de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Sources des demandes

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle preacutecise si cette source source doit ecirctre deacutefini par deacutefaut pour les tickets etou les collecteurs

32 Modules 225

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Gabarits de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Elle permet de preacutedeacutefinir le contenu ainsi que le type drsquoune solution et peut ecirctre visible ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Note Les gabarits de solution ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Statuts de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les statuts appliqueacutes agrave un projet ainsi que lrdquo(eacutetat de celui-ci

Types de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Types de tacircches de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types de tacircches appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Les onglets communs

226 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Calendrier

Les calendriers utiliseacutes au sein de GLPI sont parameacutetrables par entiteacute Ils sont caracteacuteriseacutes par des peacuteriodes drsquoouvertureainsi que des peacuteriodes de fermeture

Ces calendriers sont utiliseacutes dans les SLA (voir Configurer les SLAs) et la [configuration des enti-teacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)

Calendrier

Plages horaires

Correspond aux plages horaires drsquoouverture de lrsquoentiteacute Vous pouvez en ajouter autant que neacutecessaire par jour tant queces plages ne se chevauchent pas

Peacuteriode de fermeture

Liste les peacuteriodes de fermeture affecteacutees agrave ce calendrier et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle voir lca configurationdes peacuteriodes de fermeture

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 227

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Peacuteriodes de fermeture

La liste des peacuteriodes de fermeture est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Une peacuteriode de fermeture comprend un nom une peacuteriode et si cette fermeture est reacutecurrente ou non

Concernant le champ Reacutecurrent si celui-ci est agrave Oui cela signifie que la peacuteriode indiqueacutee est valable tout le tempsDans ce cas GLPI ne se soucierait pas de lrsquoanneacutee indiqueacutee

Tregraves utile pour indiquer les jours feacuterieacutes revenant chaque anneacutee (Noeumll Victoire de 1945 1er mai ) ou les peacuteriode defermeture de la socieacuteteacute (fermeacutee tous les ans du 1er au 31 aoucirct) et surtout cela eacutevite de ressaisir chaque anneacutee les mecircmesdates

Intituleacutes Internet

Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plusieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

Un eacutequipement se connecte au reacuteseau au travers de ports reacuteseaux

Agrave un port reacuteseau on associe un ou plusieurs Noms reacuteseau(voir ci-dessous)

Un Nom reacuteseau peut appartenir agrave un Domaine Internet Il peut contenir une ou plusieurs adresses IP (voir ci-dessous)et il peut avoir plusieurs alias

Une adresse IP appartient agrave un reacuteseau IP (voir ci-dessous)

Au niveau protocole IP les reacuteseaux sont indiffeacuteremment en IPv4 et en IPv6

Note GLPI gegravere indiffeacuteremment IPv4 et IPv6 La seule distinction provient du format des adresses et des masques

2128513766 est une adresse IPv4 alors que 2a00 1450 4007 803 1012 est en IPv6

GLPI considegravere IPv4 comme un sous-ensemble drsquoIPv6 les traitements sont les mecircmes

GLPI utilise deux repreacutesentations pour les adresses IP (IPv6 et IPv4) mdash La repreacutesentation binaire lui permet de faire lrsquoanalyse des relations entre reacuteseaux adresses et masques Elle est

inaccessible agrave lrsquoutilisateurmdash La repreacutesentation textuelle est celle utiliseacutee pour lrsquoaffichage et la saisie des donneacutees

Les adresses et les masques IPv4 sont repreacutesenteacutes par leur forme classique (ie 2128513766 2552552550) La repreacutesentation des adresses IPv6 est celle canonique (ie 2001 db8 0 85a3 ac1f 8001 plutocirct que 2001 0db8 0000 85a3 0000 0000 ac1f 8001) Lesmasques IPv6 sont repreacutesenteacutes sous la forme du preacutefixe de sous reacuteseau (ie nombre de bits agrave 1 dans lemasque)

Reacuteseaux IP

Les Reacuteseaux IP permettent de deacutefinir la topologie des reacuteseaux

Ils regroupent un ensemble drsquoadresses IP regroupeacutees selon la topologie deacutefinie par le plan drsquoadressage des administra-teurs du reacuteseau

Ils peuvent srsquoemboicircter la hieacuterarchie des reacuteseaux IP deacutepend des adresses et des masques de ces reacuteseauxainsi que de leurs identiteacutes drsquoappartenance Par exemple 192168102552552550 est un sous reacuteseau de192168002552552540)

228 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement La hieacuterarchie est geacutereacutee implicitement il est impossible de la modifier soi-mecircme

Un reacuteseau est composeacute au minimum drsquoune adresse et drsquoun masque Agrave cela peut srsquoajouter une passerelle

Un reacuteseau est dit adressable si il est utiliseacute pour le routage interne des ordinateurs En drsquoautres termes son masquede sous-reacuteseau et sa passerelle sont utiliseacutes par tous les eacutequipements du reacuteseau (si un ou plusieurs ordinateurs nrsquoontpas les mecircmes informations cela peut engendrer des problegravemes de routage ) Geacuteneacuteralement un reacuteseau ayant unepasserelle est adressable car la passerelle est connue de tous les eacutequipements et elle ne peut appartenir qursquoagrave un seulsous-reacuteseau Mais un reacuteseau adressable nrsquoa pas neacutecessairement de passerelle Crsquoest par exemple le cas des reacuteseauxpriveacutees (1921684802552552550 ) ou de la boucle locale (1270002552552550 ou 1128)

Les reacuteseaux sont modifiables depuis les intituleacutes ( Configuration gt Intituleacutes ) Internet gt Reacuteseaux IP

VLAN

Liste les VLAN associeacutes agrave ce reacuteseau IP et permet drsquoen associer un nouveau

Adresses IP

Liste les adresses IP de ce reacuteseau

Vous pouvez classer cette liste par numeacutero drsquoIP en cliant sur le lien Adresses IP ou par type de mateacuteriel en cliquant surle lien Trier par type drsquoeacuteleacutement Dans ce cas vous aurez un tableau par type drsquoeacuteleacutement

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 229

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Domaines Internet

Noms reacuteseau

Liste les noms reacuteseau du domaine

Alias reacuteseau

Liste les alias reacuteseau du domaine

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Reacuteseaux Wifi

A FAIRE

Noms reacuteseau

Un nom reacuteseau correspond agrave lrsquoidentification unique drsquoune machine du point de vue drsquoInternet

Geacuteneacuteralement un eacutequipement est identifieacute par un ou plusieurs noms particuliers sur le reacuteseau Le serveur DNS reacutesoudrace nom en adresse IP Dans le cas ougrave IPv4 et IPv6 sont utiliseacutes ce nom renverra deux adresses IP une en IPv4 etlrsquoautre en IPv6 Crsquoest pourquoi un nom reacuteseau peut avoir plusieurs adresses IP

Un nom reacuteseau est composeacute drsquoun nom qui correspond au label du FQDN (Cf [labelsFQDN](glossaryfqdn_labelhtml)) drsquoun [domaine internet](glossaryfqdnhtml) et de une ou plusieurs adressesIP

230 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Le champs reacuteseau IP apparaicirct afin de retrouver les informations sur les diffeacuterents reacuteseaux IP disponibles Cette in-formation nrsquoest pas conserveacutee dans le nom reacuteseau car il peut avoir plusieurs adresse IP et chacune peut appartenir agraveplusieurs reacuteseaux IP

Note Lors de la saisie drsquoun nom reacuteseau la validiteacute du nom ainsi que celle de chacune des adresses IP est veacuterifieacutee Siun de ces eacuteleacutement nrsquoest pas valide alors il est rejeteacute

Pour ajouter une adresse IP agrave un nom reacuteseau il faut cliquer sur le [image](docsimageaddcriteriapng) devant leschamps de saisie des adresses IP Pour supprimer une adresse IP il suffit drsquoeffacer le contenu du champs de lrsquoIP quelrsquoon souhaite retirer

Alias reacuteseau

Cet onglet liste les alias deacutejagrave preacutesents pour ce reacuteseau et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traditionnellement le nom reacuteseau est celui utiliseacute par le DNS pour la reacutesolution inverse drsquoune adresse IP alors que lesalias correspondent au CNAME du nomFQDN

De la mecircme maniegravere le nom de lrsquoalias doit un label FQDN valide

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Autres

Types

Quel que soit le type la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du type de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

32 Modules 231

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Modegraveles

Quel que soit le modegravele la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

Machines virtuelles

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute (modegraveles ou systegraveme de virtualisation eacutetat des machines virtuelles) la liste est une listede valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele ou du systegraveme de virtualisation ou celui de lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles

Seul lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles peut ecirctre traduit

Rubrique des documents

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle est valable pour toutes lesentiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Rubriques des documents liste des sous-rubriques deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Type de documents

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Lrsquoapplication propose un certain nombre de types par deacutefaut mais il est possible drsquoen ajouter en fournissant lesinformations suivantes

mdash le nom du type de document mdash lrsquoextension par exemple txt ou pdf la deacutetection des documents qursquoil est permis drsquoajouter se base sur cette

information mdash le nom du fichier pour lrsquoicocircne du document deacutesireacute Placez les fichiers drsquoicocircnes dans le reacutepertoire picsicones

sous lrsquoarborescence des fichiers drsquoinstallation de GLPI mdash le type MIME si neacutecessaire mdash lrsquoautorisation de teacuteleacutechargement de ce type de fichier (oui ou non)

Note Le type de document peut ecirctre une expression reacuteguliegravere Cela permet par exemple drsquoautoriser de deacutefinir unensemble de documents NOMFICHIERXXXXYYYY ougrave XXXX est un numeacutero et YYYY la date de lrsquoanneacutee fiscalecourante Dans ce cas preacutecis lrsquoexpression reacuteguliegravere pourrait ecirctre [0-9]+ pour indiquer toute extension composeacuteeexclusivement de nombres

Ces 2 variables peuvent ecirctre traduites

Outils (Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements ce qui facilite la navigation et larecherche Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance outre le nom de celle-ci on trouve lrsquoinformation preacutecisant lacateacutegorie megravere (comme enfant de) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance liste des sous-cateacutegories deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nou-velle

232 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Une cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance peut ecirctre traduite

Systegravemes drsquoexploitation

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Seul les sources de mise agrave jour peuvent ecirctre traduites

Reacuteseaux

Toutes les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat

Les interfaces reacuteseaux firmwares et reacuteseaux sont valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Prises reacuteseaux domaines et VLAN peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutees par entiteacute avec visibiliteacute ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Seules la liste Reacuteseaux peut ecirctre traduite

Prises reacuteseaux Une prise reacuteseau peut ecirctre lieacutee agrave un lieu Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquoune prise sur un portreacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants) apparaissentSi vous souhaitez plusieurs prises pour un mecircme lieu il est preacutefeacuterable drsquoeffectuer la creacuteation via le menu lieude la partie [Geacuteneacuteral](08_Module_Configuration02_Intituleacutes03_Intituleacutes_Geacuteneacuteralrst) du menu des intituleacutes

Logiciel (cateacutegories des logiciels)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Les valeurs sont deacutefinies pour toutesles entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de logiciels liste les sous-cateacutegories et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Une cateacutegorie de logiciels peut ecirctre traduite

Utilisateur

Les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elles peuvent ecirctre traduites

Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur (Critegravere LDAP)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Il est eacutegalement possible drsquoajouter un critegravere LDAP particulier

Uniciteacute des champs (valeurs ignoreacutees pour lrsquouniciteacute)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat qui peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute et applicable ou non au sous-entiteacutes

Il est possible de renseigner pour chaque type drsquoobjet des valeurs qui ne doivent pas ecirctre prises en compte lors de laveacuterification de lrsquouniciteacute drsquoun objet en base

Par exemple ne pas utiliser le numeacutero de seacuterie geacuteneacuterique laquo To Be Filled By OEM raquo pour veacuterifier si un ordinateur existedeacutejagrave dans GLPI

32 Modules 233

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Certains plugins peuvent apporter des intituleacutes suppleacutementaires qui sont parameacutetrables dans le mecircme menu

Authentifications externes

La liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

33 Advanced Configuration

331 Utilisation du cache

Les informations sur lrsquoutilisation du cache sont disponible dans Configuration Geacuteneacuterale Systegraveme)

Nouveau dans la version 92

Modifieacute dans la version 921

Si lrsquoun des systegravemes de cache APCu ou WinCache est preacutesent sur le serveur il sera automatiquement utiliseacute par GLPILe systegraveme se base sur ZendCache

Le cache permet drsquoameacuteliorer les performances sur certaines opeacuterations relativement lourdes telles que le chargementdes traductions ou le calcul des arbres des entiteacutes

On distingue deux caches distincts dans GLPI mdash le cache base de donneacuteesmdash le cache traduction

Cette distinction permet drsquoeacuteviter de stocker le cache des traductions sur un reacuteseau cela pourrait produire un trop grandnombre de requecirctes sur le reacuteseau et avoir au final un impact neacutegatif

A lrsquoinverse le cache de la base de donneacutees devrait ecirctre sur le reacuteseau en cas de frontaux multiples

Afin de vous permettre drsquoaffiner les reacuteglages ou drsquoutiliser un autre systegraveme de cache une solution manuelle estproposeacutee Pour en profiter ajouter dans la table glpi_configs une cleacute cache_db etou cache_trans pour lecontexte core et adapter la valeur en fonction de ce que vous souhaitez

Note Si le but est de deacutesactiver lrsquoun ou lrsquoautre de ces caches creacuteer la cleacute dans la table mais laisser la valeur vide

adapterapcu

adapterredisoptionsserverhost127001

Se reacutefeacuterer agrave la meacutethode ConfiggetCache() et agrave la documentation de ZendCache pour davantage drsquoinformations

Avertissement Si vous installez plusieurs instances de GLPI sur un mecircme serveur le namespace du cache doitecirctre unique par instance ce qui nrsquoeacutetait pas le cas dans GLPI avant la version 924

Si vous avez speacutecifieacute votre propre namespace dans la configuration assurez-vous qursquoil est bien unique sur chaqueinstance

Si votre version de GLPI est anteacuterieure agrave la 924 il faudra ajouter le namespace dans la configuration du cache dechacune de vos instances

234 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

332 OPCache

OPCache stocke des fichiers PHP preacute-compileacutes en meacutemoire et permet ainsi drsquoameacuteliorer les performances La seulechose agrave faire crsquoest de lrsquoinstaller sur votre instance de PHP et de le configurer (la configuration par deacutefaut devraitconvenir agrave la grande majoriteacute des cas)

Toutefois sur des instances qui pourraient ecirctre fortement solliciteacutees il peut ecirctre utile de ne pas inclures les fichiers depolices pour les PDF dans ce cache En effet elles y prennent eacutenormeacutement de place et le gain est relativement minime

Afin drsquoexclure les fichiers de police du cache il suffit de renseigner leur chemin complet dans un fichier deliste noire pour opcache Le chemin de ce fichier est deacutetermineacute par la diective de configuration opcacheblacklist_filename (etcphpdopcache-glpiblacklist par exemple sous Fedora) Si votre ins-tance de GLPI se situe dans le dossier varwww le chemin agrave exclure sera varwwwhtmlglpiglpi-921vendortecnickcomtcpdffonts

Bien entendu lrsquoemplacement du fichier de configuration et le chemin vers les polices est agrave adapter en fonction de votresystegraveme et de votre type drsquoinstallation

Les RPMS fournis pour Fedora (ou par le deacutepocirct Remi) offrent deacutejagrave cette fonctionnaliteacute par deacutefaut vous nrsquoaurez doncrien agrave faire )

34 Glossary

Accepted State of a demand which has been validated by an approver

Accreditation Authorization to perform a set of actions on several entities given by rights attribution process

Actions Grouping in a list of available handling of GLPI objects

Active Directory service Directory service compatible with LDAP directory provided by Microsoft Also knownas AD

Adaptive rule Rule in which at least one action is the result of a regular expression defined in a criteria

Administrative closing Modification of a ticket status to closed (manually or automatically)

Alert threshold Minimal value from which an alert is triggered

Asset Generic term for an element that can be inventoried and managed in GLPI

Automatic action Process for regular actions triggering either internal to GLPI or external (Unix cron Windowsplanned tasks )

Automatic closing GLPI internal process that closes unresolved tickets after a given time

Booking Element that is booked for a given period

Bookmark Stored link to a GLPI page that allows to access the page quickly

Budget Accounting operation that groups all provisional expenses and receipts

Cartridge Consumable used by a printer and specifically managed in GLPI

Case Physical element that contains a computerrsquos components (motherboard processor disk )

Closed (ticket) Status of a ticket whose solution has been approved by the ticket issuer or that has been closeautomatically

Collector Functionality of GLPI that allows to create tickets or followup by importing messages from a mailbox

Connection (network) Link between two network ports

Contact Referent person linked to a supplier

Contract Financial document linked to assets and to suppliers

Controller Device that interfaces with other peripheral device

Criteria Element or pattern used by search engines to select an information or used by rules engines and dictio-naries to perform actions

34 Glossary 235

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Default profile Profile attributed by the application in the absence of particular settings (rules manual attribu-tion )

Depreciation type Characteristic of depreciation which balance can be linear or declining

Dictionary Set of rules that allow to modify GLPI data

Direct connection Physical link between a computer and another asset

Document Element that defines a link andor store a file and that can be associated to other objects of GLPI

Domain Group of assets connected to a network

Dropdown Customizable dropdown list used in GLPI and plugins

Entity Organizational object allowing to partition view and action scope of users

Express renewal The contract is renewed only if both parties agree for its renewal (opposite to tacit renewal)

External link Link displayed on an asset form in GLPI and built dynamically using the asset data

Financial information Data for invoicing and warranty

Followup Exchange between a ticket issuer and the persons in charge of it

FQDN A FQDN (Fully qualified domain name) is a fully qualified domain nameFor example wwwglpi-projectorg forgeglpi-projectorg

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Specifically in GLPI selection of elements of the knowledge base that canbe provided independently for example articles that are made accessible to users having only access to thesimplified interface

Global management Management mode in which a unique inventory object can be connected to several compu-ters

Global note Public note that is also visible from sub-entities

Global right Permission on objects that are not linked to an entity

Global view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is common to all users

Group Grouping of users

Grouping Action of merging similar elements of distinct entities into the parent entity

Hive Entry in Windows registry

ICAL (ICalendar) Calendar importexport format

ID Technical identifier of an element

Identifier Connection name of a user (login)

IMAPPOP IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) and POP (Post Office Protocol) are messaging protocolsallowing to retrieve mail messages

Impact Measure of the effect of an incident problem or change in business process

In progress (attributed) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians

In progress (planned) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians andfor which an action is planned

Incident Unplanned interruption or quality decrease of a service

Intervention Action of a technician to solve an incident

Knowledge base Database allowing to gather analyze store and share knowledge and information inside anorganization

Label FQDN A FQDN is composed of labels separated by dots (ldquordquo)For example wwwglpi-projectorg is composed of labels www glpi-project and orgA computer name is composed of a label and the name of the domain it belongs to for example www name indomain glpi-projectorgIn GLPI labels are compliant with section 21 of RFC 1123

236 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

LDAP directory Directory service using the LDAP PROTOCOL (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Allowsin particular to store user accounts

Local right Permission applicable to a given scope (entity)

Location Name in GLPI allowing geographical localization of an asset

Logs List of events occurring during use of GLPI application

Mail domain Part of a mail adress that is after character

Manufacturer Company producing a hardware

Mount point Directory from which the data contained in a partition can be accessed

Network Name defining the connection type (internet local )

Network port Network interface that can be virtual or physical

Networks Hardwares providing interconnection of computer equipments

New (ticket) Default status of a ticket

Path Address allowing to localize an element in a tree structure

Pattern Character string used for comparison in a criteria

PDU Power Distribution Unit

Pending (Ticket) Status of a ticket which processing is temporarily suspended (does not impact processing time)

Personal note Note visible only by its writer

Personal view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is specific to a user

Planning Scheduling of a task in time scale

Plugin GLPI extension that allows to add functionalities andor to modify application behaviors

Power supply Bloc providing electric current to the components of a computer

Preferences Personal parameters of a user

Priority Scale that identifies the relative importance of a ticket and that results from impact and urgency

Private Element that is visible only by its writer (bookmark note )

Profile Set of rights

Provider Legal structure toward which a contractual relation can be established (purchase contract )

Public Element that is visible by all authorized users of an entity

Public note Note that is visible by all users of the notersquos entity

Purge Permanent deletion of elements placed in the trash bin

Recursivity Property of an object belonging to an entity that makes it visible from sub-entities

Refused State of a demand that has been invalidated

Registered user Person having an accreditation allowing to connect to GLPI

Regular expression Character string (often called pattern) that describes a set of accepted strings according to awell-defined syntax

Replicate (MySQL) MySQL database used by GLPI if main database (master) is not available

Report Document that sums up GLPI data

Requester Person at the origin of an incident ticket or a service request

Restoration Recovery of an element of the trash bin

Right Authorization of a user for a given action

Root entity First entity of GLPI entities tree structure that is always present even if no other entity is defined andthat cannot be deleted

Rule List of criteria that trig a list of actions if criteria are satisfied

Saved search Recording of GLPI search engine state that allows to store and perform again the search

34 Glossary 237

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Service General action of GLPI listed in the events

Simplified interface GLPI user interface that gives access to a reduced set of functionalities and that targets endusers (opposite to standard interface)

SLA SLA (for Service-Level Agreement) is a contract between a service provider and a client that defines therequested quality of service and the responsibilities in case of failure

Solved (ticket) Ticket state when a technical solution was provided for an incident

SSO Unique authentication system (SSO (Single Sign On))

Standard interface GLPI user interface that gives access to all functionalities (opposite to simplified interface)

Statistics Summary of GLPI data linked to tickets

Status State of an asset or of a ticket belonging to its life cycle

Sub-entity Child entity of an entity on a form indicates recursivity status

Subject Title or question of an element of the knowledge base

Supervisor Person in charge of a group of users

Tacit renewal The contract is renewed automaticaly if none of the parties declares its will to break it

Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is a VLAN which tag is transmited in networkframe (see 8021Q)

Task Action corresponding to a technical operation that can be planned

Technician User in charge of tickets processing

Template Reusable model of object containing predefined fieds and allowing easier user entry

Ticket GLPI object representing an incident or a service request

Tier type Category of providers

Transfer Action of moving an object from one entity to another

Trash bin Container of elements deleted by users Similar to the trash bin in a desktop environment it is anintermediate state before purge

Tree Hierarchical organization of data using a tree structure

Unitary management Management mode in which an inventory object can be connected to only one computer

Urgency Criteria defined by the requester that specifies for a ticket the desired resolution speed

User User of an asset that is not registered in GLPI user base

Validation Action of authorizing a ticket processing

Validator Person performing the validation of a ticket

VCard Virtual visit card

Virtual network port A virtual network port is a port which does not correspond to a physical network hardware

VLAN VLAN Virtual Local Network

Volume Storage area attached to a computer

Webcal Exchange format for calendar data

238 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

CHAPITRE 4

Documentation license

This documentation is distributed under the terms of the Creative Commons License Attribution-ShareAlike 30 France(CC BY-SA 30 FR)

For the complete terms of the license please refer to httpscreativecommonsorglicensesby-sa30frlegalcode

You are free to mdash Share mdash copy and redistribute the material in any medium or formatmdash Adapt mdash remix transform and build upon the material for any purpose even commercially

The licensor cannot revoke these freedoms as long as you follow the license terms

Under the following terms mdash Attribution mdash You must give appropriate credit provide a link to the license and indicate if changes were

made You may do so in any reasonable manner but not in any way that suggests the licensor endorses you oryour use

mdash ShareAlike mdash If you remix transform or build upon the material you must distribute your contributions underthe same license as the original

No additional restrictions mdash You may not apply legal terms or technological measures that legally restrict others fromdoing anything the license permits

239

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

240 Chapitre 4 Documentation license

Index

AAccepted 235Accreditation 235Actions 235Active Directory service 235Adaptive rule 235Administrative closing 235Alert threshold 235Asset 235Automatic action 235Automatic closing 235

BBooking 235Bookmark 235Budget 235

CCartridge 235Case 235Closed (ticket) 235Collector 235Connection (network) 235Contact 235Contract 235Controller 235Criteria 235

DDefault profile 236Depreciation type 236Dictionary 236Direct connection 236Document 236Domain 236Dropdown 236

EEntity 236

Express renewal 236External link 236

FFinancial information 236Followup 236FQDN 236Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 236

GGlobal management 236Global note 236Global right 236Global view 236Group 236Grouping 236

HHive 236

IICAL (ICalendar) 236ID 236Identifier 236IMAPPOP 236Impact 236In progress (attributed) (Ticket) 236In progress (planned) (Ticket) 236Incident 236Intervention 236

KKnowledge base 236

LLabel FQDN 236LDAP directory 237Local right 237Location 237

241

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Logs 237

MMail domain 237Manufacturer 237Mount point 237

NNetwork 237Network port 237Networks 237New (ticket) 237

PPath 237Pattern 237PDU 237Pending (Ticket) 237Personal note 237Personal view 237Planning 237Plugin 237Power supply 237Preferences 237Priority 237Private 237Profile 237Provider 237Public 237Public note 237Purge 237

RRecursivity 237Refused 237Registered user 237Regular expression 237Replicate (MySQL) 237Report 237Requester 237Restoration 237Right 237Root entity 237Rule 237

SSaved search 237Service 238Simplified interface 238SLA 238Solved (ticket) 238SSO 238Standard interface 238Statistics 238

Status 238Sub-entity 238Subject 238Supervisor 238

TTacit renewal 238Tagged VLAN 238Task 238Technician 238Template 238Ticket 238Tier type 238Transfer 238Trash bin 238Tree 238

UUnitary management 238Urgency 238User 238

VValidation 238Validator 238VCard 238Virtual network port 238VLAN 238Volume 238

WWebcal 238

242 Index

  • Preface
  • Installation
  • Table of contents
    • First Steps with GLPI
      • General
      • Understanding the interface
      • Manage your password
      • Manage your Preferences
      • Navigate GLPI modules
      • User interfaces
      • View and manage records
      • Search for information in GLPI
      • Saved Searches
        • Modules
          • Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes
          • Asset module
          • Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs
          • Module Gestion
          • Module Outils
          • Module Administration
          • Module Configuration
            • Advanced Configuration
              • Utilisation du cache
              • OPCache
                • Glossary
                  • Documentation license
                  • Index
Page 6: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska

CHAPITRE 1

Preface

This documentation covers the installation and use of GLPI (Gestion Libre de Parc Informatique)

Free and open-source solution for IT asset management and helpdesk and more GLPI is a web application designedto manage all of your IT asset management issues from inventory management of hardware components and softwareto the management of user assistance

This guide is intended to give an overview of GLPI for both administrators and users

Each part can be consulted independently even if for reasons of logic we recommend that you read this documentationentirely

3

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

4 Chapitre 1 Preface

CHAPITRE 2

Installation

The GLPI installation documentation is available separately

5

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Chapitre 2 Installation

CHAPITRE 3

Table of contents

31 First Steps with GLPI

Everything you need to know to get started with GLPI

311 General

Choose a web browser

GLPI requires the use of a web browser

Optimal functioning of the application is obtained by using a modern browser compliant with web standards

The following web browsers are supported mdash Edgemdash Firefox (including 2 latests ESR version)mdash Chrome

GLPI also works on mobile it is generally compatible with the mobile versions of the supported browsers

How to connect

Open your browser and go to the GLPI homepage (httpsglpi_address)

Access to the full functionality of the application requires authentication An unauthenticated user can possibly accesscertain functions if GLPI has been configured to allow it

mdash View the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)mdash Open a ticketmdash

Depending on the profile of the authenticated user they may be shown the standard interface or simplified interface

7

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

End your session

To log out click the Logout button in the top right of the screen Once logged out you will be redirected to the loginpage

312 Understanding the interface

Depending on the userrsquos profile some menus and content may differ but the logic of the interface remains the same

The GLPI interface is made up of different areas grouping together the applicationrsquos functionalities according to theirnature

1 The user menu allows you to manage your preferences access help change the current language and discon-nect

2 The main menu allows you to navigate through the different modules

3 The breadcrumb trail allows you to locate the context of use of the main work area

4 The entity selector (in multi-entity mode)

5 The main working area is the privileged space for interaction with the application

6 The search box allows you to perform a global search at any time

313 Manage your password

The change password form can be found in user preferences

You must enter and confirm your password before validation The administrator can disable this feature so the changepassword area does not appear in this case

In the event that the user has forgotten their password the possibility of resetting it is offered to them from the loginpage The link is only present if notifications are enabled

Only users with an e-mail address defined in GLPI and not authenticating via an external source (LDAP mail serveretc) can use this functionality Once the renewal request has been made by entering their e-mail address the userreceives an e-mail providing them with a link allowing them to reset their password

Passwords must follow the defined security policy A real-time check of the entered password is then carried out

8 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

314 Manage your Preferences

User preferences are accessible from the Preferences tab of the user form by clicking on your name at the top rightof the interface from any page

Each authenticated user has the possibility to modify his preferences if they have the Personalize update right in theirprofile

Main Tab

Here the user can modify the usual personal information mdash Surnamemdash First namemdash Email addressmdash Phone numbersmdash Locationmdash Languagemdash

Note Some fields cannot be modified if they come from an LDAP directory

A user can add email addresses and select the default address which will be used for sending notifications

They can also specify some default behaviors of the application such as the selected profile and entity They can alsoturn off notifications for actions they take

Depending on the profiles the experienced user can also choose to exit the normal application mode In debug modeGLPI displays errors all variable values SQL queries etc It is useful to activate this mode in the event of GLPImalfunction A maximum amount of information can therefore be communicated to the developers This mode alsoallows you to have additional information on different objects in a specific tab (notifications etc)

31 First Steps with GLPI 9

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personalization Tab

This tab allows you to modify the general display preferences applied to a given user These parameters take priorityover those defined in the general configuration

Note The Number of results per page value shown here cannot exceed the maximum value set in the general displayoptions

Note that the Remote access key section allows you to regenerate the security key used to access the private flowsoffered by GLPI Currently the ICAL and WEBCAL flows of the planning are protected by this security key which isintegrated into the url

10 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Personal View Tab

Lists custom views defined in objects by the user In particular it allows you to delete the personal views defined toreturn to global views

315 Navigate GLPI modules

The various functions of GLPI have been grouped into several modules built around similar contexts of use The topbar of the interface allows you to navigate between these modules

mdash The Assets module provides access to the various inventoried materialsmdash The Assistance module allows you to create and monitor tickets problems and changes as well as see statisticsmdash The Management module allows you to manage contacts suppliers budgets contracts and documentsmdash The Tools module allows you to manage projects notes the knowledge base reservations RSS feeds and view

reportsmdash The Administration module allows you to administer users groups entities profiles rules and dictionaries It

also allows the maintenance of the application (basic backup and restore check if a new version is available)as well as the management of the email queue

mdash The Setup module provides access to the general configuration options of GLPI notifications collectorsautomatic tasks authentication plugins external links SLA management of titles components as well ascontrol of the uniqueness of fields

The menus presented vary according to the authorizations of the logged in user The navigation context is presented tothe user in the breadcrumb trail

Note You will find at the bottom right a button allowing you to quickly return to the top of the page if necessary

There are keyboard shortcuts that allow you to navigate from one module submodule to another Here is the list ofthese shortcuts

mdash 1 =gt Homemdash Assets

mdash o =gt Computersmdash s =gt Software

mdash Assistancemdash t =gt Ticketsmdash a =gt Statisticsmdash p =gt Planning

mdash Managementmdash d =gt Documents

mdash Toolsmdash b =gt Knowledge basemdash r =gt Reservationsmdash e =gt Reports

mdash Administrationmdash u =gt Usersmdash g =gt Groups

mdash Setupmdash n =gt Dropdowns

Note The combination of keys to associate with these shortcuts varies depending on the operating systems andbrowsers used Here are some examples according to the browsers

mdash Mozilla Firefox ChromeSimultaneously press the keys Alt Shift and the desired shortcut

mdash Opera

31 First Steps with GLPI 11

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Simultaneously press the keys Esc Shift and the desired shortcut

In addition since version 92 GLPI offers navigation with approximate search (fuzzy) accessible from the keyboardshortcut Ctrl + Alt + G This will open a modal window allowing you to filter via a search field all the menus ofGLPI (all the levels are present you have for example access to the 3rd level such as the dropdowns or the components)

In this window additional shortcuts are available mdash and in order to navigate through the resultsmdash Enter to change the active glpi page on the selected resultmdash Esc to close the window

316 User interfaces

Note The choice of the default interface as well as the visiblity of different modules can be configured in the profilesor from the userrsquos preferences

Standard Interface

This is the main interface of the application All the modules are available but there are limits depending on the profilesettings

The home page of the standard interface provides a summary view for quick access to active elements (tickets notesplanning contracts etc)

It is divided into 5 views mdash Dashboard

A customizable dashboard

mdash Personal view

12 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Shows the tickets opened rejected to be processed to be approved (for which the logged-in user isthe requestor) or those on which this user has an interaction as a validator or technician (awaitingvalidation in progress to be closed in waiting) This view also offers him current issues his scheduleand available notes

mdash Group view

Offers the same information about tickets and issues as the personal view but using the groups to whichit belongs as a reference Depending on their profile they may or may not have access to the tickets forwhich their groups are requesting

mdash Global view

Offers statistics on tickets and issues according to their status and on contracts according to their expi-ration date It also offers the view of the latest additions of objects in GLPI Depending on the configu-ration used new tickets can also be presented in this tab

mdash RSS feed

Proposes the content of defined RSS feeds RSS feeds are managed from the laquo Tools gt RSS Feeds raquomenu

Note For Personal and Group views only tables with information are displayed

Note Two security messages may be displayed when you log in for the first time after completing the installationprocedure

The first asks you to change the passwords of the accounts created by default in GLPI the second asks you to deletethe directory glpiinstall

As long as you have not performed these operations the messages will remain

Simplified Interface

It is the most restrictive interface of the application and is built for an end-user more than a technician Therefore thenumber of available modules is reduced to a minimum

31 First Steps with GLPI 13

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is intended for users with very limited permissions in the application such as the built-in self-service and helpdeskprofiles

In the default configuration a user can from this interface only create tickets follow the processing of their ticketsmake reservations view the notes or public RSS feeds (or create private notes or feeds) and consult the FrequentlyAsked Questions

The home page offers the number of its tickets according to their status as well as the most popular and recent FAQtopics

317 View and manage records

The display of all the lists of records and of all the details concerning a record always works in the same way in GLPIWhether itrsquos a list of computers phones or tickets the presentation follows the same principle

A list of elements can be obtained in 2 ways mdash From the search engine

From the search engine after determining the criteria and validating the search a list of records isdisplayed By default no search criteria limit the list of recordings offered and the display is limited tothe first x records in the list which is configurable in the preferences

mdash From another list

Some tabs offer a list of related items For example from a list of computers click on the name of acomputer then navigate to the software tab The list of software installed on this computer is displayed

Details concerning a record are displayed in the form of tabs grouping together similar information For a computerthe financial information and the software list are in two separate tabs

Customize the display

The columns displayed from the complete list of the inventory can be configured Click on the button It ispossible to add delete and order the displayed columns

14 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash The global view applies to all profiles having access to a part of the inventory the modification of this partwill therefore be visible by all users

mdash The personal view applies only to the logged-in user and overrides the global view settings This view is onlyavailable if you have the User view right regarding the Search result display

This tab also allows you to reset the display customization of the different lists The user can for eachtype of object return to the default display by deleting this personalization

318 Search for information in GLPI

GLPI has a search engine allowing you to display a set of elements satisfying a certain number of criteria The proposedlists are paginated A navigation bar at the top and bottom of the list is used to define the number of items to displayper page and to navigate between pages

A global search engine (that is one that can use data from objects of different type) is also available

In addition to the list of elements corresponding to the stated criteria these lists offer some additional features mdash Export in different formats (CSV PDF )mdash Massive (Bulk) actionsmdash A marque-pages system to save searches

Perform a basic search

The basic search makes it possible to carry out multiple searches configured and sorted on one of the types of theinventory Depending on the data on which the search is carried out the following operators can be proposed

mdash containsmdash ismdash is notmdash beforemdash after

Searching on dates allows you to specify a specific date (Specify a date) or to define it in relation to the current date(Now + ou - X hour(s) day(s) month or year(s)) It is also possible to specify a search before or after a given date asdefined intervals (Monday Last Saturday Start of month Start of year Start of year etc)

For labels it is possible to search for a given value (is) If the dropdowns can be visible in the sub-entities the choicesunder and not under appear The criteria are added with the + on a gray background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes - Percentage free contains gt 80

Note Once the criteria have been defined the search is launched by pressing the Search button

Perform a multi-criteria search

The multi-criteria search makes it possible to refine the search by extending it to other types of objects by addingglobal search criteria This type of search is obtained by adding criteria with the + on a white background

For example to find computers with more than 1024 MiB of memory and more than 80 free disk space attached toa 17-inch monitor and having LibreOffice software installed

31 First Steps with GLPI 15

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

- Type Field Comparison Value- simple Memory (Mio) contains gt 1024AND simple Volumes gt Percentage free contains gt 80AND multi Monitor gt Size contains 17AND multi Software gt Name contains LibreOffice

Items in Trash

Some items in GLPI can be trashed To view them in order to restore them or delete them permanently click on theicon representing a recycle bin To return to the display of active elements click again on this icon

Perform an advanced search

Here are some examples of search operators

NULLmdash Find the records with such empty field with a date field ltnumber_of_months orgt number_of_monthsmdash Search for materials with a deadline corresponding to the number of monthsmdash Search for computers that are 5 years old Date of purchase contains lt-60

^123 Find the records containing 123 at the start of the field

Avertissement On some systems you have to type ^ the space bar then the first character

^Windows Find records containing Windows 2000 Windows XP but not with Windows

123$ Find the records containing 123 at the end of the field

^123$ Find records containing only the text 123

Two search criteria linked by the operator AND NOT Find records that do not match a criterion (other than)

Entity is laquo Root entity raquo AND NOT Type contains laquo Laptop raquo Search for all computers in the laquo Root entity raquowhich are not laptops

[Year]-[Month]-[Day] (YYYY-MM-DD) Search by date

For security reasons the operator is not usable

Export the result of a search

The export of the search result in SLK or CSV spreadsheet formats or in PDF format can be done in two differentforms

mdash The current page exports only the data displayed on the screen (for example the first 10 results out of 200)mdash All pages exports all of the search results

The SLK format can be used by many spreadsheets Fields that are too long will be truncated when using software thatdoes not fully comply with the standards In this case it is preferable to use the exports in CSV format

If the data exported in CSV format is imported into Microsoft Excel software accented characters may not be displayedcorrectly This software seems to have difficulty with data encoded in UTF-8

16 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Perform massive actions

A massive action system is integrated into the search engine It allows you to make bulk modifications and performactions to all the selected elements Some examples of the available massive actions (Will differ based on the type ofitem)

mdash Put in trashbinmdash Delete permanentlymdash Restoremdash Connect Disconnectmdash Installmdash Updatemdash Add a contractmdash Enable the financial and administrative informationmdash Add to transfer listmdash Synchronize

To use it simply select the elements for which you want to perform an action then click on the Actions button availableat the top and bottom of the list Then once the type of action has been selected options are optionally presented aswell as a validation button

The results of the actions as well as the information messages are presented at the end of the execution of all theactions

Note mdash You will find in the headers of the table (at the top and at the bottom) a checkbox allowing you to select or

unselect all the elements of the listmdash A similar system of actions is available in certain lists present within the objects themselves The operation is

identical to that explained here

Avertissement The number of elements that can be handled simultaneously is limited by the values ofmax_input_vars or suhosinpostmax_vars in your PHP configuration You may therefore get a mes-sage indicating that massive edits are disabled You just need to increase the values of your PHP configuration orreduce the number of items displayed

Quick search

This tool is located at the top right of the GLPI screen It allows searching within elements including but not limitedto

mdash Ticketsmdash Problemsmdash Changesmdash Projectsmdash Computersmdash Monitorsmdash Softwaremdash Network Equipmentmdash Peripheralsmdash Printers

31 First Steps with GLPI 17

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Phonesmdash Contactsmdash Contactsmdash Suppliersmdash Documentsmdash Budgetsmdash Licensesmdash Usersmdash Groups

Note The search is carried out only on the fields displayed by default for each of the elements mentioned above Inessence it is the same as an items seen search on each type of element

319 Saved Searches

GLPI offers a system for saving searches (bookmarks) Once the search is done it is possible to save it from a star-shaped button accessible in the search form

There are two types of saved searches mdash Private searches Usable by all users and they are only accessible by their authormdash Public searches Can only be created by authorized users and are accessible by all users provided they belong

to the configured entitiesSaved searches can be accessed by clicking on the star shaped button in the user menu

18 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From this interface it is possible to mdash Reorder private searches (drag amp drop) - public searches use automatic sortingmdash Select a default search (only one possible per type of object) by clicking on the star iconmdash Access the search results (by simply clicking on it)mdash Access the saved searches management interface by clicking on the wrench icon at the top right

Avertissement Setting a particularly heavy search as the default display can have catastrophic effects on theoverall performance of the application

Display of counters

The GLPI settings are used to define whether the counters should be displayed or not In the case of research itrsquos a bitmore complicated

This is because some searches can take a long time (and resources) to complete In order to limit the impact onperformance the heaviest requests are not counted by default So that the execution time of a saved query can becalculated it must be executed at least once A scheduled task is also offered to calculate execution times regularly(and thus avoid requests that would have become heavy over time)

Administrators can override the automatic count method and have a search always or never be counted This possibilityshould be used sparingly

Configuring alerts

It is possible to configure the sending of ldquoalertsrdquo on a saved search using the GLPI notification system Sending anotification is based on the number of results returned by the search compared with the chosen operator to the enteredvalue

31 First Steps with GLPI 19

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The notification(s) used are displayed for reference from the alerts configuration tab For private research only theuser who created the search can be notified using a template provided by default in this case a single notificationwill be linked

For public searches a specific event must be created as well as a notification that uses it This is only possible fromthe alerts configuration tab

Once the specific notification is created it has to be configured by associating it with a template and by selecting thedesired recipients Note that it is possible to associate several notifications with the same search via the event thatcorresponds to it

Note As long as the notification specific to a public search is not created it will not be possible to add alerts

32 Modules

321 Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes

Les actions

Les diffeacuterentes actions possibles sur lrsquoobjet deacutependent des droits attribueacutes dans votre profil

De mecircme certaines actions dans lrsquoonglet deacutependent des droits du profil (comme les actions de masse)

Ne sont listeacutees ici que les actions principales pouvant ecirctre reacutealiseacutees sur diffeacuterents objets Si une action est speacutecifique agraveun objet elle sera deacutecrite dans la fiche de cet objet

Creacuteation

Le droit de creacuteer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoajout srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Cliquer sur le laquo + raquo situeacute dans le menu horizontal

4 Si lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire en possegravede une gestion de gabarit choisir un gabarit agrave appliquer

5 Compleacuteter les diffeacuterents champs de la fiche vierge

20 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Valider

Une option preacutesente dans les preacutefeacuterences utilisateur (Apregraves la creacuteation aller agrave lrsquoeacuteleacutement creacuteeacute) permet de deacuteterminersi lrsquoutilisateur souhaite apregraves la creacuteation lrsquoaffichage de la fiche nouvellement creacuteeacutee ou une autre fiche vierge pourcreacuteation en seacuterie

Modification

Le droit de modifier un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la modification srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste desobjets

4 2 choix de modification

mdash Modification unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Modifier les champs souhaiteacutes

3 Cliquer sur le bouton Actualiser

mdash Modification en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

3 Choisir le champ agrave modifier

4 Indiquer la nouvelle valeur du champ

5 Cliquer sur le bouton Envoyer

Affichage

Le droit de visualiser un objet deacutepend du droit Lecture deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur Si vous nrsquoavez pas le droitde visualiser un objet le nom de celui-ci nrsquoapparaitra pas dans les diffeacuterents menus de GLPI

Par exempl si vous supprimer le droit de lecture de lrsquoobjet Ordinateur dans votre profil le sous-menu Ordinateurnrsquoapparaitra pas dans le menu Parc mecircme si vous avez le droit de modifier un ordinateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la visualisation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour visualiser un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur via le moteur de recherche situeacute en haut de la liste des objets

4 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

Association drsquoun document

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire lrsquoassociation agrave un document srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

32 Modules 21

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Documents

3 Seacutelectionner un document ou cliquer sur le bouton Parcourir pour en ajouter un

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un DocumentAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au document

Association drsquoun contrat

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire si celui-ci peut ecirctre lieacute agrave un contrat lrsquoassociation srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircmemaniegravere

1 Se connecter agrave GLPI

2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour ajouter un contrat agrave un ordinateur)

3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoobjet depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des objets

Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes mdash Association unitaire

1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Aller dans lrsquoonglet Contrats

3 Seacutelectionner un contrat

4 Cliquer sur le bouton Ajouter

mdash Association en masse

1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet

2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions et choisir Ajouter un ContratAffichage de la fiche avec lrsquoobjet associeacute au contrat

Transfert entre entiteacutes

Avec la notion drsquoentiteacutes vient la possibiliteacute de deacutefinir des profils de transfert pour les mutations drsquoeacuteleacutements entreentiteacutes

Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet notamment de passer drsquoun GLPI mono entiteacute agrave un GLPI multi-entiteacutes en utilisant lestransferts

Comment faire un transfert

1 Utiliser un profil qui a le droit de faire des transferts (Administration gt Profils gt Administration ndashgt Droit leLecture sur Transfeacuterer)

2 Configurer les actions faites par le transfert ([Administration gt Regravegles ndashgt Transfeacute-rer](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst))

3 Srsquoassurer que le profil qui va effectuer le transfert a une visibiliteacute sur lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante et sur lrsquoentiteacute prenante (leplus simple est drsquoutiliser un profil reacutecursif depuis lrsquoentiteacute racine)

4 Se positionner sur lrsquoEntiteacute racine (Voir Tous)

5 Depuis la liste des objets seacutelectionner lrsquoeacuteleacutement agrave transfeacuterer

22 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

6 Choisir Ajouter agrave la liste de transfert et Valider 7 Dans Mode de transfert choisir un profil de configuration du transfert (creacuteeacute en point 2) 8 Seacutelectionner lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle sera transfeacutereacute lrsquoeacuteleacutement 9 Cliquer sur Transfeacuterer

10 Veacuterifier dans la nouvelle entiteacute que le mateacuteriel srsquoy trouve bien

Note Si un eacuteleacutement lieacute nrsquoexiste pas dans la nouvelle entiteacute il sera automatiquement creacuteeacute si le profil de transfertdemande de le conserver

Exemple transfert drsquoun ordinateur avec un fournisseur deacutefini dans les informations financiegraveres Si ce fournisseurnrsquoexiste que dans lrsquoentiteacute ceacutedante il sera creacuteeacute dans lrsquoentiteacute prenante Par contre un fournisseur deacutefini dans lrsquoentiteacuteracine en reacutecursif ne sera pas recreacuteeacute

Avertissement Le lieu et le groupe seront agrave adapter pour la nouvelle entiteacute

Suppression

Le droit de supprimer un objet deacutepend du droit deacutefini dans le profil de lrsquoutilisateur

Quel que soit lrsquoobjet de lrsquoinventaire la suppression srsquoeffectue toujours de la mecircme maniegravere 1 Se connecter agrave GLPI 2 Aller dans le menu de lrsquoobjet (exemple Parc gt Ordinateurs pour supprimer un ordinateur) 3 Optionnel faire une recherche de lrsquoordinateur depuis le moteur de recherche situeacute au-dessus de la liste des

objets Deux possibiliteacutes sont offertes

mdash Suppression unitaire 1 Cliquer sur le nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton

mdash Suppression en masse 1 Cocher la case situeacutee agrave gauche du nom de lrsquoobjet 2 Cliquer sur le bouton Actions

Dans les deux cas de figure il faudra choisir mdash Mettre agrave la corbeille si lrsquoobjet possegravede une corbeille mdash Supprimer deacutefinitivement si lrsquoobjet ne possegravede pas de corbeille

Dans le cas drsquoun objet ne posseacutedant pas de corbeille GLPI demandera une confirmation avant la suppression deacutefinitivede lrsquoobjet dans la base de donneacutees Dans le cas contraire lrsquoobjet sera mis dans la corbeille drsquoougrave il pourra ecirctre restaureacute(sorti de la corbeille)

La gestion des gabarits dans GLPI

Preacutesentation

Pour certains eacuteleacutements de GLPI il est possible de creacuteer de nouveaux eacuteleacutements (ordinateurs par exemple) depuisdes gabarits preacutealablement deacutefinis Un gabarit deacutefinit un masque de creacuteation certaines valeurs peuvent ecirctre deacutefiniesdirectement ou calculeacutees en fonction drsquoun masque (comme un numeacutero drsquoinventaire par exemple)

La gestion des gabarits se reacutealise via lrsquoicocircne situeacutee dans la barre de menu

32 Modules 23

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Eleacutements de lrsquoinventaire

Pour les eacuteleacutements de lrsquoinventaire le gabarit deacutefinit un eacuteleacutement standard en preacute-remplissant certains champs qui serontreacuteutiliseacutes pour la creacuteation drsquoautres eacuteleacutements Cela permet de simplifier lrsquoajout drsquoun grand nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements quasiidentiques

Par example afin de preacuteparer la reacuteception de 20 imprimantes identiques dont seuls les numeacuteros de seacuterie et drsquoinventairechangent

mdash creacuteer un gabarit correspondant agrave ce modegravele drsquoimprimantemdash dans ce gabarit remplir tous les champs invariables (constructeur modegravele etc)mdash creacuteer ensuite les 20 fiches drsquoimprimantes drsquoapregraves ce gabarit

Lors de la saisie de chaque imprimante le numeacutero de seacuterie et le numeacutero drsquoinventaire seront les seuls eacuteleacutements agravecompleacuteter

Le systegraveme drsquoincreacutementation

Un systegraveme de remplissage et drsquoincreacutementation automatique de certains champs (reconnaissables gracircce au ) estdisponible Ces champs (nom numeacutero drsquoinventaire ) sont alors remplis automatiquement agrave la creacuteation si le champcorrespondant dans le gabarit contient une chaicircne de formatage de la forme ltXXXgt

La chaicircne de formatage doit impeacuterativement deacutebuter par le caractegravere lt et se terminer par le caractegravere gt

Au sein de la chaicircne vous pourrez utiliser les caractegraveres suivants mdash X repreacutesente un caractegravere quelconque mdash g recherche du numeacutero parmi tous les champs identiques baseacutes sur le mecircme format mdash emplacement du numeacutero agrave increacutementer (nombre de chiffres eacutegal au nombre de ) mdash Y anneacutee sur 4 chiffres mdash y anneacutee sur 2 chiffres mdash m mois mdash d jour

Par exemple en poursuivant lrsquoexemple citeacute plus haut il est possible drsquoutiliser la fonctionnaliteacute drsquoincreacutementation pourcreacuteer automatiquement les numeacuteros drsquoinventaire

Ceux-ci sont composeacutes par exemple de la forme ANNEE+MOIS+JOUR+code structure (555) + code opeacuteration(1234) + numeacutero agrave increacutementer il suffira de renseigner dans le gabarit pour le champ numeacutero drsquoinventaire la chaicircneltYmd-555-1234-gt

Chaque imprimante agrave sa creacuteation verra son numeacutero drsquoinventaire geacuteneacutereacute automatiquement et increacutementeacute de 1 agrave 20

Gabarits de ticket

Tout comme les objets drsquoinventaire une notion de gabarit existe pour les tickets Un gabarit permet de personnaliserlrsquointerface de deacuteclaration drsquoun ticket en fonction du type de ticket et de la cateacutegorie

Les comportements pouvant ecirctre modifieacutes sont mdash la liste de champs devant ecirctre obligatoires pour lrsquoouverture drsquoun ticket mdash la liste des champs dont la valeur sera preacutedeacutefinie lors de lrsquoaffichage du formulaire mdash la liste des champs qui doivent ecirctre masqueacutes

Note Pour le controcircle des champs obligatoires seuls les champs disponibles dans lrsquointerface de lrsquoutilisateur sontcontrocircleacutes

24 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Donc si un champ est deacutefini comme obligatoire mais qursquoil nrsquoest pas proposeacute dans lrsquointerface il ne geacuteneacuterera pas drsquoerreurA la saisie des champs obligatoires sont afficheacutees les interfaces dans lesquelles ils sont utiliseacutes

Un gabarit est lieacute agrave lrsquoentiteacute dans laquelle il a eacuteteacute deacutefini et peut ecirctre visible dans les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis pour les entiteacutes ou les profils Pour les profils ne sont associables que desgabarits de lrsquoentiteacute racine visibles de toutes les sous-entiteacutes

Des gabarits par deacutefaut peuvent eacutegalement ecirctre deacutefinis pour chaque cateacutegorie de ticket (un pour chaque type)

A la creacuteation du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est par ordre de prioriteacute 1 Celui deacutefini dans la cateacutegorie deacutefinie pour le type deacutefini2 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour le profil courant de lrsquoutilisateur3 Celui deacutefini par deacutefaut pour lrsquoentiteacute de creacuteation du ticket

Avertissement Dans les 2 derniers cas si le gabarit preacutedeacutefinit un nouveau couple typecateacutegorie le premier casest alors testeacute de nouveau avec ces nouvelles valeurs

Note mdash A la mise agrave jour du ticket le mecircme ordre de prioriteacute est utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer les champs obligatoiresmdash Si un des paramegravetre (entiteacute profil type ou cateacutegorie) est modifieacute lors de la saisie du ticket le gabarit utiliseacute est

alors deacutetermineacute une nouvelle fois en fonction des nouvelles valeursmdash Le gabarit sert agrave la creacuteation de tickets reacutecurrents

Les statuts dans GLPI la vue speacutecifique

Cette information est couramment utiliseacutee pour distinguer le mateacuteriel mis au rebut disponible affecteacute etc Il estdonc possible de creacuteer ses propres statuts en rapport avec le systegraveme drsquoinformation

Crsquoest agrave lrsquoadministrateur de GLPI depuis la configuration des intituleacutes de deacutefinir les statuts qui seront utiliseacutes et pourquels types drsquoeacutelements ils le seront Ces statuts peuvent ecirctre arborescents pour faciliter la gestion

Le statut drsquoun eacuteleacutement est modifiable depuis sa fiche ou depuis le systegraveme drsquoactions massives

Un rapport vous propose une synthegravese des statuts par type de mateacuteriel La recherche globale de lrsquoinventaire vouspermet une recherche par statut sur lrsquoensemble des eacuteleacutements

322 Asset module

The GLPI Asset module is used to manage all the assets that are part of your IT infrastructure

Asset management in GLPI

In order to manage hardwares and softwares of an IT infrastructure GLPI allows natively to list all the assets that areused inside the managed organization

However it is possible to automate information pushing from the assets thanks to third-party tools GLPI supports theuse of two existing plugins

mdash The Fusion Inventory plugin transforms GLPI into an inventory server with the Fusion Inventory agents inter-facing directly with the GLPI server

mdash The ocsinventoryng plugin allow to synchronize the GLPI database with the OCS Inventory NG inventorytool the agents installed on the computers interface directly the the OCS Inventory NG server

32 Modules 25

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Available types

Computers

In a computer form the following information is available mdash Operating system

mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Service packmdash Serial numbermdash Product IDmdash

mdash General characteristics mdash Manufacturermdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Management informations mdash Technical managermdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Users mdash Computer users either known by GLPI or not

Other fields are informative such as Network (connexion type) and Update source (where are computer updatescoming from (Windows update yum apt )

It is possible to use templates with computers

Note mdash when GLPI is used with an inventory tool various informations provided by the tool itself are also availablemdash a computer can be a server a desktop computer or a laptop to differentiate them it is possible to use the type

field

The different tabs

Operating systems

The informations on operating systems for a computer are visible in tabs Operating system for a Computer entry

26 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

An operating system is associated with the following elements mdash Namemdash Versionmdash Architecturemdash Service Packmdash Kernelmdash Editionmdash Product IDmdash Serial number

Note The creation and management of the titles for operating systems is located in the menu Configuration gtDrop-downs gt Operating systems

Note A deletion or addition of an operating system is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the operation system informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 27

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

28 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

32 Modules 29

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Volumes

This tab named Volumes and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the volumes attached to a computer

A volume attached to a computer is characterized by mdash namemdash physical partitionmdash mount pointmdash file systemmdash total sizemdash available sizemdash ciphering algorithm and type

It is possible from a Computer entry to add a volume by clicking on button Add a volume

30 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible from a Computer entry to modify an existing volume by clicking on the link under its name

Note Every deletion or addition of a volume is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the volumes informations can be automatically importedand updated

Softwares

This tab named Softwares and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the softwares installed on a computerThese softwares are sorted by their category and are characterized by name version and version status

To install a software first select its name in the drop-down list then its version

It is possible to associate a license to a software on a computer

To associate a license first select the software in the drop-down list then the wanted license

If the license is associated with a software that is already installed on the computer it will be presented in the list ofsoftwares

32 Modules 31

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Otherwise it will be displayed in a separate table

Note mdash the drop-down list enumerates the softwares that are available in the entitymdash licenses management can be found in Assets gt Softwares See Manage softwares

Note It is possible via mass actions to install on a computer a software selected from its license

Note Every deletion or addition of a software or a license is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the softwares informations can be automatically importedand updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

32 Modules 33

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

34 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

32 Modules 35

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

36 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 37

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

38 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 39

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Virtualization

This tab displays the virtualization systems (virtual machines containers jails ) associated to a host

The available information vary from one system to another for a virtual machine for instance it includes namevirtualization system virtualization model state allocated memory number of logical processors as well as thename of the physical machine (the host)

GLPI establishes the link between a host and a virtual machine based on the unique identifier (UUID) In some caseit is possible that the UUID is different inside the physical machine and the virtual machine it is therefore impossibleto make the link automatically

The only way to link manually a virtual machine to a physical machine is to attribute the same UUID to the virtualmachine declared on the host and to the virtual machine inside GLPI

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the virtualization informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Antivirus

This tab named Antivirus and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the antivirus running on a computer

An antivirus is characterized by mdash namemdash activenon activemdash vendormdash update statusmdash antivirus versionmdash signature database versionmdash expiration date

Note Every deletion or addition of an antivirus is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the antivirus informations can be automatically importedand updated

40 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 41

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

42 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 43

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to computers mdash Install a software with a license on a computer From the tab Softwares add a license by choosing the name

of the software followed by the name of the license From the Mass actions of summary table choose Install

Avertissement A software can only be installed if its license has a version in use or a purchase version

Displays

In a display form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the display

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Display management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Display users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Sizemdash Resolutionmdash Port types (VGA DVI HDMI DisplayPort)

44 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Integrated soundmdash Connectivitymdash

Management type

It is possible to manage displays either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one display per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with displays

The different tabs

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 45

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

46 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 47

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

48 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 49

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

50 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 51

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to displays mdash connect a display to a monitor

Softwares

GLPI allows management of softwares and their versions as well as licenses associated or not to software versions

A software is by default associated with an entity

Financial management is done at the level of licenses the financial management at software level is only a model forthe licenses associated with this software

Softwares can be imported automatically using a third-party inventory tool in this case a dictionary can be usedto filter or clean the import data (see [Configure data dictionaries](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrstlaquo The dictionaries are managed from menu entry Administration gt Dictionaries raquo))

Some fields are specific in the software form mdash Update is an information with no processing associated and which tells whether the software is an update of

another softwaremdash Category allows to group softwares in the list of softwares of an asset

52 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Can be associated with a ticket defines whether the software can be seen in the drop-down list laquo Hardware raquoof a ticket

It is recommended to first create the software without a version number in the name then to create the versions andlast to create the licenses

Note In multi-entity mode the list of software can rapidly become long because of double entries (one softwareper entity) A better approach can consist in grouping identical softwares in the same entity (see tab Grouping below)then to make recursive the elements that can be made recursive

It is possible to use templates with softwares

The different tabs

Versions

A version of a software is the element that can be installed on a asset see also Installations tab

The main view lists the number of installations of the version

Specific fields mdash Name the version numbermdash Status in ITIL recommendations it allows to follow the DSL (library storing authorized versions)mdash Operating system the operating system on which this software version runsmdash Installations the number of installations of the versionmdash Comment some comments

Licenses

Installations

The installation of a software on a computer is visualized through a version and can be consulted on a software form(list of computers having at least one version installed) on a version form (computers having this version installed)and finally on a computer form (list of versions of installed softwares sorted by category)

Note mdash Column license is filled only when the license is affected to the concerned computermdash The initial display of different categories depend upon user preferences (see [manage preferences](01-

premiers-pas03_Utiliser_GLPI04_Geacuterer_ses_preacutefeacuterencesrst raquo)

Two options are available on the list of installations of software on a computer Above the list Install allows toinstall manually a version of a software on the computer by selecting first the software and its version if a license isassociated with this software the use version of the license is automatically selected

To Uninstall a version of a software mass actions must be used first select the versions to be uninstalled then selectSuppress definitively If a license is affected to the computer it remains affected but its use version is erased

Following the list of installed versions the list of affected but non installed licenses is displayed It is possible to adda new license to the computer Mass actions allow via the action Install to install a use version of selected licenses

32 Modules 53

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

54 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

32 Modules 55

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

56 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

32 Modules 57

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

58 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Grouping

This section describes how to group software having same names in sub-entities allowing to group softwares of childentities into mother entity

Note This is only available for multi-entities platforms

How to realize a grouping

1 If the software does not exist in mother entity create in this mother entity a software whose name is strictlyidentical to the name of software in child entities

2 Open the form of the software of the mother entity

3 Activate recursivity (sub-entities to Yes at top right) this will make a new tab Grouping appear after tab History

4 Open this tab a list displays softwares having same names in child entities

5 Select appropriate lines and validate grouping

Avertissement This operation cannot be undone

This grouping have the following effects mdash Licenses are attached to the software in mother entity but stay in origin sub-entitiesmdash Versions are merged no more doubles in mother entitymdash Old softwares are moved to the trash

Note When using a third-party inventory tool some extra steps are mandatory mdash Empty trash after grouping otherwise synchronization will restore the old software in case of new versionmdash Associate the same vendor to the new software as the synchronization checks vendor name a new software

would then be created

32 Modules 59

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to softwares mdash Add a version to a softwaremdash [Manage licenses](03_Module_Parc04_LogicielsOnglet_Licencesrst) From menu Assets gt Softwares

click on license name in tab Licenses

Licenses

A software license is a right to use the software Its specific fields include mdash Name commercial naming of the licensemdash Purchase version the version that was boughtmdash Use version the real installed version of the software

Purchase version and use version can be different however the use version must be compliant with the purchaseversion

Version type describes the specifics of the right to use the software OEM type is the only type that is configured bydefault in GLPI Refer to configure types

60 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Number field displays the number of installations that are allowed with this license It can be a user number (floatinglicense) a number of installations (multiple license) an unlimited number of installation (site license) It is possibleto assign the license to one or several corresponding computers for instance if the license is of type OEM

Expire date is the limit date that allows the use of the license After this date a notification can be triggered for alertsto be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Indication This is configurable at entity level in menu Configuration gt Notifications in order to define usedmodels and recipients and in menu Configuration gt Entity to activate or not this functionality define default valueand anticipation of notification sending if needed

Astuce Expired licenses are not counted in the total of available licenses

It is possible to link contracts with licenses refer to [Manage contracts](05_Module_Gestion05_Contratsrstlaquo Contracts are managed via menu Management gt Contracts raquo))

Astuce When activating the accounting information for a license data are initialized from software accountinginformation which act as a model

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Summary raquo Displays a table containing the number of computers using this license

mdash Tab laquo Computers raquo Displays a table listing the computers using this license including in particular computername serial number inventory number location status group and user Mass actions are available if autho-rized for the computers to delete license use on selected computer or to assign another license of the samesoftware to selected computer (action Move)

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 61

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

62 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 63

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

64 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 65

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

mdash Display software license details From menu Assets gt Software click on license name in tab Licensesmdash Remove use of a license by a computer See tab Computers above See also [tab Softwares of a compu-

ter](modulesassetssoftwaresrst)mdash [Associate a document and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsassocier_un_document_a_un_objetrst)mdash [Associate a contract and a license](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_contrat_agrave_un_objetrst)

Network equipments

Network equipment represent the hardware that manages transmits and route network between several other equip-ments (computers printers )

A network equipment can be a switch an Ethernet hub a router a firewall or a WiFi access point

It is possible to use templates with network equipments

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

66 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

32 Modules 67

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

68 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

32 Modules 69

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

70 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

mdash Tab laquo Network names raquo Summary of IP address and IP networks for each network name

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 71

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

72 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 73

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

74 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 75

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

76 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Network equipments do not have specific actions report to common actions

Peripherals

In a peripheral form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the peripheral

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Peripheral management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Peripheral users mdash Users known to GLPI or not

32 Modules 77

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Groups of usersmdash

Management type

It is possible to manage peripherals either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one peripheral per computer while global management make the peripheral avirtual global element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with peripherals

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

78 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

32 Modules 79

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

80 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

32 Modules 81

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network name

82 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

form

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

32 Modules 83

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

84 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was ordered

32 Modules 85

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

86 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

32 Modules 87

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

88 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 89

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Peripherals do not have specific actions report to common actions

Printers

In a printer form several informations are available mdash General characteristics of the printer

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Printer users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Page countermdash Port typesmdash

Management Type

It is possible to manage printers either unitary or globally

90 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Unitary management corresponds to one printer per computer while global management make the printer a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with printers

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

32 Modules 91

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

92 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Cartridges

This tab displays the cartridges associated with the selected printer model mdash cartridges in use with add date and use datemdash used cartridges with cartridge model add date use date end of life date printing counter and number of

printed pages since last cartridge change

Note For cartridge adding or removing report to cartridges management

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

32 Modules 93

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

94 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and it

32 Modules 95

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

is possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and anetwork plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

96 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 97

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

98 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 99

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

100 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 101

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Onglet laquo Reacuteserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Gestion des reacuteservations pour un objet drsquoinventaire

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

102 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Printers do not have specific actions report to common actions

Cartridges

This functionality of Asset module allows to create cartridges models and corresponding cartridges

In a cartridge form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the cartridge

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Printer management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage sitemdash

The alert threshold is the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

32 Modules 103

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

For a cartridge to be installable on a printer it must be declared as compatible with this printer

Management of shared stock is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

mdash Tab laquo Cartridges raquo This tab allows adding as many cartridges as needed by the model It is also possible toadd several cartridges at once

A first table lists the new or unused cartridges the second table lists used cartridges

mdash Tab laquo Printer models raquo This tab allows to declare the printer models that are compatible with the cartridge

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

104 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 105

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

106 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 107

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

108 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

mdash [Add a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsCreacuteer_un_nouvel_objetrst)mdash [See a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsVisualiser_un_objetrst)mdash [Modify a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsModifier_un_objetrst)mdash [Delete a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsSupprimer_un_objetrst)mdash Add new cartridges to a model See tab Cartridges abovemdash Add a printer model for the cartridge model See tab Printer model abovemdash [Associate a document with a cartridge model](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsLier_un_document_agrave_un_objetrst)mdash [Transfer a cartridge to another entity](Les_diffeacuterentes_actionsTransfeacuterer_un_objetrst)

Consumables

In a consumable form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the consumable

mdash Vendormdash Typemdash Referencemdash

mdash Consumable management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Storage locationmdash

The alert threshold corresponds to the minimal value at which an alert is triggered

Note For alerts to be effective notifications must be activated see notifications configuration

Changing the state of a consumable from new to used requires to set involved user or group

Management of shared stocks is possible by defining the element as recursive on an entity The elements will then beavailable for all sub-entities

The different tabs

Consumables

This tab allows to add as many consumables as needed It is also possible to add several consumable in one shot

A first table lists unused consumables a second table lists used consumables together with the name of the group orthe person to which it has been allocated

The mass actions of this tab allows to allocate consumables (action Give)

32 Modules 109

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

110 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 111

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

112 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 113

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

The different actions

Apart from common actions some actions are specific to consumables mdash Add new consumables to a model mdash List allocated consumables

Right icon allows to have a summary of allocated consumables

Phones

In a phone form the following information is available mdash General characteristics of the phone

mdash Vendormdash Modelmdash Typemdash Serial numbermdash

mdash Phone management mdash Technical person in chargemdash Statusmdash Locationmdash

mdash Phone users mdash Users known to GLPI or notmdash Groups of usersmdash

mdash Specifications mdash Power supplymdash Firmwaremdash

Management type

It is possible to manage phones either unitary or globally

Unitary management corresponds to one phone per computer while global management make the phone a virtualglobal element that will be connected to several computers

Global management allows to limit the number of elements to manage when these elements are not a strategic data inthe assets management

It is possible to use templates with phones

114 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different tabs

Components

This tab named Components and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the hardware components of a com-puter

Note Adding or managing components is located in menu Configuration gt Components

Note If several components of the same type are used they will be grouped in the view

It is possible to add a component by first selecting its family in the drop-down list at the top of the table and then itsname and the number of components to add

Starting from a computer view it is possible to modify a component by clicking on the link under its name

To act on several components (for example modify an element of the component activate accounting informations ormodify them delete a component ) first select the components and then use the Actions button present at the top orthe bottom of the list

32 Modules 115

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If several types of different components not having the same characteristics are selected for modification in theactions it will be asked on which component modification must be applied

Selection button in left column allows to select all the components at once

Selection at right of type column (grayed line) allows to select all components of the same type (processor memorynetwork interface )

Note It is possible to modify the characteristics of a component only for one computer

From tab Elements of the component click on the link Update

116 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Several tabs are then displayed mdash Tab laquo Element - Link name of component raquo list the characteristics of this componentmdash Tab laquo Management raquo manage administrative and accounting informationsmdash Tab laquo Documents raquo attached documentsmdash Tab laquo History raquo history of modificationsmdash Tab laquo Contract raquo contracts managementmdash Tab laquo Debug raquo only if you are connected in Debug modemdash Tab laquo All raquo all the informations are displayed on a single page

Note Every deletion or addition of a component is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the components informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Connections

This tab allows to manage the direct connections between a computer and its connected elements

Direct connections represent the relation between different hardwares linked either physically or virtually

From a computer

The connection can be made toward one or several elements of type display printer peripheral or phone For eachtype of connected object its name serial number and inventory number are displayed

From an element other than a computer

To add a connection select the computer in the drop-down list presented at top of the table

32 Modules 117

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

If this case the connection can only be made to a single computer The table will list the name of this computer aswell as its serial and inventory numbers

Note The deletion of a connection can be made from the entry of each connected hardware (tab Connections) viamass actions

Note Every deletion or addition of a connection is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the connections informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

Network ports

This tab named Network ports and visible in a Computer entry allows to manage the network ports attached to acomputer

A network port represents the output of a network interface on a given hardware A port is characterized by a numberand a name

It is possible on a network port to add one or more VLAN these VLANs being defined by a name an optionalcomment and a VLAN number

118 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

One or more network name can be associated to each network port This can be done in tab Network name

Note When a network port has only one network name this name is displayed in the network port form itself and itis possible to modify the name directly It is also possible to modify the network name via its own form accessible byclicking on the link under the name

When a network port has several network names the only way to modify the network names is via the network nameform

Network ports can be of different types mdash physical port ethernet WiFi mdash virtual network port local loop-back alias aggregates mdash point to point switched network

The Network port tab groups in a table the ports that are available on the equipment The table header contains thetotal number of ports and a link that allows to choose display options This allows to selectively display or maskinformations such as network data (IP ) port characteristics depending on its type MAC address VLANs

Note GLPI allows to present complex network connection with for example WiFi or Ethernet port aliases associatedto VLANs grouped in aggregates

Management of Ethernet network ports

The Ethernet protocol is classically used on internal networks

An Ethernet port is characterized by its type (twisted pair mono-modemulti-mode optical fiber ) a transfer rate((10Mb 100Mb 1Gb 10Gb ) and a MAC address It is possible to associate to the port a network card and a

32 Modules 119

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

network plug

Ethernet connections are realized by linking two Ethernet ports which requires that there is a free port on eachequipment to be connected In general a connection links a port attached to a computer a peripheral or a printer anda port attached to a network equipment (hub switch)

Management of WiFi network ports

The WiFi protocol is widely used on wireless networks

A WiFi port is characterized by the mode of the network card (ad-hoc access point repeater ) the WiFi protocolversion (ab g ) and its MAX address

It is possible to associate a network card to the port similarly to Ethernet ports

A WiFi network can be associated to a given port Apart from its name a WiFi network has an ESSID and is charac-terized by its type

Infrastructure WiFi network with on or several access points and connected clients Ad-hoc WiFi network betweensimilar systems without access points

Management of local loop-back ports

The local loop-back is a virtual port used by most equipments for internal communication It is this port that is usedwhen connecting to localhost or 127001

Local loop-back has no specific attribute

Management of network port aliases

A network port alias is a virtual port that can refine a physical port

On Linux to each VLAN when transmitted laquo tagged raquo is associated a port alias for example eth250 to representVLAN 50 on port eth2

A port alias contains its base port and a MAC address

Note that when the origin port is changed the MAC address of the new port is affected to the port alias

Management of network port aggregates

A network port aggregate is a virtual port that allows to group several physical ports

On Linux aggregates are represented by bridges bridges lthttp wwwlinuxfoundationorgcollaborateworkgroupsnetworkingbridgegtlinking together different ports In the same way an Ethernet firewall uses a bridge that links interfaces to be filtered

A port aggregate contains the origin ports and a MAC address

Note Every deletion or addition of a network port is recorded in the history of the computer

Note If using native inventory or third-party inventory tool the network ports informations can be automaticallyimported and updated

120 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

32 Modules 121

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

122 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 123

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Status

124 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Agrave faire Fix this reference (include or link) [Tab laquo Reserva-tions raquo](Les_diffeacuterents_ongletsOnglet_Reacuteservationsrst) Management of reservations for an inventory object

32 Modules 125

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

126 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The different actions

Phones do not have specific actions report to common actions

Global search

Menu Asset gt Global allows to perform a global search on default view columns for allowed elements This search islimited to following assets

mdash Computermdash Contactmdash Contractmdash Documentmdash Monitormdash NetworkEquipmentmdash Peripheralmdash Phonemdash Printermdash Softwaremdash SoftwareLicensemdash Ticketmdash Problemmdash Changerdquomdash Usermdash Groupmdash Projectmdash Supplierrdquomdash Budgetmdash Certificatemdash Linemdash Datacentermdash DCRoommdash Enclosuremdash PDUmdash Rackmdash Clustermdash Domain

This search allows for instance to perform a query by status IP or MAC address

Agrave faire Referenced in original doc but not present mdash [Gestion du protocole Internet (IP)](glpiinventory_iphtml) Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plu-

sieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

323 Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs

Le module drsquoassistance permet aux utilisateurs de saisir suivre et traiter des tickets Des plannings (utilisateur ougroupe) et des statistiques sont eacutegalement disponibles

Suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil il est eacutegalement possible de saisir suivre et traiter des problegravemes et deschangements et creacuteer des tickets reacutecurrents (fonctionnaliteacutes agrave nrsquoautoriser que pour un utilisateur de type Technicien)

32 Modules 127

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Afin de mettre en route un service drsquoassistance plusieurs eacutetapes sont neacutecessaires Pour commencer analyser les besoinsde base des utilisateurs et reacutepondre au minimum vital

Une fois que les besoins de base sont satisfaits il est possible de deacutefinir les besoins secondaires et se lancer dans laconfiguration avanceacutee

Le module drsquoassistance de GLPI est conforme au guide de bonnes pratiques ITIL et integravegre donc des notions et nor-malisation de champs Bien que lrsquooutil soit conforme ITIL il nrsquoy aucune obligation pour suivre ces bonnes pratiques chacun est libre drsquoimpleacutementer le service drsquoassistance qui correspond le mieux agrave ses besoins

mdash Mise en route du service drsquoassistancemdash Deacutefinir les acteurs et leurs rocirclesmdash Deacutefinir la matrice de calcul de la prioriteacutemdash Configuration avanceacuteemdash Les matrices de cycle de vie

mdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Regravegles de gestionmdash Geacuterer les ticketsmdash Ouvrir un ticketmdash Pour aller plus loin

mdash Creacuteer un ticketmdash Geacuterer les problegravemesmdash Geacuterer les changementsmdash Les planningsmdash Les statistiquesmdash Les tickets reacutecurrents

324 Module Gestion

Le module Gestion permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les eacuteleacutements suivants

Geacuterer les licences

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les licences logiciels

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire des licences en lien avec les logiciels deacutejagrave inventorieacutes dans GLPI mdash un suivi des installations de chaque licence sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les licences dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des licences

Note Une licence ne peut pas exister au sein de GLPI sans un logiciel associeacute agrave sa creacuteation

La gestion de licence reste statique un suivi humain est neacutecessaire afin drsquoassurer lrsquoactualisation des informations

128 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Comme enfant de Permet drsquoindiquer si la licence est deacutependante drsquoune autre mdash Version utiliseacutee Crsquoest la version du logiciel qui sera associeacutee agrave la licence mdash Version drsquoachat La version drsquoachat peut diffeacuterer de la version actuellement utiliseacutee il est possible de lrsquoindi-

quer ici mdash Nombre Ici pourra ecirctre indiqueacute le nombre de lien possibles entre la licence et les mateacuteriels dans GLPI mdash Autoriser la surconsommation (Allow Over-Quota) Permet drsquoautoriser ou non le deacutepassement du nombre

de lien maximum configureacute dans le champ Nombre mdash Expiration La date de fin de validiteacute de la licence Champ utile pour configurer les alertes et anticiper le

renouvellement

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Licences

Cet onglet liste toutes les licences consideacutereacutees comme enfant de la licence actuelle

Note Certaines licences peuvent srsquoobtenir par pack ou par groupe de licence (pour un lieu speacutecifique par exemple)il est donc inteacuteressant de les lier

32 Modules 129

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Reacutesumeacute

Cet onglet liste tous les types et les entiteacutes des eacuteleacutements du parc concerneacutes par cette licence

Note Attention au nombre drsquoinstallationlicence disponible deacutefini dans le champ Nombre de la licence

La creacuteation du lien entre un eacuteleacutement du parc et la licence se fait dans lrsquoonglet Logiciels de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste preacuteciseacutement chaque eacuteleacutement relieacute agrave la licence actuelle

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

130 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

32 Modules 131

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

132 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 133

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

134 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Certificats

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un certificat preacutesent dans GLPI agrave une licence

32 Modules 135

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une licencemdash Visualiser une licencemdash Modifier une licencemdash Supprimer une licencemdash Associer un document agrave une licencemdash Transfeacuterer une licence

Geacuterer les budgets

Un budget dans GLPI crsquoest la deacutefinition drsquoun montant sur une peacuteriode donneacutee Les autre eacuteleacutements de GLPI peuventecirctre attacheacutes agrave un budget et ainsi piocher dans ce dernier en indiquant leur valeur

Mateacuterialiser un budget au sein de GLPI ouvre la fonctionnaliteacute de gestion administrative et financiegravere pour tous lesautres eacuteleacutements preacutesents dans lrsquooutil

Il est possible de suivre lrsquoeacutevolution du budget en traccedilant la valeur de chaque eacuteleacutement rattacheacutes

136 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Lier un eacuteleacutement de GLPI avec un budget se passe dans lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Note Lors de la visualisation drsquoun budget dans une sous-entiteacute le total du budget restant nrsquoest pas accessible

Important Ce total est neacutegatif si le total de la valeur des mateacuteriels est plus eacuteleveacutee que la valeur du budget

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Principal

Cet onglet fournit un tableau reacutecapitulant le montant deacutepenseacute sur le budget par type drsquoeacuteleacutements ainsi que le totalrestant

Eleacutements

Cet onglet permet de visualiser les autres eacuteleacutements de GLPI attacheacutes agrave ce budget ainsi que leur valeur

32 Modules 137

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Le lien entre le budget et un eacuteleacutement se fait depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

138 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un budgetmdash Visualiser un budgetmdash Modifier un budget

32 Modules 139

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Supprimer un budgetmdash Associer un document agrave un budgetmdash Transfeacuterer un budget

Geacuterer les certificats

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de mateacuterialiser les certificats

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash un inventaire de tous les certificats de lrsquoorganisation mdash un suivi des installations de chaque certificat sur les eacuteleacutements du parc mdash inclure les certificats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash anticiper et suivre le renouvellement des certificats

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Fabricant (CA de lrsquoautoriteacute racine) Cette liste deacuteroulante permet de seacutelectionner et ajouter le fabricant ducertificat

mdash Auto-signeacute Permet drsquoindiquer sioui ou non le certificat actuel est auto-signeacute mdash Nom DNS Ici est agrave saisir le preacutefixe du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom -gt

server

140 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Suffixe DNS Ici est agrave saisir le suffixe DNS du nom proteacutegeacute par le certificat Exemple servermycompanycom-gt mycompanycom

mdash Date drsquoexpiration Permet de deacutefinir la fin de validiteacute du certificat Champ utile pour les alertes GLPImdash Commande utiliseacutee Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le certificatmdash Requecircte pour le certificat (CSR) Ici peut ecirctre copier la commande systegraveme (CLI) qui a geacuteneacutereacute le fichier

CSRmdash Certificat Peut ecirctre saisi ici les donneacutees contenues dans le fichier CRT (PEM)

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 141

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

142 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 143

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

144 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

32 Modules 145

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

146 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un certificatmdash Visualiser un certificatmdash Modifier un certificatmdash Supprimer un certificatmdash Associer un document agrave un certificatmdash Transfeacuterer un certificat

Geacuterer les fournisseurs

GLPI integravegre une gestion des fournisseurs celle-ci sert agrave la fois agrave identifier qui a vendu un mateacuteriel (dans la gestion deparc) mais aussi agrave attribuer des tickets agrave cette personne ou socieacuteteacute

Lors de lrsquoachat drsquoun mateacuteriel de marque XX agrave un fournisseur YY il faut traiter deux informations distinctes agrave savoirle fabricant (XX) et le fournisseur (YY)

Un fournisseur se caracteacuterise par un nom un type de tiers (intituleacute) des informations de localisation (adresse codepostal ville pays) et de contact (site web teacuteleacutephone et fax)

Cette gestion agrave pour objectif notamment mdash de reacutefeacuterencer tous les fournisseurs relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation

32 Modules 147

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash drsquooptimiser le contact en cas drsquoincident mdash de permettre drsquoinclure les fournisseurs dans lrsquoAssistance de GLPI

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated Contacts

The Contacts tab is used to show or add linked contacts

Note La distinction est clairement eacutetablie entre le fournisseur qursquoil est possible de lier de maniegravere univoque agrave deseacuteleacutements drsquoinventaire et les contacts qui composent la liste des personnes permettant drsquoentrer en relation avec cefournisseur Pour eacutetablir cette liste il faut donc associer les contacts au fournisseur concerneacute

Exemple

Monsieur Dupont est conseiller de vente dans lrsquoentreprise Acme aupregraves de qui la structure se fournit reacuteguliegraverementCreacuteer un fournisseur nommeacute Acme Creacuteer un contact au nom de Monsieur Dupont Affecter agrave ce contact le typecommercial Puis associer le contact au fournisseur Acme

148 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Associated Contracts

The Contracts tab is used to show or add linked contracts

For each associated contract the name number contract type supplier start date and initial duration of the contractare listed In the last field the end date of the contract is also shown with a red display if the date is earlier than thecurrent date

Refer to contract management for more information

Eleacutements associeacutes

Lrsquoonglet Eleacutements pour lrsquoobjet fournisseur est speacutecifique Il ne permet que la consultation Lier un eacuteleacutement avec unfournissur se fera depuis lrsquoonglet Gestion de lrsquoeacuteleacutement (du Parc) concerneacute

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 149

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problegravemes

Dans cet onglet il sera possible de consulter les Problegravemes associeacutes agrave ce fournisseur Crsquoest agrave dire tous les Problegravemessur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacute agrave

150 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changements

Lrsquoonglet permet la consultation de tous les Changements sur lesquels le fournisseur est affecteacute dans le champ Attribueacuteagrave

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

Knowledge base

The Knowledge base tab is used to show or add linked knowledge base articles

32 Modules 151

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un fournisseurmdash Visualiser un fournisseurmdash Modifier un fournisseurmdash Supprimer un fournisseurmdash Associer un document agrave un fournisseurmdash Transfeacuterer un fournisseur

152 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les contacts

Les utilisateurs au sens de GLPI sont les personnes disposant drsquoun accegraves agrave lrsquoapplication Les personnes exteacuterieuresgeacuteneacuteralement associeacutees agrave des contrats sont stockeacutees sous la forme de contacts

Chaque contact est caracteacuteriseacute par les informations drsquoidentiteacute usuelles ainsi qursquoun titre et des coordonneacutees teacuteleacutepho-niques de messagerie et postales La deacutefinition drsquoune liste de types de contacts permet de classer les contacts selonleur type Lrsquoexportation au format vCard est possible dans la fiche de chaque contact

Note La liste des titres possibles pour un contact est identique agrave celle des utilisateurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Suppliers

The Suppliers tab is used to show or add linked suppliers

32 Modules 153

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

154 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contactmdash Visualiser un contactmdash Modifier un contactmdash Supprimer un contactmdash Associer un document agrave un contactmdash Associer un fournisseur agrave un contactmdash Transfeacuterer un contact

Geacuterer les contrats

Glpi integravegre la gestion des contrats Cette fonctionnaliteacute permet de couvrir tout type de contrat reacutealiseacute tel que les precirctscontrats de maintenance contrat de support etc Cette gestion a pour objectif

mdash de fournir un inventaire de tous les contrats relatifs au parc informatique de lrsquoorganisation mdash drsquointeacutegrer les contrats dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des contrats

32 Modules 155

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to use templates to generate this object

Note Il est possible de recevoir des notifications pour preacutevenir drsquoeacuteveacutenements tels que la fin du contrat Dans lecas ou la reconduction du contrat serait expresse il peut ecirctre inteacuteressant drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la date du preacuteavis Pour lescontrats peacuteriodiques il est eacutegalement possible drsquoecirctre alerteacute agrave la fin de chaque peacuteriode ou preacuteavis de peacuteriode Ceci estconfigurable par entiteacute dans le menu Configuration gt Notifications pour deacutefinir les modegraveles et destinataires utiliseacuteset dans le menu Configuration gt Entiteacute pour activer ou non cette fonctionnaliteacute deacutefinir les valeurs par deacutefaut et uneanticipation de lrsquoenvoi de la notification si besoin

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash Type de contrat par deacutefaut aucun type de contrat nrsquoest renseigneacute Il faut au preacutealable les renseigner dans laconfiguration des intituleacutes

mdash Numeacutero cette information nrsquoest pertinente que si le numeacutero de contrat est identique agrave celui utiliseacute au sein desautres services de la socieacuteteacute

mdash Date de deacutebut agrave ne pas confondre avec la date drsquoenregistrement du contrat dans GLPI Tous les calculs depeacuteriodiciteacute sur le contrat sont donc fonction de cette date

mdash Dureacutee initiale du contrat si ce champ et la date de deacutebut sont renseigneacutes la date de fin de contrat apparaitra(en rouge si la date a expireacutee)

mdash Preacuteavis ce champ peut servir au deacuteclenchement des notifications drsquoalerte mdash Numeacutero comptable pour permettre un rapprochement avec le logiciel comptable de la socieacuteteacute mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute du contrat crsquoest la dureacutee agrave laquelle la reconduction du contrat est possible (Exemple Un contrat

drsquoabonnement teacuteleacutephonique drsquoune dureacutee de 24 mois renouvelable au bout de 12 mois) mdash Peacuteriodiciteacute de facturation Crsquoest la dureacutee entre chaque facturemdash Type de reconduction Tacite (le contrat est reconductible automatiquement drsquoune peacuteriode agrave une autre si

aucune des parties ne manifeste sa volonteacute de le rompre) ou Expresse (neacutecessite lrsquoaccord des deux parties pour

156 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

la reconduction du contrat) mdash Nombre max drsquoeacuteleacutements la valeur choisie dans ce champ bloquera ou non lrsquoajout de nouvel eacuteleacutements attacheacutes

agrave ce contrat mdash Heures drsquointervention Les plages horaires drsquointervention correspondent aux horaires drsquointervention couvert

par le contrat Il est possible drsquoy distinguer les samedis et les jours chocircmeacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Coucircts

Cet onglet permet de deacutefinir un coucirct relatif au contrat sur un budget preacutesent dans GLPI- crsquoest-agrave-dire imputer une valeursur le montant total du budget seacutelectionneacute qui sera attribueacute au type drsquoobjet Contrat

Fournisseurs

Dans cet onglet il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs fournisseurs au contrat actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

32 Modules 157

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

158 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

32 Modules 159

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un contratmdash Visualiser un contratmdash Modifier un contratmdash Supprimer un contratmdash Associer un document agrave un contratmdash Transfeacuterer un contrat

Geacuterer les documents

Cette section permet drsquoenregistrer des documents eacutelectroniques ou liens web classables selon diverses rubriques

Un document possegravede un nom ainsi qursquoun commentaire et peut ecirctre associeacute agrave une rubrique

Le fichier physique correspondant au document peut ecirctre ajouteacute dans GLPI de plusieurs maniegraveres mdash En parcourant le disque dur local mdash En renseignant un lien web pointant vers un document (une image une page web un PDF ) mdash En preacutecisant un fichier preacutealablement chargeacute par FTP (dans le dossier mon_glpifiles_uploads )mdash Enfin un type MIME peut aussi ecirctre indiqueacute

Note mdash Les types de documents autoriseacutes dans GLPI (selon leur extension) sont deacutefinis dans Configuration gt Intituleacutes

gt Gestion gt Type de documentmdash Les rubriques de documents peuvent ecirctre hieacuterarchiquesmdash Lrsquooption Interdire agrave lrsquoimportation permet drsquoexclure ce document agrave lrsquoimportation via les collecteurs (images

de signatures logos )

160 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Il est possible drsquoassocier drsquoautres documents agrave un document de GLPI crsquoest pourquoi cet objet beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun ongletdu mecircme type

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

32 Modules 161

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un documentmdash Visualiser un documentmdash Modifier un documentmdash Supprimer un documentmdash Associer un document agrave un documentmdash Transfeacuterer un document

Geacuterer les lignes

Au sein de GLPI il est possible de renseigner les lignes teacuteleacutephoniques

Cette gestion a pour objectif mdash drsquoinventorier toutes les lignes de lrsquoorganisation mdash de permettre le suivi drsquoaffectation de chaque ligne mdash permettre la gestion financiegravere des lignes dans GLPI

162 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

32 Modules 163

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

164 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 165

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une lignemdash Visualiser une lignemdash Modifier une lignemdash Supprimer une lignemdash Associer un document agrave une lignemdash Transfeacuterer une ligne

166 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuterer les centres de donneacutees

GLPI permet la gestion des centres de donneacutees et plus preacuteciseacutement la gestion des salles serveurs et des baies informa-tiques qui les composent

Cette gestion a pour objectif de fournir mdash Un inventaire des centres salles et baies informatiques de lrsquoorganisation mdash tous les autres modules au service des centres salles et baies (notamment le module Parc qui permet une

reacutepreacutesentation graphique deacutetailleacutees des baies) mdash la possibiliteacute drsquoinclure ces objets dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI

Centre de donneacutees

Le centre de donneacutees en lui mecircme est un objet tregraves simpliste dans GLPI Il se mateacuterialise sous la forme drsquoun nom etdrsquoun lieu et permet uniquement de regrouper des salles serveurs

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Salles serveurs

Cet onglet liste les salles serveurs attacheacutees au centre de donneacutees actuel et permet eacutegalement drsquoen ajouter

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 167

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Salle Serveur

Une salle serveur dans GLPI se mateacuterialise sour forme drsquoun plan scheacutematique Ce plan reacutepreacutesentera lrsquoespace disponibledans la salle de la serveur Cet espace sera utiliseacute pour y deacutefinir et placer les objets Baies de GLPI

La salle serveur est associable agrave un centre de donneacutees et un lieu

Note Le plan sera une grille deacutefinie par un nombre de colonnes et de lignes 1 Baie consomme 1 case

Lrsquoarriegravere plan peut grandement aider agrave la visualisation de la salle notamment si celui ci a eacuteteacute geacuteneacutereacute avec un outiladapteacute agrave la repreacutesentation drsquoespace

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Baies

Cet onglet permet de consulter et drsquoagir sur le plan de la salle serveur Pourront ecirctre ajouteacutees directement sur le planles diffeacuterentes baies informatiques qui composent la salle

Si beaucoup drsquoeacuteleacutements sont preacutesents il est possible de passer sur une vue en mode liste

168 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Analyse drsquoimpact

Cet onglet permet de consulter et de construire le scheacutema drsquoimpact du point de vue de lrsquoobjet

32 Modules 169

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

170 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery datemdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into service

32 Modules 171

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

172 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elements

32 Modules 173

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

174 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualiser un centre de donneacuteesmdash Modifier un centre de donneacuteesmdash Supprimer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Associer un document agrave un centre de donneacuteesmdash Transfeacuterer un centre de donneacuteesmdash Visualier la liste des salles serveurs

Geacuterer les clusters

Un Cluster GLPI est un regroupement de plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc Peut rejoindre un cluster les ordinateurs et lesmateacuteriels reacuteseau

Note Les clusters renseigneacutes dans GLPI sont pris en compte dans lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact TODO link vers la preacutesen-tation de lrsquoanalyse drsquoimpact

32 Modules 175

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Description des champs speacutecifiques

mdash UUID Identifiant unique du clustermdash Version Dans le cas drsquoun cluster logiciel ou autre la version peut ecirctre indiqueacuteemdash Source de mise agrave jour Ce champ repreacutesente la maniegravere dont la fiche de lrsquoobjet dans GLPI a eacuteteacute mise agrave jour

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Eleacutements

Cet onglet liste et pemret lrsquoajout drsquoun ou plusieurs eacuteleacutements du parc au sein du cluster

Ports reacuteseau

Cet onglet permet de creacuteer et de lister des interfaces reacuteseau propres au cluster

Les interfaces possibles mdash Port Ethernetmdash Ports Wifimdash Agreacutegation de portmdash Alias de portmdash Connexion par ligne commuteacutee - Dialupmdash Boucle locale

176 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Port Fibre Channel

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 177

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

178 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 179

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un clustermdash Visualiser un clustermdash Modifier un clustermdash Supprimer un clustermdash Associer un document agrave un clustermdash Transfeacuterer un cluster

Geacuterer les domaines

Deux nouveaux objets de GLPI sont rassembleacutes dans cette fonctionnaliteacute les domaines et les enregistrements dedomaines

Geacuterer les domaines et les enregistrements au sein de GLPI permet notamment mdash de construire un inventaire des noms de domaines mdash drsquoinventorier les enregistrements (records) de chaque domaine mdash drsquoanticiper et suivre le renouvellement des noms de domaines mdash drsquointeacutegrer les domaines dans la gestion financiegravere de GLPI mdash de lier les eacuteleacutements du parc au domaine

Modifieacute dans la version 950mdash inclure les domaines et les enregitrements dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI

Note Lrsquoaccegraves agrave la liste des objets Enregistrements de domaines est accessible depuis la liste des objets Domaines

Objet Domaine

Lrsquoobjet domaine permet de mateacuterialiser un domaine informatique dans son ensemble (son nom sa date drsquoexpirationetc) Lrsquoobjet est associable dans lrsquoassistance de GLPI (tickets problegravemes changements)

180 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Records

Dans cet onglet il est possible de seacutelectionner ou de creacuteer un enregistrement de domaine agrave associer au domaine actuel

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Management

Management of financial and administrative information this information is visible in the ldquoManagementrdquo tab on thecomputerrsquos form

32 Modules 181

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

By default this management is disabled It is possible to activate the financial information on any type of object in theinventory by using the link in the Management tab of the material detail

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information from the massive actions on a set ofelements (computer monitor )

Note It is possible to activate the administrative and financial information as soon as an element is created Seelaquo Enable default administrative and financial information raquo option in Setup gt General gt Asset tab

Financial information consists of the following items

Lifecycle

mdash Order datemdash Date of purchasemdash Delivery date

182 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Date of implementationmdash Date of last physical inventorymdash Date of reform

Financial and administrative information

mdash Supplier Third party who sold the equipment See Managing suppliers Suppliers are managed from the menuManagement gt Suppliers

mdash Order number number of the order of the equipmentmdash Asset numbermdash Invoice number equipment invoice numbermdash Delivery note delivery note for the equipmentmdash Value cost of the equipmentmdash Warranty extension value cost of the warranty extension but preferably use contractsmdash Account net value this is the automatic calculation of the gross value of a piece of equipment minus the

amount of depreciationmdash Type of depreciation choice of the type of depreciation between linear and declining balancemdash Depreciation period depreciation period expressed in yearsmdash Depreciation coefficient coefficient applied to a straight-line depreciation type in order to obtain the values of

the declining balance type It is therefore only used if the type of depreciation is declining balancemdash TCO (value+amount of interventions) the total cost of ownership which includes all the constituent elements

of an invoiced productmdash Budget the budget on which this equipment was purchased See Managing the budgetmdash Order date date on which the material was orderedmdash Purchase date date on which the equipment was purchasedmdash Delivery date date on which the equipment was deliveredmdash Startup date date on which the equipment was put into servicemdash Date of last physical inventory date of the last physical inventory of the equipmentmdash Commentsmdash Monthly TCO TCO divided by the number of months between todayrsquos date and the date of purchase of the

equipment

Warranty information

mdash Warranty start date date on which the warranty of the equipment startsmdash Warranty information text qualifying the warrantymdash Warranty period duration of the warranty expressed in months If a warranty start date and a warranty

period are set the information laquo Expires on raquo will appear with a date in red if it is earlier than the currentdate

All the dates defined can be managed automatically according to changes in the status of the equipment Some datescan also be copied from another date All this configuration is done by [entity](administration_entity_delegationdita)

Tips

GLPI allows you to configure a notification on the expiry of the hardware warranty This is configurable by entity innotification management to define the models and recipients used and in the administration of entities to enable ordisable this feature define the default values and anticipate the sending of the notification if necessary

GLPI can perform a simple net book value calculation based on straight-line or declining balance depreciation To doso a certain amount of information (value date etc) must be entered The user must also enter the date of the financialyear the general configuration

32 Modules 183

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

The display of financial information for each type of equipment depends on the profile of the user logged in

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

184 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Changes

The Changes tab is used to create a change associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes the following fields for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the change)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the changes attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a change is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

32 Modules 185

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

186 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Objet Enregistrement de domaine (Record)

Lrsquoobjet Enregistrement de domaine permet de mateacuterialiser tous les types drsquoenregistrements que lrsquoon peut trouver dansune zone ou un fichier de configuration DNS ( TXT A PTR SOA CNAME etc )

Cet objet doit ecirctre associeacute agrave un objet Domaine vu preacutecedemment

Note Les types drsquoenregistrements ne sont pas limiteacutes agrave ceux creacuteeacutes par deacutefaut ils sont personnalisables depuis lagestion des intituleacutes

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

32 Modules 187

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

Problems

The Problems tab is used to create a problem associated with the current object It also lists the changes already linkedto the object

This summary table includes for each object mdash Statusmdash Date (opening or expiry date resolution or closing date depending on the status of the problem)mdash Prioritymdash Requestor(s) and assigned technician(s)mdash Associated elementsmdash Categorymdash Namemdash Column indicating the number of scheduled tasks

Note A second table lists the problems attached to the related elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a problem is recorded in the history

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

188 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Associated External Links

The External links tab is used to show associated external links

For some items external links are managed from the menu Setup gt External links

These links can use object fields such as IP name etc See Configure protocol external links

Examples mdash A web link http19216801 (IP retrieved from the network port of the hardware) mdash A RDP link for remote access glpi MSTSCEXEpc001 (name laquo pc001 raquo retrieved from the hardware)

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changed

32 Modules 189

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Description of the change that was madeThe description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Visualiser un domainemdash Ajouter un domaineun enregistrementmdash Modifier un domaineun enregistrementmdash Supprimer un domaineun enregistrementmdash Associer un document agrave un domaineun enregistrementmdash Transfeacuterer un domainemdash Visualiser les enregistrements de domaines

325 Module Outils

Le module Outils permet aux utilisateurs de geacuterer les projets les notes les flux RSS la base de connaissance lesreacuteservations ainsi que de geacuteneacuterer des rapports

Geacuterer les projets

La gestion de projets permet de suivre complegravetement lrsquoavancement drsquoun projet au sein de GLPI via la creacuteation detacircche la constitution drsquoune eacutequipe que celui-ci soit lieacute agrave un changement ou non

Un projet dans GLPI crsquoest la possibiliteacute mdash drsquoassocier des tacircches de projet et geacuterer leur avancement mdash drsquoeacutetablir une eacutequipe projet et des eacutequipes de tacircche mdash la possibiliteacute de deacuteclencher des sous projets au sein drsquoun mecircme projet mdash de construire un diagramme de GANTTmdash la possibiliteacute drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban mdash drsquoassocier des coucircts mdash de relier les objets ITIL de GLPI

Le projets peut ecirctre hieacuterarchiseacute un projet peut donc avoir des sous-projets

Les projets disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom codeeacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquounpourcentage drsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

Plusieurs diagrammes de GANTT sont proposeacutes pour chaque projet (voir onglet GANTT)

Dans cette gestion de projet il y a deux objets principaux le projet et la tacircche de projet

190 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Projet

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter une nouvelle tacircche au projet Il liste eacutegalement les tacircches deacutejagrave deacutefinies pour ce projeten indiquant pour chaque tacircche son nom son type son statut le pourcentage effectueacutee les dates de deacutebut et de finplanifieacutees les dureacutees planifieacutee et effective ainsi que le nom de la tacircche parent

Equipe Projet

Cet onglet permet drsquoajouter un membre agrave lrsquoeacutequipe que ce soit un contact un fournisseur un utilisateur ou un groupeIl liste eacutegalement chaque membre de lrsquoeacutequipe projet ainsi que son type respectif

Projet

Cet onglet liste les sous-projets du projet Pour deacutefinir un sous-projet il suffit de remplir le champ laquo comme enfantde raquo drsquoun projet

32 Modules 191

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

GANTT

Un diagramme de GANTT est proposeacute pour chaque projet Un diagramme de GANTT global est eacutegalement proposeacuteincluant les projets deacutefinis comme visible dans ce diagramme

Kanban

Cet onglet met agrave disposition une interface afin drsquoutiliser la meacutethode Kanban dans GLPI

192 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Coucircts

Des coucircts sont associables aux projets auxquels peuvent ecirctre ajouteacute les coucircts des tickets lieacutees aux tacircches du projet

Objets Itil

Crsquoest dans cet onglet qursquoil est possible drsquoassocier au projet actuel les objets itil de GLPI tickets problegravemes etchangements Il est possible de creacuteer ces objets depuis cet onglet eacutegalement

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object and

32 Modules 193

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

the document the document itself is still present

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Debugging information

If you have Debug mode enabled in your preferences a Debug tab will appear before the All tab This tab offersinformation to help you resolve an issue

For example for a computer you have one or more tables depending on the affected object (financial informationreservations ) listing the notifications that will be triggered on this computer with

mdash Triggering eventmdash Recipient(s)mdash Notification model usedmdash Recipient(s) email address

194 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Tacircche de projet

lrsquoobjet tacircche de projet est assez similaire au projet

une tacircche de projet peut ecirctre eacutegalement une sous tacircche de projet

Les tacircches disposent de caracteacuteristiques (nom eacutetat type ) de dates preacutevisionnelles et reacuteelles ainsi qursquoun pourcentagedrsquoavancement

Des eacutequipes de gestion distinctes peuvent ecirctre composeacutees drsquoutilisateurs de groupes de fournisseurs et de contacts

32 Modules 195

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note La tacircche de projet nrsquoest pas un objet indeacutependant de GLPI Lrsquoaccegraves agrave une tache de projet se fait dans lrsquoongletTacircches de projet du projet concerneacute

Les tacircches peuvent ecirctre lieacutees agrave des tickets permettant de planifier des interventions permettant de mettre en place leprojet Des dureacutees preacutevisionnelles et effectives sont eacutegalement deacutefinies au niveau des tacircches Ces dureacutees ainsi quecelles des tickets sont alors consolideacutees au niveau du projet lui mecircme

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Tacircches de projet

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et drsquoajouter les sous-tacircches

Equipe de tacircche

Ici est deacutefinie lrsquoeacutequipe en charge de la tacircche

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

196 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Tickets

The Tickets tab is used to create a ticket associated with the current object It also lists the tickets already linked to theobject

Note A second table lists the tickets attached to the linked elements

Note Any deletion or addition of a ticket is recorded in the history

32 Modules 197

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Notes

The Notes tab provides a free text field for storing additional information Notes are displayed in the order of theircreation

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un projetmdash Visualiser un projetmdash Modifier un projetmdash Supprimer un projetmdash Associer un document agrave un projetmdash Transfeacuterer un projet

Geacuterer les notes personnelles ou publiques

Une note dans GLPI est un simple champ texte et piegravece jointe permettant de transmettre des informations aux utilisa-teurs de la plateforme

Une note est caracteacuteriseacutee par mdash une dureacutee de vie

198 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash un statut mdash la possibiliteacute de la faire apparaicirctre dans le planning mdash les cibles de la note

Les notes saisies apparaissent ensuite sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI ou dans le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes

32 Modules 199

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il est possible de deacuteterminer une date de deacutebut et de fin de publication pour chaque note Si la date de deacutebutnrsquoest pas mentionneacutee la note sera visible immeacutediatement jusqursquoagrave la date de fin Si la date de fin nrsquoest pas mentionneacuteela note sera visible de faccedilon permanente agrave partir de la date de deacutebut

Lrsquoajout drsquoune note au calendrier permet de la faire apparaicirctre sur le planning des utilisateurs concerneacutes par la note celui de lrsquoutilisateur pour une note personnelle les plannings de tous les utilisateurs dans le cas drsquoune note publiqueUne note planifieacutee nrsquoest pas supprimeacutee une fois la date expireacutee

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

200 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

Cible

Une note est consideacutereacutee comme personnelle par deacutefaut Elle est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoune note devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (note publique) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ouplusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lanote

Une note publique est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les notes publiques

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une notemdash Visualiser une note

32 Modules 201

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Modifier une notemdash Supprimer une notemdash Associer un document agrave une notemdash Rendre une note publique Ajouter une cible agrave la notemdash Publier une note pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee Ajouter une date de deacutebut et une date de fin au niveau de la

visibiliteacute

Geacuterer les rapports

GLPI permet la geacuteneacuteration drsquoun certain nombre de rapports en lien avec les objets preacutesents sur la plateforme mdash Rapport par deacutefaut Ce rapport comptabilise les mateacuteriels preacutesents dans le parc trieacutes par type Pour les ordi-

nateurs un tri est eacutegalement effectueacute par systegraveme drsquoexploitationmdash Par contrat Mateacuteriel sous contrat de maintenance aupregraves drsquoun tiers Il est possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat deacutetailleacute

par type de mateacuteriel et par date drsquoachat La seacutelection multiple est autoriseacutee Pour ajouter un type il suffitde cliquer dans la zone blanche et de choisir le nouveau type Le principe est le mecircme pour ajouter unedate Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet le nom srsquoil est dans la corbeille ou non son entiteacute son lieu les datedrsquoachat et drsquoexpiration de garantie le type de contrat ainsi que les dates de deacutebut et de fin de contrat

mdash Par anneacutee Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacutedent mais listant eacutegalement les mateacuteriel sanscontrat

mdash Informations financiegraveres et administratives du mateacuteriel Reacutecapitulatif des informations financiegraveres pour lesordinateurs les imprimantes les mateacuteriels reacuteseaux les moniteurs les peacuteripheacuteriques et les teacuteleacutephones Ilest possible drsquoobtenir un eacutetat pour une peacuteriode donneacutee Le tableau liste par type drsquoobjet son nom sonentiteacute sa valeur sa valeur nette comptable son TCO ses dates drsquoachat de mise en service et drsquoexpirationde garantie Un reacutecapitulatif comprenant le total de la valeur et de la valeur nette comptable est poposeacute partype drsquoobjet et pour la totaliteacute des objets

mdash Autres Informations Financiegraveres et administratives Rapport sous le mecircme principe que le rapport preacuteceacute-dent mais mais pour les cartouches les licences et les consommables

mdash Rapport reacuteseau 3 rapports peuvent ecirctre reacutealiseacutes selon le lieu selon le type de mateacuteriel reacuteseau ou selon laprise reacuteseau

mdash Precirct Reacutecapitulatif des reacuteservations en cours agrave venir ou passeacutees pour un utilisateur donneacutemdash Rapport sur les statuts Synthegravese par type de mateacuteriel des diffeacuterents statuts

Note Le nombre de rapport peut ecirctre eacutetoffer en ajoutant un plugin disponible ici httpspluginsglpi-projectorgpluginreports

Geacuterer les reacuteservations

GLPI met agrave disposition un outils de reacuteservation de mateacuteriel outil qui permet de seacutelectionner un ou plusieurs eacuteleacutementsdu parc afin de les reacuteserver sur une plage horaire Pour des reacuteservations reacutepeacutetitives il est possible de mettre en placede la reacutecurrence sur la reacuteservation

202 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Un mateacuteriel nrsquoest pas reacuteservable par deacutefaut Pour rendre un mateacuteriel reacuteservable il faut se rendre dans lrsquoongletReacuteservation de la fiche du mateacuteriel

Un mateacuteriel reacuteserveacute apparaicirctra dans un planning global des reacuteservations

Il est eacutegalement possible de consulter le planning speacutecifique drsquoun mateacuteriel reacuteservable La reacuteservation peut ecirctre creacuteeacuteedepuis ce planning eacutegalement

32 Modules 203

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Reacuteservations

Onglet principal de lrsquooutil Il permet de consulter et de seacutelectionner les mateacuteriels reacuteservables disponibles

Administration

Cet onglet liste tous les objets reacuteservables et non plus ceux disponibles Comme pour les principaux objet de GLPI ilpropose un moteur de recherche avec la possibiliteacute drsquoeffectuer des actions de masse

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter une reacuteservationmdash VisualiserModifier les reacuteservationsmdash Supprimer une reacuteservationmdash Rendre un mateacuteriel indisponible

Geacuterer les flux RSS

GLPI permet drsquoinclure des flux RSS dans la page drsquoaccueil de lrsquooutil

Un flux RSS est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun flux RSS devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs (flux RSS public) il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner uneou plusieurs cibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes aux profils groupes ou utilisateurs de la plateforme

Note Un flux RSS public est visible pour les utilisateurs associeacutes agrave un profil ayant le droit de lire les flux RSSpublics

204 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Contenu

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter le nombre drsquoeacuteleacutements afficheacutes Crsquoest ce contenu qui est reporteacute en pagedrsquoaccueil

Cibles

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter et modifier la liste des cibles pour le flux RSS concerneacute

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 205

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un flux RSSmdash VisualiserModifier un flux RSSmdash Supprimer un flux RSS

Geacuterer la base de connaissances

La base de connaissances de GLPI reacutepond agrave deux objectifs principaux mdash Centraliser des connaissances internes pour les diffeacuterents techniciens mdash Mettre agrave la disposition des utilisateurs des informations leur permettant de reacutesoudre seuls des problegravemes

simples sous forme de FAQ publique

Note Seuls les eacuteleacutements de la FAQ publique sont visibles par les utilisateurs de lrsquointerface simplifieacutee Les eacuteleacutementsqui ne sont pas deacutefinis comme faisant partie de la FAQ publique sont visibles uniquement au sein de la console centralepar des techniciens par exemple

Il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner pour chaque article de la base de connaissances ou de la FAQ une ou plusieurscibles La ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Tantqursquoaucune cible nrsquoa eacuteteacute seacutelectionneacutee pour un article ce dernier est visible uniquement par son reacutedacteur Lrsquoarticle estconsideacutereacute comme laquo non publieacute raquo et apparaicirct dans le tableau laquo Articles non publieacutes raquo de la page drsquoaccueil de la base deconnaissances

Par deacutefaut les articles ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute est activable (voir laconfiguration geacuteneacuterale)

Il est possible drsquoassocier un ou plusieurs documents aux articles de la base de connaissances

Note Un article peut ecirctre rendu visible pendant une peacuteriode donneacutee via la deacutefinition de la date de deacutebut et la date defin de visibiliteacute

Avertissement Les eacuteleacutements qui ne doivent pas ecirctre interpreacuteteacutes agrave lrsquoaffichage peuvent ecirctre deacutefinis avec le style Preacute-formateacute (ltpregt en HTML) Des balises comme ltVirtualHostgt sont donc inseacuterable et affichable Par contredes balises au format HTML (ltBALISEgt) peuvent disparaicirctre au moment de lrsquoeacutedition pour avoir une visibiliteacutecomplegravete du texte vous pouvez passer en mode HTML ougrave tous les eacuteleacutements seront visibles Votre navigateur peuteacutegalement modifier dynamiquement le contenu (changement de casse ajout de balises) lors drsquoune eacutedition

Il est possible de creacuteer des cateacutegories et sous-cateacutegories afin drsquoorganiser la navigation (voir Configurer les intituleacutes)

Lrsquoutilisateur peut alors utiliser plusieurs onglets pour recherche et naviguer au sein de la base de connaissances mdash Rechercher Crsquoest lrsquoonglet par deacutefaut Il preacutesente les articles les plus reacutecents les plus populaires et les derniegraveres

modifications Il permet eacutegalement de rechercher au sein de la base de connaissances

206 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash Parcourir Cet onglet permet de naviguer au sein de lrsquoarborescence des cateacutegories

mdash Geacuterer Cet onglet nrsquoest accessible qursquoaux administrateurs de la base de connaissances Suivant les droits delrsquoutilisateur il est possible drsquoacceacuteder rapidement agrave ses ou agrave tous les articles non publieacutes (sans cible deacutefinies)ainsi qursquoagrave tous ses articles

Note Le moteur de recherche de la base de connaissances permet drsquoutiliser un certain nombre drsquoopeacuterateurs poureffectuer des recherches complexes + - ~ lt gt rdquo rdquo ()

mdash + Le mot doit ecirctre preacutesent

32 Modules 207

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash - Le mot ne doit pas ecirctre preacutesent mdash Opeacuterateur de troncature agrave positionner en suffixe mdash Une phrase entre guillemets double (laquo ) est rechercheacutee litteacuteralement telle qursquoelle a eacuteteacute saisie mdash lt gt permet de deacutefinir une preacutefeacuterence sur lrsquoordre des eacuteleacutements rechercheacutes mdash () agreacutegateur utile pour lrsquoutilisation de lt et gt

Exemples

- panne imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent au moins un de ces mots

- +panne +imprimante-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent ces deux mots

- +courriel thunderbird-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent le mot courriel

mais classe plus haut les lignes qui contiennent aussi thunderbird

- +courriel -outlook-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent courriel mais pas outlook

- +courriel +(gtthunderbird ltoutlook)-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent les mots courriel et thunderbird

ou courriel et outlook (dans nimporte quel ordre)mais classe courriel thunderbird plus haut que courriel outlook

- open-gt Trouve les lignes qui contiennent des mots tels que openoffice openwriter

openbar ou openphp

- suite openoffice-gt Recherche les lignes qui contiennent exactement la phrase suite openoffice

Les diffeacuterents onglets drsquoun article

Base de connaissances

Cet onglet affiche un tableau concernant lrsquoarticle avec en titre sa cateacutegorie Son ensuite listeacutes son sujet et son contenuainsi que le nom du reacutedacteur des dates de creacuteation et de derniegravere modification le nombre de fois ougrave lrsquoarticle a eacuteteacute luainsi que srsquoil fait partie ou non de la FAQ Si un article nrsquoest pas publieacute (cible non deacutefinie) cette information apparaicircten rouge au-dessus du nombre de vues

Cible

Un article est consideacutereacute comme personnel par deacutefaut Il est par conseacutequent uniquement visible par son reacutedacteur

Pour qursquoun article devienne visible par drsquoautres utilisateurs il est neacutecessaire de seacutelectionner une ou plusieurs ciblesLa ou les cibles correspondent aux entiteacutes profils groupes ou utilisateurs qui pourront consulter lrsquoarticle Cet ongletpermet donc drsquoajouter une nouvelle cible tout en listant les cibles deacutejagrave deacutefinies

208 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Editer

Cet onglet permet suivant vos droits de modifier ou supprimer un article

Associated elements

The Items tab is used to show or add linked assets

Documents

Additional information is stored in the form of external documents which are files uploaded into GLPI In the Do-cuments tab documents can be associated and unlinked with the selected item The management of the documentsthemselves is dealt with in another chapter

It is also possible to quickly create a document via this tab by specifying the desired file and optionally the field inwhich the new document is to be placed The name of the created document will be based on the name of the addedfile

Note When you delete a document from this tab via mass actions you only remove the link between the object andthe document the document itself is still present

32 Modules 209

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Reacutevisions

Dans cet onglet il est possible de consulter toutes les reacutevisions de chaque article Crsquoest agrave dire que chaque modificationde lrsquoarticle donnera naissance agrave une reacutevision une version anteacuterieure de lrsquoarticle

les reacutevisions sont affichables et peuvent ecirctre restaureacutees

Commentaires

Un article beacuteneacuteficie drsquoun espace commentaires permettant aux utilisateurs de la plateforme drsquoeacutechanger agrave son sujet

210 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

mdash Ajouter un articlemdash Modifier un articlemdash Supprimer un articlemdash Associer un document agrave un articlemdash Modifier la visibiliteacute drsquoun article

326 Module Administration

Le module Administration permet drsquoadministrer les utilisateurs groupes entiteacutes profils regravegles et dictionnaires etoffre des outils de maintenance de lrsquoapplication (sauvegarde et restauration de base veacuterification de nouvelle versiondisponible)

mdash [Geacuterer les utilisateurs](07_Module_Administration02_Utilisateurs01_Utilisateursrst)mdash [Geacuterer les groupes](07_Module_Administration03_Groupesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les entiteacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les regravegles](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles01_Geacuterer_les_regraveglesrst)mdash [Configurer les dictionnaires de donneacutees](07_Module_Administration06_Dictionnairesrst)mdash [Geacuterer les profils](07_Module_Administration07_Profils01_Profilsrst)mdash [Geacuterer la file drsquoattente drsquoenvoi des courriels](07_Module_Administration08_File_drsquoattente_des_courrielsrst)mdash [Maintenance](07_Module_Administration09_Maintenancerst)mdash [Visualiser les journaux drsquoactiviteacute](07_Module_Administration10_Journauxrst)

327 Module Configuration

Le module Configuration permet drsquoacceacuteder aux options de configuration geacuteneacuterale de GLPI la configuration globalede GLPI les notifications les collecteurs les tacircches automatiques lrsquoauthentification les plugins les critegraveres drsquouniciteacuteet les liens externes protocoleacutes

Les intituleacutes ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

32 Modules 211

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Si des eacuteleacutements que vous voulez supprimer sont utiliseacutes GLPI proposera automatiquement de transfeacuterer lesentreacutees existantes vers un autre eacuteleacutement de la liste ou bien de les remettre agrave zeacutero

mdash [Configurer les composants](08_Module_Configuration03_Composantsrst)mdash [Configurer les notifications](08_Module_Configuration04_Notifications01_Configurer_les_notificationsrst)

Configurer les suivis par courriels creacuteer des modegraveles de notifications deacutefinir lrsquoenvoi de notificationmdash [Configurer les SLAs](08_Module_Configuration05_Sla01_Slarst) Deacutefinir les SLA ainsi que les diffeacute-

rents niveaux drsquoescalademdash [Configurer les paramegravetres centraux](08_Module_Configuration06_Geacuteneacuterale01_Configurer_les_paramegravetres_centrauxrst)mdash [Configurer les controcircles](08_Module_Configuration07_Controlesrst)mdash [Configurer les actions automatiques](08_Module_Configuration08_Actions_automatiquesrst)mdash [Configurer les collecteurs](glpiconfig_mailcollectorhtml) La configuration des collecteurs srsquoeffectue

depuis le menuConfiguration gt Collecteurs

mdash [Ajouter un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un collecteur](glpiconfig_mailcollector_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les liens externes protocoleacutes](glpiconfig_linkhtml)

Les liens externes se configurent depuis le menu Configuration gt

Liens externesmdash [Ajouter un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un lien externe](glpiconfig_link_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les plugins GLPI](glpiconfig_pluginhtml) Les plugins dans GLPI installation configura-

tion activation

Authentification

Crsquoest ici que GLPI gegravere lrsquoauthentification et les informations personnelles des utilisateurs

Lrsquoaccegraves drsquoun utilisateur agrave GLPI est possible apregraves que ces conditions aient eacuteteacute veacuterifieacutees

1 envoi drsquoinformations drsquoauthentification par lrsquoutilisateur

2 existence de lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur

3 authentification de lrsquoutilisateur

4 attribution drsquohabilitations agrave lrsquoutilisateur

GLPI utilise sa propre base interne drsquoutilisateurs Ceux-ci sont soit creacuteeacutes depuis lrsquointerface de lrsquoapplication soit im-porteacutes depuis une ou plusieurs sources externes Selon le type de source lrsquoimport des utilisateurs peut se faire soit enmasse soit au fil de lrsquoeau lors de la tentative de connexion drsquoun utilisateur non encore connu de GLPI

Pour effectuer lrsquoauthentification GLPI fait appel agrave une base de mots de passes interne qui peut ecirctre compleacuteteacutee parune ou plusieurs sources externes drsquoauthentification Lrsquoutilisation de meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externes permet dedeacuteleacuteguer cette fonctionnaliteacute agrave des systegravemes tiers assurant la gestion drsquoidentiteacute Voir [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec lessources drsquoauthentification externes](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification02_Configurationrst) laquo Les para-megravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configura-tion gt Authentification gt Configuration raquo)

Lrsquoattribution des habilitations est deacutecrite dans la section [Attribuer des habilitations agrave un utilisa-teur](07_Module_Administration05_Regravegles03_Habilitations_utilisateurrst) laquo GLPI dispose drsquoun moteur drsquoha-bilitations dynamiques qui se base sur des sources externes drsquoauthentification Il est accessible depuis le menuAdministration gt Regravegles gt Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitation agrave un utilisateur raquo)

Note La cineacutematique drsquoauthentification est la suivante

1 lrsquoutilisateur entre son identifiant et son mot de passe

212 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

2 GLPI veacuterifie si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave enregistreacute dans la base Srsquoil ne lrsquoest pas

1 GLPI essaye les meacutethodes drsquoauthentification les unes apregraves les autres la base interne puis tous les an-nuaires LDAP et enfin les annuaires de messagerie

2 lorsque lrsquoauthentification est reacuteussie lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans la base interne ainsi que sa meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

3 si aucune source nrsquoa pu authentifier lrsquoutilisateur celui-ci est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que sonidentifiant ou mot de passe est incorrect

3 Si lrsquoutilisateur est deacutejagrave preacutesent dans la base interne ou une fois son identifiant creacuteeacute

1 GLPI tente drsquoauthentifier lrsquoutilisateur en utilisant la derniegravere meacutethode drsquoauthentification reacuteussie (et unique-ment celle-ci)

2 si lrsquoauthentification a eacutechoueacute lrsquoutilisateur est redirigeacute vers une page lui indiquant que son identifiant oumot de passe est incorrect

4 Le moteur drsquohabilitation est lanceacute avec les informations de lrsquoutilisateur

1 si le moteur a donneacute agrave celui-ci une ou plusieurs habilitations alors lrsquoutilisateur a accegraves agrave GLPI

2 si lrsquoutilisateur ne se voit attribuer aucune habilitation alors bien qursquoeacutetant inscrit dans la base GLPI il nepeut se connecter agrave lrsquoapplication

mdash [Configurer lrsquointeacutegration avec les sources drsquoauthentification externes](glpiconfig_common_authhtml)Les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes

drsquoauthentification se configurent dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration Authentifica-tion

mdash [Chiffrage des mots de passe dans la base de donneacutees](glpiconfig_passwords_encryptedhtml)Les mots de passe des accegraves exteacuterieurs sont chiffreacutes

mdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldaphtml)Lrsquointerface de GLPI avec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le

menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Annuaire LDAP mdash [Configurer la liaison LDAP pour les utilisateurs et les groupes](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_usersgroupshtml)mdash [Ajouter un nouvel annuaire LDAP](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un annuaire](glpiconfig_auth_ldap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Importer et synchroniser depuis un annuaire par script](glpiscripts_ldap_mass_synchtml)

Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisation agrave partir drsquoun

annuairemdash [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imaphtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme source

drsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie mdash [Ajouter un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_createhtml)mdash [Supprimer un serveur de messagerie](glpiconfig_auth_imap_t_deletehtml)mdash [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](glpiconfig_auth_otherhtml)

Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de

lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoau-thentification

Sujet parent [Administrer les controcircles drsquoaccegraves](glpiaccess_control_introhtml laquo Cette partie deacutecrit commentadministrer le systegraveme de controcircle drsquoaccegraves qui permet agrave chaque utilisateur drsquoacceacuteder agrave un contexte drsquoutilisation speacuteci-fique raquo)

32 Modules 213

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sources drsquoauthentification externes

Ce menu permet de configurer les paramegravetres geacuteneacuteraux de lrsquointeacutegration avec des sources externes drsquoauthentification

Afin de pouvoir utiliser ces sources externes drsquoauthentification il faut au preacutealable activer les extensions correspon-dantes dans la configuration de PHP Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre de sources externes configureacutees danslrsquoapplication

Pour utiliser la capaciteacute de GLPI de creacuteer agrave la voleacutee des utilisateurs preacutesents dans les sources externes drsquoauthentifica-tion il faut lrsquoactiver dans le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Configuration

Figure 1 Menu de la configuration de lrsquoauthentification [image](docsimageauthConfigpng)

Les annuaires LDAP permettent en outre de refuser la creacuteation des utilisateurs ne posseacutedant pas drsquohabilitations Lasuppression drsquoun utilisateur de lrsquoannuaire peut aussi entraicircner une action telle que la mise agrave la corbeille de lrsquoutilisateurla suppression de ses habilitations ou sa deacutesactivation Crsquoest eacutegalement agrave ce niveau qursquoest parameacutetreacute le fuseau horairede GLPI

Les sources drsquoauthentification externes prises en charges par GLPI sont les suivantes mdash annuaire LDAP voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir drsquoannuaires

LDAP](08_Module_Configuration09_Authentification03_Annuaires_LDAPrst laquo Lrsquointerface de GLPIavec les annuaires LDAP se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt AnnuairesLDAP raquo)

mdash serveur de messagerie voir [Authentifier des utilisateurs agrave partir de serveurs de message-rie](config_auth_imaphtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI avec des serveurs de messagerie comme sourcedrsquoauthentification se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Serveurs de messagerie raquo)

mdash serveur CAS voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash certificat x509 voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification externe](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquoin-terfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentification unique se configure depuis le menuConfiguration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

mdash authentification deacuteleacutegueacutee au serveur web voir [Configurer les autres meacutethodes drsquoauthentification ex-terne](config_auth_otherhtml laquo Lrsquointerfaccedilage de GLPI agrave des systegravemes permettant de faire de lrsquoauthentificationunique se configure depuis le menu Configuration gt Authentification gt Autre meacutethode drsquoauthentification raquo)

Annuaires LDAP

GLPI srsquointerface avec un (ou plusieurs) Annuaire LDAP afin drsquoauthentifier les utilisateurs de controcircler leur accegraves dereacutecupeacuterer leurs informations personnelles et drsquoimporter des groupes

Tous les annuaires compatibles LDAP v3 sont supporteacutes par GLPI Crsquoest donc aussi le cas pour lrdquoAnnuaire ActiveDirectory de Microsoft Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires renseigneacutes bien entendu plus le nombreest eacuteleveacute plus la recherche drsquoun nouvel utilisateur agrave authentifier peut ecirctre longue

Il est possible drsquoimporter et de synchroniser les utilisateurs de 2 maniegraveres mdash au fil de lrsquoeau agrave la premiegravere connexion lrsquoutilisateur est creacuteeacute dans GLPI A chaque login ses informations

personnelles sont synchroniseacutees avec lrsquoannuaire Dans le cas ougrave les collecteurs sont utiliseacutes une adresse demessagerie inconnue sera rechercheacutee dans lrsquoannuaire pour creacuteer lrsquoutilisateur associeacute

mdash en masse soit via lrsquointerface web de GLPI soit en utilisant le script fourni voir [Importer et synchroniserdepuis un annuaire par script](scripts_ldap_mass_synchtml laquo Un script permet lrsquoimport et la synchronisationagrave partir drsquoun annuaire raquo)

Avertissement Si aucune configuration LDAP nrsquoest visible (voir un message drsquoerreur sur cette partie) crsquoest quele module LDAP pour PHP nrsquoest pas installeacute

214 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Sous Linux installer le paquet ldap pour PHP (par exemple php5-ldap sur Debian) puis redeacutemarrer le serveurweb

Sous Windows il faut deacutecommenter dans le fichier phpini (fichier preacutesent dans le reacutepertoire apachebin) la ligneextension=php_ldapdll puis redeacutemarrer le serveur web

Le processus drsquoauthentification des utilisateurs est deacutecoupeacute en 3 parties lrsquoauthentification le controcircle drsquoaccegraves et enfinla reacutecupeacuteration des donneacutees personnelles

Authentification LDAP

Lors de la premiegravere connexion de lrsquoutilisateur GLPI va srsquoadresser agrave tous les annuaires jusqursquoagrave trouver celui qui contientlrsquoutilisateur Si lrsquooption permettant drsquoimporter des utilisateurs depuis une source externe est active alors celui-ci estcreacuteeacute et lrsquoidentifiant de la meacutethode de connexion et le serveur LDAP sont stockeacutes en base de donneacutees

Ensuite agrave chaque login lrsquoutilisateur est authentifieacute sur lrsquoannuaire dont lrsquoidentifiant est stockeacute dans GLPI Les autresannuaires ne sont pas utiliseacutes si un utilisateur est deacutesactiveacute dans lrsquoannuaire qursquoil a utiliseacute jusque lagrave pour se connecteril ne peut se connecter avec une autre source drsquoauthentification

Controcircle drsquoaccegraves

Le controcircle drsquoaccegraves est lrsquoattribution drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur Mecircme si un utilisateur est authentifieacute sur un an-nuaire il nrsquoest pas forceacutement habiliteacute agrave se connecter agrave GLPI

Ce meacutecanisme repose sur lrsquoutilisation de regravegles drsquoaffectations drsquohabilitations

Les diffeacuterents onglets

Annuaire LDAP

32 Modules 215

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Il existe un modegravele de preacute-configuration Active Directory qui preacute-remplit un certain nombre de champsCelui-ci a eacuteteacute mis en place afin de faciliter la configuration GLPI-AD

Pour le charger cliquer sur le lien Active Directory lors de lrsquoajout drsquoun annuaire Le lien Valeur(s) par deacutefautreacuteinitialise la saisie

mdash serveur par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieurs serveurs LDAP de parameacutetreacutes vous ne pouvez deacutefinir qursquoun seulserveur par deacutefaut Le fait de choisir ce paramegravetre le supprime du serveur sur lequel il eacutetait preacuteceacutedemmentparameacutetreacute

mdash serveur et port repreacutesentant lrsquoadresse de lrsquoannuaire LDAPmdash basedn emplacement de lrsquoannuaire agrave partir duquel les recherches et lectures seront effectueacutees

Note Le basedn doit ecirctre renseigneacute sous la forme du DN complet de lrsquoutilisateur Par exempleCN=glpiadminDC=mondomaine si le compte dans lrsquoannuaire pour GLPI est glpiadmin

mdash DN du compte identifiant de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) mdash Mot de passe du compte mot de passe correspondant (dans le cas drsquoun accegraves non anonyme) Il est possible

drsquoeffacer le mot de passe en cochant la case effacer puis de valider mdash filtre de connexion permet de restreindre la recherche de personnes dans lrsquoannuaire Par exemple si seul un

ensemble restreint de personnes de lrsquoannuaire ont le droit de se connecter agrave GLPI il faut mettre en place unecondition pour restreindre la recherche agrave ces personnes

On peut citer les exemples de filtres suivants mdash un filtre classique LDAP peut ecirctre (objectclass=inetOrgPerson)mdash pour Active Directory utiliser le filtre suivant qui ne renvoie que les utilisa-

teurs non deacutesactiveacutes (car les machines sont aussi consideacutereacutees comme des utili-sateurs par AD) (amp(objectClass=user)(objectCategory=person)((userAccountControl1284011355614803=2)))

Il faut noter que ce filtre est automatiquement rempli lorsque le modegravele de preacute-configurationActive Directory est seacutelectionneacute

mdash Champ de lrsquoidentifiant nom du champ dans lrsquoannuaire LDAP correspondant agrave lrsquoidentifiant de lrsquoutilisateur(par exemple uid sur un annuaire LDAP samaccountname sur un annuaire AD)

mdash Champ de synchronisation nom du champ utiliseacute pour la synchronisation Ce champ doit identifier de ma-niegravere unique lrsquoutilisateur il permet de prendre en compte le cangement de login (par exemple employeeuidsur un LDAP ou objectguid pour un AD)

Avertissement Ne pas oublier drsquoactiver votre annuaire et de le deacutefinir lrsquoannuaire par deacutefaut si vous avez plusieursannuaires

Base DN et utilisateur authentifieacute

Attention le rootdn et le basedn doivent ecirctre eacutecrits sans espaces apregraves les virgules De plus la casse est importante

Exemple de rootdn mdash cn=Admin ou=users dc=mycompany incorrectmdash cn=Adminou=usersdc=mycompany correct

Pour Active Directory si on utilise le userprincipalname au lieu du samaccountname on peut avoir un rootdn sous laforme prenomnomdomainefr

Les paramegravetres agrave entrer sont tregraves simples par exemple mdash hocircte ldapmycompanyfrmdash basedn dc=mycompanydc=fr

216 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Et cela doit suffire si la recherche anonyme est permise Dans le cas contraire et si tous les utilisateurs ne sont paspositionneacutes au sein du mecircme DN il vous faut speacutecifier le DN drsquoun utilisateur autoriseacute et son mot de passe rootdnPassPour Active Directory il est obligatoire de renseigner un compte qui a le droit de srsquoauthentifier sur le domaine

En tentant de se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire gracircce agrave un browser LDAP il est possible de tester ces paramegravetres Il en existebeaucoup mais on peut citer

mdash LdapBrowser Editor (logiciel libre eacutecrit en Java et donc multi-plateforme)mdash ADSIedit pour Active Directory Cet outil se trouve sur les supports toolsoutils suppleacutementaires du CD drsquoins-

tallation de Windows Server

Note Si certains des utilisateurs ont des restrictions de connexion agrave certaines machines configureacutees dans leur profilAD lrsquoerreur suivante est possible lors drsquoune tentative de login sur la page drsquoaccueil de GLPI Utilisateur non trouveacuteou plusieurs utilisateurs identiques trouveacutes La solution consiste agrave ajouter le serveur heacutebergeant lrsquoAD agrave la liste desPC sur lesquels lrsquoutilisateur peut se connecter

Tester

Permet de tester la configuration deacutefinie dans lrsquoonglet Annuaire LDAP

Le message Test de connexion reacuteussi indique que GLPI a pu se connecter agrave lrsquoannuaire LDAP avec les informationsrenseigneacutees (hocircte port compte utilisateur)

Il reste deacutesormais agrave importer les utilisateurs Pour cela il faut bien veacuterifier les autres paramegravetres (filtre de connexionchamps de login etc)

Utilisateurs

Permet de configurer comment va ecirctre effectueacute le lien entre les champs de lrsquoannuaire et ceux de GLPI Pour chaquechamp de GLPI (nom preacutenom image ) est associeacute un champ de lrsquoannuaire

Groupes

Permet de configurer la meacutethode de stockage des groupes au niveau de lrsquoannuaire

32 Modules 217

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Informations avanceacutees

Dans le cas ougrave lrsquoheure de la machine heacutebergeant lrsquoannuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas dans le mecircme fuseau horaire que celui deGLPI il faut modifier la variable Fuseau horaire afin drsquoajuster le deacutelai en effet cela peut provoquer des reacutesultatserroneacutes dans la liste des utilisateurs agrave synchroniser

Connexion LDAP seacutecuriseacutee

GLPI gegravere la connexion seacutecuriseacutee agrave un annuaire LDAP agrave travers une connexion SSL (aussi appeleacute LDAPS) Il suffitde rajouter devant le nom de lrsquohocircte (ou son IP) ldaps Ainsi que de changer le port (par deacutefaut 636) Par exemplelrsquoaccegraves en LDAPS en local donnera Hocircte ldaps 127001 Port 636

Limite du nombre drsquoenregistrement retourneacutes (sizelimit)

Il existe souvent deux limites sur le nombre maximum drsquoenregistrements retourneacutes par une requecircte LDAP mdash la limite du client (deacutefinie par exemple sur DebianUbuntu dans etcldapldapconf)mdash la limite imposeacutee par le serveur si la limite deacutefinie par le client est supeacuterieure agrave la limite serveur crsquoest cette

derniegravere qui prend le dessus

Avertissement Si la limite est atteinte lrsquooption de comportement lors de la suppression drsquoun utilisateur delrsquoannuaire ne peut fonctionner De plus GLPI affichera un message drsquoavertissement lors drsquoun import ou drsquounesynchronisation

Avec PHP 54 ou supeacuterieur il est deacutesormais possible de contourner la limitation du sizelimit en activant dans lrsquoongletInformations avanceacutees la pagination des reacutesultats Dans ce mode PHP va requecircter lrsquoannuaire autant de fois queneacutecessaire et par tranche de X reacutesultats jusqursquoagrave ce que lrsquoensemble des enregistrements soient renvoyeacutes

Lrsquooption Taille des pages permet drsquoajuster cette valeur de mecircme que nombre maximum de reacutesultats deacutefinit la limitedrsquoenregistrement agrave ne pas deacutepasser lors drsquoune requecircte LDAP (afin par exemple drsquoeacuteviter une erreur indiquant que PHPdemande plus de meacutemoire que ce qui lui est alloueacute)

218 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Sur un annuaire OpenLDAP la limite par deacutefaut est agrave 500 enregistrements sur un Active Directory elle est de1000

Sur un Active directory il est possible de modifier la valeur du MaxPageSize gracircce aux commandes suivantes (attentioncette modification est globale agrave tout lrsquoannuaire)

Reacuteplicats

Si un annuaire LDAP nrsquoest pas accessible les utilisateurs ne pourront plus se connecter agrave GLPI

Afin drsquoeacuteviter cette situation des reacuteplicats peuvent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes ils partagent la mecircme configuration que le serveurqursquoils reacutepliquent mais sont disponibles agrave une adresse diffeacuterente

Lrsquoutilisation des reacuteplicats se fait uniquement dans le cas drsquoune perte de connexion agrave lrsquoannuaire maicirctre Lrsquoajout dereacuteplicats se fait dans la fiche drsquoun annuaire en renseignant un nom qui sera afficheacute dans GLPI ainsi qursquoun nomdrsquohocircte et un port Il nrsquoy a pas de limite quant au nombre drsquoannuaires reacutepliqueacutes

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Les diffeacuterentes actions

Les annuaires LDAP ne proposent pas drsquoactions speacutecifiques se reporter aux actions communes

Intituleacutes

Certaines listes de seacutelections deacuteroulantes sont parameacutetrables dans GLPI mdash lieux

32 Modules 219

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

mdash statuts de mateacuterielsmdash cateacutegories de ticketsmdash noms des logicielsmdash noms des constructeursmdash

En somme tout ce qui deacutepend drsquoune nomenclature propre agrave un contexte particulier doit ecirctre parameacutetreacute Si certains deces intituleacutes sont fournis avec une liste par deacutefaut la plupart des intituleacutes doivent ecirctre deacuteclareacutes dans lrsquoapplication

Par deacutefaut les intituleacutes ne peuvent ecirctre traduits dans plusieurs langues Cette fonctionnaliteacute doit ecirctre activeacutee et permetalors de traduire lrsquoensemble des champs des intituleacutes

Les intituleacutes sont soit une liste de valeurs agrave plat (simple liste de valeurs) soit une liste arborescente (chaque eacuteleacutementpeut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements)

La premiegravere eacutetape est de seacutelectionner la liste agrave modifier Ensuite on peut ajouter des eacuteleacutements agrave la liste les modifier etles supprimer

Agrave chaque intituleacute est associeacute un commentaire Celui-ci est visible depuis les formulaires de GLPI Il apparaicirct au survolde lrsquoicocircne Aide associeacutee agrave la liste deacuteroulante

Il est possible de visualiser tous les types drsquointituleacutes existants en utilisant voir tous

Cette liste peut varier suivant les droits accordeacutes dans le profil Les intituleacutes avec fond plus fonceacute sont des intituleacutesglobaux alors que les autres peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutes par entiteacute

220 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Geacuteneacuteral

Lieux

La liste des lieux est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements (Lieu 1 gt Sous-lieu 1 gtSous-sous-lieu 1) Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun lieu on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant ce lieu (code du bacirctiment de la piegravecelongitude latitude altitude) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant le lieu pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le lieu peut ecirctrevisible des sous entiteacutes

Lieux

Liste les sous-lieux existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Eleacutements

Liste tous les eacuteleacutements affecteacutes agrave ce lieu Vous pouvez choisir de nrsquoafficher qursquoun type drsquoeacuteleacutement (ordinateur utilisa-teur prise reacuteseau logiciel )

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

32 Modules 221

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

Prise reacuteseau

[image](docsimagepriseReseaupng)

Liste les prises reacuteseau affecteacutees agrave ce lieu et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquouneprise sur un port reacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants)apparaissent

Lrsquoajout peut ecirctre unique via la partie haute ou multiple via la partie basse Pour lrsquoajout multiple vous pouvez preacutefixerle numeacutero de la prise comme indiqueacute dans la copie drsquoeacutecran

Autre exemple considerant le preacutefixe bru 9 et 11 les bornes de la numeacuterotation et srv le suffixe les prises reacuteseaucreacuteeacutees seront nommeacutees bru09srv bru10srv et bru11srv

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Statuts

La liste des statuts est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee parentiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoun statut on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant la visibiliteacute de ce statut ainsi quelrsquoinformation preacutecisant le statut pegravere (comme enfant de) et si le statut peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Statuts des eacuteleacutements

Liste les sous-statuts existants et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

222 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Fabricants

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Listes noires

La liste des Listes noires est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle comprend la valeur que vous voulez mettre en liste noire ainsi que sur quel type lrsquoappliquer (IP MAC numeacutero deseacuterie UUID ou courriel) Les listes noires sont utiliseacutees pour les imports automatique via un agent drsquoinventaire ou parle collecteur de courriels

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

32 Modules 223

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Contenu de courriel interdit

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle ne possegravede pas qursquoun seul onglet celui du formulaire

Elle permet au collecteur de courriels de ne pas importer un courriel contenu le texte deacutefini Cela peut permettre entreautre de lutter contre le spam dans le cas de lrsquoautorisation de creacuteation de ticket pour les courriels anonymes

Assistance

Cateacutegories de ticket

La liste des cateacutegories de ticket est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de ticket on trouve un certain nombre drsquoinformations concernant cette cateacutego-rie (responsable et groupe techniques pour lrsquoaffectation automatique des tickets (voir [configuration de lrsquoen-titeacute](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)) la cateacutegorie par deacutefaut de la base de connaissance lorsque lrsquoon sou-haite ajouter une solution drsquoun ticket dans celle-ci la visibiliteacute de cette cateacutegorie suivant lrsquointerface ou suivant lrsquoobjetainsi que les gabarits affecteacutees agrave cette cateacutegorie) ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes En cas de choix drsquoun gabarit celui-ci sera affecteacute au choix de lacateacutegorie donc surchargera celle qui aurait u ecirctre deacutefinie dans lrsquoentiteacute ou via regravegle meacutetier

Un lien avec les cateacutegories de la base de connaissances est possible Si une cateacutegorie est choisie le clic sur lrsquoaide de lacateacutegorie du ticket dans un ticket amegravene directement agrave tous les articles de la base de connaissance de cette cateacutegorie

Cateacutegories de tickets

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

224 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Cateacutegories de tacircches

La liste des cateacutegories de tacircches est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle peut ecirctredeacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

La fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de tacircche indique son nom ainsi que lrsquoinformation preacutecisant la cateacutegorie megravere (comme enfantde) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Cateacutegories de tacircches

Liste les sous-cateacutegories existantes et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Types de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Sources des demandes

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle preacutecise si cette source source doit ecirctre deacutefini par deacutefaut pour les tickets etou les collecteurs

32 Modules 225

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Gabarits de solution

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Elle permet de preacutedeacutefinir le contenu ainsi que le type drsquoune solution et peut ecirctre visible ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Note Les gabarits de solution ne peuvent pas ecirctre traduits

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

Statuts de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les statuts appliqueacutes agrave un projet ainsi que lrdquo(eacutetat de celui-ci

Types de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Types de tacircches de projet

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir les types de tacircches appliqueacutes agrave un projet

Les onglets communs

226 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Traduction

Cet onglet est reacuteserveacute aux intituleacutes et nrsquoapparait que si la traduction des intituleacutes a eacuteteacute autoriseacutee dans la configurationgeacuteneacuterale

Il liste les traductions deacutejagrave reacutealiseacutees pour lrsquointituleacute et permet drsquoen ajouter de nouvelles

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Calendrier

Les calendriers utiliseacutes au sein de GLPI sont parameacutetrables par entiteacute Ils sont caracteacuteriseacutes par des peacuteriodes drsquoouvertureainsi que des peacuteriodes de fermeture

Ces calendriers sont utiliseacutes dans les SLA (voir Configurer les SLAs) et la [configuration des enti-teacutes](07_Module_Administration04_Entiteacutesrst)

Calendrier

Plages horaires

Correspond aux plages horaires drsquoouverture de lrsquoentiteacute Vous pouvez en ajouter autant que neacutecessaire par jour tant queces plages ne se chevauchent pas

Peacuteriode de fermeture

Liste les peacuteriodes de fermeture affecteacutees agrave ce calendrier et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle voir lca configurationdes peacuteriodes de fermeture

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 227

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Peacuteriodes de fermeture

La liste des peacuteriodes de fermeture est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Une peacuteriode de fermeture comprend un nom une peacuteriode et si cette fermeture est reacutecurrente ou non

Concernant le champ Reacutecurrent si celui-ci est agrave Oui cela signifie que la peacuteriode indiqueacutee est valable tout le tempsDans ce cas GLPI ne se soucierait pas de lrsquoanneacutee indiqueacutee

Tregraves utile pour indiquer les jours feacuterieacutes revenant chaque anneacutee (Noeumll Victoire de 1945 1er mai ) ou les peacuteriode defermeture de la socieacuteteacute (fermeacutee tous les ans du 1er au 31 aoucirct) et surtout cela eacutevite de ressaisir chaque anneacutee les mecircmesdates

Intituleacutes Internet

Le protocole IP est mateacuterialiseacute sous plusieurs formes adresses IP reacuteseaux IP mais aussi des FQDN

Un eacutequipement se connecte au reacuteseau au travers de ports reacuteseaux

Agrave un port reacuteseau on associe un ou plusieurs Noms reacuteseau(voir ci-dessous)

Un Nom reacuteseau peut appartenir agrave un Domaine Internet Il peut contenir une ou plusieurs adresses IP (voir ci-dessous)et il peut avoir plusieurs alias

Une adresse IP appartient agrave un reacuteseau IP (voir ci-dessous)

Au niveau protocole IP les reacuteseaux sont indiffeacuteremment en IPv4 et en IPv6

Note GLPI gegravere indiffeacuteremment IPv4 et IPv6 La seule distinction provient du format des adresses et des masques

2128513766 est une adresse IPv4 alors que 2a00 1450 4007 803 1012 est en IPv6

GLPI considegravere IPv4 comme un sous-ensemble drsquoIPv6 les traitements sont les mecircmes

GLPI utilise deux repreacutesentations pour les adresses IP (IPv6 et IPv4) mdash La repreacutesentation binaire lui permet de faire lrsquoanalyse des relations entre reacuteseaux adresses et masques Elle est

inaccessible agrave lrsquoutilisateurmdash La repreacutesentation textuelle est celle utiliseacutee pour lrsquoaffichage et la saisie des donneacutees

Les adresses et les masques IPv4 sont repreacutesenteacutes par leur forme classique (ie 2128513766 2552552550) La repreacutesentation des adresses IPv6 est celle canonique (ie 2001 db8 0 85a3 ac1f 8001 plutocirct que 2001 0db8 0000 85a3 0000 0000 ac1f 8001) Lesmasques IPv6 sont repreacutesenteacutes sous la forme du preacutefixe de sous reacuteseau (ie nombre de bits agrave 1 dans lemasque)

Reacuteseaux IP

Les Reacuteseaux IP permettent de deacutefinir la topologie des reacuteseaux

Ils regroupent un ensemble drsquoadresses IP regroupeacutees selon la topologie deacutefinie par le plan drsquoadressage des administra-teurs du reacuteseau

Ils peuvent srsquoemboicircter la hieacuterarchie des reacuteseaux IP deacutepend des adresses et des masques de ces reacuteseauxainsi que de leurs identiteacutes drsquoappartenance Par exemple 192168102552552550 est un sous reacuteseau de192168002552552540)

228 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Avertissement La hieacuterarchie est geacutereacutee implicitement il est impossible de la modifier soi-mecircme

Un reacuteseau est composeacute au minimum drsquoune adresse et drsquoun masque Agrave cela peut srsquoajouter une passerelle

Un reacuteseau est dit adressable si il est utiliseacute pour le routage interne des ordinateurs En drsquoautres termes son masquede sous-reacuteseau et sa passerelle sont utiliseacutes par tous les eacutequipements du reacuteseau (si un ou plusieurs ordinateurs nrsquoontpas les mecircmes informations cela peut engendrer des problegravemes de routage ) Geacuteneacuteralement un reacuteseau ayant unepasserelle est adressable car la passerelle est connue de tous les eacutequipements et elle ne peut appartenir qursquoagrave un seulsous-reacuteseau Mais un reacuteseau adressable nrsquoa pas neacutecessairement de passerelle Crsquoest par exemple le cas des reacuteseauxpriveacutees (1921684802552552550 ) ou de la boucle locale (1270002552552550 ou 1128)

Les reacuteseaux sont modifiables depuis les intituleacutes ( Configuration gt Intituleacutes ) Internet gt Reacuteseaux IP

VLAN

Liste les VLAN associeacutes agrave ce reacuteseau IP et permet drsquoen associer un nouveau

Adresses IP

Liste les adresses IP de ce reacuteseau

Vous pouvez classer cette liste par numeacutero drsquoIP en cliant sur le lien Adresses IP ou par type de mateacuteriel en cliquant surle lien Trier par type drsquoeacuteleacutement Dans ce cas vous aurez un tableau par type drsquoeacuteleacutement

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

32 Modules 229

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Domaines Internet

Noms reacuteseau

Liste les noms reacuteseau du domaine

Alias reacuteseau

Liste les alias reacuteseau du domaine

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Reacuteseaux Wifi

A FAIRE

Noms reacuteseau

Un nom reacuteseau correspond agrave lrsquoidentification unique drsquoune machine du point de vue drsquoInternet

Geacuteneacuteralement un eacutequipement est identifieacute par un ou plusieurs noms particuliers sur le reacuteseau Le serveur DNS reacutesoudrace nom en adresse IP Dans le cas ougrave IPv4 et IPv6 sont utiliseacutes ce nom renverra deux adresses IP une en IPv4 etlrsquoautre en IPv6 Crsquoest pourquoi un nom reacuteseau peut avoir plusieurs adresses IP

Un nom reacuteseau est composeacute drsquoun nom qui correspond au label du FQDN (Cf [labelsFQDN](glossaryfqdn_labelhtml)) drsquoun [domaine internet](glossaryfqdnhtml) et de une ou plusieurs adressesIP

230 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Le champs reacuteseau IP apparaicirct afin de retrouver les informations sur les diffeacuterents reacuteseaux IP disponibles Cette in-formation nrsquoest pas conserveacutee dans le nom reacuteseau car il peut avoir plusieurs adresse IP et chacune peut appartenir agraveplusieurs reacuteseaux IP

Note Lors de la saisie drsquoun nom reacuteseau la validiteacute du nom ainsi que celle de chacune des adresses IP est veacuterifieacutee Siun de ces eacuteleacutement nrsquoest pas valide alors il est rejeteacute

Pour ajouter une adresse IP agrave un nom reacuteseau il faut cliquer sur le [image](docsimageaddcriteriapng) devant leschamps de saisie des adresses IP Pour supprimer une adresse IP il suffit drsquoeffacer le contenu du champs de lrsquoIP quelrsquoon souhaite retirer

Alias reacuteseau

Cet onglet liste les alias deacutejagrave preacutesents pour ce reacuteseau et permet drsquoen ajouter un nouveau

Traditionnellement le nom reacuteseau est celui utiliseacute par le DNS pour la reacutesolution inverse drsquoune adresse IP alors que lesalias correspondent au CNAME du nomFQDN

De la mecircme maniegravere le nom de lrsquoalias doit un label FQDN valide

History

The History tab is used to show any changes made to an item The following information about the changes is avai-lable

mdash ID of the changemdash Date and time the change was mademdash User who made the change If this field is not filled it means that the action was done automatically (For

example automatic inventory update)mdash Field that was changedmdash Description of the change that was made

The description of the change represents either the difference between the old and the new value (For example withlocation field Change HQ to Remote Office A) or the explanation of the action which was carried out (For example Uninstallation of a software laquo Gimp 20 raquo)

Note For dropdowns or objects with a parentchild relationship the modification of a child will appear in the historyof the parent element

All Information

For an item all information is displayed on one page from the All tab This shows all of the tabs of an objectrsquos form inone view one below the other

Autres

Types

Quel que soit le type la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du type de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

32 Modules 231

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Modegraveles

Quel que soit le modegravele la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele de lrsquoonglet et peut ecirctre traduite

Machines virtuelles

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute (modegraveles ou systegraveme de virtualisation eacutetat des machines virtuelles) la liste est une listede valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elle permet de deacutefinir le nom du modegravele ou du systegraveme de virtualisation ou celui de lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles

Seul lrsquoeacutetat des machines virtuelles peut ecirctre traduit

Rubrique des documents

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Elle est valable pour toutes lesentiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Rubriques des documents liste des sous-rubriques deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Type de documents

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Lrsquoapplication propose un certain nombre de types par deacutefaut mais il est possible drsquoen ajouter en fournissant lesinformations suivantes

mdash le nom du type de document mdash lrsquoextension par exemple txt ou pdf la deacutetection des documents qursquoil est permis drsquoajouter se base sur cette

information mdash le nom du fichier pour lrsquoicocircne du document deacutesireacute Placez les fichiers drsquoicocircnes dans le reacutepertoire picsicones

sous lrsquoarborescence des fichiers drsquoinstallation de GLPI mdash le type MIME si neacutecessaire mdash lrsquoautorisation de teacuteleacutechargement de ce type de fichier (oui ou non)

Note Le type de document peut ecirctre une expression reacuteguliegravere Cela permet par exemple drsquoautoriser de deacutefinir unensemble de documents NOMFICHIERXXXXYYYY ougrave XXXX est un numeacutero et YYYY la date de lrsquoanneacutee fiscalecourante Dans ce cas preacutecis lrsquoexpression reacuteguliegravere pourrait ecirctre [0-9]+ pour indiquer toute extension composeacuteeexclusivement de nombres

Ces 2 variables peuvent ecirctre traduites

Outils (Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements ce qui facilite la navigation et larecherche Elle peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute

Dans la fiche drsquoune cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance outre le nom de celle-ci on trouve lrsquoinformation preacutecisant lacateacutegorie megravere (comme enfant de) et si la cateacutegorie peut ecirctre visible des sous entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de la base de connaissance liste des sous-cateacutegories deacutejagrave creacuteeacutees et permet drsquoen ajouter une nou-velle

232 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Une cateacutegorie de la base de connaissance peut ecirctre traduite

Systegravemes drsquoexploitation

Quel que soit le sous-intituleacute la liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valable pour toutes les entiteacutes

Seul les sources de mise agrave jour peuvent ecirctre traduites

Reacuteseaux

Toutes les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat

Les interfaces reacuteseaux firmwares et reacuteseaux sont valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Prises reacuteseaux domaines et VLAN peuvent ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutees par entiteacute avec visibiliteacute ou non des sous-entiteacutes

Seules la liste Reacuteseaux peut ecirctre traduite

Prises reacuteseaux Une prise reacuteseau peut ecirctre lieacutee agrave un lieu Dans ce cas lors de la seacutelection drsquoune prise sur un portreacuteseau drsquoun mateacuteriel seules les prises reacuteseau disponibles du lieu du mateacuteriel (et des lieux enfants) apparaissentSi vous souhaitez plusieurs prises pour un mecircme lieu il est preacutefeacuterable drsquoeffectuer la creacuteation via le menu lieude la partie [Geacuteneacuteral](08_Module_Configuration02_Intituleacutes03_Intituleacutes_Geacuteneacuteralrst) du menu des intituleacutes

Logiciel (cateacutegories des logiciels)

Cette liste est de type arborescente chaque eacuteleacutement peut avoir des sous-eacuteleacutements Les valeurs sont deacutefinies pour toutesles entiteacutes

Lrsquoonglet Cateacutegories de logiciels liste les sous-cateacutegories et permet drsquoen ajouter une nouvelle

Une cateacutegorie de logiciels peut ecirctre traduite

Utilisateur

Les listes de cette partie sont des listes de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Elles peuvent ecirctre traduites

Regravegles drsquoaffectation drsquohabilitations agrave un utilisateur (Critegravere LDAP)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

Il est eacutegalement possible drsquoajouter un critegravere LDAP particulier

Uniciteacute des champs (valeurs ignoreacutees pour lrsquouniciteacute)

Cette liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat qui peut ecirctre deacuteleacutegueacutee par entiteacute et applicable ou non au sous-entiteacutes

Il est possible de renseigner pour chaque type drsquoobjet des valeurs qui ne doivent pas ecirctre prises en compte lors de laveacuterification de lrsquouniciteacute drsquoun objet en base

Par exemple ne pas utiliser le numeacutero de seacuterie geacuteneacuterique laquo To Be Filled By OEM raquo pour veacuterifier si un ordinateur existedeacutejagrave dans GLPI

32 Modules 233

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Note Certains plugins peuvent apporter des intituleacutes suppleacutementaires qui sont parameacutetrables dans le mecircme menu

Authentifications externes

La liste est une liste de valeurs agrave plat valables pour toutes les entiteacutes

33 Advanced Configuration

331 Utilisation du cache

Les informations sur lrsquoutilisation du cache sont disponible dans Configuration Geacuteneacuterale Systegraveme)

Nouveau dans la version 92

Modifieacute dans la version 921

Si lrsquoun des systegravemes de cache APCu ou WinCache est preacutesent sur le serveur il sera automatiquement utiliseacute par GLPILe systegraveme se base sur ZendCache

Le cache permet drsquoameacuteliorer les performances sur certaines opeacuterations relativement lourdes telles que le chargementdes traductions ou le calcul des arbres des entiteacutes

On distingue deux caches distincts dans GLPI mdash le cache base de donneacuteesmdash le cache traduction

Cette distinction permet drsquoeacuteviter de stocker le cache des traductions sur un reacuteseau cela pourrait produire un trop grandnombre de requecirctes sur le reacuteseau et avoir au final un impact neacutegatif

A lrsquoinverse le cache de la base de donneacutees devrait ecirctre sur le reacuteseau en cas de frontaux multiples

Afin de vous permettre drsquoaffiner les reacuteglages ou drsquoutiliser un autre systegraveme de cache une solution manuelle estproposeacutee Pour en profiter ajouter dans la table glpi_configs une cleacute cache_db etou cache_trans pour lecontexte core et adapter la valeur en fonction de ce que vous souhaitez

Note Si le but est de deacutesactiver lrsquoun ou lrsquoautre de ces caches creacuteer la cleacute dans la table mais laisser la valeur vide

adapterapcu

adapterredisoptionsserverhost127001

Se reacutefeacuterer agrave la meacutethode ConfiggetCache() et agrave la documentation de ZendCache pour davantage drsquoinformations

Avertissement Si vous installez plusieurs instances de GLPI sur un mecircme serveur le namespace du cache doitecirctre unique par instance ce qui nrsquoeacutetait pas le cas dans GLPI avant la version 924

Si vous avez speacutecifieacute votre propre namespace dans la configuration assurez-vous qursquoil est bien unique sur chaqueinstance

Si votre version de GLPI est anteacuterieure agrave la 924 il faudra ajouter le namespace dans la configuration du cache dechacune de vos instances

234 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

332 OPCache

OPCache stocke des fichiers PHP preacute-compileacutes en meacutemoire et permet ainsi drsquoameacuteliorer les performances La seulechose agrave faire crsquoest de lrsquoinstaller sur votre instance de PHP et de le configurer (la configuration par deacutefaut devraitconvenir agrave la grande majoriteacute des cas)

Toutefois sur des instances qui pourraient ecirctre fortement solliciteacutees il peut ecirctre utile de ne pas inclures les fichiers depolices pour les PDF dans ce cache En effet elles y prennent eacutenormeacutement de place et le gain est relativement minime

Afin drsquoexclure les fichiers de police du cache il suffit de renseigner leur chemin complet dans un fichier deliste noire pour opcache Le chemin de ce fichier est deacutetermineacute par la diective de configuration opcacheblacklist_filename (etcphpdopcache-glpiblacklist par exemple sous Fedora) Si votre ins-tance de GLPI se situe dans le dossier varwww le chemin agrave exclure sera varwwwhtmlglpiglpi-921vendortecnickcomtcpdffonts

Bien entendu lrsquoemplacement du fichier de configuration et le chemin vers les polices est agrave adapter en fonction de votresystegraveme et de votre type drsquoinstallation

Les RPMS fournis pour Fedora (ou par le deacutepocirct Remi) offrent deacutejagrave cette fonctionnaliteacute par deacutefaut vous nrsquoaurez doncrien agrave faire )

34 Glossary

Accepted State of a demand which has been validated by an approver

Accreditation Authorization to perform a set of actions on several entities given by rights attribution process

Actions Grouping in a list of available handling of GLPI objects

Active Directory service Directory service compatible with LDAP directory provided by Microsoft Also knownas AD

Adaptive rule Rule in which at least one action is the result of a regular expression defined in a criteria

Administrative closing Modification of a ticket status to closed (manually or automatically)

Alert threshold Minimal value from which an alert is triggered

Asset Generic term for an element that can be inventoried and managed in GLPI

Automatic action Process for regular actions triggering either internal to GLPI or external (Unix cron Windowsplanned tasks )

Automatic closing GLPI internal process that closes unresolved tickets after a given time

Booking Element that is booked for a given period

Bookmark Stored link to a GLPI page that allows to access the page quickly

Budget Accounting operation that groups all provisional expenses and receipts

Cartridge Consumable used by a printer and specifically managed in GLPI

Case Physical element that contains a computerrsquos components (motherboard processor disk )

Closed (ticket) Status of a ticket whose solution has been approved by the ticket issuer or that has been closeautomatically

Collector Functionality of GLPI that allows to create tickets or followup by importing messages from a mailbox

Connection (network) Link between two network ports

Contact Referent person linked to a supplier

Contract Financial document linked to assets and to suppliers

Controller Device that interfaces with other peripheral device

Criteria Element or pattern used by search engines to select an information or used by rules engines and dictio-naries to perform actions

34 Glossary 235

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Default profile Profile attributed by the application in the absence of particular settings (rules manual attribu-tion )

Depreciation type Characteristic of depreciation which balance can be linear or declining

Dictionary Set of rules that allow to modify GLPI data

Direct connection Physical link between a computer and another asset

Document Element that defines a link andor store a file and that can be associated to other objects of GLPI

Domain Group of assets connected to a network

Dropdown Customizable dropdown list used in GLPI and plugins

Entity Organizational object allowing to partition view and action scope of users

Express renewal The contract is renewed only if both parties agree for its renewal (opposite to tacit renewal)

External link Link displayed on an asset form in GLPI and built dynamically using the asset data

Financial information Data for invoicing and warranty

Followup Exchange between a ticket issuer and the persons in charge of it

FQDN A FQDN (Fully qualified domain name) is a fully qualified domain nameFor example wwwglpi-projectorg forgeglpi-projectorg

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Specifically in GLPI selection of elements of the knowledge base that canbe provided independently for example articles that are made accessible to users having only access to thesimplified interface

Global management Management mode in which a unique inventory object can be connected to several compu-ters

Global note Public note that is also visible from sub-entities

Global right Permission on objects that are not linked to an entity

Global view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is common to all users

Group Grouping of users

Grouping Action of merging similar elements of distinct entities into the parent entity

Hive Entry in Windows registry

ICAL (ICalendar) Calendar importexport format

ID Technical identifier of an element

Identifier Connection name of a user (login)

IMAPPOP IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) and POP (Post Office Protocol) are messaging protocolsallowing to retrieve mail messages

Impact Measure of the effect of an incident problem or change in business process

In progress (attributed) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians

In progress (planned) (Ticket) Status of a ticket that is attributed to a technician or a group of technicians andfor which an action is planned

Incident Unplanned interruption or quality decrease of a service

Intervention Action of a technician to solve an incident

Knowledge base Database allowing to gather analyze store and share knowledge and information inside anorganization

Label FQDN A FQDN is composed of labels separated by dots (ldquordquo)For example wwwglpi-projectorg is composed of labels www glpi-project and orgA computer name is composed of a label and the name of the domain it belongs to for example www name indomain glpi-projectorgIn GLPI labels are compliant with section 21 of RFC 1123

236 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

LDAP directory Directory service using the LDAP PROTOCOL (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Allowsin particular to store user accounts

Local right Permission applicable to a given scope (entity)

Location Name in GLPI allowing geographical localization of an asset

Logs List of events occurring during use of GLPI application

Mail domain Part of a mail adress that is after character

Manufacturer Company producing a hardware

Mount point Directory from which the data contained in a partition can be accessed

Network Name defining the connection type (internet local )

Network port Network interface that can be virtual or physical

Networks Hardwares providing interconnection of computer equipments

New (ticket) Default status of a ticket

Path Address allowing to localize an element in a tree structure

Pattern Character string used for comparison in a criteria

PDU Power Distribution Unit

Pending (Ticket) Status of a ticket which processing is temporarily suspended (does not impact processing time)

Personal note Note visible only by its writer

Personal view In a GLPI menu display of columns in a list that is specific to a user

Planning Scheduling of a task in time scale

Plugin GLPI extension that allows to add functionalities andor to modify application behaviors

Power supply Bloc providing electric current to the components of a computer

Preferences Personal parameters of a user

Priority Scale that identifies the relative importance of a ticket and that results from impact and urgency

Private Element that is visible only by its writer (bookmark note )

Profile Set of rights

Provider Legal structure toward which a contractual relation can be established (purchase contract )

Public Element that is visible by all authorized users of an entity

Public note Note that is visible by all users of the notersquos entity

Purge Permanent deletion of elements placed in the trash bin

Recursivity Property of an object belonging to an entity that makes it visible from sub-entities

Refused State of a demand that has been invalidated

Registered user Person having an accreditation allowing to connect to GLPI

Regular expression Character string (often called pattern) that describes a set of accepted strings according to awell-defined syntax

Replicate (MySQL) MySQL database used by GLPI if main database (master) is not available

Report Document that sums up GLPI data

Requester Person at the origin of an incident ticket or a service request

Restoration Recovery of an element of the trash bin

Right Authorization of a user for a given action

Root entity First entity of GLPI entities tree structure that is always present even if no other entity is defined andthat cannot be deleted

Rule List of criteria that trig a list of actions if criteria are satisfied

Saved search Recording of GLPI search engine state that allows to store and perform again the search

34 Glossary 237

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Service General action of GLPI listed in the events

Simplified interface GLPI user interface that gives access to a reduced set of functionalities and that targets endusers (opposite to standard interface)

SLA SLA (for Service-Level Agreement) is a contract between a service provider and a client that defines therequested quality of service and the responsibilities in case of failure

Solved (ticket) Ticket state when a technical solution was provided for an incident

SSO Unique authentication system (SSO (Single Sign On))

Standard interface GLPI user interface that gives access to all functionalities (opposite to simplified interface)

Statistics Summary of GLPI data linked to tickets

Status State of an asset or of a ticket belonging to its life cycle

Sub-entity Child entity of an entity on a form indicates recursivity status

Subject Title or question of an element of the knowledge base

Supervisor Person in charge of a group of users

Tacit renewal The contract is renewed automaticaly if none of the parties declares its will to break it

Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is a VLAN which tag is transmited in networkframe (see 8021Q)

Task Action corresponding to a technical operation that can be planned

Technician User in charge of tickets processing

Template Reusable model of object containing predefined fieds and allowing easier user entry

Ticket GLPI object representing an incident or a service request

Tier type Category of providers

Transfer Action of moving an object from one entity to another

Trash bin Container of elements deleted by users Similar to the trash bin in a desktop environment it is anintermediate state before purge

Tree Hierarchical organization of data using a tree structure

Unitary management Management mode in which an inventory object can be connected to only one computer

Urgency Criteria defined by the requester that specifies for a ticket the desired resolution speed

User User of an asset that is not registered in GLPI user base

Validation Action of authorizing a ticket processing

Validator Person performing the validation of a ticket

VCard Virtual visit card

Virtual network port A virtual network port is a port which does not correspond to a physical network hardware

VLAN VLAN Virtual Local Network

Volume Storage area attached to a computer

Webcal Exchange format for calendar data

238 Chapitre 3 Table of contents

CHAPITRE 4

Documentation license

This documentation is distributed under the terms of the Creative Commons License Attribution-ShareAlike 30 France(CC BY-SA 30 FR)

For the complete terms of the license please refer to httpscreativecommonsorglicensesby-sa30frlegalcode

You are free to mdash Share mdash copy and redistribute the material in any medium or formatmdash Adapt mdash remix transform and build upon the material for any purpose even commercially

The licensor cannot revoke these freedoms as long as you follow the license terms

Under the following terms mdash Attribution mdash You must give appropriate credit provide a link to the license and indicate if changes were

made You may do so in any reasonable manner but not in any way that suggests the licensor endorses you oryour use

mdash ShareAlike mdash If you remix transform or build upon the material you must distribute your contributions underthe same license as the original

No additional restrictions mdash You may not apply legal terms or technological measures that legally restrict others fromdoing anything the license permits

239

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

240 Chapitre 4 Documentation license

Index

AAccepted 235Accreditation 235Actions 235Active Directory service 235Adaptive rule 235Administrative closing 235Alert threshold 235Asset 235Automatic action 235Automatic closing 235

BBooking 235Bookmark 235Budget 235

CCartridge 235Case 235Closed (ticket) 235Collector 235Connection (network) 235Contact 235Contract 235Controller 235Criteria 235

DDefault profile 236Depreciation type 236Dictionary 236Direct connection 236Document 236Domain 236Dropdown 236

EEntity 236

Express renewal 236External link 236

FFinancial information 236Followup 236FQDN 236Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 236

GGlobal management 236Global note 236Global right 236Global view 236Group 236Grouping 236

HHive 236

IICAL (ICalendar) 236ID 236Identifier 236IMAPPOP 236Impact 236In progress (attributed) (Ticket) 236In progress (planned) (Ticket) 236Incident 236Intervention 236

KKnowledge base 236

LLabel FQDN 236LDAP directory 237Local right 237Location 237

241

GLPI User Documentation Version 95

Logs 237

MMail domain 237Manufacturer 237Mount point 237

NNetwork 237Network port 237Networks 237New (ticket) 237

PPath 237Pattern 237PDU 237Pending (Ticket) 237Personal note 237Personal view 237Planning 237Plugin 237Power supply 237Preferences 237Priority 237Private 237Profile 237Provider 237Public 237Public note 237Purge 237

RRecursivity 237Refused 237Registered user 237Regular expression 237Replicate (MySQL) 237Report 237Requester 237Restoration 237Right 237Root entity 237Rule 237

SSaved search 237Service 238Simplified interface 238SLA 238Solved (ticket) 238SSO 238Standard interface 238Statistics 238

Status 238Sub-entity 238Subject 238Supervisor 238

TTacit renewal 238Tagged VLAN 238Task 238Technician 238Template 238Ticket 238Tier type 238Transfer 238Trash bin 238Tree 238

UUnitary management 238Urgency 238User 238

VValidation 238Validator 238VCard 238Virtual network port 238VLAN 238Volume 238

WWebcal 238

242 Index

  • Preface
  • Installation
  • Table of contents
    • First Steps with GLPI
      • General
      • Understanding the interface
      • Manage your password
      • Manage your Preferences
      • Navigate GLPI modules
      • User interfaces
      • View and manage records
      • Search for information in GLPI
      • Saved Searches
        • Modules
          • Geacuteneacuteraliteacutes
          • Asset module
          • Le service drsquoassistance aux utilisateurs
          • Module Gestion
          • Module Outils
          • Module Administration
          • Module Configuration
            • Advanced Configuration
              • Utilisation du cache
              • OPCache
                • Glossary
                  • Documentation license
                  • Index
Page 7: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 8: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 9: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 10: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 11: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 12: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 13: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 14: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 15: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 16: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 17: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 18: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 19: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 20: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 21: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 22: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 23: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 24: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 25: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 26: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 27: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 28: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 29: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 30: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 31: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 32: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 33: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 34: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 35: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 36: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 37: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 38: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 39: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 40: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 41: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 42: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 43: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 44: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 45: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 46: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 47: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 48: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 49: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 50: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 51: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 52: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 53: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 54: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 55: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 56: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 57: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 58: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 59: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 60: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 61: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 62: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 63: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 64: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 65: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 66: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 67: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 68: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 69: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 70: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 71: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 72: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 73: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 74: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 75: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 76: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 77: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 78: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 79: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 80: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 81: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 82: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 83: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 84: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 85: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 86: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 87: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 88: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 89: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 90: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 91: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 92: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 93: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 94: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 95: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 96: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 97: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 98: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 99: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 100: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 101: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 102: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 103: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 104: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 105: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 106: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 107: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 108: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 109: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 110: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 111: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 112: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 113: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 114: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 115: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 116: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 117: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 118: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 119: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 120: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 121: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 122: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 123: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 124: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 125: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 126: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 127: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 128: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 129: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 130: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 131: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 132: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 133: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 134: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 135: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 136: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 137: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 138: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 139: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 140: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 141: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 142: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 143: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 144: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 145: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 146: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 147: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 148: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 149: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 150: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 151: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 152: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 153: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 154: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 155: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 156: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 157: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 158: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 159: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 160: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 161: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 162: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 163: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 164: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 165: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 166: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 167: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 168: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 169: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 170: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 171: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 172: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 173: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 174: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 175: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 176: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 177: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 178: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 179: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 180: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 181: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 182: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 183: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 184: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 185: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 186: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 187: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 188: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 189: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 190: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 191: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 192: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 193: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 194: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 195: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 196: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 197: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 198: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 199: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 200: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 201: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 202: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 203: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 204: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 205: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 206: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 207: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 208: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 209: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 210: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 211: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 212: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 213: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 214: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 215: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 216: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 217: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 218: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 219: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 220: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 221: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 222: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 223: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 224: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 225: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 226: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 227: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 228: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 229: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 230: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 231: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 232: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 233: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 234: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 235: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 236: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 237: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 238: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 239: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 240: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 241: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 242: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 243: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 244: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska
Page 245: GLPI User Documentation - GLPI Polska